Professional Documents
Culture Documents
National Buildings Code-Is - sp.7.2005 PDF
National Buildings Code-Is - sp.7.2005 PDF
Whereas the Parliament of India has set out to provide a practical regime of right to
information for citizens to secure access to information under the control of public authorities,
in order to promote transparency and accountability in the working of every public authority,
and whereas the attached publication of the Bureau of Indian Standards is of particular interest
to the public, particularly disadvantaged communities and those engaged in the pursuit of
education and knowledge, the attached public safety standard is made available to promote the
timely dissemination of this information in an accurate manner to the public.
1 +, 1 + 01 ' 5
Mazdoor Kisan Shakti Sangathan Jawaharlal Nehru
The Right to Information, The Right to Live Step Out From the Old to the New
! $ ' +-
Satyanarayan Gangaram Pitroda
Invent a New India Using Knowledge
! > 0 B
BharthariNtiatakam
Knowledge is such a treasure which cannot be stolen
Hkkjr dh jk"Vh; Hkou fuekZ.k lafgrk 2005
( iv )
FOREWORD
Construction programmes are interwoven in a large measure in all sectors of development, be it housing, transport,
industry, irrigation, power, agriculture, education or health. Construction, both public and private, accounts for
about fifty percent of the total outlay in any Five Year Plan. Half of the total money spent on construction
activities is spent on buildings for residential, industrial, commercial, administrative, education, medical, municipal
and entertainment uses. It is estimated that about half of the total outlay on buildings would be on housing. It is
imperative that for such a large national investment, optimum returns are assured and wastage in construction is
avoided.
Soon after the Third Plan, the Planning Commission decided that the whole gamut of operations involved in
construction, such as, administrative, organizational, financial and technical aspects, be studied in depth. For this
study, a Panel of Experts was appointed in 1965 by the Planning Commission and its recommendations are found
in the Report on Economies in Construction Costs published in 1968.
One of the facets of building construction, namely, controlling and regulating buildings through municipal byelaws
and departmental handbooks received the attention of the Panel and a study of these regulatory practices revealed
that some of the prevailing methods of construction were outmoded; some designs were overburdened with
safety factors and there were other design criteria which, in the light of newer techniques and methodologies,
could be rationalized; and building byelaws and regulations of municipal bodies which largely regulate the
building activity in the country wherever they exist, were outdated. They did not cater to the use of new building
materials and the latest developments in building designs and construction techniques. It also became clear that
these codes and byelaws lacked uniformity and they were more often than not specification oriented and not
performance oriented.
These studies resulted in a recommendation that a National Building Code be prepared to unify the building
regulations throughout the country for use by government departments, municipal bodies and other construction
agencies. The then Indian Standards Institution (now Bureau of Indian Standards) was entrusted by the Planning
Commission with the preparation of the National Building Code. For fulfilling this task a Guiding Committee for
the preparation of the Code was set up by the Civil Engineering Division Council of the Indian Standards Institution
in 1967. This Committee, in turn, set up 18 specialist panels to prepare the various parts of the Code. The
Guiding Committee and its panels were constituted with architects, planners, materials experts, structural,
construction, electrical illumination, air conditioning, acoustics and public health engineers and town planners.
These experts were drawn from the Central and State Governments, local bodies, professional institutions and
private agencies. The first version of the Code was published in 1970.
After the National Building Code of India was published in 1970, a vigorous implementation drive was launched
by the Indian Standards Institution to propagate the contents and use of the Code among all concerned in the field
of planning, designing and construction activities. For this, State-wise Implementation Conferences were organized
with the participation of the leading engineers, architects, town planners, administrators, building material
manufacturers, building and plumbing services installation agencies, contractors, etc.
These Conferences were useful in getting across the contents of the Code to the interests concerned. These
Conferences had also helped in the establishment of Action Committees to look into the actual implementation
work carried out by the construction departments, local bodies and other agencies in different States. The main
actions taken by the Action Committees were to revise and modernize their existing regulatory media, such as,
specifications, handbooks, manuals, etc, as well as building byelaws of local bodies like municipalities at city
and town levels, zilla parishads, panchayats and development authorities, so as to bring them in line with the
provisions contained in the National Building Code of India. In this process, the Indian Standards Institution
rendered considerable support in redrafting process.
Since the publication in 1970 version of the National Building Code of India, a large number of comments and
useful suggestions for modifications and additions to different parts and sections of the Code were received as a
result of use of the Code by all concerned, and revision work of building byelaws of some States. Based on the
comments and suggestion received the National Building Code of India 1970 was revised in 1983.
(v)
Some of the important changes in 1983 version included : addition of development control rules, requirements
for greenbelts and landscaping including norms for plantation of shrubs and trees, special requirements for low
income housing; fire safety regulations for high rise buildings; revision of structural design section based on new
and revised codes, such as Concrete Codes (plain and reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete), Earthquake
Code, Masonry Code; addition of outside design conditions for important cities in the country, requirements
relating to noise and vibration, air filter, automatic control, energy conservation for air conditioning; and guidance
on the design of water supply system for multi-storeyed buildings.
The National Building Code of India is a single document in which, like a network, the information contained in
various Indian Standards is woven into a pattern of continuity and cogency with the interdependent requirements
of Sections carefully analyzed and fitted in to make the whole document a cogent continuous volume. A continuous
thread of preplanning is woven which, in itself, contributes considerably to the economies in construction
particularly in building and plumbing services.
The Code contains regulations which can be immediately adopted or enacted for use by various departments,
municipal administrations and public bodies. It lays down a set of minimum provisions designed to protect the
safety of the public with regard to structural sufficiency, fire hazards and health aspects of buildings; so long as
these basic requirements are met, the choice of materials and methods of design and construction is left to the
ingenuity of the building professionals. The Code also covers aspects of administrative regulations, development
control rules and general building requirements; fire protection requirements; stipulations regarding materials
and structural design; rules for design of electrical installations, lighting, air conditioning and lifts; regulation for
ventilation, acoustics and plumbing services, such as, water supply, drainage, sanitation and gas supply; measures
to ensure safety of workers and public during construction; and rules for erection of signs and outdoor display
structures.
Some other important points covered by the Code include industrialized systems of building and architectural
control. The increase in population in the years to come will have a serious impact on the housing problem. It
has been estimated that the urban population of India will continue to increase with such pace as to maintain the
pressure on demand of accommodation for them. Speed of construction is thus of an utmost importance and
special consideration has to be given to industrialized systems of building. With increased building activity, it is
also essential that there should be some architectural control in the development of our cities and towns if
creation of ugliness and slum-like conditions in our urban areas is to be avoided.
Since the publication of 1983 version of National Building Code of India, the construction industry has gone
through major technological advancement. In the last two decades, substantial expertise has been gained in the
areas of building planning, designing and construction. Also, lot of developments have taken places in the techno-
legal regime and techno-financial regime, apart from the enormous experience gained in dealing with natural
calamities like super cyclones and earthquakes faced by the country. Further, since the last revision in 1983
based on the changes effected in the Steel Code, Masonry Code and Loading Code as also in order to update the
fire protection requirements, three amendments were brought out to the 1983 version of the Code. Considering
these, it was decided to take up a comprehensive revision of the National Building Code of India.
The changes incorporated in the present Code, which is second revision of the Code, have been specified in the
Foreword to each Part/Section of the Code. Some of the important changes are:
a) A new Part 0 Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying the Provisions of the Code emphasizing
on multi-disciplinary team approach for successfully accomplishing building/development project, has
been incorporated.
b) New chapters on significant areas like structural design using bamboo, mixed/composite construction
and landscaping have been added.
c) Number of provisions relating to reform in administration of the Code as also assigning duties and
responsibilities to all concerned professionals, have been incorporated/modified. Also detailed provisions/
performance to ensure structural sufficiency of buildings, have been prescribed so as to facilitate
implementation of the related requirements to help safely face the challenges during natural disasters
like earthquake.
d) Planning norms and requirements for hilly areas and rural habitat planning, apart from detailed planning
norms for large number of amenities have been incorporated.
e) Fire safety aspects have been distinctly categorized into fire prevention, life safety and fire protection
( vi )
giving detailed treatment to each based on current international developments and latest practices followed
in the country.
f) Aspects like energy conservation and sustainable development have been consistently dealt with in
various parts and sections through appropriate design, usage and practices with regard to building
materials, construction technologies and building and plumbing services. Renewable resources like
bamboo and practices like rain water harvesting have been given their due place.
g) The latest revised earthquake code, IS 1893 (Part 1) : 2002 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of
structures: Part 1 General provisions and buildings, has been incorporated, due implementation of the
provisions of which in applicable seismic zone of the country, needs to be duly adhered to by the
Authorities.
The Code now published is the third version representing the present state of knowledge on various aspects of
building construction. The process of preparation of the 2005 version of the Code had thrown up a number of
problems; some of them were answered fully and some partially. Therefore, a continuous programme will go on
by which additional knowledge that is gained through technological evolution, users views over a period of time
pinpointing areas of clarification and coverage and results of research in the field, would be incorporated in to
the Code from time to time to make it a living document. It is, therefore, proposed to bring out changes to the
Code periodically.
The provisions of this Code are intended to serve as a model for adoption by Public Works Departments and
other government construction departments, local bodies and other construction agencies. Existing PWD codes,
municipal byelaws and other regulatory media could either be replaced by the National Building Code of India
or suitably modified to cater to local requirements in accordance with the provisions of the Code. Any difficulties
encountered in adoption of the Code could be brought to the notice of the Sectional Committee for corrective
action.
( vii )
National Building Code Sectional Committee, CED 46
Chairman
Dr H. C. VISVESVARAYA
Chandrika, at 15th Cross, 63-64 East Park Road
Malleswaram, Bangalore 560 003
Vice-Chairman
SHRI V. SURESH
P-233/3, Officers Enclave,
Air Force Station, Rajokari, New Delhi 110 038
Organization Representative(s)
Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation, Ahmedabad SHRI VATSAL S. P ATEL
SHRI JAGDISH A. P ATEL (Alternate)
Bangalore Mahanagara Palike, Bangalore SHRI M. R. S REENIVASA MURTHY
SHRI R. RAMEGOWDA (Alternate I)
SHRI N. KRISHNA (Alternate II)
Builders Association of India, Mumbai SHRI B. G. AHUJA
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRI T. N. GUPTA & SHRI D. B. N. R AO
Bureau of Energy Efficiency (Ministry of Power), New Delhi REPRESENTATIVE
Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee SHRI V. K. M ATHUR
SHRI B. S. GUPTA (Alternate)
Central Public Health and Environmental Engineering Organisation SHRI B. B. UPPAL
(Ministry of Urban Development and Poverty Alleviation), SHRI V. K. CHAURASIA (Alternate)
New Delhi
Central Public Works Department (Central Designs Organization), CHIEF ENGINEER (D ESIGNS)
New Delhi S UPERINTENDING ENGINEER (S & S) (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department (Electrical Department), CHIEF ENGINEER (ELECTRICAL) I
New Delhi
Centre for Disaster Mitigation and Management, Anna University, DIRECTOR
Chennai
Chennai Metropolitan Development Authority, Chennai MEMBER S ECRETARY
SHRI N. V. RAKHUNATH (Alternate)
Construction Industry Development Council, New Delhi SHRI P. R. SWARUP
SHRI ANIL CHADHA (Alternate)
Council of Architecture, New Delhi SHRI P REMENDRA R AJ MEHTA
SHRI S UDHIR V OHRA (Alternate)
Delhi Development Authority, New Delhi ENGINEER MEMBER
CHIEF ENGINEER (HQ) (Alternate)
Delhi Fire Service, Government of National Capital Territory SHRI R. C. SHARMA
of Delhi, Delhi
Department of Science and Technology (Ministry of Science SHRI V. RAO A LYAGARI
and Technology), New Delhi
Directorate General of Employment and Training, New Delhi SHRI A SHWANI K UMAR
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters, New Delhi BRIG S. K. S HARMA
SHRI D. K. DINKER (Alternate)
Forest Research Institute (Indian Council for Forestry Research DIRECTOR GENERAL
and Education), Dehra Dun DIRECTOR (Alternate)
Housing and Urban Development Corporation Ltd, New Delhi CHAIRMAN & MANAGING DIRECTOR
SHRI R. K. S AFAYA (Alternate)
Indian Geotechnical Society, New Delhi SHRI D. B. MAHAJAN
DR M. D. DESAI (Alternate)
( viii )
Organization Representative(s)
Member Secretary
SHRI S ANJAY P ANT
Joint Director (Civil Engineering)
( ix )
Special Panel for Guiding and Co-ordinating the
Revision of National Building Code of India, CED 46:SP
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (P-233/3, Officers Enclave, Air Force Station, SHRI V. SURESH (Convener)
Rajokari, New Delhi 110 038)
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRI T. N. G UPTA
Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee SHRI V. K. M ATHUR
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI H. S. D OGRA
Council of Architecture, New Delhi SHRI P REMENDRA R AJ MEHTA
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters, New Delhi LT-G EN HARI U NIYAL
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata PROF G. P. LAL
SHRI O. P. GOEL (Alternate)
Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi SHRI S ANJAY P ANT
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (Chandrika, at 15th Cross, 63-64, East Park Road, DR H. C. VISVESVARAYA (Convener)
Malleswaram, Bangalore 560 003)
Council of Architecture, New Delhi SHRI P REMENDRA R AJ MEHTA
In personal capacity (P-233/3, Officers Enclave, Air Force Station, SHRI V. SURESH
Rajokari, New Delhi 110 038)
In personal capacity (A-39/B, DDA Flats, Munirka, New Delhi 110 067) SHRI P. B. VIJAY
In personal capacity (EA-345, Maya Enclave, New Delhi 110 064) SHRI J. N. BHAVANI P RASAD
In personal capacity (P-233/3, Officers Enclave, Air Force Station, SHRI V. SURESH (Convener)
Rajokari, New Delhi 110 038)
Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation, Ahmedabad REPRESENTATIVE
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRI T. N. G UPTA
SHRI RAJESH M ALIK (Alternate)
Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee SHRI V. K. M ATHUR
SHRI N. K. SHANGARI (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI R. S. KAUSHAL
SHRI S ANJIB S ENGUPTA (Alternate)
Consulting Engineers Association of India, New Delhi SHRI S. C. M EHROTRA
SHRI N. F. PATEL (Alternate)
Council of Architecture, New Delhi SHRI P REMENDRA R AJ MEHTA
SHRI S UDHIR V OHRA (Alternate)
Delhi Development Authority, New Delhi SHRI R. C. KINGER
SHRI A. K. GUPTA (Alternate)
Housing and Urban Development Corporation Ltd, New Delhi SHRI K. C. BATRA
Indian Association of Structural Engineers, New Delhi SHRI M AHENDRA R AJ
Institute of Town Planners (India), New Delhi DR S. K. K ULSHRESTHA
Municipal Corporation of Delhi, Delhi ENGINEER -IN -CHIEF
SHRI M. M. DAS (Alternate)
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, Mumbai CHIEF ENGINEER (DEVELOPMENT P LAN )
DEPUTY CHIEF ENGINEER (DEVELOPMENT PLAN)-I (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh DR ANIL KUMAR
(x)
Organization Representative(s)
National Real Estate Development Council, New Delhi BRIG R. R. S INGH (RETD)
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi PROF S UBIR S AHA
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI B ALBIR VERMA
SHRI ABHIJIT R AY (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI A. D. SHIRODE
SHRI P. B. VIJAY (Alternate)
Town and Country Planning Organization, New Delhi SHRI J. B. KSHIRSAGAR
SHRI R. S RINIVAS (Alternate)
In personal capacity (29/25, Old Rajendra Nagar, New Delhi 110 060) SHRI S. K. D HERI (Convener)
Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee DR T. P. SHARMA
DR G OPAL KRISHNA (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI A RVIND K ANSAL
SHRI R. S. K AUSHAL (Alternate)
Deolalikar Consultants Pvt Ltd, New Delhi SHRI S. G. D EOLALIKAR
Directorate of Town and Country Planning, Government of Tamil Nadu, SHRI S. D HANASEKARAN
Chennai SHRI R. RAJAGOPALAN (Alternate)
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters, New Delhi SHRI R. A. DUBEY
SHRI AJAY S HANKAR (Alternate)
Institution of Fire Engineers (India), New Delhi SHRI U. S. C HHILLAR
SHRI S. P. BATRA (Alternate)
Lloyd Insulations (India) Ltd, New Delhi SHRI S ANJEEV A NGRA
SHRI K. K. MITRA (Alternate)
Ministry of Home Affairs, New Delhi SHRI O M P RAKASH
SHRI D. K. SHAMMI (Alternate)
Delhi Fire Service, Government of National Capital Territory of Delhi, SHRI R. C. SHARMA
Delhi SHRI G. C. MISRA (Alternate)
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (Mumbai Fire Brigade), SHRI A. D. JHANDWAL
Mumbai SHRI V. H. NAIK (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh DR ANIL KUMAR
National Fire Service College (Ministry of Home Affairs), Nagpur DR K. C. WADHWA
SHRI S HAMIM (Alternate)
Oil Industry Safety Directorate, New Delhi SHRI D. JAGANNATH
SHRI S. K. AGGARWAL (Alternate)
Regional Research Laboratory (CSIR), Jorhat REPRESENTATIVE
Spectral Services Consultants Pvt Ltd, New Delhi SHRI S ANDEEP G OEL
Tariff Advisory Committee, Mumbai SHRI Z. U. ISLAM
SHRI D. N. SAHA (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata PROF M. P. C HOWDIAH
SHRI K. B. RAJORIA (Alternate)
In personal capacity (P-233/3, Officers Enclave, Air Force Station, SHRI V. SURESH
Rajokari, New Delhi 110 038)
( xi )
Organization Representative(s)
Council of Architecture, New Delhi SHRI A NURAG R OY
SHRI ATUL G UPTA (Alternate)
Department of Science and Technology (Ministry of Science and SHRI SOUMITRA B ISWAS
Technology), New Delhi SHRI G. SRIKANTH (Alternate)
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters, New Delhi SHRI A. K. S INGH
SHRI P. K. GUPTA (Alternate)
Housing and Urban Development Corporation Ltd, New Delhi CHAIRMAN AND MANAGING D IRECTOR
SHRI S. K. TANEJA (Alternate)
Indian Plywood Industries Research and Training Institute, SHRI K. S HYAMASUNDAR
Bangalore SHRI M. PAWAN K UMAR (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI S HIBAN R AINA
DR K. M OHAN (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI G. L. R AO
SHRI R. S. GOEL (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh DR A NIL KUMAR (Convener)
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRI T. N. G UPTA
SHRI I. S. SIDHU (Alternate)
Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee SHRI B. S. GUPTA
SHRI A. K. MITTAL (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI N. M. D. J AIN
SHRI ABHAY S INHA (Alternate)
Centre for Disaster Mitigation and Management, Anna University, DR R. K. BHANDARI
Chennai
Mahendra Raj Consultants Pvt Ltd, New Delhi SHRI M AHENDRA R AJ
SHRI J. G HOSE (Alternate)
Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR), Chennai SHRI C. V. VAIDYANATHAN
SHRI K. MANI (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI P. P. D HARWADKAR
In personal capacity (Professor of Bridge Engineering, Railway Chair, DR P REM K RISHNA
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology,
Roorkee 247 667)
In personal capacity (Emeritus Scientist, Structural Engineering DR T. V. S. R. A PPA R AO
Research Centre, Madras CSIR Campus, Taramani,
Chennai 600 113)
In personal capacity (P-233/3, Officers Enclave, Air Force Station, SHRI V. SURESH
Rajokari, New Delhi 110 038)
Organization Representative(s)
Centre for Disaster Mitigation and Management, Anna University, DR R. K. BHANDARI (Convener before 19 September 2003)
Chennai
Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee SHRI CHANDRA PRAKASH (Convener since 19 September 2003)
DR S URENDRA K UMAR (Alternate)
Afcons Infrastructure Limited, Mumbai SHRI S. B. JOSHI
SHRI D. G. BHAGWAT (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI B HAGWAN S INGH
SHRI R. K. S INGHAL (Alternate)
Delhi Development Authority, New Delhi SHRI S. P. RUSTOGI
SHRI J. M. JOSHI (Alternate)
( xii )
Organization Representative(s)
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters, New Delhi COL R. N. M ALHOTRA
COL N. B. S AXENA (Alternate)
Indian Geotechnical Society, New Delhi MAJ G EN S. N. MUKERJEE
SHRI S ANJAY G UPTA (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh DR ANIL KUMAR
SHRI H. K. JULKA (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata PROF J ANARDAN J HA
Delhi Tourism and Transportation Development Corporation, SHRI J OSE K URIAN (Convener)
New Delhi
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRI T. N. G UPTA
SHRI P ANKAJ G UPTA (Alternate)
Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee SHRI A. K. M ITTAL
SHRI S HAILESH KUMAR (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi DR A. K. M ITTAL
SHRI NEERAJ M ISHRA (Alternate I)
SHRI A. K. JHA (Alternate II)
Delhi Development Authority, New Delhi SHRI S. P. RUSTOGI
SHRI J. M. JOSHI (Alternate)
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters, New Delhi SHRI D. R. KURDIYA
SHRI S UBODH KUMAR (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Science (Centre for Astra), Bangalore DR B. V. VENKATARAMA REDDY
DR K. S. N ANJUNDA RAO (Alternate)
( xiii )
Organization Representative(s)
Indian Institute of Technology, Kanpur DR DURGESH C. RAI
DR C. V. R. M URTY (Alternate I)
DR S UDHIR K. J AIN (Alternate II)
Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi DR S. N. S INHA
Public Works Department, Government of Maharashtra, Mumbai SHRI P. K. N INAVE
Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR), Chennai SHRI R. J AYARAMAN
SHRI A. C HELLAPPAN (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI S. L. G ARG
( xiv )
Organization Representative(s)
Research, Designs and Standards Organization (Ministry of Railways), SHRI R. K. GUPTA
Lucknow SHRI D. K. SINGH (Alternate)
SPECO Engineering Pvt Ltd, New Delhi SHRI O NKAR S INGH
Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR), Chennai DR S. SEETHARAMAN
SHRI S. A RUL JAYACHANDRAN (Alternate)
The Institute of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI R. P. GUPTA
Organization Representative(s)
Organization Representative(s)
( xv )
Organization Representative(s)
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters, New Delhi SHRI D INESH S IKAND
SHRI A. K. SINGH (Alternate)
Engineers India Limited, New Delhi SHRI M. P. JAIN
SHRI A. K. TANDON (Alternate)
Gammon India Ltd, Mumbai SHRI K. N. CHATTERJEE
SHRI S. C. SARIN (Alternate)
Indian Plywood Industries Research and Training Institute, SHRI H. GURUVA R EDDY
Bangalore SHRI M. PAVAN K UMAR (Alternate)
Larsen and Toubro Ltd, Chennai SHRI R. P. SAKUNIA
National Building Construction Corporation, New Delhi SHRI B. P RASAD
SHRI N. P. AGARWAL (Alternate)
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi DR V. T HIRUVENGADAM
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI K AILASH CHANDRA J AITIA
SHRI C. M. SAPRA (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI H. P. JAMDAR
SHRI K. B. RAJORIA (Alternate)
( xvi )
Organization Representative(s)
Spectral Services Consultants Pvt Ltd, New Delhi DR P REM C. JAIN (Convener)
SHRI ASHISH RAKHEJA (Alternate)
Airtron Consultants, Bangalore SHRI R. V. SIMHA
Air Treatment Engineering Pvt Ltd, Chennai SHRI K. P. S. RAMESH
Blue Star Limited, Mumbai SHRI J ITENDRA MORESHWAR B HAMBURE
Bureau of Energy Efficiency (Ministry of Power), New Delhi REPRESENTATIVE
Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee DR I SHWAR C HAND
SHRI B. M. SUMAN (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI S. R. S UBRAMANIAN
SHRI S. P. BARANWAL (Alternate)
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters, New Delhi SHRI N ARENDRA K UMAR
SHRI R. A. DUBEY (Alternate)
Hi-Tech Consultant, New Delhi SHRI N. S. HUKMANI
Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi DR R. S. AGARWAL
Indian Society for Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning SHRI N. S. HUKMANI
Engineers, New Delhi
Sterling India Consulting Engineers, New Delhi SHRI G. C. MODGIL
Suvidha Engineers India Ltd, Noida SHRI A LOK C. T ANDON
The Institution of Engineer (India), Kolkata SHRI P RADEEP CHATURVEDI
Voltas Limited, New Delhi SHRI S. M. KULKARNI
SHRI ATUL MALIK (Alternate)
In personal capacity (K-43, Kailash Colony, New Delhi 110 048) SHRI M. M. P ANDE
Panel for Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control, CED 46:P15
Organization Representative(s)
Suri and Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers, New Delhi SHRI GAUTAM S URI (Convener)
All India Radio, New Delhi SHRI D EEPAK M EHROTRA
SHRI S. M UTHUSWAMY (Alternate)
Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee SHRI R. K. SRIVASTAVA
SHRI R. L. DHABAL (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI K. A. ANANTHANARAYANAN
SHRI N. NAGARAJAN (Alternate)
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters, New Delhi BRIG S. K. S HARMA
SHRIMATI A NURADHA BHASIN (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore PROF M. L. M UNJAL
Indian Institute of Technology, Chennai PROF S. N ARYANAN
DR A. RAMACHANDRAIAH (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur DR A. R. MOHANTY
( xvii )
Organization Representative(s)
Lloyd Insulations (India) Pvt Ltd, New Delhi SHRI N. SRINIVAS
SHRI B. S. JAMWAL (Alternate)
National Physical Laboratory (CSIR), New Delhi DR V. M OHANAN
DR O MKAR S HARMA (Alternate)
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi PROF (DR) S HOVAN K. S AHA
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI I NDRANATH B ASU
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI K. V. CHAUBAL
SHRI P. K. A DLAKHA (Alternate)
( xviii )
Organization Representative(s)
Delhi Jal Board, New Delhi SHRI S UBHASH CHANDER
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters, New Delhi SHRI J ITENDRA S INGH
SHRI S URYA PRAKASH (Alternate)
Indian Plumbing Association, New Delhi SHRI S UDHAKARAN N AIR
S HRI P. RAMACHANDRAN (Alternate)
Indraprastha Gas Ltd, New Delhi SHRI P EEYUSH TRIPATHI
SHRI C. S. SAGAR (Alternate)
Municipal Corporation of Delhi, Delhi ENGINEER -IN -CHIEF
S HRI M. M. DAS (Alternate)
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, Mumbai SHRI T. V. S HAH
SHRI V. R. P EDHNEKAR (Alternate)
National Environmental Engineering Research Institute (CSIR), DR APURBA G UPTA
Nagpur SHRI P. S. K ELKAR (Alternate)
Spectral Services Consultants Pvt Ltd, New Delhi SHRI S ANDEEP G OEL
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI U DAY P ANDE
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI P. C. T YAGI
In personal capacity (B/58A, Gangotri Enclave, Alaknanda, SHRI J. D C RUZ
New Delhi 110 019)
In personal capacity (Principal Advisor, School of Environment DR D. K. CHADHA
Management, Guru Gobind Singh Indraprastha University,
Keshmere Gate, Delhi 110 006)
In personal capacity (610, Technology Apartments, 24, Patparganj, SHRI S UBIR P AUL
Delhi 110 092)
Panel for Landscaping, Signs and Outdoor Display Structures, CED 46:P18
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (5, Sunder Nagar, New Delhi 110003) DR J. R. B HALLA (Convener)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI A RVIND K ANSAL
SHRI A. N. DEVIKAR (Alternate)
Council of Architecture, New Delhi KUMARI V INITA C. K. VIJAYAN
Delhi Urban Arts Commission, New Delhi SHRI H. K. Y ADAV
SHRI DINA NATH (Alternate)
Housing and Urban Development Corporation, New Delhi SHRI R. K. SAFAYA
Institute of Town Planners, India, New Delhi DR S. K. K ULSHRESTHA
Municipal Corporation of Delhi, Delhi SHRI S. S. H ADKE
SHRI S. RAMESH (Alternate)
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, Mumbai SHRI M. S. G HAG
SHRI R. K. RAHATE (Alternate)
National Institute of Design, Ahmedabad SHRI A NANDO DUTTA
SHRI J. G. SEVAK (Alternate)
Selvel Publicity and Consultants Pvt Ltd, Mumbai SHRI K. S. N ICHOLSON
Shaheer Associates, New Delhi PROF M. S HAHEER
Town and Country Planning Organization, New Delhi SHRI J. B. KSHIRSAGAR
SHRI Y. RAMESH (Alternate)
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI MAHESH P ALIWAL
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata PROF J ITENDRA SINGH
In personal capacity (D-198, Defence Colony, New Delhi 110024) SHRI R AVINDRA B HAN
Member Secretary
SHRI S ANJAY P ANT
Joint Director (Civil Engineering)
Joint Member Secretary
SHRI S. K. V ERMA
Deputy Director (Civil Engineering)
( xix )
Important Explanatory Note for Users of Code
( xxi )
INFORMATION FOR THE USERS
For the convenience of the users, this publication is also available in the following five groups of the National
Building Code of India 2005 each incorporating the related Parts/Sections dealing with particular area of building
activity:
Group 1 For Development, Building Part 0: Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying
Planning and Related Provisions of the Code
Aspects Part 2: Administration Part 3: Development Control
Part 4: Fire and Life Safety Rules and General
Part 5: Building Materials Building Requirements
Part 10: Landscaping, Signs and Outdoor Display Structures
Section 1 Landscape Planning and Design
Section 2 Signs and Outdoor Display Structures
Group 2 For Structural Design and Part 0: Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying
Related Aspects Provisions of the Code
Part 6: Structural Design
Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects
Section 2 Soils and Foundations
Section 3 Timber and Bamboo
3A Timber
3B Bamboo
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
5A Plain and Reinforced Concrete
5B Prestressed Concrete
Section 6 Steel
Section 7 Prefabrication, Systems Building and
Mixed/Composite Construction
7A Prefabricated Concrete
7B Systems Building and Mixed/
Composite Construction
Group 3 For Construction Related Part 0: Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying
Aspects including Safety Provisions of the Code
Part 7: Constructional Practices and Safety
Group 4 For Aspects Relating to Part 0: Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying
Building Services Provisions of the Code
Part 8: Building Services
Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation
Section 2 Electrical and Allied Installations
Section 3 Air conditioning, Heating and Mechanical
Ventilation
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise
Control
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escalators
Group 5 For Aspects Relating to Part 0: Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying
Plumbing Services Provisions of the Code
including Solid Waste Part 9: Plumbing Services
Management
Section 1 Water Supply, Drainage and Sanitation
(including Solid Waste Management)
Section 2 Gas Supply
The information contained in different groups will essentially serve the concerned professionals dealing in the
respective areas.
( xxii )
C O NT E NT S
Total Pages
PART 0 INTEGRATED APPROACH PREREQUISITE FOR APPLYING PROVISIONS OF THE CODE 12
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 16
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 24
PART 3 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS 64
PART 4 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY 88
PART 5 BUILDING MATERIALS 40
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects 104
Section 2 Soils and Foundations 48
Section 3 Timber and Bamboo
3A Timber 50
3B Bamboo 24
Section 4 Masonry 44
Section 5 Concrete
5A Plain and Reinforced Concrete 90
5B Prestressed Concrete 6
Section 6 Steel 8
Section 7 Prefabrication, Systems Building and Mixed/Composite
Construction
7A Prefabricated Concrete 22
7B Systems Building and Mixed/Composite Construction 12
PART 7 CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY 70
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES
Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation 48
Section 2 Electrical and Allied Installations 68
Section 3 Air Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation 48
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control 44
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escalators 42
PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES
Section 1 Water Supply, Drainage and Sanitation (including Solid 90
Waste Management)
Section 2 Gas Supply 14
PART 10 LANDSCAPING, SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
Section 1 Landscape Planning and Design 30
Section 2 Signs and Outdoor Display Structures 24
( xxiii )
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 0 INTEGRATED APPROACH PREREQUISITE FOR
APPLYING PROVISIONS OF THE CODE
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 GENERAL 5
4 TEAM APPROACH 5
5 PLANNING, DESIGNING AND DEVELOPMENT 6
6 CONSTRUCTION/EXECUTION (ACTUALIZATION) 7
7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 8
FOREWORD
In order to provide safe and healthy habitat, careful consideration needs to be paid to the building construction
activity. Building planning, designing and construction activities have developed over the centuries. Large number
of ancient monuments and historical buildings all over the world bear testimony to the growth of civilization
from the prehistoric era with the extensive use of manual labour and simple systems as appropriate to those ages
to the present day mechanized and electronically controlled operations for designing and constructing buildings
and for operating and maintaining systems and services. In those days those buildings were conceptualized and
built by master builders with high levels of artisan skills. Technological and socio-economic developments in
recent times have led to remarkable increase in demand for more and more sophistication in buildings resulting
in ever increasing complexities. These perforce demand high levels of inputs from professionals of different
disciplines such as architecture, civil engineering, structural engineering, functional and life safety services
including special aspects relating to utilities, landscaping, etc in conceptualization, spatial planning, design and
construction of buildings of various material and technology streams, with due regard to various services including
operation, maintenance, repairs and rehabilitation aspects throughout the service life of the building.
This Code, besides prescribing the various provisions, also allows freedom of action to adopt appropriate practices
and provides for building planning, designing and construction for absorbing traditional practices as well as
latest developments in knowledge in the various disciplines as relevant to a building including computer aided
and/or other modern sensors aided activities in the various stages of conceptualization, planning, designing,
constructing, maintaining and repairing the buildings. India being a large country with substantial variations
from region to region, this Code has endeavoured to meet the requirements of different regions of the country,
both urban and rural, by taking into consideration factors, such as, climatic and environmental conditions,
geographical terrain, proneness to natural disasters, ecologically appropriate practices, use of eco-friendly materials,
reduction of pollution, protection and improvement of local environment and also socio-economic considerations,
towards the creation of sustainable human settlements.
This Part of the Code dealing with integrated approach is being included for the first time. It gives an overall
direction for practical applications of the provisions of different specialized aspects of spatial planning, designing
and construction of buildings, creation of services, and proposes an integrated approach for utilizing appropriate
knowledge and experience of qualified professionals right from the conceptualization through construction and
completion stages of a building project and indeed during the entire life cycle. The integrated approach should
not only take care of functional, aesthetic and safety aspects, but also the operational and maintenance requirements.
Also, cost optimization has to be achieved through proper selection of materials, techniques, equipment
installations, etc. Further, value engineering and appropriate management techniques should be applied to achieve
the aim set forth for the purpose of construction of a building fully meeting the specified and implied needs of
spatial functions, safety and durability aspects, life and health safety, comfort, services, etc in the building.
The aim of the integrated approach is to get the maximum benefit from the building and its services in terms of
quality, timely completion and cost-effectiveness. In the team approach which is an essential pre-requisite for
integrated approach, the aim clearly is to maximize the efficiency of the total system through appropriate
optimization of each of its sub-systems. In other words, in the team, the inputs from each of the professional
disciplines have to be so optimized that the total systems efficiency becomes the maximum. It may be re-
emphasized that maximizing the efficiencies of each sub-system may not necessarily assure the maximization of
the efficiency of the total system. It need hardly to be stated that specified or implied safety will always get
precedence over functional efficiency and economy. Further, progressive approach such as that relating to the
concept of intelligent buildings would be best taken care of by the integrated approach as laid down in this Part.
Quality systems approach and certification thereunder covering the various dimensions brought out above may
go a long way in achieving the above goal of real integrated approach.
2.0 For the purpose of this Part, the following 3.2 The scope of various Parts/Sections of the Code
definitions and those given in Part 1 Definitions shall which cover detailed provisions on different aspects
apply. of development of land/building construction activity,
are given in Annex A, with a view to providing an
2.1 Authority Having Jurisdiction The Authority overview for the users of the Code.
which has been created by a statute and which, for the
purpose of administering the Code/Part, may authorize 4 TEAM APPROACH
a committee or an official or an agency to act on its
A land development/building project comprises the
behalf; hereinafter called the Authority.
following major stages:
2.2 Building Any structure for whatsoever purpose
a) Location/siting,
and of whatsoever materials constructed and every part
thereof whether used as human habitation or not and b) Conceptualization and planning,
includes foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs, c) Designing and detailing,
chimneys, plumbing and building services, fixed d) Construction/execution, and
platforms, VERANDAH, balcony, cornice or projection, e) Maintenance and repair.
part of a building or anything affixed thereto or any
wall enclosing or intended to enclose any land or space Each stage necessarily requires professionals of many
and signs and outdoor display structures. Tents/ disciplines who should work together as a well
SHAMIANAHS/PANDALS, tarpaulin shelters, etc, coordinated team to achieve the desired product
erected for temporary and ceremonial occasions shall delivery with quality, in an effective manner.
not be considered as building. Appropriate multi-disciplinary teams need to be
2.3 Owner Person or body having a legal interest constituted to successfully meet the requirements of
in land and/or building thereon. This includes free different stages. Each team may comprise need based
holders, leaseholders or those holding a sub-lease professionals out of the following depending upon the
which both bestows a legal right to occupation and nature, magnitude and complexity of the project:
gives rise to liabilities in respect of safety or building a) Architect,
condition. b) Civil engineer,
In case of lease or sub-lease holders, as far as ownership c) Structural engineer,
with respect to the structure is concerned, the structure d) Electrical engineer,
of a flat or structure on a plot belongs to the allottee/ e) Plumbing engineer,
lessee till the allotment/lease subsists.
f) Fire protection engineer,
NOTE For the purpose of the Code, the word owner will
also cover the generally understood terms like client, user,
g) HVAC engineer,
etc. h) Environment specialist,
3 GENERAL j) Town planner,
k) Urban designer,
3.1 Buildings, shall be classified as Residential,
m) Landscape architect,
Educational, Institutional, Assembly, Business,
Mercantile, Industrial, Storage and Hazardous in n) Security system specialist,
groups and sub-division as classified in Part 4 Fire p) Interior designer,
and Life Safety. q) Quantity surveyor,
For further sub-classification of buildings and various r) Project/construction manager, and
related provisions thereof with respect to administration; s) Other subject specialist(s).
It covers the development control rules and general It covers the use of bamboo for constructional purposes
building requirements for proper planning and design in structures or elements of the structure, ensuring
at the layout and building level to ensure health safety, quality and effectiveness of design and construction
public safety and desired quality of life. using bamboo. It covers minimum strength data,
dimensional and grading requirements, seasoning,
A-4 PART 4 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY preservative treatment, design and jointing techniques
with bamboo which would facilitate scientific
It covers the requirements for fire prevention, life
application and long-term performance of structures.
safety in relation to fire, and fire protection of
It also covers guidelines so as to ensure proper
buildings. The Code specifies planning and
procurement, storage, precautions and design
construction features and fire protection features for
limitations on bamboo.
all occupancies that are necessary to minimize danger
to life and property. A-6.4 Section 4 Masonry
A-5 PART 5 BUILDING MATERIALS It covers the structural design aspects of unreinforced
load bearing and non-load bearing walls, constructed
It covers the requirements of building materials and
using various bricks, stones and blocks permitted in
components, and criteria for accepting new or
accordance with this Section. This, however, also
alternative building materials and components.
covers provisions for design of reinforced brick and
A-6 PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN reinforced brick concrete floors and roofs. It also
covers guidelines regarding earthquake resistance of
This Part through its seven sections provides for low strength masonry buildings.
structural adequacy of buildings to deal with both
internal and external environment, and provide A-6.5 Section 5 Concrete
guidance to engineers/structural engineers for varied
A-6.5.1 Section 5A Plain and Reinforced Concrete
usage of material/technology types for building
design. It covers the general structural use of plain and
reinforced concrete.
A-6.1 Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects
It covers basic design loads to be assumed in the design A-6.5.2 Section 5B Prestressed Concrete
of buildings. The live loads, wind loads, seismic loads, It covers the general structural use of prestressed
snow loads and other loads, which are specified therein, concrete. It covers both work carried out on site and
are minimum working loads which should be taken the manufacture of precast prestressed concrete
into consideration for purposes of design. units.
FOREWORD
Each Part or Section of the National Building Code gives the definitions of the special terms used in it. These
definitions may be found in the clause Terminology normally placed immediately after the Scope in each
Part/Section. However, users may find this part very convenient for reference as it gives the alphabetically
arranged list of terms defined in all the parts along with the location of the definition.
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 3
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 1 DEFINITIONS
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 5
Beam Part 6/Section 3B SHAMIANAHS, tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected for
Beam, Built-Up-Laminated Part 6/Section 3 temporary and ceremonial occasions with the
Beam, Glued-Laminated Part 6/Section 3 permission of the Authority shall not be considered as
building.
Bearing Capacity, Safe Part 6/Section 2
Bearing Capacity, Ultimate Part 6/Section 2 Building, Height of Part 2, Part 3, Part 4
Bearing Pile Part 6/Section 2 The vertical distance measured, in the case of flat roofs
Bearing Pressure, Allowable (Gross or Net) Part 6/ from the average level of the ground around and
Section 2 contiguous to the building or as decided by the
Bearing Pressure, Allowable Part 6/Section 2 Authority to the terrace of last livable floor of the
Bearing Pressure, Safe Part 6/Section 2 building adjacent to the external walls; and in the case
of pitched roofs, up to the point where the external
Bed Block Part 6/Section 4
surface of the outer wall intersects the finished surface
Bedding Part 9/Section 1 of the sloping roof, and in the case of gables facing the
Benching Part 9/Section 1 road, the mid-point between the eaves level and the
Bond Part 6/Section 4 ridge. Architectural features serving no other function
Bored Cast in-situ Pile Part 6/Section 2 except that of decoration shall be excluded for the
Bored Compaction Pile Part 6/Section 2 purpose of measuring heights.
Bored Pile Part 6/Section 2 Building Line Part 2, Part 3, Part 10/Section 2
Bottom Car Clearance Part 8/Section 5 The line up to which the plinth of a building adjoining
Bottom Car Runby Part 8/Section 5 a street or an extension of a street or on a future street
Bottom Coutnerweight Runby Part 8/Section 5 may lawfully extend. It includes the lines prescribed,
if any, in any scheme. The building line may change
Boucherie Process Part 6/Section 3B
from time-to-time as decided by the Authority.
Branch Part 9/Section 1
Branch Soil Pipe (BSP) Part 9/Section 1 Buildings Related Illnesses (BRI) Part 8/Section 3
Branch Soil Waste Pipe (BSWP) Part 9/Section 1 Bunched Part 8/Section 2
Branch Ventilating Pipe (BVP) Part 9/Section 1 C
Branch Waste Pipe (BWP) Part 9/Section 1 Cabin Part 3
Break-in Part 8/Section 4 Cable Part 8/Section 2
Breaking Strength Part 6/Section 3B Cable Armoured Part 8/Section 2
Break-out Part 8/Section 4 Cable, Crossed Linked Insulated Part 8/Section 2
Brightness Ratio or Contrast Part 8/Section 1 Cable, Flexible Part 8/Section 2
Broad Band Noise Part 8/Section 4 Cable, Lead-Covered Part 8/Section 2
Buffer Part 10/Section 1, Part 8/Section 5 Cable, Metal-Sheathed Part 8/Section 2
Building (House) Drain Part 9/Section 1 Cable, PVC-Insulated Part 8/Section 2
Building (House) Drain-Combined Part 9/Section 1 Cable, PVC-Sheathed Part 8/Section 2
Building (House) Drain-Sanitary Part 9/Section 1 Cable, Tough Rubber-Sheathed (Cable, TRS) Part 8/
Building (House) Drain-Storm Part 9/Section 1 Section 2
Building (House) Sewer Part 9/Section 1 Cable, Weatherproof Part 8/Section 2
Building (House) Sub-Drain Part 9/Section 1 Cable, XLPE Part 8/Section 2
Building (House) Trap Part 9/Section 1 Call Indicator Part 8/Section 5
Building Part 2, Part 3, Part 4 Candela (cd) Part 8/Section 1
Any structure for whatsoever purpose and of Canopy Part 3
whatsoever materials constructed and every part Canopy Sign Part 10/Section 2
thereof whether used as human habitation or not and Car Bodywork Part 8/Section 5
includes foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs, Car Door Electric Contact Part 8/Section 5
chimneys, plumbing and building services, fixed
Car Platform Part 8/Section 5
platforms, verandah, balcony, cornice or projection,
part of a building or anything affixed thereto or any Car Switch Operation Part 8/Section 5
wall enclosing or intended to enclose any land or space Carframe Part 8/Section 5
and signs and outdoor display structures. Tents/ Carpet Area Part 3
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 7
ramp areas covered by CHHAJJA and the like; Dewpoint Temperature Part 8/Section 3
and Diameter Part 9/Section 1
d) watchmans booth, pumphouse, garbage The nominal internal diameter of pipes and fittings.
shaft, electric cabin or sub-stations, and such Diameter of Knot Part 6/Section 3
other utility structures meant for the services
Diaphragm, Structural Part 6/Section 3B
of the building under consideration.
Dilution Ventilation Part 8/Section 1
NOTE For the purpose of this part, covered area
equals the plot area minus the area due for open spaces Direct Earthing System Part 8/Section 2
in the plot. Direct Solar Illuminance Part 8/Section 1
Crookedness Part 6/Section 3B Direct Tap Part 9/Section 1
Cross Wall Part 6/Section 3B Direction Sign Part 10/Section 2
Cross-Connection Part 9/Section 1 Discolouration Part 6/Section 3, Part 6/Section 3B
Cross-Sectional Area of Masonry Unit Part 6/ Discrimination (Over-Current Discrimination)
Section 4 Part 8/Section 2
Cross-Talk Part 8/Section 4 Distance Area of Resistance Area (for Earth Electrode
Crown of Trap Part 9/Section 1 only) Part 8/Section 2
Cul-de-Sac Cluster Part 3 Distribution Board Part 8/Section 2
Curtain Wall Part 6/Section 4 Door Part 8/Section 5
Curvature Part 6/Section 3B Door Closer Part 8/Section 5
Customers/Consumers Connection Part 9/ Door Operator Part 8/Section 5
Section 2 Door, Centre Opening Sliding Part 8/Section 5
Cut-off Level Part 6/Section 2 Door, Mid-Bar Collapsible Part 8/Section 5
Cut-out Part 8/Section 2 Door, Single Slide Part 8/Section 5
Door, Swing Part 8/Section 5
D
Door, Two Speed Siding Part 8/Section 5
Damp Situation Part 8/Section 2 Door, Vertical Bi-parting Part 8/Section 5
Daylight Area Part 8/Section 1 Door, Vertical Lifting Part 8/Section 5
Daylight Factor Part 8/Section 1 Double Button (Continuous Pressure) Operation
Daylight Penetration Part 8/Section 1 Part 8/Section 5
Dead Part 8/Section 2 Downcomer Part 4
Dead Knot Part 6/Section 3 Downtake Tap Part 9/Section 1
Decay or Rot Part 6/Section 3 Drain Part 2, Part 3, Part 9/Section 1
Decayed Knot Part 6/Section 3 A conduit, channel or pipe for the carriage of storm
Decibels Part 8/Section 4 water, sewage, waste water or other water-borne wastes
Deciduous Tree Part 10/Section 1 in a building drainage system.
Deep Manhole Part 9/Section 1 Drain Ventilating Pipe (DVP) Part 9/Section 1
Definitions of Defects in Bamboo Part 6/Section 3B Drainage Part 2, Part 9/Section 1
Definitions of Defects in Timber Part 6/Section 3
The removal of any liquid by a system constructed for
Deflector Shieve Part 8/Section 5
the purpose.
Delamination Part 6/Section 3B
Density Part 3 Drainage Work Part 9/Section 1
Depth of Manhole Part 9/Section 1 Driven Cast in-situ Pile Part 6/Section 2
Detached Building Part 3 Driven Precast Pile Part 6/Section 2
Development Part 2, Part 3 Drop Connection Part 9/Section 1
Drop Manhole Part 9/Section 1
Development with grammatical variations means the
Dry Bulb Temperature Part 8/Section 1
carrying out of building, engineering, mining or other
operations in, or over, or under land or water, or in Dry Riser Part 4
the use of any building or land, and includes Dry-Bulb Temperature Part 8/Section 3
redevelopment and layout and subdivision of any land; Drying Degrades in Round Bamboo Part 6/
and to develop shall be construed accordingly. Section 3B
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 9
The lower surface in a storey on which one normally Ground Sign Part 10/Section 2
walks in a building. The general term floor unless Groundcover Part 10/Section 1
specifically mentioned otherwise shall not refer to a Group Automatic Operation Part 8/Section 5
mezzanine floor.
Group Housing Part 3
Floor Area Ratio (FAR) Part 3, Part 4 Group Open Space Part 3
The quotient obtained by dividing the total covered Grout Part 6/Section 4
area (plinth area) on all floors by the area of the plot: Guide Rails Part 8/Section 5
Total covered area of all floors Guide Rails Fixing Part 8/Section 5
FAR = Guide Rails Shoe Part 8/Section 5
Plot area
Gully Chamber Part 9/Section 1
Floor Levelling Switch Part 8/Section 5
Gully Trap Part 9/Section 1
Floor Selector Part 8/Section 5
Floor Stopping Switch Part 8/Section 5 H
Flushing Cistern Part 9/Section 1 Habitable Room Part 3
Foliage Part 10/Section 1 Hard Landscape Part 10/Section 1
Footing Part 6/Section 2 Hardy Plant Part 10/Section 1
Formation Part 9/Section 1 Harmonics Part 8/Section 2
Foundation Part 6/Section 2 Haunching Part 9/Section 1
Foundation, Raft Part 6/Section 2 Hedge Part 10/Section 1
Free-Field Level Part 8/Section 4 Heel Rest Bend or Duck-Foot Bend Part 9/Section 1
Freestanding Sign Part 10/Section 2 Hemi Cellulose Part 6/Section 3B
French Drain or Rubble Drain Part 9/Section 1 Herb Part 10/Section 1
Frequency Part 8/Section 4 High Altitudes Part 9/Section 1
Fresh Air or Outside Air Part 8/Section 1 High Rise Building Part 4
Frost Line Part 9/Section 1 Highway Authority Part 9/Section 1
Full Culm Part 6/Section 3B Hollow Unit Part 6/Section 4
Fuse Part 8/Section 2 Horizontal Exit Part 4
Fuse-Element Part 8/Section 2 Horizontal Pipe Part 9/Section 1
Hospital Lift Part 8/Section 5
G
Hot Water Tank Part 9/Section 1
Gallery Part 3
Humidification Part 8/Section 1
Garage, Private Part 3
Humidity, Absolute Part 8/Section 1
Garage, Public Part 3
Humidity, Relative Part 8/Section 1
Gas Fitter Part 9/Section 2
Hydronic Systems Part 8/Section 3
Geared Machine Part 8/Section 5
Gearless Machine Part 8/Section 5 I
General Part 6/Section 2, Part 10/Section 2 Identification Sign Part 10/Section 2
General Ventilation Part 8/Section 1 Illuminance Part 8/Section 1
General Washing Place Part 9/Section 1 Illuminated Sign Part 10/Section 2
Geyser Part 9/Section 1 Impact Sound Pressure Level, Li Part 8/Section 4
Glare Part 8/Section 1 Increments Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B
Global Warming Potential (GWP) Part 8/Section 3 Independent Cluster Part 3
Globe Temperature Part 8/Section 1 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Part 8/Section 3
Goods Lift Part 8/Section 5 Indoor Ambient Noise Part 8/Section 4
Grade Part 10/Section 1 Inflammable Part 8/Section 2
Gradient Part 10/Section 1 Informational Sign Part 10/Section 2
Grading Part 10/Section 1 Ingress Part 10/Section 1
Grasses Part 10/Section 1 Inlet Hopper Part 9/Section 1
Gravel Part 6/Section 2 Inner Diameter Part 6/Section 3B
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 11
Masonry Unit Part 6/Section 4 *Offset Part 6/Section 2, Part 9/Section 1
Matchet Part 6/Section 3B Oil Buffer Part 8/Section 5
Mats Part 6/Section 3B Oil Buffer Stroke Part 8/Section 5
Means of Egress Part 4 Open Clusters Part 3
Mechanical Ventilation Part 8/Section 1 Open Sign Part 10/Section 2
Meridian Part 8/Section 1 Open Space Part 3
Mezzanine Floor Part 3 Open Space, Front Part 3
Miniature Circuit Breaker Part 8/Section 2 Open Space, Rear Part 3
Modular Co-ordination Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/ Open Space, Side Part 3
Section 7B Operating Device Part 8/Section 5
Modular Grid Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B Operation Part 8/Section 5
Module Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B Operational Construction/Installation Part 2
Mortise and Tenon Part 6/Section 3B Orientation of Buildings Part 8/Section 1
Mould Part 6/Section 3 Outdoor Furniture Part 10/Section 1
Mound Part 10/Section 1 Outer Diameter Part 6/Section 3B
Multimodule Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B Outside Location Part 6/Section 3A, Part 6/
Multiple Earthed Neutral System Part 8/Section 2 Section 3B
Multi-Under-Reamed Pile Part 6/Section 2 Over Speed Governor Part 8/Section 5
Overhead Beams Part 8/Section 5
N
Owner Part 2, Part 3, Part 10/Section 2
Native Part 10/Section 1
Person or body having a legal interest in land and/or
Natural Grade Part 10/Section 1
building thereon. This includes free holders,
Natural Ventilation Part 8/Section 1 leaseholders or those holding a sub-lease which both
Negative Skin Friction Part 6/Section 2 bestows a legal right to occupation and gives rise to
Net Section Part 6/Section 3B liabilities in respect of safety or building condition.
Neutral Conductor Part 8/Section 2 In case of lease or sub-lease holders, as far as ownership
Node Part 6/Section 3B with respect to the structure is concerned, the structure
Noise Part 8/Section 4 of a flat or structure on a plot belongs to the allottee/
Noise Exposure Forecast (NEF) Part 8/Section 4 lessee till the allotment/lease subsists.
Noise Rating (NR) Part 8/Section 4 Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) Part 8/Section 3
Noise Reduction Co-efficient (NRC) Part 8/
Section 4 P
Non-Selective Collective Automatic Operation Panel Wall Part 6/Section 4
Part 8/Section 5 Parapet Part 3, Part 10/Section 2
Non-Service Laterine Part 9/Section 1 Parking Space Part 3
Normalized Impact Sound Pressure Level, Ln Part 8/ Partition Part 3
Section 4 Partition Wall Part 6/Section 4
North and South Points Part 8/Section 1 Passenger Lift Part 8/Section 5
O Peat Part 6/Section 2
Percentile Level, LAN, T Part 8/Section 4
Occupancy or Use Group Part 2, Part 3, Part 4
Period of Supply Part 9/Section 1
The principal occupancy for which a building or a Peripheral Field Part 8/Section 1
part of a building is used or intended to be used; for
Permanent Load Part 6/Section 2
the purposes of classification of a building according
Permissible Stress Part 6/Section 3, Part 6/
to occupancy, an occupancy shall be deemed to
Section 3B
include the subsidiary occupancies which are
contingent upon it. Permit Part 2
Pile Foundation Part 6/Section 2
Occupier Part 2
Octave Band Part 8/Section 4 * Definitions are different.
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 13
Sediment Part 10/Section 1 Slenderness Ratio Part 6/Section 4
Selective Collective Automatic Operation Part 8/ Sliver Part 6/Section 3B
Section 5 Slop Hopper (Slop Sink) Part 9/Section 1
Self Compacting Concrete Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/ Slope of Grain Part 6/Section 3
Section 7B Smoke Damper Part 8/Section 3
Semi-Detached Building Part 3 Soakaway Part 9/Section 1
Service Part 8/Section 2 Socket-Outlet Part 8/Section 2
Service Laterine Part 9/Section 1 Soffit (Crown) Part 9/Section 1
Service Lift (Dumb-Waiter) Part 8/Section 5 Soft Landscape Part 10/Section 1
* Service Pipe Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
Soft Rock Part 6/Section 2
Service Road Part 2, Part 3
Soil Appliances Part 9/Section 1
Service Shut-Off Valve (Isolation Valve) Part 9/
Soil Pipe Part 9/Section 1
Section 2
Soil Waste Part 9/Section 1
Set-back Line Part 2, Part 3
Soil, Black Cotton Part 6/Section 2
A line usually parallel to the plot boundaries and laid Soil, Coarse Grained Part 6/Section 2
down in each case by the Authority, beyond which
Soil, Find Grained Part 6/Section 2
nothing can be constructed towards the site boundaries.
Solar Load Part 8/Section 1
Sewer Part 9/Section 1 Solid-State d.c. Variable Voltage Control Part 8/
Shade Factor Part 8/Section 3 Section 5
Shake Part 6/Section 3 Sound Part 8/Section 4
Shallow Foundation Part 6/Section 2 Sound Exposure Level, LAE Part 8/Section 4
Shear Connectors Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/ Sound Knot Part 6/Section 3
Section 7B Sound Power Part 8/Section 4
Shear Wall Part 6/Section 4 Sound Power Level (Lw) Part 8/Section 4
Sheave Part 8/Section 5 Sound Pressure Level, Lp Part 8/Section 4
Shrub Part 10/Section 1 Sound Pressure, p Part 8/Section 4
Sick Building Syndrome (SBS) Part 8/Section 3 Sound Receiver Part 8/Section 4
Sign Part 10/Section 2 Sound Reduction Index, R Part 8/Section 4
Sign Area Part 10/Section 2 Sound Source Part 8/Section 4
Sign Copy Part 10/Section 2 Spaced Column Part 6/Section 3
Sign Face Part 10/Section 2 Spectrum Part 8/Section 4
Sign Structure Part 10/Section 2 Speech Interference Level (SIL) Part 8/Section 4
Signal Operation Part 8/Section 5 Split Part 6/Section 3
Signs Part 10/Section 2 Splits Part 6/Section 3B
Silt Part 6/Section 2 Spot Elevation Part 10/Section 1
Single Automatic Operation Part 8/Section 5 Spray-Head System Part 8/Section 1
Single-Speed Alternating Current Control Part 8/ Spread Foundation Part 6/Section 2
Section 5
Spring Buffer Part 8/Section 5
Site (Plot) Part 2, Part 3, Part 4
Spring Buffer Load Rating Part 8/Section 5
A parcel (piece) of land enclosed by definite boundaries.
Spring Buffer Stroke Part 8/Section 5
Site, Corner Part 3
Stack Effect Part 8/Section 1
Site, Depth of Part 3
Stack Pressure Part 4
Site, Double Frontage Part 3
Staircover (or Mumty) Part 3
Site, Interior or Tandem Part 3
Standardized Impact Sound Pressure Level, L' nT
Sky Component (SC) Part 8/Section 1 Part 8/Section 4
Sky Sign Part 10/Section 2 Standardized Level Difference, DnT Part 8/Section 4
Slack Rope Switch Part 8/Section 5
Static Pressure Part 8/Section 3
* Definitions are different. Stop Tap Part 9/Section 1
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 15
Unit Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B Warp Part 6/Section 3
Unloaded End Distance Part 6/Section 3B Wash-Out Valve Part 9/Section 1
Unsafe Building Part 2 Waste Appliance Part 9/Section 1
Usable Wall Space Part 8/Section 2 Waste Pipe Part 9/Section 1
Utilization Factor (Coefficient of Utilizaiton) () Waste-Water (Sullage) Part 9/Section 1
Part 8/Section 1 Water Conditioning Part 8/Section 3
Water Hardness Part 8/Section 3
V
Water Main (Street Main) Part 9/Section 1
Variable Voltage Motor Control (Generator Field Water Outlet Part 9/Section 1
Control) Part 8/Section 5
Water Seal Part 9/Section 1
Velocity, Capture Part 8/Section 1
Water Supply System Part 9/Section 1
Vent Pipe Part 9/Section 2
Water-Closet (WC) Part 3
Vent Stack/Vent Pipe Part 9/Section 1
Waterworks Part 9/Section 1
Vent System Part 9/Section 1
Wavelength Part 8/Section 4
Ventilation Part 4, Part 8/Section 1
Weatherproof Part 8/Section 2
Venting Fire Part 4
Weighted Level Difference, Dw Part 8/Section 4
Verandah Part 3
Weighted Normalized Impact Sound Pressure Level,
Verandah Sign Part 10/Section 2
L' n.w Part 8/Section 4
Vertical Pipe Part 9/Section 1
Weighted Sound Reduction Index, R w Part 8/
Vibration Isolation Part 8/Section 4 Section 4
Visual Field Part 8/Section 1 Weighted Standardized Impact Sound Pressure Level,
Voltage Extra Low Part 8/Section 2 L' nT, w Part 8/Section 4
Voltage Extra High Part 8/Section 2 Weighted Standardized Level Difference, Dn, Tw
Voltage, High Part 8/Section 2 Part 8/Section 4
Voltage, Low Part 8/Section 2 * Wet Bulb Temperature Part 8/Section 1, Part 8/
Voltage, Medium Part 8/Section 2 Section 3
Volume to Plot Area Ratio (VPR) Part 3, Part 4 Wet Location Part 6/Section 3, Part 6/Section 3B
Wet Riser Part 4
The ratio of volume of building measured in cubic
metres to the area of the plot measured in square metres White Noise Part 8/Section 4
and expressed in metres. Window Part 3
Window Sign Part 10/Section 2
W
Working Plane Part 8/Section 1
Wall Sign Part 10/Section 2 Worm Holes Part 6/Section 3
Wall Thickness Part 6/Section 3B Wrinkled and Deformed Surface Part 6/Section 3B
Wane Part 6/Section 3
Warning Pipe Part 9/Section 1 * Definitions are different.
FOREWORD 3
SECTION 1 GENERAL
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 APPLICABILITY OF THE CODE 6
4 INTERPRETATION 7
5 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS, METHODS OF DESIGN AND 7
CONSTRUCTION, AND TESTS
6 DEPARTMENT OF BUILDINGS 7
7 POWER AND DUTIES OF TEAM OF BUILDING OFFICIALS 8
8 BOARD OF APPEALS 9
9 VIOLATIONS AND PENALTIES 9
10 POWER TO MAKE RULES 9
11 DEVELOPMENT/BUILDING PERMIT 9
12 APPLICATION FOR DEVELOPMENT/BUILDING PERMIT 10
13 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF THE OWNER 15
14 INSPECTION, OCCUPANCY PERMIT AND POST-OCCUPANCY 15
INSPECTION
15 UNSAFE BUILDING 16
16 DEMOLITION OF BUILDING 16
17 VALIDITY 17
18 ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL 17
FOREWORD
A need for codifying and unifying administrative provisions in different development control rules and building
byelaws had been felt, particularly in regard to the applicability of the Code, desirable qualifications for the enforcing
Authority and the representative of the owner and responsibilities and duties of the Authority and the owner.
It is expected that the town and country planning department will co-ordinate the administrative provisions of
this Part and the same given in the State Town and Country Planning Acts.
This Part recommends the setting up of a Board of Appeal. The Board of Appeal gives the owner/architect/
engineer an opportunity to defend the schemes which are based on conventional or new methods of design and
construction or using new materials, which have been otherwise rejected by the Authority.
This Part also emphasizes the need for setting up an Arts Commission for metropolitan areas to safeguard existing
aesthetics in the event of new schemes proposed for buildings of public importance or buildings coming up in an
important area near historic/monumental buildings. The Commission can assist the civic authorities in reviewing
plans for development from the stand point of assuring good taste and regard for often threatened natural beauties.
The Commission can serve as a means whereby by the government and public bodies and individuals could get
advice on artistic questions in connection with building schemes.
The first version of this Part was brought out in 1970, which was subsequently revised in 1983. As a result of
implementing 1970 version of this Part in rewriting building byelaws and development control rules of some
municipal corporations and municipalities, some useful suggestions were emerged. These were incorporated in
the first revision to the extent possible. The significant changes in 1983 version of this Part included the new
administrative provisions related to development control rules, additional information to be furnished/indicated
in the building plan for multi-storeyed and special buildings and modified provisions regarding submission of
building plans by Government Departments to the Authority.
In this second revision, number of modifications have been incorporated based on the experience gained over the
years specially in view of different techno-administrative and techno-legal regime encountered in various situations
faced. Specially the provisions of this Part have been thoroughly reviewed in the context of the natural calamities
faced by the country, such as the devastating earthquake in Gujarat in the year 2001, and provisions have been
accordingly modified to further ensure structural adequacy of the buildings. In this context, structural design of
buildings in accordance with the provisions of the Code and construction and supervision thereof by competent
professionals to ensure structural safety have been given due importance in this revision. Other significant
modifications incorporated include:
a) Modifications in the definitions of certain terms;
b) Inclusion of the concept of team of building officials;
c) Inclusion of provision of single window approach for permit for all services;
d) Inclusion of provisions regarding computerization of approval processes for building permits;
e) Inclusion of provision to certify safety of buildings against natural disaster by engineer/structural engineer
and owner;
f) Inclusion of provision of two stage permit for high rise residential buildings and special buildings;
g) Provisions regarding inspection of completed and occupied building by the Authority from safety point
of view have been made comprehensive;
h) Inclusion of provision empowering engineers/architects for sanctioning plans of residential buildings
up to 500 m2;
j) Provisions for architectural control to effectively take care of the urban aesthetics, have been modified;
and
k) Inclusion of landscape architect and urban designer among the registered professionals for the concerned
applicable works.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 3
The Sectional Committee responsible for revision of the Code has examined the use of the words surveyor/
building surveyor/supervisor, etc under various building bye-laws with varying qualifications in different states.
It has been decided not to use the generic word surveyor or such other words. The Sectional Committee has, on
the other hand recommended association of various professionals for various job responsibilities depending
upon their qualifications/competence.
Also, it is noted that the words licencing/licensed, etc are in use by local bodies in different states. The Sectional
Committee, however, decided for use of words registration/registered, etc for the same, which may now be
adopted uniformly. The registration requirements of professionals are given in Annex A.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 5
2.15 Owner Person or body having a legal interest carriageway, footway, square, place or bridge, whether
in land and/or building thereon. This includes free a thoroughfare or not, over which the public have a
holders, leaseholders or those holding a sub-lease right of passage or access or have passed and had access
which both bestows a legal right to occupation and uninterruptedly for a specified period, whether existing
gives rise to liabilities in respect of safety or building or proposed in any scheme and includes all bunds,
condition. channels, ditches, storm-water drains, culverts,
sidewalks, traffic islands, roadside trees and hedges,
In case of lease or sub-lease holders, as far as ownership
retaining walls, fences, barriers and railings within the
with respect to the structure is concerned, the structure
street lines.
of a flat or structure on a plot belongs to the allottee/
lessee till the allotment/lease subsists. 2.26 Street Level or Grade The officially
established elevation or grade of the centre line of the
2.16 Permit A permission or authorization in
street upon which a plot fronts and if there is no
writing by the Authority to carry out work regulated
officially established grade, the existing grade of the
by the Code.
street at its mid-point.
2.17 Registered Architect, Engineer, Structural
2.27 Street Line The line defining the side limits
Engineer, Supervisor, Town Planner, Landscape
of a street.
Architect, Urban Designer A qualified architect,
engineer, structural engineer, supervisor, town 2.28 To Erect To erect a building means:
planner, landscape architect or urban designer who
a) to erect a new building on any site whether
has been registered by the Authority or by the body
previously built upon or not;
governing such profession and constituted under a
statute, as may be applicable. The registration b) to re-erect any building of which portions
requirements of these professionals shall be as given above the plinth level have been pulled down,
in Annex A. burnt or destroyed.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 7
qualifications, two or three such bodies contiguously 7.3 Right of Entry
located could join together and share the services of
Upon presentation of proper credentials and with
one team of building officials.
advance notice, the team of building officials or its
6.6 Qualifications of Assistant duly authorized representative may enter at any
reasonable time any building or premises to perform
No person shall be appointed as Assistant unless he
any duty imposed upon him by the Code.
has got the qualifications prescribed in Annex A for a
registered Supervisor. 7.4 Inspection
6.7 Restriction on Employees The team of building officials shall make all the
required inspections or it may accept reports of
No official or employee connected with the department
inspections of authoritative and recognized services
of buildings except one whose only connection is that
or individuals; and all reports of inspections shall be
of a member of the Board of Appeals, established
in writing and certified by a responsible officer of such
under 8 shall be engaged directly or indirectly in a work
authoritative service or by the responsible individual
connected with the furnishing of labour, materials
or engage any such expert opinion as he may deem
or appliances for the construction, alteration or
necessary to report upon unusual technical issues that
maintenance of a building, or the preparation of plans
may arise, subject to the approval of the Authority.
or of specifications thereof unless he is the owner of
building; nor shall such official or employee engage 7.5 Construction Not According to Plan
in any work which conflicts with his official duties or
Should the team of building officials determine at any
with the interests of the Department.
stage that the construction is not proceeding according
6.8 Records to the sanctioned plan or is in violation of any of the
provisions of the Code, or any other applicable Code
Proper records of all applications received, permits and
Regulation, Act or Byelaw, it shall notify the owner,
orders issued, inspections made shall be kept and copies
and all further construction shall be stayed until
of all papers and documents connected with the
correction has been effected and approved.
administration of its duties shall be retained and all
such records shall be open to public inspection at all 7.5.1 Should the owner fail to comply with the
appropriate times. requirements at any stage of construction, the Authority
shall issue a notice to the owner asking explanation
7 POWER AND DUTIES OF TEAM OF BUILDING for non-compliance. If the owner fails to comply within
OFFICIALS 14 days from the date of receiving the notice, the
7.0 The team of building officials shall enforce all the Authority shall be empowered to cancel the building
provisions of the Code and shall act on any question permit issued and shall cause notice of such
relative to the mode or manner of construction and the cancellation to be securely pasted upon the said
materials to be used in the erection, addition, alteration, construction, if the owner is not traceable at his address
repair, removal, demolition, installation of service given in the notice. Pasting of such a notice shall be
equipment and the location, use, occupancy and considered sufficient notification of cancellation to the
maintenance of all buildings except as may otherwise owner thereof. No further work shall be undertaken or
be specifically provided. permitted upon such construction until a valid building
permit thereafter has been issued. If the owner, in
7.1 Application and Permits violation of the notice for cancellation, continues the
The team of building officials shall receive all construction, the Authority may take all necessary
applications and issue permits (see 12.10) for the means to stop such work and further appropriate actions
erection and alteration of buildings and examine the including demolitions. The owner shall, however, have
premises for which such permits have been issued and right to appeal against cancellation of permit, to the
enforce compliance with the Code. board of appeal, within a stipulated period, as may be
decided by the Authority.
7.2 Building Notices and Orders
7.6 Modification
The team of building officials shall issue all necessary
notices or orders to remove illegal or unsafe conditions, Wherever practical difficulties are involved in carrying
to require the necessary safeguards during construction, out any provision of the Code, the team of building
to require adequate exit facilities in existing buildings officials may vary or modify such provisions upon
and to ensure compliance with all the requirements of application of the owner or his representative provided
safety, health and general welfare of the public as the spirit and intent of the Code shall be observed and
included in the Code. public welfare and safety be assured. The application
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 9
by the Authority, the permit shall take care of the need 12 APPLICATION FOR DEVELOPMENT/
for landscape development plan incorporating rain- BUILDING PERMIT
water harvesting proposals in the layout and building
12.1 Notice
plans.
Every owner who intends to develop, erect, re-erect or
11.1.2 Specific approvals shall be obtained from
make alterations in any place in a building shall give
Civil Aviation Authorities, Fire Services Department
notice in writing to the Authority of his said intention
(in case the building proposed is 15 m and above),
in the prescribed form (see Annex B) and such notice
Pollution Control Board, designated authorities under
shall be accompanied by plans and statements in
Factories Act/Cinema Regulation Act, Urban Arts
triplicate as required under 12.2 and 12.3 except for
Commission, designated Coastal Regulation Zone
special buildings (high rise, non-residential) where
Authority, Archeological Survey of India, Heritage
additional copies may be submitted as desired by the
Committee and any such other authority as may be
Authority. The Authority shall permit submission of
applicable.
plans/documents in electronic form in addition to hard
11.1.3 In order to facilitate clearance from above copy. The Authority should also progressively
bodies with the concept of single window clearance computerize the approval process.
approach and thereby final approval by the Authority
12.1.1 Regarding submission of plans by Government
within the stipulated time frame, the Authority may
Departments, the procedure shall be as given
constitute a Development/Building Permit Approval
in 12.1.1.1 and 12.1.1.2.
Committee consisting of representative of the team of
building officials, representatives of all bodies/ 12.1.1.1 The operational construction/installation of
organizations from whom clearance for development/ the Government, whether temporary or permanent,
building permit clearance is required. which is essential for the operation, maintenance,
development or execution of any of the following
Recommendations from such Committee shall be services may be exempted from the point of view of
summarily utilized by the team of building officials the byelaws:
in sanctioning process. The Committee may meet
once in 15/30 days depending upon the work load. a) Railways;
The first response/invalid notice/non-compliance b) National highways;
intimation shall be issued by the Authority to the c) National waterways;
owner within 30 days of submission of the plans to d) Major ports;
the Authority. e) Airways and aerodromes;
11.1.4 The Authority shall permit a registered f) Posts and telegraphs, telephones, wireless,
architect/engineer to approve the building proposals broadcasting, and other like forms of
including plans, and certify completion of building for communications;
issue of related regulatory building permits and g) Regional grid for electricity;
occupancy certificate for residential buildings designed h) Defence; and
by self or otherwise, on plot size up to 500 m2. The
j) Any other service which the Central/State
responsibility of compliance with respect to provisions
Government may, if it is of opinion that the
of Code shall rest with the registered architect/engineer.
operation, maintenance, development of
However, the plans shall be required to be submitted
execution of such service is essential to the
to the Authority for information and record.
life of the community, by notification, declare
NOTE Where the experience clearly shows that satisfactory to be a service for the purpose of this clause.
building permit activities are being carried out through the
above empowerment of professionals, the Authority may In case of construction/installation where no approvals
extend such provision for larger areas and other building are required, the concerned agencies which are
occupancies. exempted from seeking approval shall submit the
drawings/plans/details for information and records of
11.2 Pre-Code Development/Building Permit
the Authority before construction/installation.
If any development/building, permit for which had
12.1.1.2 However, the following construction of the
been issued before the commencement of the Code, is
Government departments do not come under the
not wholly completed within a period of three years
purview of operational construction for the purpose of
from the date of such permit, the said permission shall
exemption under 12.1.1.1:
be deemed to have lapsed and fresh permit shall be
necessary to proceed further with the work in a) New residential building (other than gate
accordance with the provisions of the Code. lodges, quarters for limited essential operational
NOTES
1 For entirely new construction this need not be done; for extension of an existing work this shall apply.
2 For land development, subdivision, layout, suitable colouring notations shall be used which shall be indexed.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 11
1) the boundaries of the site and in case area of the site proposed to be subdivided;
where the site has been partitioned, the and
boundaries of the portion owned by the g) In case of plots which are subdivided in built-
applicant and also of the portions owned up areas in addition to the above, the means
by others; of access to the sub-division from existing
2) all adjacent street, buildings (with streets.
number of storeys and height) and
12.2.5 Building Plan and Details
premises within a distance of 12 m of the
site and of the contiguous land (if any) The plan of the buildings and elevations and sections
referred to in (a); and accompanying the notice shall be drawn to a scale of
3) if there is no street within a distance of 1 : 100. The plans and details shall:
12 m of the site, the nearest existing a) include floor plans of all floors together with
street; the covered area clearly indicating the size
f) the means of access from the street to the and spacings of all framing members and sizes
building, and to all other buildings (if any) of rooms and the position of staircases, ramps
which the applicant intends to erect upon his and liftwells;
contiguous land referred to in (a); b) show the use or occupancy of all parts of the
g) space to be left about the building to secure a buildings;
free circulation of air, admission of light and c) show exact location of essential services, for
access for scavenging purposes; example, WC, sink, bath and the like;
h) the width of the street (if any) in front and of d) include at least one elevation from the front
the street (if any) at the side or near the showing height of building and rooms and
buildings; also the height of parapet;
j) the direction of north point relative to the plan e) include at least one section through the
of the buildings; staircase;
k) any physical features, such as wells, drains, f) include the structural arrangements with
etc; and appropriate sections showing type/
m) such other particulars as may be prescribed arrangement of footings, foundations,
by the Authority. basement walls; structural load bearing walls,
columns and beams, and shear walls; and
12.2.4 Sub-Division/Layout Plan
arrangement/spacing of framing members,
In the case of development work, the notice shall be floor slabs and roof slabs with the material
accompanied by the sub-division/layout plan which used for the same;
shall be drawn on a scale of not less than 1 : 500 g) show all street elevations;
containing the following: h) give dimensions of the projected portions
a) Scale used and north point; beyond the permissible building line;
b) The location of all proposed and existing j) include terrace plan indicating the drainage
roads with their existing/proposed/prescribed and the slope of the roof; and
widths within the land; k) give indications of the north point relative to
c) Dimensions of plot along with building lines the plan.
showing the setbacks with dimensions within NOTE The requirement of 1 : 100 is permitted to
each plot; be flexible for specific details needed for further
illustration; and also for drawings for these in electronic
d) The location of drains, sewers, public facilities
form.
and services, and electrical lines, etc;
e) Table indicating size, area and use of all the 12.2.5.1 Building plan for multi-storeyed/special
plots in the sub-division/layout plan; buildings
f) A statement indicating the total area of the For all multi-storeyed buildings which are 15 m or more
site, area utilized under roads, open spaces in height and for special buildings like educational,
for parks, playgrounds, recreation spaces for assembly, institutional, industrial, storage and
parks, playgrounds, recreation spaces and hazardous and mixed occupancies with any of the
development plan reservations, schools, aforesaid occupancies having covered area more than
shopping and other public places alongwith 500 m2, the building sanction shall be done in two
their percentage with reference to the total stages.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 13
building requirements, structural stability and fire and 12.9 Qualifications of Architects/Engineers/
health safety requirements of the Code: Structural Engineers/Landscape Architect/Urban
Designer/Supervisors/Town Planners/Services
a) Opening and closing of a window or door or
Personnel
ventilator;
b) Providing intercommunication doors; Architects, engineers, structural engineers, landscape
c) Providing partitions; architect, urban designer, supervisors and town
planners wherever referred in the Code, shall be
d) Providing false ceiling;
registered by the Authority or the body governing such
e) Gardening; profession constituted under a statute, as competent to
f) White washing; do the work for which they are employed. A guide for
g) Painting; the equivalent technical qualifications and professional
h) Re-tiling and re-roofing; experience required for such registration with the
j) Plastering and patch work; Authority is given in Annex A. In case of building and
plumbing services, qualifications for engineers for
k) Re-flooring; and
utility services shall be as given in A-2.8.
m) Construction of sunshades on ones own land.
12.9.1 In case the registered professional associated
12.5 Fees with the preparation and signing of plans or for
supervision, is being changed during any stage of
No notice as referred to in 12.1 shall be deemed valid
building/land development process, the professional
unless and until the person giving notice has paid the
shall intimate the Authority in writing about the further
fees to the Authority and an attested copy of the receipt
non-association with the project.
of such payment is attached with the notice.
NOTE The fees may be charged as a consolidated fee. In 12.10 Grant of Permit or Refusal
the event of a building/development permit is not issued, the
fees so paid shall not be returned to the owner, but he shall be The Authority may either sanction or refuse the plans
allowed to re-submit it without any fees after complying with and specifications or may sanction them with such
all the objections raised by the Authority within a period of modifications or directions as it may deem necessary
one year from the date of rejection after which fresh fees shall and thereupon shall communicate its decision to the
have to be paid.
person giving the notice (see Annex E).
12.6 Duration of Sanction 12.10.1 The building plans for buildings identified
The sanction once accorded shall remain valid up to in 12.2.5.1 shall also be subject to the scrutiny of the
three years. The permit shall be got revalidated before Fire Authority and the sanction through building permit
the expiration of this period. Revalidation shall be shall be given by the Authority after the clearance from
subject to the rules then in force. the Fire Authority (see also 11.1.3).
12.10.2 If within 30 days of the receipt of the notice
12.7 Deviations During Construction
under 12.1 of the Code, the Authority fails to intimate
If during the construction of a building any departure in writing to the person, who has given the notice, of
(excepting for items as given in 12.4.1) from the its refusal or sanction, the notice with its plans and
sanctioned plan is intended to be made (see 7.5), statements shall be deemed to have been sanctioned;
sanction of the Authority shall be obtained before the provided the fact is immediately brought to the notice
change is made. The revised plan showing the of the Authority in writing by the person who has given
deviations shall be submitted and the procedure laid notice and having not received any intimation from
down for the original plan heretofore shall apply to all the Authority within fifteen days of giving such written
such amended plans except that the time limit specified notice. Subject to the conditions mentioned in this
in 12.10.2 shall be three weeks in such cases. clause, nothing shall be construed to authorize any
person to do anything in contravention of or against
12.8 Revocation of Permit the terms of lease or titles of the land or against any
other regulations, byelaws or ordinance operating on
The Authority may revoke any permit issued under
the site of the work.
the provisions of the Code, wherever there has been
any false statement, misrepresentation of any material 12.10.3 In the case of refusal, the Authority shall quote
fact in the application on which the permit was the reason and relevant sections of the Code which the
based or violation of building permit or in case of plans contravene. The Authority shall as far as possible
noncompliance thereof, and shall state the reasons for advise all the objections to the plans and specifications
revoking the permit. in the first instance itself and ensure that no new
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 15
14.3 When inspection of any construction operation 15.3.1 The Authority may direct in writing that the
reveals than any lack of safety precautions exist, the building which in his opinion is dangerous, or has
Authority shall have right to direct the owner to stop no provision for exit if caught fire, shall be vacated
the work immediately until the necessary remedial immediately or within the period specified for the
measures to remove the violation of safety precautions purpose; provided that the Authority concerned shall
are taken. keep a record of the reasons for such action with
him.
14.4 Periodic Occupancy Renewal Certificate
If any person does not comply with the orders of
14.4.1 For buildings covered in 12.2.5.1 after vacating a building, the Authority may direct the police
completion of the building and obtaining the occupancy to remove the person from the building and the police
certificate, periodic inspections of buildings shall be shall comply with the orders.
made by the Fire Authority to ensure the fire safety of
the building and compliance with the provisions of fire 15.4 Disregard of Notice
and life safety requirements (see Part 4 Fire and Life
In case the owner or occupier fails, neglects, or refuses
Safey). Periodic occupancy renewal certificate shall
to comply with the notice to repair or to demolish the
be made available by the Authority/Fire Authority which
said building or portion thereof, the Authority shall
shall also include safekeep of fire fighting installations
cause the danger to be removed whether by demolition
and equipments for such buildings.
or repair of the building or portion thereof or otherwise.
14.4.2 All occupied building and buildings covered
under 12.2.5.1 shall also be subjected to periodic 15.5 Cases of Emergency
physical inspection by a team of multi-disciplinary In case of emergency, which, in the opinion of the
professionals of local Authority. The work by team of Authority involves imminent danger to human life or
professionals may be outsourced by the Authority to health, the decision of the Authority shall be final. The
competent professionals as may be deemed necessary. Authority shall forthwith or with such notice as may
The team shall ensure the compliance of byelaws, be possible promptly cause such building or portion
natural lighting, ventilation, etc, besides structural and thereof to be rendered safe by retrofitting/strengthening
electrical safety. After checking, the team shall be to the same degree of safety or removed. For this
required to give the certificate for above aspects. If purpose, the Authority may at once enter such structure
any shortcoming/deficiencies or violations are noticed or land on which it stands, or abutting land or structure,
during inspection, the Authority shall ensure the
with such assistance and at such cost as may be deemed
compliance of these within a specified time frame of
necessary. The Authority may also get the adjacent
six months. If not complied with, the building shall be
structures vacated and protect the public by an
declared unsafe. The period of inspection shall usually
appropriate fence or such other means as may be
be 3 to 5 years but in any case not more than 5 years.
necessary.
15 UNSAFE BUILDING
15.6 Costs
15.1 All unsafe buildings shall be considered to
Costs incurred under 15.4 and 15.5 shall be charged to
constitute danger to public safety and shall be restored
the owner of the premises involved. Such costs shall
by repairs or demolished or dealt with as otherwise
be charged on the premises in respect of which or for
directed by the Authority (see 15.2 to 15.5).
the benefit of which the same have been incurred and
15.2 Examination of Unsafe Building shall be recoverable as provided under the laws (see
Note).
The Authority shall examine or cause to be examined
every building reported to be unsafe or damaged, and NOTE The costs may be in the form of arrears of taxes.
shall make a written record of such examination.
16 DEMOLITION OF BUILDING
15.3 Notice to Owner, Occupier Before a building is demolished, the owner shall notify
Whenever the Authority finds any building or portion all utilities having service connections within the
thereof to be unsafe, it shall, in accordance with building, such as water, electric, gas, sewer and other
established procedure for legal notice, give to the owner connections. A permit to demolish a building shall not
and occupier of such building written notices stating be issued until a release is obtained from the utilities
the defects thereof. This notice shall require the owner stating that their respective service connections and
or the occupier within a stated time either to complete appurtenant equipment, such as, meters and regulators
specified repairs or improvements or to demolish and have been removed or sealed and plugged in a safe
remove the building or portion thereof. manner.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 17
ANNEX A
(Foreword and Clauses 2.17, 6.5, 6.6, 9.1.3, 12.2.8, 12.3 and 12.9)
GUIDE FOR THE QUALIFICATIONS AND COMPETENCE OF PROFESSIONALS
The registered town planner shall be competent to A-2.8 Engineers for Utility Services
carryout the work related to the development permit
as given below: For buildings identified in 12.2.5.1, the work of
building and plumbing services shall be executed under
a) Preparation of plans for land sub-division/ the planning, design and supervision of competent
layout and related information connected with personnel. The qualification for registered mechanical
development permit for all areas. engineer (including HVAC), electrical engineer and
b) Issuing of certificate of supervision for plumbing engineers for carrying out the work of Air-
development of land of all areas. conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation,
NOTE However, for land layouts for development Electrical Installations, Lifts and Escalators and Water
permit above 5 hectare in area, landscape architect Supply, Drainage, Sanitation and Gas Supply
shall also be associated, and for land development installations respectively shall be as given in Part 8
infrastructural services for roads, water supplies,
Building Services and Part 9 Plumbing Services or
sewerage/drainage, electrification, etc, the registered
engineers for utility services shall be associated. as decided by the Authority taking into account
practices of the National professional bodies dealing
A-2.6 Landscape Architect with the specialist engineering services.
The minimum qualification for a landscape architect
A-3 BUILDER/CONSTRUCTOR ENTITY
shall be the bachelor or masters degree in landscape
architecture or equivalent from recognized Indian or The minimum qualification and competence for the
foreign university. builder/constructor entity for various categories of
building and infrastructural development shall be as
A-2.6.1 Competence
decided by the Authority to ensure compliance of
The registered landscape architect shall be competent quality, safety and construction practices as required
to carryout the work related to landscape design for under the Code.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 19
ANNEX B
(Clause 12.1)
FORM FOR FIRST APPLICATION TO DEVELOP, ERECT, RE-ERECT OR TO MAKE
ALTERATION IN ANY PLACE IN A BUILDING
To
........................................
........................................
........................................
Sir,
I hereby give notice that I intend to develop, erect, re-erect or to make alteration in the building No.............................
or to.........................................................on/in Plot No.........................................................................in Colony/
Street .............................................MOHALLA/BAZAR/Road.............................................City ...........................and
in accordance with the building code of ...............................................Part II, Clauses .....................................and
I forward herewith the following plans and specifications in triplicate duly signed by me and .....................................
the Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban Designer1),
Registration No. ........................................... who will supervise its erection.
(Name in block letters)
1. Key plan
2. Site plans
3. Sub-division/layout plan
4. Building plans
5. Services plans
6. Specifications, general and detailed 2)
7. Title of ownership of land/building
8. Certificates for structural sufficiency and supervision
I request that the development/construction may be approved and permission accorded to me to execute the
work.
Signature of Owner.....................................................
Name of the Owner ....................................................
(in block letters)
Address of Owner ....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
Date: ..........................
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable.
2)
A format may be prepared by the Authority for direct use.
With respect to the building work of erection, re-erection or for making alteration in the building
No................................or to......................................................on/in Plot No. ...................................................Colony/
Street.....................................MOHALLA/BAZAR/Road .......................................................City.................................,
we certify that the structural plans and details of the building submitted for approval satisfy the structural safety
requirements for all situations including natural disasters, as applicable, as stipulated under Part 6 Structural
Design of the National Building Code of India and other relevant Codes; and the information given therein is
factually correct to the best of our knowledge and understanding.
ANNEX D
(Clause 12.2.9)
FORM FOR SUPERVISION
I hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in/of building No..............................
or the ...................................................................on/in Plot No.................................................................in Colony/
Street .......................................MOHALLA/BAZAR/Road................................................... City..................................
shall be carried out under my supervision and I certify that all the materials (type and grade) and the workmanship
of the work shall be generally in accordance with the general and detailed specifications submitted along with,
and that the work shall be carried out according to the sanctioned plans.
Signature of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban
Designer1) ......................................................
Name of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban
Designer1) ......................................................
(in block letters)
Registration No. of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban
Designer1) ......................................................
Address of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban
Designer1) ......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
Date: ........................
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 21
ANNEX E
(Clause 12.10)
FORM FOR SANCTION OR REFUSAL OF DEVELOPMENT/BUILDING PERMIT
To
...............................................
...............................................
...............................................
Sir,
With reference to your application ........................................dated ........................................for grant of permit
for the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in the building No. ........................................
or to....................................................on/in Plot No....................................................................in Colony/
Street............................................MOHALLA/BAZAR/Road...........................................City...............................
I have to inform you that the sanction has been granted/refused by the Authority on the following grounds:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Office Stamp ............................................... Signature of the Authority ........................................
Office (Communication) No. ...................... Name, Designation and Address
of the Authority.......................................................
Date: ............................ .......................................................
.......................................................
ANNEX F
[Clause 13.2 (d)]
FORM FOR NOTICE FOR COMMENCEMENT
I hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in/of building No. ...........................
or the..............................on/in Plot No....................................in Colony/Street.....................................MOHALLA/
BAZAR/Road....................................City ....................................will be commenced on as per your permission,
vide No.....................................dated..............................under the supervision of ....................................Registered
Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban Designer1),
Registration No...............................................................and in accordance with the plans sanctioned, vide
No.....................................dated............................
Signature of Owner ....................................................
Name of Owner ..........................................................
(in block letters)
Address of Owner.......................................................
.......................................................
Date: ............................ .......................................................
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable.
With respect to the building work of erection, re-erection or for making alteration in the building No..........................
or to ................................on/in Plot No.......................................Colony/Street ...................................MOHALLA/
BAZAR/Road ................................City................................, we certify:
a) that the building has been constructed according to the sanctioned plan and structural design (one set of
drawings as executed enclosed), which incorporates the provisions of structural safety as specified in
Part 6 Structural Design of the National Building Code of India and other relevant Codes; and
b) that the construction has been done under our supervision and guidance and adheres to the drawings and
specifications submitted and records of supervision have been maintained.
Any subsequent changes from the completion drawings shall be the responsibility of the owner.
Signature of owner Signature of the
with date Registered Engineer/
Structural Engineer with
date and registration No.
Name: ........................................... ..........................................
Address: ........................................... ..........................................
ANNEX H
[Clause 13.2 (f)]
FORM FOR COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
I hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in/of building No...........................
or the ........................... on/in Plot No............................ in Colony/Street ........................... MOHALLA/BAZAR/
Road...........................City........................... has been supervised by me and has been completed on ...........................
........................... according to the plans sanctioned, vide No. ........................... dated ...................... The work
has been completed to my best satisfaction, the workmanship and all the materials (type and grade) have been
used strictly in accordance with general and detailed specifications. No provisions of the Code, no requisitions
made, conditions prescribed or orders issued thereunder have been transgressed in the course of the work. The
land is fit for construction for which it has been developed or re-developed or the building is fit for use for which
it has been erected, re-erected or altered, constructed and enlarged.
I hereby also enclose the plan of the building completed in all aspects.
Signature of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban
Designer 1) .....................................................................
Name of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban
Designer1) .....................................................................
(in block letters)
Registration No. of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban
Designer 1) .....................................................................
Address of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban
Designer 1) .....................................................................
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 23
ANNEX J
[Clause 13.2(h)]
FORM FOR OCCUPANCY PERMIT
Office Stamp
Date: .........................
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 7
2 TERMINOLOGY 7
3 LAND USE CLASSIFICATION AND USES PERMITTED 12
4 MEANS OF ACCESS 13
5 COMMUNITY OPEN SPACES AND AMENITIES 15
6 REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS 21
7 CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS 22
8 OPEN SPACES (WITHIN A PLOT) 23
9 AREA AND HEIGHT LIMITATIONS 26
10 OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES 28
11 GREENBELTS, LANDSCAPING AND WATER CONSERVATION 29
12 REQUIREMENTS OF PARTS OR BUILDINGS 29
13 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY 34
14 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 34
15 LIGHTING AND VENTILATION 34
16 ELECTRICAL AND ALLIED INSTALLATIONS (INCLUDING LIGHTNING 35
PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS)
17 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 35
18 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 35
19 HEAT INSULATION 35
20 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS AND ESCALATORS 35
21 PLUMBING SERVICES AND SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 35
LIST OF STANDARDS 63
FOREWORD
This Part covers development control rules, including such aspects as sub-division and layout rules, land use
classifications, open spaces, area and height limitations, means of access, and parking spaces; this part also
covers the general building requirements, such as the requirements of parts of buildings, provision of lifts, etc.
It is expected that for proper coordination and enforcement of the development control rules and general building
requirements, the departments concerned, namely, the town planning department and the building department,
will coordinate the total development and building activity at both organizational and technical levels.
Particular attention is invited to Table 3 on floor area ratio (FAR) limitations. It is emphasized that the floor area
of a single storey building is limited in absolute terms by the type of construction and occupancy class. Also, the
absolute floor areas for different types of construction and different occupancies have a definite ratio among
them. The ratios as recommended in the American Iron and Steel Institute publication 1961 Fire Protection
Through Modern Building Codes have been generally adopted in this Part and Table 3 has been developed on
this basis. Table 3 is repeated in Part 4 Fire and Life Safety also for convenience of reading.
Limitation of areas and heights of buildings is achieved in this country by specifying it in terms of floor area ratio
(FAR) or floor space index (FSI). The significance of the contribution of different types of construction giving
different fire resistances has not been taken cognizance of in specifying FAR for different occupancies, in the
present development control rules and municipal byelaws of the country. Table 3, therefore, gives the comparative
ratios of FAR between types of buildings and occupancy classes and these have been specified mainly from the
fire protection aspect of buildings. To arrive at the actual FAR for different buildings coming up in different
areas, the Authority should further modify them, by taking into consideration other aspects like density of any
area, parking facilities required, the traffic load (road width) and the services available. The heights of buildings
shall also be regulated, keeping in view the local fire fighting facilities.
In some state byelaws, the FAR (or FSI) has been expressed in the form of percentage. However, the Committee
responsible for preparation of this Code is of the opinion that, it being a ratio should be expressed only in the
form of a ratio, as done in this Part.
It is particularly to be borne in mind by the Authority that the ratios are definitive and it can assess the particular
FAR for a type of construction and for an occupancy and establish a new table, but retaining the comparative
ratios as given in Table 3.
Keeping in view the enormous problems faced by the country with regard to the ever increasing squatter settlements/
pavement dwellers in urban areas (cities of all sizes), it is imperative that all the urban local bodies sooner or later
evolve schemes for their rehabilitation. The resources are meagre and the problems are enormous. There has
been a tendency on the part of a number of development agencies/local bodies to link space norms with
affordability. Affordability is an important criterion but at the same time a public agency cannot ignore the basic
minimum needs of the family to be housed (including the mental, physical and social health of the marginalized
groups, which is linked with shelter). The local bodies shall have to evolve appropriate policies for their integration
with the broad urban society and generate/allocate resources and more importantly adopt a planning process,
which are people friendly. The Government of India has also formulated the National Slum Policy to this effect.
Therefore, keeping in view the needs of low income housing, to cater to Economically Weaker Sections of
Society (EWS) and Low Income Group (LIG), the requirements on planning, design of layout/shelter have
been rationalized and the same are provided in this Part. This will contribute significantly in the massive
housing programmes undertaken for the low income sector. This information is based on the provisions
of IS 8888 (Part 1) : 1993 Guide for requirements of low income housing: Part 1 Urban areas (first revision).
Further, city development process would need a dynamic approach to take care of urban renewal and also
development needs in dense core areas of the cities. Innovative approaches in planning and design with participating
models of public private-peoples partnership become necessary to solve the emerging development needs. With
F IG. 3 CLUSTER
2.60 Owner Person or body having a legal interest 2.70 Row Housing/Row Type Building A row of
in land and/or building thereon. This includes free buildings, with only front, rear and interior open spaces
holders, leaseholders or those holding a sub-lease where applicable.
which both bestows a legal right to occupation and
2.71 Semi-Detached Building A building detached
gives rise to liabilities in respect of safety or building
on three sides.
condition.
2.72 Service Road/Lane A road/lane provided
In case of lease or sub-lease holders, as far as ownership adjacent to a plot(s) for access or service purposes as
with respect to the structure is concerned, the structure the case may be.
of a flat or structure on a plot belongs to the allottee/
lessee till the allotment/lease subsists. 2.73 Set-Back Line A line usually parallel to the
plot boundaries and laid down in each case by the
2.61 Parapet A low wall or railing built along the Authority, beyond which nothing can be constructed
edge of a roof or floor. towards the plot boundaries.
2.62 Parking Space An area enclosed or unenclosed, 2.74 Site (Plot) A parcel (piece) of land enclosed
covered or open, sufficient in size to park vehicles, by definite boundaries.
together with a drive-way connecting the parking space
with a street or alley and permitting ingress and egress 2.75 Site, Corner A site at the junctions of and
of the vehicles. fronting on two or more intersecting streets.
2.63 Partition An interior non-load bearing barrier, 2.76 Site, Depth of The mean horizontal distance
one storey or part-storey in height. between the front and rear site boundaries.
2.64 Plinth The portion of a structure between the 2.77 Site, Double Frontage A site, having a
surface of the surrounding ground and surface of the frontage on two streets, other than a corner plot.
floor, immediately above the ground. 2.78 Site, Interior or Tandem A site access to
2.65 Plinth Area The built up covered area which is by a passage from a street whether such
measured at the floor level of the basement or of any passage forms part of the site or not.
storey. 2.79 Staircover (or MUMTY) A structure with a
2.66 Porch A covered structure supported on roof over a staircase and its landing built to enclose
pillars or otherwise for the purpose of pedestrian or only the stairs for the purpose of providing protection
vehicular approach to a building. from weather and not used for human habitation.
2.67 Road See 2.82. 2.80 Storey The portion of a building included
between the surface of any floor and the surface of the
2.68 Road Line See 2.84. floor next above it, or if there be no floor above it,
2.69 Room Height The vertical distance measured then the space between any floor and the ceiling next
from the finished floor surface to the finished ceiling above it.
surface. Where a finished ceiling is not provided, the 2.81 Storey, Topmost The uppermost storey in a
underside of the joists or beams or tie beams shall building whether constructed wholly or partly on the
determine the upper point of measurement. roof.
NOTES
1 Areas of informal activities may be identified in the above land use categories at Level 2.
2 Mixed use zone may be identified at the development plan level, having more than one use zone with mixed activities of
such use zones.
3 In all, there could be 35 use zones at the development plan level within eight land use categories at the perspective plan
level as given in the above table.
4 Use premises for different activities could be provided at the project/action plan level or with the approval of the Authority
as the case may be.
5 Use zone regulations for the use permissibility could be decided by the town planner depending upon the requirement/
feasibility.
3.2 The various building uses and occupancies (see 7) 3.6 Fire Safety
permitted on the various zones shall be as given in the Buildings shall be so planned, designed and constructed
Master Plan. as to ensure fire safety and this shall be done as per
3.3 Uses to be in Conformity with the Zone Part 4 Fire and Life Safety.
5.5.6 Fire
c) Banking
1) Extension counters with ATM facility (1 for every 15 000 population)
i) Floor area for counters 75 m2
ii) Floor area for ATM 6 m2
2) Bank with locker, ATM and other banking facilities (1 for 100 000 population)
Area 2 500 m2
5.5.9 Shopping
5.5.12 Transport
5.6 Every layout or sub-division shall take into account 6 REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS
the provisions of development plan and if the land is 6.1 No building shall be constructed on any site, on
affected by any reservation for public purposes, the any part of which there is deposited refuse, excreta or
Authority may agree to adjust the location of such other offensive matter objectionable to the Authority,
reservations to suit the development. until such refuse has been removed therefrom and the
a) Every building fronting a street shall have a a) Every semi-detached and detached building
front space, forming an integral part of the shall have a permanently open air space,
site as below: forming an integral part of the site as below:
1) For detached buildings there shall be a
Sl Front Open Space, Width of Street minimum side open space of 3 m on both
No. Min Fronting the Plot the sides.
m m NOTE For detached residential buildings up
(1) (2) (3) to 7 m in height on plots with a frontage less than
12 m (see 6.6.1), one of the side open spaces may
i) 1.51) Up to 7.51) be reduced to 1.5 m.
ii) 3.0 7.5 to 18 2) For semi-detached buildings, there shall
iii) 4.5 18 to 30 be a minimum side open space of 3 m on
iv) 6.0 Above 30 one side.
1)
For buildings up to a maximum height 7 m. NOTE For semi-detached buildings up to 7 m
in height on plots with a frontage less than 9 m
NOTE In case a building abuts two or more streets, the (see 6.6.1), the side open spaces may be reduced
value of open paces is to be based on the average width of to 1.5 m.
streets, subject to a minimum of 1.8 m for cases (ii), (iii) and
(iv) above. 3) For row-type buildings, no side open is
required.
b) For streets less than 7.5 m in width, the b) In the case of semi-detached buildings, the
distance of the building (building line) shall open spaces provided on one side shall be as
12.11 Parapet a) not less than 15 m from any ash pit, refuse
pit, earth closet or privy and shall be located
Parapet walls and handrails provided on the edges of on a site upwards from the earth closet or
roof terraces, balcony, VARANDAH, etc shall not be privy;
less than 1.0 m and not more than 1.2 m in height from
the finished floor level. b) not less than 18 m from any cess pit soakway
or borehole latrine and shall be located on a
12.12 Cabin site upwards from the earth closet or privy;
The size of cabins shall not be less than 3.0 m2 with a c) that contamination by the movement of sub-
minimum width of 1.0 m. The clear passages within soil or other water is unlikely; and
the divided space of any floor shall not be less than d) not under a tree or otherwise it should have a
0.75 m and the distance from the farthest space in a canopy over it, so that leaves and twigs may
cabin to any exit shall not be more than 18.5 m. In not fall into the well and rot.
case the sub-divided cabin does not derive direct
lighting and ventilation from any open spaces/ 12.14.2 Requirements
mechanical means, the maximum height of the cabin The well shall:
shall be 2.2 m.
a) have a minimum internal diameter of not less
12.13 Boundary Wall than 1 m;
b) be constructed to a height not less than 1 m
12.13.1 The requirements of the boundary wall are
above the surrounding ground level, to form a
given below:
parapet or kerb and to prevent surface water
a) Except with the special permission of the from flowing into a well, and shall be
Authority, the maximum height of the surrounded with a paving constructed of
compound wall shall be 1.5 m above the impervious material which shall extend for a
centre line of the front street. Compound wall distance of not less than 1.8 m in every direction
up to 2.4 m height may be permitted if the from the parapet from the kerb forming the well
top 0.9 m is of open type construction of a head and the upper surface of such a paving
design to be approved by the Authority. shall be sloped away from the well;
b) In the case of a corner plot, the height of the c) be of sound and permanent construction
boundary wall shall be restricted to 0.75 m (PUCCA) throughout. Temporary or exposed
for a length of 10 m on the front and side of (KUTCHA) wells shall be permitted only in
the inter-sections and the balance height of fields or gardens for purposes of irrigation; and
0.75 m if required in accordance with (a) may d) have the interior surface of the lining or walls
be made up of open type construction of the well be rendered impervious for a
(through railings) and of design to be depth of not less than 1.8 m measured
approved by the Authority. from the level of the ground immediately
c) However, the provisions of (a) and (b) are not adjoining the well-head.
FIG. 8 RUNWAY
ANNEX C
(Clause 12.20)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME HOUSING IN URBAN AREAS
The minimum plot size with ground coverage not For size of open cluster and open space, set backs,
exceeding 75 percent, shall not be less than 40 m2 in vehicular access and pedestrian paths in cluster
small and medium town and not less than 30 m2 in planning, the provisions given in Annex E shall apply.
metropolitan cities. Plot sizes below 30 m2 but not less
C-3 GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
than 15 m2 may be permitted in case of cluster planning,
however, in such cases the ground coverage and FSI C-3.1 General
shall be 100 percent and 2 percent respectively (see
The requirements of parts of buildings shall be as given
also Annex E for Special requirements for cluster
in C-3.2 to C-3.9.
planning for housing).
NOTES C-3.2 Plinth
1 In exceptional cases in metropolitan cities with population
The minimum height of plinth shall be regulated on
more than 1 million the size of plots may be brought down to
25 m 2 in cases of low income housing colonies located in the basis of environmental and topographical condition
congested areas as decided by the Authority. In mega-cities it and higher plinth height may be required in areas prone
may be further reduced to 15 m2. In such cases where plot size to flooding.
is below 25 m2, only cluster planning or group housing may
be adopted. C-3.3 Size of Room
2 A minimum of 25 percent of the plot size shall be left open
without adversely affecting light and ventilation for habitable C-3.3.1 Habitable Room
spaces and toilet. It shall not be made mandatory to leave set
back on any side. Every dwelling unit to be provided should have at least
two habitable rooms. Even if one room house is
C-2.3.2 Minimum Frontage provided initially it should be capable of adding a new
The minimum frontage of the plot shall be 3.6 m in second room in future. However, in case single room
width. tenements are required to be provided where future
additions are not possible, the carpet area of
C-2.4 Density multipurpose single room should be at least 12.5 m2.
The density norms for plotted development and mixed Such one room dwelling units with 12.5 m2 carpet area
development shall be as follows: of habitable space is permitted only in case of on site
rehabilitation of slum dwellers. In a house of two
Type of Development Range of Densities rooms, first room shall not be less than 9.0 m2 with
(Gross) minimum width of 2.5 m and second room shall not
a) Plotted development 65-120 plots per hectare be less than 6.5 m2 with a minimum width of 2.1 m
b) Mixed development provided the total area of both the rooms is not less
i) Small towns 75-100 dwelling units than 15.5 m2. In incremental housing the bigger room
per hectare shall always be the first room.
ii) Cities 100-125 dwelling units C-3.3.1.1 To facilitate incremental housing in case of
per hectare flatted development or otherwise, habitable space at
iii) Metropolitan Cities 125-150 dwelling units mezzanine level may be permitted. The minimum size
per hectare of such a mezzanine floor should not be lesser than
6.5 m2 and such a floor should occupy not more than
C-2.4.2 In case of developments with per dwelling 50 percent of the room area of which it is a part. Such
unit covered area of 15 m2 maximum densities of 500 a mezzanine floor should have appropriate openings
dwelling units per hectare shall be permissible. to facilitate light and ventilation as per C-3.6. Minimum
The minimum width of individual balcony, where The circulation area on any floor including staircase,
provided, shall be 0.9 m and shall not be more than shall not exceed 8 m2/dwelling unit.
1.2 m and it shall not project beyond the plot line and C-3.9 Water Seal Latrine
on roads or pathway.
No building plan shall be approved and no building
C-3.4 Basement shall be deemed to have been completed and fit for
human occupation unless provision is made for water
No basement floor shall be allowed.
seal latrine. No dry latrine shall be allowed. Water seal
C-3.5 Minimum Height latrines can also be provide on the basis of community
toilets or shared toilets as per the recommendation
The minimum height of rooms/spaces shall be as given in good practice [3(3)].
follows:
Where leaching pits are used, it should be constructed
a) Habitable room 2.6 m within the premises of the households as it would be
b) Kitchen 2.6 m economical as well as facilitate their cleaning. However,
c) Bath/water-closet 2.1 m where, due to space constraint, construction of pits
d) Corridor 2.1 m within the premises may not be possible, pits may be
constructed in places like lanes, streets and roads.
C-3.5.1 In the case of sloping roofs, the average height
of roof for habitable rooms shall be 2.6 m and the In case the pit is located under the road, street or foot
minimum height at eaves shall be 2.0 m. path, the inverted level of the pipe connecting the
latrine pan with the pit shall be at least 1.1 m below
C-3.6 Lighting and Ventilation ground level or below the bottom of the water main
The openings through windows, ventilators and other existing within a distance of 3 m from the pits
openings for lighting and ventilation shall be in whichever is more. Construction of such pits may be
accordance with 15.1.2. in accordance with good practice [3(4)].
ANNEX D
(Clause 12.21)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANNING OF PUBLIC BUILDINGS
MEANT FOR USE OF PHYSICALLY CHALLENGED
D-1 GENERAL the public accessible to, and functional for the physically
challenged through and within their doors, without loss
D-1.1 These requirements apply to all buildings and
of function, space or facility where the general public is
facilities used by the public. These apply to temporary
concerned. It supplements the general requirements of
or emergency conditions as well as permanent
the Code, and reflects greater concern for safety of life
conditions. It does not apply to private residences.
and limb. In cases of practical difficulty, unnecessary
These requirements are concerned with non- hardship, or extreme differences, the Authority may grant
ambulatory disabilities, semi-ambulatory disabilities, exceptions from the literal requirements of this Annex or
sight disabilities, hearing disabilities, disabilities of permit the use of other methods or materials, but only
inco-ordination, aging, allergies, heart and lung when it is clearly evident that equivalent facilities and
diseases, epilepsy, haemophilia, incontinence and protection are thereby secured.
enterostomy.
D-1.2 For the purpose of this Annex, the following
It is intended to make all buildings and facilities used by definitions shall apply.
FIG. 12 ENTRANCES
D-3.2.2 At least one entrance usable by individuals D-3.3.1.1 Two-leaf doors are not usable by those with
in wheelchairs shall be on a level that would make the disabilities defined in D-1.2.1, D-1.2.2 and D-1.2.5
elevators accessible. unless they operate by a single effort, or unless one of
the two leaves meets the requirements of D-3.3.1.
D-3.3 Doors and Doorways
D-3.3.1.2 Side-hung doors
D-3.3.1 Doorwidth
To facilitate wheelchair manoeuvre, doors should be
To enable wheelchair users to pass through doors, the hung with the hinges in room corners. Doors opening
minimum clear width should be 900 mm and shall be out into corridors or circulation spaces should be
operable by a single effort. In certain cases the clear avoided as far as possible.
width should be 900 mm to 1 000 mm; for example, if
the wheelchair has to be turned in the doorway, where D-3.3.1.3 It is recommended that all doors have kick
there is a door-closer or at entrance doors to public plates extending from the bottom of the door to at least
buildings and in other situations where there is 400 mm from the floor, or be made of a material and
considerable traffic. finish that would safely withstand the abuse they might
D-3.3.3 Thresholds
Raised thresholds should be avoided, but where this is
not possible, their height should not exceed 25 mm.
Rubber thresholds are advantageous for wheelchair
users.
D-3.3.3.1 Care should be taken in the selection,
placement and setting of door closers so that they do All dimensions in millimetres.
not prevent the use of doors by the physically disabled. FIG. 14 POSITION OF H ANDLE
Time-delay door closers are recommended.
D-3.3.3.2 Self-closing doors D-3.4 Windows
Wheelchair users and other with impaired mobility Windows should be designed to avoid the glare which
have difficulty in using self-closing doors. The force is a particular problem for people with impaired
required to open them should be reduced as far as vision. Large glass areas close to circulation spaces
possible. Public buildings should preferably have should be marked a little below eye-level with a
sliding automatic doors. coloured band or frame. To enable wheelchair users
to see through a window comfortably, the sill should
D-3.3.4 Door Indentification be not higher than 800 mm from the floor. Windows
To help people with impaired vision to see doors, the should be easy to open and close. Their controls
door and frame should be in a colour which contrasts should be placed in the zone 900 to 1 200 mm from
with the adjoining wall. Glass or glazed doors should the floor (see Fig. 15).
D-3.6 Floors
D-3.6.1 Floors shall have a non-slip surface.
D-3.6.2 Floors on a given storey shall be of a common
level through out or be connected by a ramp in
accordance with D-3.1.1 to D-3.1.8.
D-3.6.2.1 A gentle slope up to 10 mm may be given
between the level of the floor of the corridor and the
level of the floor of the toilet rooms.
D-3.6.2.2 There should not be a difference between
All dimensions in millimetres.
the level of the floor of a corridor and the level of a
FIG. 15 POSITION OF SILL AND W INDOW CONTROL meeting room, dining room, or any other room, unless
proper ramps are provided.
D-3.5 Stairs
D-3.7 Sanitary Facilities
Stairs should not be the only means of moving between
floors. They should be supplemented by lifts or ramps. It is essential that sanitary facilities, in accordance with
the nature and use of a specific building or facility, be
D-3.5.1 Straight flights of steps are preferred
made accessible to, and usable by, the physically
by ambulant disabled people. Treads should be
challenged.
approximately 300 mm deep and risers not higher than
150 mm. Steps should be of a consistent height and D-3.7.1 Sanitary facilities shall have space to allow traffic
depth throughout the stair. Projecting nosings and open of individuals in wheelchairs (see Fig. 17 and 18).
D-3.8.2 Drinking water fountains or water coolers be securely fitted to the wall to withstand heavy pressure.
shall be hand-operated or hand and foot-operated. Handrails should turn in towards the wall at either end.
D-3.8.2.1 Conventional floormounted water coolers D-3.10.1 Handrails should be approximately 900 mm
may be convenient to individuals in wheelchairs if a from the floor. The rail should be easy to grip, having
small fountain is mounted on the side of the cooler a circular section with a diameter of approximately
800 mm above the floor. 40 mm and fixed as shown in Fig. 21.
D-3.8.2.2 Fully recessed drinking water fountains are
not recommended.
D-3.8.2.3 Drinking water fountains should not be set into
an alcove unless the alcove is wider than a wheelchair.
D-3.9 Public Telephones
An appropriate number of public telephones should be
made accessible to and usable by the physically disabled.
NOTE The conventional public telephone booth is not
usable by most physically disabled individuals. There are many
ways in which public telephones may be made accessible and
usable. It is recommended that architects and builders confer
with the telephone companies in the planning of the building
or facility.
D-3.11 Elevators D-3.13.3 Doors that are not intended for normal use,
and that might prove dangerous if a blind person were
In a multi-storey building, elevators are essential to to exit or enter by them, should be made quickly
the successful functioning of physically disabled identifiable to the touch by knurling the door handle
individuals. They shall conform to the requirements or knob (see Fig. 22).
given in D-3.11.1 and D-3.11.2.
D-3.11.1 Elevators shall be accessible to, and usable
by the physically disabled on the level that they use to
enter the building, and at all levels normally used by
the general public.
D-3.11.2 Elevators shall allow for traffic by wheelchairs
(see also D-3.3).
D-3.12 Controls
It is advantageous for wheelchair users if controls are
placed at low level. For visually impaired people, they
should be at eye-level.
D-3.12.1 To enable wheelchair users to reach controls
while not placing them too low for visually impaired FIG. 22 DOOR HANDLE
people, controls should be in the zone 900 mm to
1 200 mm from the floor. It is advantageous if controls D-3.14 Warning Signals
in, for example, lifts are placed at an angle of
D-3.14.1 Audible warning signals shall be accompanied
approximately 45 to the wall so that they are easier to
by simultaneous visual signals for the benefit of those
read and operate. To cater for wheelchair users,
with hearing disabilities.
controls should be placed not less than 400 mm from
room corners. All the power and electric points should D-3.14.2 Visual signals shall be accompanied by
be placed at one metre above the floor level and should simultaneous audible signals for the benefit of the
not project outside walls. blind. To assist blind people, lettering and symbols on
signs should be in relief for tactile reading.
D-3.12.2 Again, to cater for visually impaired people,
controls should be colour-contrasted with D-3.14.3 Signs should be designed and located so that
backgrounds. Information should preferably be in relief they are easy to read. For visually impaired people,
for tactile reading. signs should preferably be at eye-level and it should
be possible to approach them closely. Text and symbols
D-3.12.3 To aid operation for people with impaired
should be colour-contrasted with the background. The
co-ordination or impaired vision, switches, etc, should
letters should not be less than 12 mm high.
have large push plates.
D-3.12.4 Controls for powered door openers to hinged D-3.14.4 Signs should be well illuminated and
doors should be located so that the doors do not conflict surfaces should not cause mirroring or reflections.
with wheelchairs, sticks, walking aids, etc. Signs should not be behind glass or similar materials.
D-3.12.5 To facilitate operation for people with D-3.14.5 Information based on colour codes only
limited strength in arms and hands, handles should be should be avoided; colourblind people may find them
easy to grip and turn. difficult to understand.
Appropriate identification of specific facilities within This should be at least 800 mm wide, 600 mm deep
a building used by the public is particularly essential and 650 mm to 700 mm high. For wheelchair users,
to the blind. the convenient height of work tops is between
750 mm and 850 mm; flexible provision is preferred.
D-3.13.1 Raised letters or numbers shall be used to
Further, for wheelchair access to a work bench, wash
identify rooms or offices.
basin or table, a clear space for knees and footrests is
D-3.13.2 Such identification should be placed on the needed.
ANNEX E
(Clauses 12.22, C-2.3.1 and C-2.6)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OF CLUSTER PLANNING FOR HOUSING
ANNEX F
(Clause 12.23)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME HABITAT PLANNING
IN RURAL AREAS
ANNEX G
(Clause 12.24)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEVELOPMENT PLANNING IN HILLY AREAS
G-4 ROADS AND PATHS buildings on one side do not shade those on the other
G-4.1 Street orientation shall preferably be East-West side.
to allow for maximum South sun to enter the buildings. G-4.2 The following road widths shall be adopted for
The street shall be wide enough to ensure that the urban roads in Hilly areas.
G-4.3 Hill Road Manual (IRC:SP:48-1998), a G-5 COMMUNITY FACILITIES AND SERVICES
publication of the Indian Roads Congress shall be
G-5.1 The following standards shall be adopted for
referred to for detailed guidelines for planning roads
community facilities and Services in Hilly areas.
in Hilly areas.
G-6 GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS G-6.3 Passive Systems for Climatic Control
G-6.1 General G-6.3.1 Appropriate solar passive methods, such as
orientation, double-glazing, trombe walls and solar
The provisions contained in this Part shall
collectors, shall be adopted to achieve climatic comfort
apply excepting for the specific provisions given
with little use of conventional energy.
hereunder.
G-6.3.2 Care shall be taken in siting and design of
G-6.2 Siting buildings to provide passive controls to modify the
G-6.2.1 No house shall preferably be located closer effect of cold/strong winds.
than 1 m to another house. G-6.4 Flat land is normally not available in hilly
G-6.2.2 No house shall be located closer than 10 m regions. The houses are required to be constructed on
to a steep slope. partially sloping land made available by cutting and
filling. It shall be necessary to protect the house by
G-6.2.3 No house shall be built on a landfill or on the building retaining walls/breast walls [see 3(8)] to avoid
edge of a slope known to have been levelled. landslides occurring at time of earthquakes or heavy
G-6.2.4 Buildings in hills shall be clustered together rains.
to minimise the exposure to cold winds. Open spaces G-6.5 Disaster Resistance
provided shall allow for maximum South sun.
All necessary steps shall be taken in designing and
G-6.2.5 Buildings shall be located on the south slope building in hilly regions to achieve disaster resistance
of a hill or mountain for better exposure to solar as per the relevant codes and Part 6 Structural Design.
radiation. At the same time, exposure to cold winds All natural disasters likely to affect the locality shall
may be minimized by locating the building on the be taken into consideration, namely earthquakes,
leeward side. cyclones, avalanches, flash floods, landslides etc.
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 7
2 TERMINOLOGY 7
3 FIRE PREVENTION 9
4 LIFE SAFETY 26
5 FIRE PROTECTION 32
6 ADDITIONAL OCCUPANCY-WISE REQUIREMENTS 49
LIST OF STANDARDS 83
FOREWORD
This Part of the Code deals with safety from fire. It specifies the demarcation of fire zones, restrictions on
construction of buildings in each fire zone, classification of buildings based on occupancy, types of building
construction according to fire resistance of the structural and non-structural components and other restrictions
and requirements necessary to minimize danger to life from fire, smoke, fumes or panic before the buildings can
be evacuated. The Code recognizes that safety of life is more than a matter of means of exits and accordingly
deals with various matters which are considered essential to the safety of life.
Fire protection techniques have to be based on the fire behaviour characteristics of different materials and structural
elements of buildings. The activities pursued by the occupants of buildings must also be taken into consideration
for assessing the extent of hazards, and method should then be devised by which the hazards could be minimized.
An indefinite combination of variables is involved in the phenomenon of fire, all of which cannot be quantified.
The requirements of this Code should, therefore, be taken as a guide and an engineering design approach should
be adopted for ensuring a fire safe design for buildings. It would also be necessary for this purpose to associate
qualified and trained fire protection engineers with the planning of buildings, so that adequate fire protection
measures could be incorporated in the building design right from the beginning.
Absolute safety from fire is not attainable in practice. The objective of this Part is to specify measures that will
provide that degree of safety from fire which can be reasonably achieved. The Code endeavours to avoid
requirements that might involve unreasonable hardships or unnecessary inconvenience or interference with normal
use and occupancy of buildings, but insists upon compliance with minimum standards for fire safety necessary in
public interest. For ensuring compliance of fire protection equipments/installations to the laid down quality
requirements, it is desirable to use such equipments/installation duly certified under the BIS Certification Marks
Scheme.
While providing guidelines for minimizing chances of occurrence of fire through passive fire protection measures,
this Part does not intend to cover all aspects of general fire prevention including sources of ignition. Nor does it
cover the prevention of accidental personal injuries during the course of normal occupancy of buildings.
This Part while recognizing that panic in a building on fire may be uncontrollable, deals with the potential panic
hazard through measures designed to prevent the development of panic. Experience indicates that panic seldom
develops even in the presence of potential danger, so long as occupants of buildings are moving towards exits
which they can see within a reasonable distance and with no obstruction or undue congestion in the path of
travel. However, any uncertainty as to the location or adequacy of means of egress, the presence of smoke or
fumes and the stoppage of travel towards the exit, such as may occur when one person stumbles and falls on
stairs, may be conducive to panic. Danger from panic is greater when a large number of people are trapped in a
confined area.
Experience has shown that concealed spaces within a building, such as, space between ceiling and false ceiling,
horizontal and vertical ducts, etc, tend to act as flues/tunnels during a fire. Provision should, therefore, be made
to provide fire stopping within such spaces.
Nothing in this Part of the Code shall be construed to prohibit better types of building construction, more exits or
otherwise safer conditions than the minimum requirements specified in this Part.
Compliance with this Part shall not be construed as eliminating or reducing the necessity for other provisions for
safety of persons using a building or structure under normal occupancy conditions. Nor shall any provision of
this Code be construed as requiring or permitting any addition that may be hazardous under normal occupancy
conditions.
One of the major points brought out in this Part is the limitation of heights and areas of buildings based on fire
safety of the occupants. Individual municipal corporations are free to alter Table 19 based on local conditions,
The first version of this Part was formulated in 1970 and first revision was brought out in 1983. Subsequently the
first revision of this Part was modified in 1997 through Amendment No. 3 to 1983 version of the Code. This
modified version of this part included few tables for the fire resistance ratings of various building components,
such as walls, columns, beams and floors. The requirements for wet riser, down-comer, automatic sprinkler
installation, high velocity (10-15 m/s) water spray or foam generating system, etc, for buildings were modified.
Annex giving guidelines for selection of fire detectors had been deleted and relevant Indian Standards on fire
alarm system and smoke detectors had been referred. Also, Annex for determination of fire loads and fire load
density for arriving at the classification of occupancy hazard and calorific values of some common materials
were included. Annex for broad classification of industrial and non-industrial occupancies into low, moderate
and high hazard had also been included.
As a result of implementation of this Part, some useful suggestions have emerged. This revision has, therefore,
been prepared to take care of the same. The significant modifications incorporated include:
a) The text has now been divided into the following broad clauses:
1) Fire Prevention Covering aspects of fire prevention pertaining to design and construction of
buildings on passive fire protection measures, also describing the various types of building materials
and their fire rating.
2) Life Safety Covering life safety provisions in the event of fire and similar emergencies, also
addressing construction and occupancy features that are necessary to minimize danger to life from
fire, smoke, fumes or panic.
2.3 Building Any structure for whatsoever purpose 2.7 Down-comer An arrangement of fire fighting
and of whatsoever materials constructed and every part within the building by means of down-comer pipe
thereof whether used as human habitation or not and connected to terrace tank through terrace pump, gate
includes foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs, valve and non-return valve and having mains not less
chimneys, plumbing and building services, fixed than 100 mm internal diameter with landing valves on
platforms, VERANDAH, balcony, cornice or projection, each floor/landing. It is also fitted with inlet
part of a building or anything affixed thereto or any wall connections at ground level for charging with water
enclosing or intended to enclose any land or space by pumping from fire service appliances and air release
and signs and outdoor display structures. Tents, valve at roof level to release trapped air inside.
SHAMIANAHS, tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected for 2.8 Dry Riser An arrangement of fire fighting
temporary and ceremonial occasions with the permission within the building by means of vertical rising mains
of the Authority shall not be considered as building. not less than 100 mm internal diameter with landing
2.4 Building, Height of The vertical distance valves on each floor/landing which is normally dry
measured in the case of flat roofs, from the average level but is capable of being charged with water usually by
of the ground around and contiguous to the building or pumping from fire service appliances.
as decided by the Authority to the terrace of the last 2.9 Emergency Lighting Lighting provided for use
livable floor of the building adjacent to the external wall; when the supply to the normal lighting fails.
and in the case of pitched roofs, up to the point where
2.10 Emergency Lighting System A complete but
the external surface of the outer wall intersects the
discrete emergency lighting installation from the
finished surface of the sloping roof; and in the case of
standby power source to the emergency lighting
gables facing the road, the mid-point between the eaves
lamp(s), for example, self-contained emergency
level and the ridge. Architectural features serving no
luminaire or a circuit from central battery generator
other function except that of decoration, shall be
connected through wiring to several escape luminaries.
excluded for the purpose of measuring heights.
2.11 Escape Lighting That part of emergency
2.5 Combustible Material The material which
lighting which is provided to ensure that the escape
either burns itself or adds heat to a fire, when tested
route is illuminated at all material times, for example,
for non-combustibility in accordance with accepted
at all times when persons are on the premises, or at
standard [4(1)].
times the main lighting is not available, either for the
2.6 Covered Area Ground area covered by the whole building or for the escape routes.
1 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
i) Reinforced1) cement concrete 120 140 160 200 240
(25) 2) (25)2) (25) 2) (25)2) (25)2)
ii) Unreinforced cement concrete 150 175
iii) No-fines concrete with :
a) 13 mm cement/sand or gypsum/sand 150 150 150 150 150
b) 13 mm light weight aggregate gypsum 150 150 150 150 150
plaster
iv) Bricks of clay:
a) Without finish 90 100 100 170 170 75 90 100 170 170
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 90 90 90 100 100 75 90 90 90 100
gypsum plaster
v) Bricks of sand lime:
a) Without finish 90 100 100 190 190 75 90 100 170 170
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 90 90 90 100 100 75 90 90 90 100
gypsum plaster
vi) Blocks of concrete:
a) Without finish 90 100 100 75 90 100 140 150
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 90 90 90 100 100 75 75 75 90 100
gypsum plaster
c) With 13 mm cement/sand or gypsum/ 75 90 90 100 140
sand
vii) Blocks of lightweight concrete:
a) Without finish 90 100 100 140 150 75 75 75 125 140
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 90 90 90 100 100 50 63 75 75 75
gypsum plaster
c) With 13 mm cement/sand or gypsum/ 75 75 75 90 100
sand
viii) Blocks of aerated concrete:
a) Without finish 90 100 100 140 180 50 63 63 75 100
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 90 90 100 100 150
gypsum plaster
1)
Walls containing at least 1 percent of vertical reinforcement.
2)
Minimum thickness of actual cover to reinforcement.
Table 3 Masonry Walls: Hollow (Required to Resist Fire from One Side at a Time)
(Clause 3.3.2)
Sl Nature of Construction Minimum Thickness (mm), Excluding any Finish for a
No. and Materials Fire Resistance (Hours) of
1 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
i)
Bricks of clay:
a) Without finish 170 170 170 200 200 75 75 90 100 170 170
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 100 100 170 170 170 75 75 90 90 90 100
gypsum plaster
ii) Blocks of concrete:
a) Without finish 90 125 125 140 140 150
b) With 13 mm cement/sand or gypsum/sand 190 200 200 90 125 125 140 140 140
c) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 75 90 90 100 125 125
gypsum plaster
iii) Blocks of lightweight concrete:
a) Without finish 100 100 100 75 90 90 100 140 150
b) With 13 mm cement/sand or gypsum/sand 75 75 75 100 140 140
c) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 63 63 63 75 90 100
gypsum plaster
Sl Nature of Construction and Materials/Timber Studs at Centres not Minimum Thickness (mm) of Protection
No. Exceeding 600 mm, Faced on Each Side with for a Fire Resistance of 1h
(1) (2) (3)
i) Plasterboard layers with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped and filled Total 25
thickness for each face
ii) One layer of 12.7 mm plasterboard with a finish of lightweight aggregate gypsum 13
plaster
iii) Metal lath and plaster, thickness of plaster:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade) 22
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13
Nature of Construction and Materials/Steel or Timber Frame at Stud Minimum Thickness (mm) of Protection
Centres not Exceeding 600 mm, Facings on Both Sides of Construction for a Fire Resistance
h 1h 1 h 2h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
A) Dry lining with materials fixed direct to studs
(without plaster finish)
1. One layer of plasterboard with taped and filled joints Timber or steel 12.7
2. Two layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in Timber or steel 19 25
outer layer taped and filled Total thickness for each face
3. One layer of asbestos insulating board with transverse joints Timber or steel 9 12
backed by fillers of asbestos insulating board not less than 9
mm thick, or by timber
4. One layer of wood wool slabs Timber 25
5. One layer of chipboard or of plywood Timber or steel 18
B) Lining with materials fixed direct to suds, with plaster finish:
Plasterboard of thickness: Timber or steel
a) With not less than 5 mm gypsum plaster finish 9.5
b) With not less than 13 mm gypsum plaster finish 12.7
C) Wet finish:
Metal lath and plaster, thickness of plaster:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster Timber or steel 13
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster Timber 13 19 25
Steel 13
h 1h 1 h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Steel frame with an external cladding of non-combustible sheets (excluding
sheet steel), with a steel supporting framework and internal lining of:
1. Metal lath and plaster, thickness of plaster:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade) 13 13
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 10 13 15 15 15 19
2. Two layer of plasterboard with joints staggered joints in outer layer 21 32
taped and filled Total thickness
3. Plasterboard of thickness:
a) With not less than 5 mm gypsum plaster finish 12.7
b) With not less than 13 mm gypsum plaster finish 9.5
c) With not less than 10 mm lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 9.5
4. One layer of asbestos insulating board with transverse joints backed by 9 9 12 12 12 12
fillers of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber
5. One layer of wood/wool slabs without finish 50
6. One layer of compressed straw building slabs:
a) Without finish 50
b) With not less than 5 mm gypsum plaster finish 50
7. Aerated concrete blocks 50 50 63 63 75 100
8. Bricks of clay:
a) Without finish 75 75 90 90 100 100
b) With not less than 13 mm lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 75 75 90 90
Table 8 Framed External Walls Non-Load Bearing Required to Resist Fire only
from Inside the Building (B)
(Clause 3.3.2)
Nature
Nature of
of Construction
Construction and
and Materials
Materials Minimum
Minimum Thickness
Thickness (mm)
(mm) ofof Protection
Protection to to
Provide
Provide Sufficient
Sufficient Insulation
Insulation to
to Achieve
Achieve aa
Modified
Modified Fire
Fire Resistance
Resistance of
of Up
Up to
to 44 hh
(1)
(1) (2)
(2)
Steel
Steel frame
frame with
with an
an external
external cladding
cladding ofof sheet
sheet steel
steel fully
fully lapped,
lapped, steel
steel bolted
bolted and
and
fixed
fixed to
to steel
steel sheeting
sheeting rails,
rails, with
with timber
timber or
or steel
steel supporting
supporting framework
framework andand internal
internal
lining
lining of:
of:
1.
1. Metal
Metal lath
lath and
and plaster,
plaster, thickness
thickness of
of plaster:
plaster:
a)
a) Sanded
Sanded gypsum
gypsum plaster
plaster (metal
(metal lathing
lathing grade)
grade) 13
13
b)
b) Lightweight
Lightweight aggregate
aggregate gypsum
gypsum plaster
plaster 10
10
2.
2. One
One layer
layer of
of plasterboard
plasterboard with
with joints
joints taped
taped and
and filled
filled 12.7
12.7
3.
3. Plasterboard
Plasterboard of
of thickness
thickness with
with not
not less
less than
than 55 mm
mm gypsum
gypsum plaster
plaster finish
finish 9.5
9.5
4.
4. One
One layer
layer of
of asbestos
asbestos insulating
insulating board
board with
with transverse
transverse joints
joints backed
backed by
by 99
fillers
fillers of
of asbestos
asbestos insulating
insulating board
board not
not less
less than
than 99 mm
mm thick,
thick, or
or by
by timber
timber
5.
5. One
One layer
layer of
of wood/wool
wood/wool slabs
slabs 25
25
6.
6. One
One layer
layer of
of compressed
compressed straw
straw building
building slabs
slabs 50
50
7.
7. One
One layer
layer of
of chipboard
chipboard or
or of
of plywood
plywood 18
18
8.
8. Aerated
Aerated concrete
concrete blocks
blocks 50
50
9.
9. Bricks
Bricks of
of clay
clay 75
75
10.
10. Any
Any internal
internal decorative
decorative lining
lining with
with aa cavity
cavity fill
fill independently
independently supported
supported 50
50
and
and retained
retained in in position
position ofof mineral
mineral fibre
fibre insulating
insulating material
material (excluding
(excluding
33
glass)
glass) at
at aa density
density of
of 48
48 kg/m
kg/m
h 1h 1 h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Fully exposed Width 150 200 250 300 400 450
Cover 40 40 40 40 40 40
ii) 50 percent exposed Width 125 160 200 200 300 350
Cover 40 40 40 40 40 40
iii) One face exposed Thickness 100 120 140 160 200 240
Cover 40 40 40 40 40 40
h 1h 1 h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Reinforced concrete (simply supported) Width 200 200 200 200 240 280
Cover 20 20 20 40 601) 701)
ii) Reinforced concrete (continuous) Width 200 200 200 200 240 280
Cover 20 20 20 30 40 501)
iii) Prestressed concrete (simply supported) Width 100 120 150 200 240 280
Cover 25 40 55 70 80 90
iv) Prestressed concrete (continuous) Width 80 100 120 150 200 240
Cover 20 30 40 55 70 80
1)
Require attention to the additional measures necessary to reduce the risk of spalling.
h 1h 1 h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Reinforced concrete (simply supported) Thickness 75 95 110 125 150 170
Cover 20 20 25 35 451) 551)
ii) Reinforced concrete (continuous) Thickness 75 95 110 125 150 170
Cover 20 20 20 25 35 451)
1)
Require attention to the additional measures necessary to reduce the risk of spalling.
Sl Nature of Construction and Materials Minimum Dimensions (mm) Excluding any Finish,
No. for a Fire Resistance of
h 1h 1 h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Reinforced concrete (simply supported) Thickness of floor 75 95 110 125 150 170
Rib width 125 125 125 125 150 175
Cover 20 20 35 45 55 65
Nature of Construction and Materials Minimum Dimensions (mm) Excluding any Finish,
for a Fire Resistance of
1h 1 h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
1)
So fixed or designed, as to allow full penetration for mechanical bond.
2)
Reinforcement shall consist of steel binding wire not less than 2.3 mm in thickness, or a steel mesh weighing not less than 0.5 kg/m2. In
concrete protection, the spacing of that reinforcement shall not exceed 200 mm in any direction.
h 1h 1 h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
1)
So fixed or designed, as to allow full penetration for mechanical bond.
2)
Where wire binding cannot be used, expert advice should be sought regarding alternative methods of support to enable the lower edges
of the plasterboard to be fixed together and to the lower flange, and for the top edge of the plasterboard to be held in position.
3)
Reinforcement shall consist of steel binding wire not less than 2.3 mm in thickness or a steel mesh weighing not less than 0.5 kg/m2. In
concrete protection, the spacing of that reinforcement shall not exceed 200 mm in any direction.
4)
Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced.
Table 16 Timber Floors Tongued and Grooved Boarding, or Sheets of Tongued and Grooved
Plywood or Wood Chipboard, of not Less than 21 mm Finished Thickness
(Clause 3.3.2)
Nature of Construction and Materials Minimum Thickness (mm) of Protection for a
Fire Resistance of
h 1h 2h
(1) (2) (3) (4)
1 h 1h 2h
(1) (2) (3) (4)
37 mm (minimum) timber joists with a ceiling of:
1. Timber lathing and plaster, plaster of thickness 15
2. Metal lathing and plaster, thickness of plaster for:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade) 15
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13 13 25
3. One layer of plasterboard with taped and filled joints 12.7
4. Two layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped 22 31
and filled total thickness
5. One layer of plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finish with:
a) Gypsum plaster 5
b) Sanded gypsum plaster 15
c) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13
6. One layer of plasterboard not less than 12.7 mm thick, finished with:
a) Gypsum plaster 5
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 10
7. One layer of asbestos insulating board, with any transverse joints backed by 9 121)
fillets of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber
1)
Finished on top with 25 mm minimum thick glass fibre or mineral wool laid between joints.
h 1h
(1) (2) (3)
37 mm (minimum) timber joists with a ceiling of:
1. Timber lathing and plaster, plaster of thickness 15
2. Metal lathing and plaster, thickness of plaster for:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade) 15
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13 19
3. One layer of plasterboard with joints taped and filled and backed by timber 12.7
4. Two layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped 25
and filled total thickness
5. Two layers of plasterboard, each not less than 9.5 mm thick, joints between 5
boards staggered and outer layer finished with gypsum plaster
6. One layer of plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finish with:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster 13
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 15
7. One layer of plasterboard not less than 12.7 mm thick, finished with:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster 15
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13
8. One layer of asbestos insulating board with any transverse joints backed by 12
fillets of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber
Every building shall be so constructed, equipped, 4.2.10 All exits shall provide continuous means of
maintained and operated as to avoid undue danger to egress to the exterior of a building or to an exterior
the life and safety of the occupants from fire, smoke, open space leading to a street.
fumes or panic during the time period necessary for 4.2.11 Exits shall be so arranged that they may be
escape. reached without passing through another occupied
unit.
4.2 General Exit Requirements
4.3 Occupant Load
4.2.1 An exit may be a doorway; corridor; passageway(s)
to an internal staircase, or external staircase, or to a For determining the exits required, the number of
VERANDAH or terrace(s), which have access to the persons within any floor area or the occupant load shall
street, or to the roof of a building or a refuge area. An be based on the actual number of occupants, but in no
exit may also include a horizontal exit leading to an case less than that specified in Table 20.
adjoining building at the same level.
4.3.1 Mezzanine
4.2.2 Lifts and escalators shall not be considered as
The occupant load of a mezzanine floor discharging
exits.
to a floor below shall be added to that floor occupancy
4.2.3 Every exit, exit access or exit discharge shall be and the capacity of the exits shall be designed for the
continuously maintained free of all obstructions or total occupancy load thus established.
impediments to full use in the case of fire or other
emergency. 4.4 Capacities of Exits
4.2.4 Every building meant for human occupancy shall 4.4.1 The unit of exit width, used to measure the
be provided with exits sufficient to permit safe escape capacity of any exit, shall be 500 mm. A clear width
of occupants, in case of fire or other emergency. of 250 mm shall be counted as an additional half unit.
Clear widths less than 250 mm shall not be counted
4.2.5 In every building or structure, exits shall comply for exit width.
with the minimum requirements of this part, except
NOTE The total occupants from a particular floor must
those not accessible for general public use.
evacuate within 2 minutes for Type 1 construction,
4.2.6 No building shall be so altered as to reduce the 1 minutes for Type 2 construction and 1 minute for Type 3
construction. Size of the exit door/exitway shall be calculated
number, width or protection of exits to less than that accordingly keeping in view the travel distance as per
required. Table 22.
4.2.7 Exits shall be clearly visible and the route to 4.4.2 Occupants per unit exit width shall be in
reach the exits shall be clearly marked and signs posted accordance with Table 21.
to guide the occupants of the floor concerned. Signs
shall be illuminated and wired to an independent 4.4.3 Horizontal Exit Allowance
electrical circuit on an alternative source of supply. When horizontal exit is provided in buildings of
The sizes and colours of the exit signs shall be in mercantile, storage, industrial, business and assembly
accordance with good practice [4(16)]. The colour of occupancies, the capacity per storey per unit width of
the exit signs shall be green. exit of stairways in Table 21 may be increased by 50
NOTE This provision shall not apply to A-2 and A-4 percent and in buildings of institutional occupancy it
occupancies less than 15 m in height. may be increased by 100 percent.
j) The exit sign with arrow indicating the way 4.10 Pressurization of Staircases (Protected Escape
to the escape route shall be provided at a Routes)
suitable height from the floor level on the wall 4.10.1 Though in normal building design,
and shall be illuminated by electric light compartmentation plays a vital part in limiting the
connected to corridor circuits. All exit way spread of fire, smoke will readily spread to adjacent
marking signs should be flush with the wall spaces through the various leakage openings in the
and so designed that no mechanical damage compartment enclosure, such as cracks, openings
shall occur to them due to moving of furniture around pipes ducts, airflow grills and doors, as perfect
or other heavy equipments. Further, all sealing of all these openings is not possible. It is smoke
landings of floor shall have floor indicating and toxic gases, rather than flame, that will initially
boards prominently indicating the number of obstruct the free movement of occupants of the
floor as per bye-laws. building through the means of escape (escape routes).
The floor indication board shall be placed on Hence the exclusion of smoke and toxic gases from
the wall immediately facing the flight of stairs the protected routes is of great importance.
and nearest to the landing. It shall be of size 4.10.2 Pressurization is a method adopted for protected
not less than 0.5 m 0.5 m. escape routes against ingress of smoke, especially in
k) Individual floors shall be prominently high-rise buildings. In pressurization, air is injected
indicated on the wall facing the staircases. into the staircases, lobbies or corridors, to raise their
m) In case of single staircase it shall terminate pressure slightly above the pressure in adjacent parts
at the ground floor level and the access to of the building. As a result, ingress of smoke or toxic
the basement shall be by a separate staircase. gases into the escape routes will be prevented. The
The second staircase may lead to basement pressurization of staircases shall be adopted for high
levels provided the same is separate at rise buildings and building having mixed occupancy/
ground level by ventilated lobby with multiplexes having covered area more than 500 m2.
discharge points to two different ends 4.10.3 The pressure difference for staircases shall be
through enclosures. as under:
4.12.4 Where there is a difference in level between 4.16 Emergency and Escape Lighting
connected areas for horizontal exits, ramps, not more 4.16.1 Emergency lighting shall be powered from a
than 1 in 10 m slope shall be provided; steps shall not source independent of that supplying the normal
be used. lighting [see good practice [4 (17)].
4.12.5 Doors in horizontal exits shall be openable at Escape lighting shall be capable of:
all times from both sides.
a) Indicating clearly and unambiguously the
4.13 Fire Tower escape routes,
Fire towers are the preferred type of escape route for b) Providing adequate illumination along such
storeyed buildings and these shall be considered as the routes to allow safe movement of persons
safest route for escape. Their number, location and size towards and through the exits,
shall depend on the building concerned, and its c) Ensuring that fire alarm call points and fire-
associated escape routes. fighting equipments provided along the
escape routes can be readily located.
4.13.1 In high rise buildings with over 8 storeys or
24 m in height, at least one required means of egress 4.16.2 The horizontal luminance at floor level on the
shall preferably be a fire tower. centreline of an escape route shall be not less than
10 lux. In addition, for escape routes up to 2 m wide,
4.13.2 The fire towers shall be constructed of walls 50 percent of the route width shall be lit to a minimum
with a 2 h fire resistance rating without openings other of 5 lux.
than the exit doorways, with platforms, landings and
balconies having the same fire-resistance rating. 4.16.3 The emergency lighting shall be provided to
be put on within 1 s of the failure of the normal lighting
4.14 Ramps supply.
4.14.1 Ramps shall comply with all the applicable 4.16.4 Escape lighting luminaries should be sited to
requirements for stairways regarding enclosure, cover the following locations:
Fire Hose Dry Wet Down- Yard Automatic Manually Automatic Underground Terrace Pump Near At the
Extin- Reel Riser Riser Comer Hydrant Sprinkler Operated Detection Static Water Tank Underground Terrace
gusher (see System Electric and Alarm Storage Static Water Tank Level
Note 6) Fire Alarm System Tank Storage Tank with
Systems (Fire Pump) Minimum
1) Less than 15 m in
height
i) Up to 15 rooms R NR NR NR NR NR R NR NR NR 5 000 NR NR
(see Note 2) (see Note 3)
35
Table 23 Continued
36
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
c) Dormitories (A-3)
Apartment
Houses (A-4)
d) Hotels (A-5)
1) Less than 15 m
in height
37
Table 23 Continued
38
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
3) 15 m and above but not R R NR R NR R R R R 100 000 20 000 (see Note 20) NR
exceeding 24 m in height (see Note 11)
39
Table 23 Continued
40
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
iii) Built up area more R R NR R R R R NR R 100 000 10 000 (see Note 20) 450
than 500 m2 (see Note 7)
b) Moderate Hazard
(G-2) (see Note 14)
iii) Built up area more R R NR R R R R R R 75 000 20 000 (see Note 20) 900
than 500 m2 and (see Note 7)
up to 1 000 m2
iv) Built up area more R R NR R R R R R R 100 000 20 000 (see Note 20) 900
than 1 000 m2 (see Note 7)
iii) Built up area more R R NR R NR NR R NR R 25 000 10 000 (see Note 19) 450
than 150 m2 and
up to 300 m2
iv) Built up area more R R NR R NR R R R R 50 000 20 000 (see Note 19) 900
than 300 m2 and
up to 500 m2
v) Built up area more R R NR R R R R R R 100 000 20 000 (see Note 20) 900
than 500 m2 (see Note 7)
2) Below 15 m in height
and covered area more
than 250 m2
41
Table 23 Concluded
42
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
iii) More than ground R R NR R NR R R NR R 100 000 10 000 (see Note 20) 450
plus one floor
1) Up to 15 m in height
ii) More than one floor R R NR R R R R R R Minimum 50 000 (see Note 18) 900
building but not 4 h fire
exceeding 15 m fighting
requirements
R Required
NR Not Required
NOTES
1 Buildings above15 m in height not to be permitted for occupancies A-1 and A-2.
2 Required to be installed in basement if area of basement exceeds 200 m2.
3 Required to be provided if basement area exceeds 200 m2.
4 Additional value given in parenthesis shall be added if basement area exceeds 200 m2.
5 Required to be provided for buildings with more than two storeys (Ground + One).
6 As per the requirement of local authority Dry Riser may be used in hilly areas, industrial areas or as required.
7 Required to be provided for buildings with height above 15 m.
8 To be installed in basement. If basement provided is used for car parking and area thereof exceeds 750 m2 then the sprinklers shall be fed water from both underground static water storage tank and
terrace tank.
9 Required to be provided for buildings with more than one storey.
10 To be installed in entire building.
11 To be installed in all floors at appropriate places and in consultation with local fire authorities.
12 Buildings above 30 m in height not to be permitted for Group B, Group C, Group D and Group F occupancies.
13 All underground shopping areas should be fully air-conditioned.
14 The requirements given in this table for Group G Industrial Buildings are for small scale industry units. For other industries the requirements will have to be worked out on the basis of relevant Indian
Standards and also in consultation with the local fire authorities.
15 Buildings above 18 m in height not to be permitted for G-1 and G-2 occupancies.
16 Buildings above 15 m in height not to be permitted for G-3 occupancies.
17 Buildings above 15 m in height not to be permitted for Group H and Group J occupancies.
-do- 4. Assembly buildings (D) 15 m or above but not exceeding 30 m and total floor
area not exceeding 500 m2/floor (above 30 m, not to
be permitted)
-do- 10. All buildings classified under 1 (v) above Above 30 m and area exceeding 500 m2
-do- 14. All storage buildings (H) Above 10 m but not exceeding 15 m
-do- 15. All Hazardous buildings (J) Above 10 m but not exceeding 15 m
1)
Buildings above 15 m in height not permitted in case of high hazard industrial buildings.
selective sprinklering is adopted, there is a real danger of a fire cooled transformers as applicable in accordance
starting on one of the lower unsprinklered floors gathering with C-1.16 and good practice [4(23)].
momentum, spreading upwards from floor to floor through the
unsprinklered floor and reaching the first sprinklered floor as 5.1.9 Fixed Foam Installation
a fully developed fire. In such an event, the sprinklers can be
rendered useless or ineffective. Fixed foam generating system shall be provided for
2 Use of false ceiling voids for storage or as return air plenums protection of oil storage area for boilers with its
should be discouraged. ancillary storage of furnace oils in basement. Fixed
3 For areas having very high ceiling height and other special foam installations can be low, medium or high
function areas, where automatic sprinklers cannot be provided,
appropriate sprinklers/provisions shall be provided in expansion types, which can cover fire risks in oil
consultation with local fire authorities. storage areas generally. High expansion foams are used
for cable tunnels and other confined areas.
5.1.8 Automatic High Velocity Water Spray or
Emulsifying System 5.1.10 Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishing System
Automatic high velocity water spray or emulsifying Fixed carbon dioxide fire extinguishing installation
system shall be provided for protection of indoor oil- shall be provided in accordance with good practice
6.3.3.10 All buildings or sections of buildings in penal 6.4.4.1 Every place of assembly, every tier or balcony,
and mental institutions used for manufacturing, storage and every individual room used as a place of assembly
or office purposes shall have exits in accordance with shall have exits sufficient to provide for the total
the provisions of the Code for those occupancies. capacity thereof as determined in accordance with 4.
Door width for assembly buildings shall not be less
6.3.4 Additional Precautions than 2 000 mm.
6.3.4.1 No combustible material of any kind shall be a) Every place of assembly of sub-division D-1
PLATFORM
1. Internal Hydrants Two at each platform. The hydrants at two platforms may be
staggered for maximum coverage.
2. Manual call box One on each platform preferably near emergency plunger.
3. Portable Extinguishers One set of Water CO2 and CO2 type on each platform at a central
area.
CONCOURSE
1. Internal Hydrants Two at each concourse. When concourse is in two parts then each
part should have at least one hydrant.
2. Additional first-aid reel point Additional first-aid reel point for every additional 1 000 m2, if the
area is more than 2 000 m2. Similarly, if the concourse is in two parts
then additional first aid reel point for every additional
1 000 m2, if the area of the part is more than 1 000 m2.
3. Manual call box Two at each concourse. When concourse is in two parts then each
part should have at least one.
4. Portable Extinguishers Two sets at each concourse. When concourse is in two parts then
each part should have at least one set.
5. Detectors Above false ceiling where depth of false ceiling is greater than
800 mm. Required in commercial areas also.
EQUIPMENT ROOM AREAS
1. Internal Hydrants/first-aid reel The requirement shall get covered with platform/concourse.
point Additional first-aid reel point may be provided, if required.
2. Manual call box One at a central place. When the equipment rooms are in two/more
parts then each part should have one.
3. Portable Extinguishers One set for each room.
4. Detectors Above and below false ceiling and below floor giving due
consideration to depth of false ceiling/floor.
5. Response Indicator To be provided.
6. Panel gas flooding To be provided for HT panel, main LT panel, main LT distribution
board and essential power panels and other such major panels.
EXTERNAL AREAS
1. Hydrants One at ground floor at each entry to station near staircase/DG room.
2. Two/four way fire brigade inlet To be provided for each riser/sprinkler riser.
3. Fire brigade Draw-off connection To be provided on water tank.
6.5 Business Buildings (Group E) 6.5.2.1 Occupancy sub-division E-1 (except office
6.5.1 In addition to the general requirements specified buildings)
in 3.4 for type of construction and occupancy group
and the exit requirements given in 4, the requirements Details of Fire Detection/Extinguishing
given in 6.5.2 to 6.5.5 shall be complied with. Occupancy System
6.5.2 Fire Detection/Extinguishing System E-1 Automatic fire alarm system {good
The requirements for occupancy sub-divisions as practice [4(17)] and [4(18)], and
specified in Table 23 and Annex C (for High Rise Table 23}.
Buildings) shall apply.
ANNEX C
(Clauses 3.4.11.1, 4.18.2, 5.1.8, 5.2.2, 6.1.2, 6.2.3, 6.3.2, 6.4.3, 6.5.2, 6.6.2,
6.7.2, 6.8.2 and 6.9.2)
FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS
15 m IN HEIGHT OR ABOVE
C-0 GENERAL on top of the shaft and separated from the shaft
by the floor of the room.
In addition to the general provisions given in this Part,
c) Landing doors in lift enclosures shall have a
the Authority may insist on suitable protection
fire resistance of not less than 1 h.
measures (see C-1 to C-11) in a building 15 m in height
or above. d) The number of lifts in one row for a lift bank
shall not exceed 4 and the total number of
C-1 CONSTRUCTION lifts in the bank (of two rows) shall not exceed
8. A wall of 2 h fire rating shall separate
C-1.1 All materials of constructions in load bearing
individual shafts in a bank.
elements, stairways and corridors and facades shall be
non-combustible. e) Lift car door shall have a fire resistance rating
of half an hour.
C-1.2 The interior finish materials shall not have a flame f) Collapsible gates shall not be permitted for
spreadability rating exceeding Class 1 (see 3.4.15.2). lifts and shall have solid doors with fire
C-1.3 The internal walls or staircase shall be of brick resistance of at least 1 h.
or reinforced concrete with a minimum of 2 h fire g) If the lift shaft and lobby is in the core of the
rating. building, a positive pressure between 25 and
30 Pa shall be maintained in the lobby and a
C-1.4 The staircase shall be ventilated to the
positive pressure of 50 Pa shall be maintained
atmosphere at each landing and a vent at the top; the
in the lift shaft. The mechanism for
vent openings shall be of 0.5 m2 in the external wall
pressurization shall act automatically with the
and the top. If the staircase cannot be ventilated,
fire alarm; it shall be possible to operate this
because of location or other reasons, a positive pressure
mechanically also.
50 Pa shall be maintained inside. The mechanism for
pressurizing the staircase shall operate automatically h) Exit from the lift lobby, if located in the
with the fire alarm. The roof of the shaft shall be 1 m core of the building, shall be through a self-
above the surrounding roof. Glazing or glass bricks if closing smoke stop door of half an hour fire
used in staircase, shall have fire resistance rating of resistance.
minimum 2 h. j) Lifts shall not normally communicate with
the basement; if, however, lifts are in
C-1.5 Lifts communication, the lift lobby of the
basements shall be pressurized as in (g), with
General requirements of lifts shall be as follows:
self-closing door as in (h).
a) Walls of lift enclosures shall have a fire rating k) Grounding switch(es), at ground floor level,
of 2 h; lifts shafts shall have a vent at the top shall be provided on all the lifts to enable the
of area not less than 0.2 m2. fire service to ground the lifts.
b) Lift motor room shall be located preferably m) Telephone or other communication facilities
C-1.6.6 If cut outs are provided from basements to C-1.12 Electrical services shall conform to the
the upper floors or to the atmospheres, all sides cut following:
out openings in the basements shall be protected by a) The electric distribution cables/wiring shall
sprinkler head at close spacing so as to form a water be laid in a separate duct. The duct shall be
curtain in the event of a fire. sealed at every floor with non-combustible
C-1.7 Openable windows on external walls shall be materials having the same fire resistance as
fitted with such locks that can be opened by a firemans that of the duct. Low and medium voltage
axe. wiring running in shaft and in false ceiling
shall run in separate conduits;
C-1.8 All floors shall be compartmented with area not b) Water mains, telephone lines, intercom lines,
exceeding 750 m2 by a separation wall with 2 h fire gaspipes or any other service line shall not be
rating, for floors with sprinklers the area may be laid in the duct for electrical cables; use of
increased by 50 percent. In long building, the fire bus ducts/solid rising mains instead of cables
separation walls shall be at distances not exceeding is preferred;
40 m. For departmental stores, shopping centres and
c) Separate circuits for fire fighting pumps, lifts,
basements, the area may be reduced to 500 m2 for
staircases and corridor lighting and blowers
compartmentation. Where this is not possible, the
for pressurizing system shall be provided
spacings of the sprinklers shall be suitably reduced.
directly from the main switch gear panel and
When reducing the spacing of sprinklers, care should
these circuits shall be laid in separate conduit
be taken to prevent spray from one sprinkler impeding
pipes, so that fire in one circuit will not affect
the performance of an adjascent sprinkler head.
the others. Such circuits shall be protected at
C-1.8.1 It is essential to make provisions for drainage origin by an automatic circuit breaker with
of any such water on all floors to prevent or minimize its no-volt coil removed. Master switches
water damage of the contents. The drain pipes should controlling essential service circuits shall be
be provided on the external wall for drainage of water clearly labelled;
ANNEX D
(Clauses 6.7.3.3 (a) and 6.7.5)
FIRE PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS FOR VENTING IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
D-2.5 Size, Spacing and Disposition of Vents D-2.6.2 They shall be of sheet metal or any other
substantial non-combustible material strong enough to
D-2.5.1 Vents shall be correctly sited to ensure their withstand damage by heat or impact.
functional efficiency. Ideally, they shall be sited at the
highest point in each area to be covered. D-2.6.3 They shall be reasonably gas-tight, although
small openings for passage of pipes, conduits, etc, shall
D-2.5.2 They shall, as far as possible, be located be permitted.
immediately above the risk to be protected so as to
allow free and speedy removal of smoke and other D-2.6.4 They shall extend down from the roof/ceiling
combustion products in the event of fire. for a minimum depth of 2.2 m. Around specific
hazards, the depth shall be 4 m. Where roof/ceiling
D-2.5.3 The minimum dimension for an effective vent height exceeds 15 m they shall extend down to within
opening shall be not less than 1.25 m in any direction. 3 m of the floor. For pitched sawtoothed roofs, they
D-2.5.4 The spacing of the individual vents shall be shall extend down to truss level dividing the roof into
based on the principle that more number of well compartments.
distributed smaller vents are more effective than less D-2.6.5 In moderate hazard occupancies, the distance
number of badly located larger vents. between the screens/curtain boards shall not exceed
D-2.5.5 The maximum spacing between vents for the 75 m and the curtained areas shall be limited to a
three occupancy classifications shall be as follows: maximum of 4 500 m2.
a) Low heat release content 45 m between D-2.6.6 In high hazard occupancies, the distance
centres between screens shall not exceed 30 m and the
b) Moderate heat release content 36 to 37 m curtained area shall be limited to 750 m2.
between centres D-2.6.7 The curtained roof area shall be so arranged
c) High heat release content 22.5 to 30 m that they effectively aid in the venting of smoke and
between centres, depending on the severity hot gases through the automatic vents provided in each
of fire potential. area.
D-2.5.6 Vents shall be placed in a sheltered situation D-2.6.8 In sprinklered buildings, the screens shall
where advantage can be taken of the prevailing wind. preferably be so located as to coincide with the
The design of the vent shall be such as to produce a individual sprinkler system areas.
suction effect. A wind blowing across a flat roof or
one with a pitch be 40 produces a negative pressure, D-3 EXPLOSION RELIEF VENTS
that is, it tends to draw gases out of the building and so D-3.1 Industrial premises where combustible dusts can
aids venting of hot gases. Wind blowing across a roof accumulate or where flammable gases, vapours or mists
of pitch greater than 40 will draw gases out on the in explosive concentrations may be present are
leeward side, but oppose outward flow on the constantly exposed to explosion hazards. Pressures
windward side of the roof. developed by such explosions may be of the order of
D-2.5.7 Low level inlets, with total area not less than 7 105 Pa and ordinary buildings will not be able to
the total area of vents, shall be provided to permit withstand the shock of such pressures. Hence, such
outside air to be drawn in to aid automatic venting. buildings require explosion relief vents for preventing
These inlets, which may be in the form of doors, structural damage.
windows or such other openings, shall be designed for
manual operation when desired. D-3.2 Basic Principle/Considerations
D-3.2.1 Most ordinary building walls will not
D-2.6 Roof Screens or Curtain Boards withstand a sustained internal pressure as great as
D-2.6.1 Industrial buildings with large areas and 6.9 10 3 Pa. Hence, explosion relief vents for
having no sub-division/separating walls limiting the buildings must be designed to operate at pressures well
area of individual compartments to 750 m2 or less, shall below those at which the building walls will fail.
be provided with roof screens or curtain boards. D-3.2.2 There is a rise in pressure during an explosion
These screens which extend from the roof downwards within an enclosure even with open, unobstructed
at specific intervals not only prevent lateral spread of vents, and any delay in opening the venting devices
heat and smoke in the event of fire below, but increases that pressure.
D-3.2.8 The maximum explosion pressure in a vented D-3.3.7 Movable sash shall be of the top or bottom
structure decreases as the size of the vent increases, but hinged or protected type. These shall be equipped with
is independent of the rupturing pressure of a diaphragm. a latch or friction device to prevent accidental opening
due to wind action or intrusion. Such latches or locks
D-3.2.9 The most effective vent for the release of shall be well maintained.
explosion pressures is an unobstructed vent opening.
D-3.3.8 Fixed sash shall be set in place with very light
D-3.2.10 Pressure required to rupture diaphragms of wall anchorages, or, if right, shall be securely fitted
the same area and material directly varies with the and glazed with plastic panes in plastic putty.
thickness of the material.
D-3.3.9 Where the process is such that the whole of a
D-3.2.11 The slower the rate of pressure rise, the more building or a room may be desirable to arrange for a
easily can the explosion be vented. lightly constructed wall or roof to collapse and thus
D-3.2.12 The degree of venting required is directly avert the worst effects of an explosion.
proportional to the degree of explosion hazard.
D-3.4 Design, Size and Disposition of Vents
D-3.2.13 Experience has shown that most explosions
D-3.4.1 The required area of explosion vents shall
of dusts, vapours and gases do not involve a large part
ordinarily depend on the expected maximum intensity
of the total volume of the enclosure, and frequently
of an explosion in the occupancy, the strength of the
occur near the upper or lower limits of the explosive
structure, the type of vent closure and other factors.
range. Consequently, such explosions are relatively
weak compared with the optimum. D-3.4.2 Venting shall be planned in such a manner as
Any person discovering fire, heat or smoke shall E-4.2 Floor Numbering Signs
immediately report such condition to the fire brigade,
A sign shall be posted and maintained within each
unless he has personal knowledge that such a report
stair enclosure on every floor, indicating the number
has been made. No person shall make, issue, post or
of the floor, in accordance with the requirements
maintain any regulation or order, written or verbal, that
given below.
would require any person to take any unnecessary
delaying action prior to reporting such condition to The numerals shall be of bold type and at least 75 mm
the fire brigade. high. The numerals and background shall be in
contrasting colours. The sign shall be securely attached
E-3 DRILLS to the stair side of the door.
E-3.1 Fire drills shall be conducted, in accordance with
E-4.3 Stair and Elevator Identification Signs
the Fire Safety Plan, at least once every three months
for existing buildings during the first two years. Each stairway and each elevator back shall be identified
Thereafter, fire drills shall be conducted at least once by an alphabetical letter. A sign indicating the letter of
every six months. identification shall be posted and maintained at each
elevator landing and on the side of the stairway door
E-3.2 All occupants of the building shall participate
from which egress is to be made, in accordance with
in the fire drill. However, occupants of the building,
the requirements given below:
other than building service employees, are not required
to leave the floor or use the exits during the drill. The lettering on the sign shall be at least 75 mm high,
of bold type and of contrasting colour from the
E-3.3 A written record of such drills shall be kept on
background. Such signs shall be securely attached.
the premises for a three years period and shall be readily
available for fire brigade inspection. E-4.4 Stair Re-entry Signs
E-4 SIGNS AND PLANS A sign shall be posted and maintained on each floor
within each stairway and on the occupancy side of the
E-4.1 Signs at Lift Landings stairway where required, indicating whether re-entry
A sign shall be posted and maintained in a conspicuous is provided into the building and the floor where
place on every floor at or near the lift landing in such re-entry is provided, in accordance with the
accordance with the requirements, indicating that in requirements given below:
case of fire, occupants shall use the stairs unless The lettering and numerals of the signs shall be at least
instructed otherwise. The sign shall contain a diagram 12.5 mm high of bold type. The lettering and
showing the location of the stairways except that such background shall be of contrasting colours and the
diagram may be omitted, provided signs containing signs shall be securely attached approximately 1.5 m
such diagram are posted in conspicuous places on the above the floor level.
respective floor.
E-4.5 Fire command station shall be provided with
A sign shall read IN CASE OF FIRE, USE STAIRS floor plan of the building and other pertinent
UNLESS INSTRUCTED OTHERWISE. The lettering information relative to the service equipment of the
shall be at least 12.5 mm block letters in red and white building.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards 3844 : 1989 Code of practice for installation
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The and maintenance of internal fire
standards listed may be used by the Authority as a guide hydrants and hose reels on
in conformance with the requirements of the referred premises (first revision)
clauses in the Code. (7) 3614 Specification for fire check
IS No. Title (Part 1) : 1966 doors: Part 1 Plate, metal covered
and rolling type
(1) 3808 : 1979 Method of test for non-
combustibility of building (8) 12458 : 1988 Method of test for fire resistance
materials (first revision) test for fire stops
(2) 8757 : 1999 Glossary of terms associated (9) 1646 : 1997 Code of practice for fire safety
with fire safety (first revision) of buildings (general) :
Electrical installations (second
7673 : 1975 Glossary of terms for fire revision)
fighting equipment
2309 : 1989 Code of practice for protection of
(3) 15394 : 2003 Fire safety in petroleum refinery building and allied structures
and fertilizer plants Code of against lighting (second revision)
practice
(10) ................ Specification for fire dampers
(4) 8758 : 1993 Recommendations for fire for air conditioning ducts (under
precautionary measures in the preparation)
construction of temporary
(11) 11360 : 1985 Specification for smoke
structures and PANDALS (first
detectors for use in automatic
revision) electrical fire alarm system
(5) 3809 : 1979 Fire resistance test of structure (12) 659 : 1964 Safety code for air-conditioning
(first revision)
(13) 1649 : 1962 Code of practice for design and
1641 : 1988 Code of practice for fire safety construction of flues and
of buildings (general): General chimneys for domestic heating
principles of fire grading and appliances (first revision)
classification (first revision)
1642 : 1989 Code of practice for safety of
15103 : 2002 Specification for fire resistant buildings (general): Details of
steel construction (first revision)
(6) 9668 : 1990 Code of practice for provision (14) 12777 : 1989 Fire safety-flame-spread of
and maintenance of water products Method for
supplies and fire fighting classification
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 MATERIALS 5
3 NEW OR ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS 5
4 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION 5
5 USED MATERIALS 5
6 STORAGE OF MATERIALS 5
7 METHODS OF TEST 5
LIST OF STANDARDS 6
FOREWORD
Ensuring the quality and effectiveness of building materials used in the construction and their storage are as
important as the other phases of building activity like planning, designing and constructing the building itself.
This Part, therefore, lists Indian Standards for materials used in building construction. The methods of tests, to
ensure the requirements demanded of the materials in the various situations, are also included.
Historically choice of building materials was determined by what was locally available, appropriateness to geo-
climatic conditions and affordability of users. In recent past, different initiatives have been taken in the areas of
research and development, standardization, and development and promotion of innovative materials. A review
of the recent trends indicates that the growth in the area of building materials covers emerging trends and latest
developments in the use of wastes, mineral admixtures in cement and concrete, substitutes to conventional timber,
composite materials and recycling of wastes, at the same time ensuring desired response of materials to fire, long
term performance and durability. In addition to these developments, the future decade may witness development
of specific materials which may be structured and designed to meet needs to specially developed construction
technologies, such as, for disaster prone areas or aggressive climatic and industrial situations.
In this context, the following factors have become important for facilitating application and adoption in practice,
of the materials:
a) Utilization of industrial, mining, mineral and agricultural wastes; plantation timbers; and renewable
natural fibres and residues for production of building materials.
b) Impact of production of building materials on the consumption levels of natural resources.
c) Change in energy demand in production of building materials due to development of efficient
manufacturing processes.
d) Impact of production and usage of materials and disposal thereof on the environment.
To encourage use of appropriate materials, it may be desirable to have, to the extent possible, performance
oriented approach for specifications rather than prescriptive approach. The approach has been already adopted in
some cases in development of standards, wherever found possible.
Indian Standards cover most of the requirements for materials in use. However, there may be a gap between
development of new materials and techniques of application and formulation of standards. It, therefore, becomes
necessary for a Building Code to be flexible to recognize building materials other than those for which Indian
Standards are available. This Part, therefore, since its first version, duly takes care of this aspect and explicitly
provides for use of new or alternate building materials, provided it is proved by authentic tests that the new or
alternative material is effective and suitable for the purpose intended. However, it is worthwhile that more and
more emphasis is given to the satisfaction of performance requirements expected of a building material, so that
a wide range of such new or alternate materials can be evaluated and used, if found appropriate.
As already emphasized, quality of material is quite important for their appropriate usage, whether it is a material
for which an Indian Standard is available or a new or alternative material as defined in 3 of this Part. Third party
certification schemes available in the country for quality assurance of above materials can be used with advantage
to ensure the appropriateness of these materials.
This Part of the Code was first published in 1970 and subsequently revised in 1983. The first revision of this Part
incorporated an updated version of the list of Indian Standards given at the end of this Part of the Code. The
present draft revision of this Part, while basically retaining the structure of 1983 version of the Code, explicitly
takes care of the following:
a) While continuing to emphasize on conformity of building materials to available Indian Standards, the
building regulating authority also recognizes use of building materials conforming to other specifications
and test methods (see 3), in case Indian Standards are not available for particular materials.
Following are the Indian Standards for various building 29. WIRE ROPES AND WIRE PRODUCTS
materials and components, to be complied with in
fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. 1. ALUMINIUM AND OTHER LIGHT METALS
AND THEIR ALLOYS
In the following list, while enlisting the Indian
Standards, the materials have been categorized in such IS No. Title
a way as to make the list user friendly. In the process, 733 : 1983 Specification for wrought
if so required, some of the standards have been included aluminium and aluminium alloys,
even in more than one category of products, such as in bars, rods and sections for general
the category based on composition as well as on end engineering purposes (third
application of the materials. The list has been arranged revision)
in alphabetical order of their principal category as given
737 : 1986 Specification for wrought
below:
aluminium and aluminium alloys,
1. ALUMINIUM AND OTHER LIGHT METALS sheet rods and strip for general
AND THEIR ALLOYS engineering purposes (third
2. BITUMEN AND TAR PRODUCTS revision)
3. BUILDERS HARDWARES 738 : 1994 Specification for wrought
4. BUILDING CHEMICALS aluminium and aluminium alloy
5. BUILDING LIME AND PRODUCTS drawn tube for general engineering
purposes (third revision)
6. BURNT CLAY PRODUCTS
740 : 1977 Specification for wrought
7. CEMENT AND CONCRETE (including concrete
aluminium and aluminium alloy
reinforcement)
rivet stock for general engineering
8. COMPOSITE MATRIX PRODUCTS (including purposes (second revision)
cement matrix products)
1254 : 1991 Specification for corrugated
9. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
aluminium sheet (third revision)
10. DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
1284 : 1975 Wrought aluminium alloy bolt and
11. ELECTRICAL WIRING, FITTINGS AND screw stock for general engineering
ACCESSORIES purposes (second revision)
12. FILLERS, STOPPERS AND PUTTIES 1285 : 2002 Specification for wrought
13. FLOOR COVERING, ROOFING AND OTHER aluminium and aluminium alloys,
FINISHES extruded round tube and hollow
14. GLASS sections for general engineering
15. GYPSUM BASED MATERIALS purposes (third revision)
16. LIGNOCELLULOSIC BUILDING MATERIALS 2479 : 1981 Colour code for the identification
(including timber, bamboo and products thereof) of aluminium and aluminium
17. PAINTS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS alloys for general engineering
18. POLYMERS, PLASTICS AND purposes (second revision)
GEOSYNTHETICS/GEOTEXTILES 2676 : 1981 Dimensions for wrought
19. SANITARY APPLIANCES AND WATER aluminium and aluminium alloy
FITTINGS sheet and strip
20. SOIL-BASED PRODUCTS 2677 : 1979 Dimensions for wrought
21. STEEL AND ITS ALLOYS aluminium and aluminium alloys,
plates and hot rolled sheets
22. STONES
14712 : 1999 Wrought aluminium and its alloys
23. STRUCTURAL SECTIONS
Chequered/tread sheets for
24. THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS general engineering purposes
25. THREADED FASTENERS AND RIVETS Specification
26. UNIT WEIGHTS OF BUILDING MATERIALS
27. WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING 2. BITUMEN AND TAR PRODUCTS
MATERIALS 73 : 1992 Specification for paving bitumen
28. WELDING ELECTRODES AND WIRES (second revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 DEAD LOAD 5
3 IMPOSED LOAD 5
4 WIND LOAD 14
5 SEISMIC LOAD 53
6 SNOW LOAD 75
7 SPECIAL LOADS 81
8 LOAD COMBINATIONS 86
9 MULTI-HAZARD RISK IN VARIOUS DISTRICTS OF INDIA 86
FOREWORD
This Section covers the various loads, forces and effects which are to be taken into account for structural design
of buildings. The various loads that are covered under this Section are dead load, imposed load, wind load,
seismic load, snow load, special loads and load combinations.
This Code was first published in 1970 and revised in 1983. Subsequently the first revision of this Section was
modified in 1987 through Amendment No. 2 to the 1983 version of the Code to bring this Section in line with the
latest revised loading code. Now, in view of the revision of the important Indian Standard on earthquake resistant
design of structure, that is IS 1893, a need to revise this Part was felt. This revision has therefore been prepared
to take into account this revised standard, IS 1893 (Part 1) : 2002 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of
structures: Part 1 General provision and buildings (fifth revision) and also incorporate latest information on
additional loads, forces and effects as also the details regarding multi-hazard risk in various districts of India.
The significant changes incorporated in this revision include:
a) The seismic zone map is revised with only four zones, instead of five. Erstwhile Zone I has been merged
in to Zone II. Hence, Zone I does not appear in the new zoning; only Zones II, III, IV and V do.
b) The values of seismic zone factors have been changed; these now reflect more realistic values of effective
peak ground acceleration considering Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCE) and service life of
structure in each seismic zone.
c) Response spectra are now specified for three types of founding strata, namely rock and hard soil, medium
soil and soft soil.
d) Empirical expression for estimating the fundamental natural period Ta of multi-storeyed buildings with
regular moment resisting frames has been revised.
e) This revision adopts the procedure of first calculating the actual force that may be experienced by the
structure during the probable maximum earthquake, if it were to remain elastic. Then, the concept of
response reduction due to ductile deformation or frictional energy dissipation in the cracks is brought in
this Section explicitly, by introducing the response reduction factor in place of the earlier performance
factor.
f) A lower bound is specified for the design base shear of buildings, based on empirical estimate of the
fundamental natural period Ta.
g) The soil-foundation system factor is dropped. Instead, a clause has been introduced to restrict the use of
foundations vulnerable to differential settlements in severe seismic zones.
h) Torsional eccentricity values have been revised upwards in view of serious damages observed in buildings
with irregular plans.
j) Modal combination rule in dynamic analysis of buildings has been revised.
k) Other clauses have been redrafted where necessary for more effective implementation.
m) A new clause on multi-hazard risk in various districts of India and a list of districts identified as multi-
hazard prone districts have been included.
n) Latest amendments issued to IS 875 have been incorporated.
p) A clause on vibration in buildings has been introduced for general guidance.
q) Reference has been included to the Indian Standards on landslide control and design of retaining walls,
formulated after the last revision of the Section.
The information contained in this Section is largely based on the following Indian Standards:
IS 1893 (Part 1) : 2002 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures: Part 1 General provisions
and buildings (fifth revision)
Sl Type of Roof Imposed Load Measured on Plan Area Minimum Imposed Load
No. Measured on Plan
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Flat, sloping or curved roof with
slopes up to and including 10
degrees
a) Access provided 1.5 kN/m2 3.75 kN uniformly distributed over
any span of one metre width of the
roof slab and 9 kN uniformly
distributed over the span of any beam
or truss or wall
b) Access not provided except for 0.75 kN/m2 1.9 kN uniformly distributed over any
maintenance span of one metre width of the roof
slab and 4.5 kN uniformly distributed
over the span of any beam or truss or
wall
ii) Sloping roof with slope greater than For roof membrane sheets or purlins 0.75 kN/m2 Subject to a minimum of 0.4 kN/m2
10 less 0.02 kN/m2 for every degree increase in slope
over 10
iii) Curved roof with slope of line (0.75 0.52 2) kN/m2 Subject to a minimum of 0.4 kN/m2
obtained by joining springing point where
to the crown with the horizontal,
greater than 10 = h/l
h = height of the highest point of the structure
measured from its springing; and
l = chord width of the roof if singly curved and
shorter of the two sides if doubly curved.
Alternatively, where structural analysis can be
carried out for curved roofs of all slopes in a simple
manner applying the laws of statistics, the curved
roofs shall be divided into minimum 6 equal
segments and for each segment imposed load shall
be calculated appropriate to the slope of the chord
of each segment as given in (i) and (ii).
NOTES
1 The loads given above do not include loads due to snow, rain, dust collection, etc. The roof shall be designed for imposed loads
given above or for snow/rain load, whichever is greater.
2 For special types of roofs with highly permeable and absorbent material, the contingency of roof material increasing in weight due
to absorption of moisture shall be provided for.
3.4.1.1 Roofs of buildings used for promenade or 3.4.3 Loads Due to Rain
incidental to assembly purposes shall be designed for
the appropriate imposed floor loads given in Table 1 On surfaces whose positioning, shape and drainage
for the occupancy. system are, such as, to make accumulation of rain water
possible, loads due to such accumulation of water and
3.4.2 Concentrated Load on Roof Coverings the imposed loads for the roof as given in Table 2 shall
To provide for loads incidental to maintenance, unless be considered separately and the more critical of the
otherwise specified by the Engineer-in-Charge, all roof two shall be adopted in the design.
coverings (other than glass or transparent sheets made
3.4.4 Dust Loads
of fibre glass) shall be capable of carrying an incidental
load of 0.90 kN concentrated on an area of 12.5 cm2 so In areas prone to settlement of dust on roofs (example,
placed as to produce maximum stresses in the covering. steel plants, cement plants), provision for dust load
The intensity of the concentrated load may be reduced equivalent to probable thickness of accumulation of
with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge, where it dust may be made.
is ensured that the roof coverings would not be traversed
3.4.5 Loads on Members Supporting Roof Coverings
without suitable aids. In any case, the roof coverings
shall be capable of carrying the loads in accordance Every member of the supporting structure which is
with 3.4.1, 3.4.3, 3.4.4 and wind load. directly supporting the roof covering(s) shall be
3.5 Imposed Horizontal Loads on Parapets and NOTE In the case of guard parapets on a floor of multi-
storeyed car park or crash barriers provided in certain buildings
Balustrades
for fire escape, the value of imposed horizontal load (together
3.5.1 Parapets, Parapet Walls and Balustrades with impact load) may be determined.
Parapets, parapet walls and balustrades, together with which induce impact or vibration, as far as possible,
the members which give them structural support, shall calculations shall be made for increase in the imposed
be designed for the minimum loads given in Table 3. load due to impact or vibration. In the absence of
These are expressed as horizontal forces acting at sufficient data for such calculation, the increase in the
handrail or coping level. These loads shall be imposed loads shall be as follows:
considered to act vertically also but not simultaneously
with the horizontal forces. The values given in Table 3 Structures Impact Allowance,
are minimum values and where values for actual Percent,
loadings are available, they shall be used instead. Min
3.5.2 Grandstands and the Like a) For frames supporting lifts 100
and hoists
Grandstands, stadia, assembly platforms, reviewing b) For foundations, footings 40
stands and the like shall be designed to resist a and piers supporting lifts and
horizontal force applied to seats of 0.35 kN per linear hoisting apparatus
metre along the line of seats and 0.15 kN per linear
c) For supporting structures and 20
metre perpendicular to the line of the seats. These
foundations for light
loadings need not be applied simultaneously. Platforms
machinery, shaft or motor
without seats shall be designed to resist a minimum units
horizontal force of 0.25 kN/m2 of plan area.
d) For supporting structures and 50
3.6 Loading Effects Due to Impact and Vibration foundations for reciprocating
machinery or power units
The crane loads to be considered under imposed loads
shall include the vertical loads, eccentricity effects 3.6.2 Concentrated Imposed Loads with Impact and
induced by vertical loads, impact factors, lateral and Vibration
longitudinal braking forces acting across and along the
crane rails respectively. Concentrated imposed loads with impact and vibration
which may be due to installed machinery shall be
3.6.1 Impact Allowance for Lifts, Hoists and Machinery considered and provided for in the design. The impact
factor shall not be less than 20 percent which is the
The imposed loads specified in 3.3.1 shall be assumed
amount allowable for light machinery.
to include adequate allowance for ordinary impact
conditions. However, for structures carrying loads 3.6.2.1 Provision shall also be made for carrying any
3.6.3.1 Overloading factors in crane supporting a) Two adjacent cranes working in tandem with
structures full load and with overloading according to
3.6.3.1; and
For all ladle cranes and charging cranes where there
is possibility of overloading from production b) For long span gantries, where more than one
considerations, an overloading factor of 10 percent of crane can come in the span, the girder shall
the maximum wheel loading shall be taken. be designed for one crane fully loaded with
overloading according to 3.6.3.1 plus as many
3.6.4 Crane Load Combinations loaded cranes as can be accommodated on
In the absence of any specific indications, the load the span but without taking into account
combinations shall be as indicated below. overloading according to 3.6.3 (a) to give the
maximum effect.
3.6.4.1 Vertical loads
3.6.4.2 Lateral surge
In an aisle, where more than one crane is in operation
or has provision for more than one crane in future, the For design of columns and foundations, supporting
following load combinations shall be taken for vertical crane girders, the following crane combinations shall
loading: be considered:
4 WIND LOAD 4.1.3 The wind speeds recorded at any locality are
extremely variable and, in addition to steady wind at
4.1 General any time, there are effects of gusts which may last for
This clause gives wind forces and their effects (static a few seconds. These gusts cause increase in air
and dynamic) that should be taken into account when pressure but their effect on the stability of the building
designing buildings, structures and components may not be so important; often, gusts affect only part
thereof. of the building and the increased local pressures may
be more than balanced by a momentary reduction in
NOTES
the pressure elsewhere. Because of the inertia of the
1 It is believed that ultimately wind load estimation will be building, short period gusts may not cause any
made by taking into account the random variation of wind
speed with time, but available theoretical methods have not appreciable increase in stress in the main components
matured sufficiently at present for use in the Section. For of the building, although the walls, roof sheeting and
this reason, equivalent static load estimation which implies a individual cladding units (glass panels) and their
steady wind speed, which has proved to be satisfactory for supporting members, such as purlins, sheeting rails and
normal, short and heavy structures, is given in 4.5 and 4.6.
However, a beginning has been made to take account of the glazing bars may be more seriously affected. Gusts
random nature of the wind speed by requiring that the along- can also be extremely important for the design of
wind or drag load on structures which are prone to wind structures with high slenderness ratios.
induced oscillations, be also determined by the gust factor
method (see 4.8) and the more severe of the two estimates be 4.1.4 The liability of a building to high wind pressures
taken for design. depends not only upon the geographical location and
A large majority of structures met within practice do not, proximity of other obstructions to air flow but also upon
however, suffer wind induced oscillations and generally do
not require to be examined for the dynamic effects of wind
the characteristics of the structure itself.
including use of gust factor method. Nevertheless, there are
4.1.5 The effect of wind on the structure as a whole is
various types of structures or their components, such as some
tall buildings, etc, which require investigation of wind induced determined by the combined action of external and
oscillations. In identifying and analyzing such structures 4.6 internal pressures acting upon it. In all cases, the
shall be followed. calculated wind loads act normal to the surface to which
2 In the case of tall structures with unsymmetrical geometry, they apply.
the designs may have to be checked for torsional effects due
to wind pressure. 4.1.6 Buildings shall also be designed with due
4.1.1 Wind is air in motion relative to the surface of attention to the effects of wind on the comfort of people
the earth. The primary cause of wind is traced to earths inside and outside the buildings.
rotation and differences in terrestrial radiation. The 4.1.7 The stability calculations of the building as a
radiation effects are primarily responsible for whole shall be done considering the combined effect,
convection either upwards or downwards. The wind as well as separate effects of imposed loads and wind
NOTE When the force is in the direction of the incident 4.3.1.15 Return period
wind, the non-dimensional coefficient will be called as drag
Return period is the number of years, the reciprocal of
coefficient. When the force is perpendicular to the direction
of incident wind the non-dimensional coefficient will be called which gives the probability of extreme wind exceeding
as lift coefficient. a given wind speed in any one year.
N
E
P
A
L BHUTAN
BANGLADESH
I N D I A MAYANMAR
B AY
OF
BENGAL
ARABIAN
SEA
LAKS
HAD
WEE
P SE
A
ANDAMAN SEA
SRI
LANKA
I N D I A N O C E A N
Table 4 Risk Coefficients for Different Classes of Structures in Different Wind Speed Zones
(Clause 4.4.3.1)
Class of Structure Mean Probable k1 Factor for Basic Wind Speed
Design Life of (m/s) of
Structure in Years
33 39 44 47 50 55
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
All general buildings and structures 50 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Temporary sheds, structures such as those 5 0.82 0.76 0.73 0.71 0.70 0.67
used during construction operations (for
example, formwork and falsework),
structures during construction stages and
boundary walls
Buildings and structures presenting a low 25 0.94 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.89
degree of hazard to life and property in the
event of failure, such as isolated towers in
wooded areas, farm buildings, other than
residential buildings
Important buildings and structures, such as 100 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.07 1.08 1.08
hospitals, communications buildings/towers
and power plant structures
1
A B ln{ ln(1 PN )}
X N, PN N
k1 = =
X 50, 0.63 A + 4B
where
N = mean probable design life of structure in years;
PN = risk level in N consecutive years (probability that the design wind speed is exceeded at least once in N successive
years), nominal value = 0.63;
XN, PN = extreme wind speed for given values of N and PN; and
X50, 0.63 = extreme wind speed for N = 50 years and PN = 0.63
A and B are coefficients having the following values for different basic wind speed zones:
Zone A B
33 m/s 83.2 9.2
39 m/s 84.2 14.0
44 m/s 88.0 18.0
47 m/s 88.0 20.5
50 m/s 88.8 22.8
55 m/s 90.8 27.3
NOTE The factor k1 is based on statistical concepts which take account of the degree of reliability required and period of time
in years during which there will be exposure to wind, that is, life of the structure. Whatever wind speed is adopted for design
purposes, there is always a probability (however small) that it may be exceeded in a storm of exceptional violence; the greater
the period of years over which there will be exposure to wind, the greater is the probability. Higher return periods ranging from
100 to 1 000 years (implying lower risk level) in association with greater periods of exposure may have to be selected for
exceptionally important structures, such as nuclear power reactors and satellite communication towers. Equation given above
may be used in such cases to estimate k 1 factors for different periods of exposure and chosen probability of exceedence (risk
level). The probability level of 0.63 is normally considered sufficient for design of buildings and structures against wind effects
and the values of k1 corresponding to this risk level are given in Table 4.
design of a structure may vary depending on Category 1 Exposed open terrain with few
the direction of wind under consideration. or no obstructions and in which the average
Wherever sufficient meteorological height of any objects surrounding the structure
information is available about the nature of is less than 1.5 m.
wind direction, the orientation of any building NOTE This category includes open sea-coasts and
or structure may be suitably planned. flat treeless plains.
Terrian, in which a specific structure stands, Category 2 Open terrain with well scattered
shall be assessed as being one of the following obstructions having heights generally between
terrain categories: 1.5 and 10 m.
Table 5 k2 Factors to Obtain Design Wind Speed Variation with Height in Different
Terrains for Different Classes of Building Structures
[Clause 4.4.3.2 (b)]
Height Terrain Terrain Terrain Terrain
(m) Category 1 Class Category 2 Class Category 3 Class Category 4 Class
A B C A B C A B C A B C
10 1.05 1.03 0.99 1.00 0.98 0.93 0.91 0.88 0.82 0.80 0.76 0.67
15 1.09 1.07 1.03 1.05 1.02 0.97 0.97 0.94 0.87 0.80 0.76 0.67
20 1.12 1.10 1.06 1.07 1.05 1.00 1.01 0.98 0.91 0.80 0.76 0.67
30 1.15 1.13 1.09 1.12 1.10 1.04 1.06 1.03 0.96 0.97 0.93 0.83
50 1.20 1.18 1.14 1.17 1.15 1.10 1.12 1.09 1.02 1.10 1.05 0.95
100 1.26 1.24 1.20 1.24 1.22 1.17 1.20 1.17 1.10 1.20 1.15 1.05
150 1.30 1.28 1.24 1.28 1.25 1.21 1.24 1.21 1.15 1.24 1.20 1.10
200 1.32 1.30 1.26 1.30 1.28 1.24 1.27 1.24 1.18 1.27 1.22 1.13
250 1.34 1.32 1.28 1.32 1.31 1.26 1.29 1.26 1.20 1.28 1.24 1.16
300 1.35 1.34 1.30 1.34 1.32 1.28 1.31 1.28 1.22 1.30 1.26 1.17
350 1.37 1.35 1.31 1.36 1.34 1.29 1.32 1.30 1.24 1.31 1.27 1.19
400 1.38 1.36 1.32 1.37 1.35 1.30 1.34 1.31 1.25 1.32 1.28 1.20
450 1.39 1.37 1.33 1.38 1.36 1.31 1.35 1.32 1.26 1.33 1.29 1.21
500 1.40 1.38 1.34 1.39 1.37 1.32 1.36 1.33 1.28 1.34 1.30 1.22
NOTES
1 See 4.4.3.2 (b) for definitions of Class A, Class B and Class C structures.
2 Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation, if desired. It is permissible to assume constant wind speed between two
heights for simplicity.
l 3
1< 0 +0.7 0.2 0.5 0.5
w 2 0.8
90 0.5 0.5 +0.7 0.2
h 1
w 2
3 l
< <4
2 w 0 +0.7 0.25 0.6 0.6
1.0
90 0.5 0.5 +0.7 0.1
l 3
1<
w 2
0 +0.7 0.25 0.6 0.6
1.1
90 0.6 0.6 +0.7 0.25
1 h 3
<
2 w 2
3 l
< <4
2 w 0 +0.7 0.3 0.7 0.7
1.1
90 0.5 0.5 +0.7 0.1
3 h
<1 < 6
2 w
NOTE h is the height of eaves or parapet, l is the greater horizontal dimension of a building and w is the lesser horizontal
dimension of a building.
Building Height Ratio Roof Wind Angle Wind Angle Local Coefficients
o o
Angle 0 90
degrees EF GH EG FH
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
0 0.8 0.4 0.8 0.4 2.0 2.0 2.0
5 0.9 0.4 0.8 0.4 1.4 1.2 1.2 1.0
10 1.2 0.4 0.8 0.6 1.4 1.4 1.2
h 1
20 0.4 0.4 0.7 0.6 1.0 1.2
w 2
30 0 0.4 0.7 0.6 0.8 1.1
45 +0.3 0.5 0.7 0.6 1.1
60 +0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 1.1
NOTES
1 h is the height to caves or parapet, w is the lesser horizontal dimension of a building.
2 Where no local coefficients are given the overall coefficients apply.
y = h or 0.15 w,
whichever is the lesser
OVERALL COEFFICIENTS
Roof Angle Wind Angle
o o
0 45 90o 135 o 180 o
Degree H L H L H&L H&L H L H L
Applies to length w/2 Applies to
from wind ward end remainder
5 1.0 0.5 1.0 0.9 1.0 0.5 0.9 1.0 0.5 1.0
10 1.0 0.5 1.0 0.8 1.0 0.5 0.8 1.0 0.4 1.0
15 0.9 0.5 1.0 0.7 1.0 0.5 0.6 1.0 0.3 1.0
20 0.8 0.5 1.0 0.6 0.9 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.2 1.0
25 0.7 0.5 1.0 0.6 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.9 0.1 0.9
30 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.6 0.8 0.5 0.1 0.6 0 0.6
NOTE h is the height to eaves at lower side, l is greater horizontal dimension of a building and w is the lesser horizontal
dimension of a building.
Roof Angle Solidity Ratio Maximum (Largest +ve) and Minimum (Largest ve)
Pressure Coefficients
Overall Local coefficients
coefficients
Degree
NOTE For monopitch canopies the centre of pressure should be taken to act at 0.3 w from the windward edge.
Roof Angle Solidity Ratio Maximum (Largest +ve) and Minimum (Largest ve) Pressure Coefficients
Overall Local coefficients
coefficients
Degree
NOTE Each slope of a duopitch canopy should be able to withstand forces using both the maximum and the minimum coefficients,
and the whole canopy should be able to support forces using one slope at the maximum coefficient with the other slope at the
minimum coefficient. For duopitch canopies the centre of pressure should be taken to act at the centre of each slope.
= 30
= 0 45, D, D, E, E full length
= 90, D, D, E, E part length b
PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, Cp
C C' G G'
o
0 0.6 1.0 0.5 0.9
45o 0.1 0.3 0.6 0.3
90o 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.8 0.3 0.4
= 30
Effects of trains or stored materials:
= 0 45, or 135 180, D, D, E, E full length
= 90, D, D, E, E part length b
PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, Cp
= 10
= 0 45, D, D, E, E full length
= 90, D, D, E, E part length b
PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, Cp
C C' G G'
o
0 1.0 0.3 0.5 0.2
o
45 0.3 0.1 0.3 0.1
o
90 0.3 0.0 0.3 0.0 0.4 0.8 0.3 0.6
= 10
Effects of trains or stored materials:
= 0 45, 135 180, D, D, E, E full length
= 90, D, D, E, E part length b
PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, Cp
C C' G G'
o
0 1.3 0.8 0.6 0.7
o
45 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.3
90o 0.3 0.0 0.3 0.0
o
180 0.4 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.4 0.8 0.3 0.6
Roof slope = 10
Effects of trains or stored materials:
Roof slope = 10 = 0 45, or 135 180, D, D, E, E full length
= 0 45, D, D, E, E full length = 90, D, D, E, E part length b
= 90, D, D, E, E part length b
PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, Cp
PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, Cp
D D' E E'
D D' E E' 0 0.7 0.8 0.6 0.6
0o 0.3 0.7 0.2 0.9 45o 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.2
45 0.0 0.2 0.1 0.3 90o 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
90 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 180o 0.4 1.2 0.6 0.3
0o For f: Cp top = 0.4; Cp bottom = 1.5. 0o For f: Cp top = 1.1; Cp bottom = 0.9.
0 90o
o
Tangentially acting friction: R90 = 0.1 pd.bd. 0 180o Tangentially acting friction: R90 = 0.1 pd.bd.
o
H h
>/ 0.6 and > 0.6
l l
Values of C, C1 and C2
H/l C C1 C2
0.1 0.8 +0.1 0.8
0.2 0.9 +0.3 0.7
0.3 1.0 +0.4 0.3
0.4 1.1 +0.6 +0.4
0.5 1.2 +0.7 +0.7
NOTE When the wind is blowing normal to the gable ends, Cpe may be taken as equal to 0.7 for the full width of the roof over a
length of l/2 from the gable ends and 0.5 for the remaining portion.
Table 19 External Pressure Coefficients (Cpe) for Pitched Roofs of Multi-span Buildings
(All Spans Equal) with h > w
[Clause 4.5.2.2 (f)]
Roof Angle Wind Angle First First Intermediate Span Other Intermediate End Span Local Coefficient
Span Span
degrees degrees
a b c d m n x z
o
Frictional drag: when wind angle = 0 horizontal forces due to frictional drag are allowed for in the above values;
o
when wind angle = 90 allow for frictional drag in accordance with 4.5.3.1.
NOTE Evidence on these buildings is fragmentary and any departures from the cases given should be investigated separately.
Wind Angle First Span First Intermediate Other Intermediate End Span Local
Span Span Coefficient
degrees
a b c d m n x z
Frictional drag: when wind angle = 0o horizontal forces due to frictional drag are allowed for in the above values;
when wind angle = 90o allow for frictional drag in accordance with 4.5.3.1.
NOTE Evidence on these buildings is fragmentary and any departures from the cases given should be
investigated separately.
a, b and c d
H/D Roof (Z/H) 1 Roof Bottom
0.5 0.65 1.00 0.75 0.8
1.0 1.00 1.25 0.75 0.7
2.0 1.00 1.50 0.75 0.6
Total force acting on the roof of the structure, P = 0.785 D2 (Cpi Cpe)pd.
The resultant of P lies eccentrically, e = 0.1 D.
a) Combined Roofs
Values of Cpe
b1 > b2 b1 < b2
Portion a b a&b
Cpe -0.6 +0.7 See Table for
Combined Roofs
J K L M
o
0 +0.9 0.5 +0.9 0.5
45o +0.8 0.6 +0.4 0.4
135o 1.1 +0.6 1.0 +0.4
180o 0.3 +0.9 0.3 +0.9
60o Mw Cp of K = 1.0
60o Mw Cp of J= +1.0
A B C D E F G H
o
0 1.0 +0.9 1.0 +0.9 0.7 +0.9 +0.7 +0.9
45o 1.0 +0.7 0.7 +0.4 0.5 +0.8 0.5 +0.3
o
135 0.4 1.1 0.7 1.0 0.9 1.1 0.9 1.0
180o 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.3
o
45 MR Cp (top) = 2.0
45o MR Cp (bottom) = +1.0
Two design conditions shall be examined, one through the slits round the closed windows and doors
and through chimneys, ventilators and through the joints
with an internal pressure coefficient of
between roof coverings, the total open area being less
+0.2 and another with an internal pressure than 5 percent of the area of the walls having the
coefficient of 0.2. openings.
The internal pressure coefficient is algebraically b) Building with medium and large openings
added to the external pressure coefficient and Buildings with medium and large openings
the analysis, which indicates greater distress may also exhibit either positive or negative
of the member, shall be adopted. In most internal pressure depending upon the direction
situations, a simple inspection of the sign of of wind. Buildings with medium openings
the external pressure will at once indicate the between about 5 to 20 percent of wall area
proper sign of the internal pressure coefficient shall be examined for an internal pressure
to be taken for design. coefficient of +0.5 and later with an internal
NOTE The terms normal permeability relates to the pressure coefficient of 0.5, and the members
flow of air commonly afforded by the claddings not shall be adopted. Buildings with large
only through the open windows and doors, but also openings, that is, openings larger than
8
All surfaces <6
Ellipse b/d = 2
b/d = 1/2
All values 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7
r/b = 1/6
b/d = 2
All values 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.9
r/b = 1/12
8
<6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.6
All surfaces
b/d = 2
r/b = 1/4
r/a = 1/3
r/a = 1/12 All values 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.6
r/a = 1/48 All values 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.6
r/b = 1/4
r/b = 1/12 All values 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.4
r/b = 1/48 All values 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3
8
<8 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3
r/b = 1/4
12 sided
polygon
Octagon All values 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.4
Hexagon All values 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.5
NOTE Structures that, because of their size and the design wind velocity, are in the supercritical flow regime may need further
calculation to ensure that the greatest loads do not occur at some wind speed below the maximum when the flow will be sub-
critical.
The coefficients are for buildings without projections, except where otherwise shown. In this table V b is used as an indication of the
airflow regime.
5 The wake shed from an upstream body may intensify b) Flutter Flutter is unstable oscillatory motion
motions in the direction of the wind, and may also effect of a structure due to coupling between
crosswind motions. aerodynamic force and the elastic deformation of
the structure. Perhaps the most common form is
6 The designer must be aware of the following three
the oscillatory motion due to combined bending
forms of wind induced motion which are characterized
and torsion. Although oscillatory motions in each
by increasing amplitude of oscillation with increase of
degree of freedom may be dampled, instability
wind speed.
can set in due to energy transfer from one mode
a) Galloping Galloping is transverse oscillations of oscillation to another, and the structure is seen
of some structures due to the development of to execute sustained or divergent oscillations with
aerodynamic forces which are in phase with the a type of motion which is a combination of the
motion. It is characterized by the progressively individual modes of motion. Such energy transfer
increasing amplitude of transverse vibration with takes place when the natural frequencies of the
increase of wind speed. The cross-sections which modes, taken individually, are close to each other
are particularly prone to this type of excitation (ratio being typically less than 2.0). Flutter can
include the following: set in at wind speeds much less than those required
i) All structures with non-circular cross- for exciting the individual modes of motion. Long
sections, such as triangular, square, polygons, span suspension bridge decks or any member of a
as well as angles, crosses and T-sections. structure with large values of d/t (where d is the
ii) Twisted cables and cables with ice depth of a structure or structural member parallel
encrustations. to wind stream and t is the least lateral dimension
5.1.9 Ductility
where Ductility of a structure, or its members, is the capacity
x = mean deflection at the position where the to undergo large inelastic deformations without
acceleration is required. significant loss of strength or stiffness.
Floor response spectra is the response spectra for a Modal mass of a structure subjected to horizontal or
time history motion of a floor. This floor motion time vertical, as the case may be, ground motion is a part of
history is obtained by an analysis of multi-storey the total seismic mass of the structure that is effective
building for appropriate material damping values in mode k of vibration. The modal mass for a given
subjected to a specified earthquake motion at the base mode has a unique value irrespective of scaling of the
of structure. mode shape.
The originating earthquake source of the elastic waves Modal participation factor of mode k of vibration is
inside the earth which cause shaking of ground due to the amount by which mode k contributes to the overall
earthquake. vibration of the structure under horizontal and vertical
earthquake ground motions. Since the amplitudes of
5.1.14 Importance Factor (I) 95 per cent mode shapes can be scaled arbitrarily, the
It is a factor used to obtain the design seismic force value of this factor depends on the scaling used for
depending on the functional use of the structure, mode shapes.
characterised by hazardous consequences of its failure, 5.1.22 Modes of Vibration (see 5.1.25)
its post-earthquake functional need, historic value, or
economic importance. 5.1.23 Mode Shape Coefficient (ik )
When a system is vibrating in normal mode k, at any
5.1.15 Intensity of Earthquake
particular instant of time, the amplitude of mass i
The intensity of an earthquake at a place is a measure expressed as a ratio of the amplitude of one of the
of the strength of shaking during the earthquake, and masses of the system, is known as mode shape
is indicated by a number according to the modified coefficient (ik ).
Mercalli Scale or M.S.K. scale of Seismic Intensities
5.1.24 Natural Period ( T)
(see Annex H).
Natural period of a structure is its time period of
5.1.16 Liquefaction
undamped free vibration.
Liquefaction is a state in saturated cohesionless soil
5.1.24.1 Fundamental natural period (T1 )
wherein the effective shear strength is reduced to
negligible value for all engineering purpose due to pore It is the first (longest) modal time period of vibration.
pressure caused by vibrations during an earthquake
5.1.24.2 Modal natural period (Tk )
when they approach the total confining pressure. In
this condition the soil tends to behave like a fluid mass. The modal natural period of mode k is the time period
of vibration in mode k.
5.1.17 Lithological Features
5.1.25 Normal Mode
The nature of the geological formation of the earths
crust above bed rock on the basis of such characteristics A system is said to be vibrating in a normal mode when
as colour, structure, mineralogical composition and all its masses attain maximum values of displacements
grain size. and rotations simultaneously, and pass through
equilibrium positions simultaneously.
5.1.18 Magnitude of Earthquake (Richters Magnitude)
5.1.26 Response Reduction Factor (R)
The magnitude of earthquake is a number, which is a
measure of energy released in an earthquake. It is It is the factor by which the actual base shear force,
defined as logarithm to the base 10 of the maximum that would be generated if the structure were to remain
trace amplitude, expressed in microns, which the elastic during its response to the design basis
NOTES
1 The allowable bearing pressure shall be determined in accordance with good practice [6-1(6)].
2 If any increase in bearing pressure has already been permitted for forces other than seismic forces, the total increase in allowable
bearing pressure when seismic force is also included shall not exceed the limits specified above.
3 Desirable minimum field values of N If soils of smaller N-values are met, compacting may be adopted to achieve these values or
deep pile foundations going to stronger strata should be used.
4 The values of N (corrected values) are at the founding level and the allowable bearing pressure shall be determined in accordance
with good practice [6-1(6)].
5 The piles should be designed for lateral loads neglecting lateral resistance of soil layers liable to liquefy.
6 Accepted standard [6-1(7)] and good practice [6-1(8)] may also be referred.
7 Isolated R.C.C. footing without tie beams, or unreinforced strip foundation shall not be permitted in soft soils with N<10.
1)
See accepted standard [6-1(7)].
2)
See good practice [6-1(8)].
B AY
ARABIAN
OF
SEA
BENGAL
LAK
SH
AD
WE
EP
SEA
ANDAMAN SEA
I N D I A N O C E A N
FIG. 12 RESPONSE SPECTRA FOR ROCK AND SOIL SIGHT FOR 5 PERCENT DAMPING
than buildings with irregular configurations. A building Table 34 Definition of Irregular Buildings
shall be considered as irregular for the purposes of this Vertical Irregularities (Fig. 14)
standard, if at least one of the conditions given (Clause 5.4.1)
in Tables 33 and 34 is applicable.
Sl No. Irregularity Type and Description
Table 33 Definitions of Irregular Buildings
i) a) Stiffness Irregularity Soft Storey
Plan Irregularities (Fig. 13)
A soft storey is one in which the lateral stiffness is less
(Clause 5.4.1) than 70 percent of that in the storey above or less than
80 percent of the average lateral stiffness of the three storeys
Sl No. Irregularity Type and Description above.
i) Torsion Irregularity b) Stiffness Irregularity Extreme Soft Storey
To be considered when floor diaphragms are rigid in their An extreme soft storey is one in which the lateral stiffness
own plan in relation to the vertical structural elements that is less than 60 percent of that in the storey above or less
resist the lateral forces. Torsional irregularity to be than 70 percent of the average stiffness of the three storeys
considered to exist when the maximum storey drift, above. For example, buildings on STILTS will fall under
computed with design eccentricity, at one end of the this category.
structures transverse to an axis is more than 1.2 times the ii) Mass Irregularity
average of the storey drifts at the two ends of the structure.
Mass irregularity shall be considered to exist where the
ii) Re-entrant Corners seismic weight of any storey is more than 200 percent of
Plan configurations of a structure and its lateral force resisting that of its adjacent storeys. The irregularity need not be
system contain re-entrant corners, where both projections of considered in case of roofs.
the structure beyond the re-entrant corner are greater than 15 iii) Vertical Geometric Irregularity
percent of its plan dimension in the given direction.
Vertical geometric irregularity shall be considered to exist
iii) Diaphragm Discontinuity where the horizontal dimension of the lateral force resisting
Diaphragms with abrupt discontinuities or variations in system in any storey is more than 150 percent of that in its
stiffness, including those having cut-out or open areas greater adjacent storey.
than 50 percent of the gross enclosed diaphragm area, or iv) In-Plane Discontinuity in Vertical Elements Resisting
changes in effective diaphragm stiffness of more than 50 Lateral Force
percent from one storey to the next. An in-plane offset of the lateral force resisting elements
iv) Out- of- Plane Offsets greater than the length of those elements.
Discontinuities in a lateral force resistance path, such as out- v) Discontinuity in Capacity Weak Strorey
of-plane offsets of vertical elements.
A weak storey is one in which the storey lateral strength is
v) Non-parallel Systems less than 80 percent of that in the storey above. The storey
The vertical elements resisting the lateral force are not lateral strength is the total strength of all seismic force
parallel to or symmetric about the major orthogonal axes or resisting elements sharing the storey shear in the considered
the lateral force resisting elements. direction.
14 B MASS IRREGULARITY
W
2
lateral force or seismic base shear (VB) along any j
hj
j =1
principal direction shall be determined by the following
expression: where
VB = AhW Qi = Design lateral force at floor i,
where Wi = Seismic weight of floor i,
Ah = Design horizontal acceleration spectrum hi = Height of floor i measured from base, and
value as per 5.3.4.2, using the fundamental n = Number of storeys in the building is the
natural period as per 5.4.6 in the considered number of levels at which the masses are
direction of vibration; and located.
W = Seismic weight of the building as 5.4.7.2 Distribution of horizontal design lateral force
per 5.4.4.2. to different lateral force resisting elements
5.4.6 Fundamental Natural Period
5.4.7.2.1 In case of buildings whose floors are capable
5.4.6.1 The approximate fundamental natural period of providing rigid horizontal diaphragm action, the total
W ( )
2
j = circular frequency in jth mode. i ik
i =1
Alternatively, the peak response quantities may be
combined as follows: c) Design lateral Force at Each Floor in Each
Mode The peak lateral force (Qik ) at floor
a) If the building does not have closely-spaced i in mode k is given by
modes, then the peak response quantity ()
due to all modes considered shall be obtained Qik = AK ik PK Wi
as
where
r
All horizontal projections like cornices and balconies 6.3 Snow Load in Roof(s)
shall be designed and checked for stability for five
6.3.1 The minimum design snow load on a roof area
times the design vertical coefficient specified in 5.3.4.5.
or any other area above ground which is subjected to
5.4.12.2.3 The increased design forces specified snow accumulation is obtained by multiplying the snow
in 5.4.11.2.1 and 5.4.12.2.2 are only for designing the load on ground, so by the shape coefficient , as
projecting parts and their connections with the main applicable to the particular roof area considered:
structures. For the design of the main structure, such
s = so
increase need not be considered.
where
5.4.12.3 Compound walls
s = Design snow load in Pa on plan area of roof,
Compound walls shall be designed for the design
horizontal coefficient Ah with Importance Factor I = 1.0 = Shape coefficient (see 5.4), and
specified in 6.4.2 so = Ground snow load in Pa (1 Pa=1 N/m2)
5.4.12.4 Connections between parts NOTE Ground snow load at any place depends on the
critical combination of the maximum depth of undisturbed
All parts of the building, except between the separation aggregate cumulative snow fall and its average density. In
sections, shall be tied together to act as integrated single due course the characteristic snow load on ground for
different regions will be included based on studies. Till such
unit. All connections between different parts, such as, time the users of this code are advised to contact either Snow
beams to columns and columns to their footings, should and Avalanches Study Establishment (Defence Research and
be made capable of transmitting a force, in all possible Development Organization), Manali (HP) or Indian
directions, of magnitude (Qi /Wi ) times but not less than Meteorological Department (IMD), Pune in the absence of
any specific information for any location.
0.05 times the weight of the smaller part or the total
of dead and imposed load reaction. Frictional 6.4 Shape Coefficients
resistance shall not be relied upon for fulfilling these
6.4.1 General Principles
requirements.
In perfectly calm weather, falling snow would cover
6 SNOW LOAD roofs and the ground with a uniform blanket of snow,
6.1 This clause deals with snow loads on roofs of and the design snow load could be considered as a
buildings. Roofs should be designed for the actual load uniformly distributed load. Truly uniform loading
due to snow or for the imposed loads specified in 3 conditions, however, are rare and have usually only
whichever is more severe. been observed in areas that are sheltered on all sides
by high trees, buildings, etc. In such a case, the shape
NOTE Mountainous regions in northern parts of India are
coefficient would be equal to unity.
subjected to snow fall.
In India, part of Jammu and Kashmir (Baramulah In most regions, snow-falls are accompanied or followed
District, Srinagar District, Anantnag District and Ladakh by winds. The winds will re-distribute the snow, and on
District); Punjab and Himachal Pradesh (Chamba, Kulu some roofs especially multilevel roofs, the accumulated
Kinnaur District, Mahasu District, Mandi District, drift load may reach a multiple of the ground load. Roofs
Sirmur District and Simla District); and Uttaranchal which are sheltered by other buildings, vegetation, etc,
(Dehra Dun District, Tehri Garhwal District, Almora may collect more snow load than the ground level. The
District and Nainital District) experience snow fall of phenomenon is of the same nature as that illustrated for
varying depths two or three times in a year. multi-level roofs in 6.4.2.4.
So far sufficient data are not available to determine
6.2 Notations
the shape coefficient on a statistical basis. Therefore,
(Dimensionless) Nominal values of the shape a nominal value is given. A representative sample of
coefficients, taking tin account snow draft, sliding roofs is shown in 6.4.2. However, in special cases such
snow, etc, with subscripts, if necessary. as strip loading, cleaning of the roof periodically by
li (metres) Horizontal dimension with numerical deliberate heating of the roof, etc, have to be treated
subscripts, if necessary. separately.
hi (metres) Vertical dimensions with numerical The distribution of snow in the direction parallel to
subscripts, if necessary. the caves is assumed to be uniform.
1)
For asymmetrical simple pitched roofs, each side of the roof shall be treated as one half of corresponding symmetrical roofs.
Restriction:
m2 < 2.3
m = 0 if b > 60
1)
A more extensive formula for w is described in Annex A. 1)
The load on the upper roof is calculated according to 6.4.2.1
2)
If l2 < l3, the coefficient is determined by interpolation between or 6.4.2.2.
1 and 2.
2 = kh
so
h = is in metres
so = is in kilopascals (kilonewtons per square metre)
k = 2 kN/m2
= 0.8
Restrictions:
0.8 w 2.0
5 m 1 15 m
6.4.3 Shape Coefficients in Areas Exposed to Wind within a distance from the building equal to
The shape coefficients given in 6.4.2 and Annex K ten times the height of the obstruction above
may be reduced by 15 percent, provided the designer the roof level; and
has demonstrated that the following conditions are b) The roof does not have any significant
fulfilled: projections, such as, parapet walls which may
prevent snow from being blow off the roof.
a) The building is located in an exposed location,
such as open level terrain with only scattered NOTE In some areas, winter climate may not be of
such a nature as to produce a significant reduction of
buildings, trees or other obstructions so that
roof loads from the snow load on the ground these areas
the roof is exposed to the winds on all sides area:
and is not likely to become shielded in the a) Winter calm valleys in the mountains where
future by obstructions higher than the roof sometimes layer after layer of snow accumulates
7.3.3 Safe-guarding of structures and structural being considered, unless otherwise specified in relevant
members against overturning and horizontal sliding codes of practice.
shall be verified. Imposed loads having favourable
Each element of the structure shall be designed for the
effect shall be disregarded for the purpose. Due
number of stress cycles of each magnitude to which it
consideration shall be given to the possibility of soil
is estimated that the element is liable to be subjected
being permanently or temporarily removed.
during the expected life of the structure. The number
7.4 Fatigue of cycles of each magnitude shall be estimated in the
light of available date regarding the probable frequency
7.4.1 General of occurrence of each type of loading.
Fatigue cracks are usually initiated at points of high NOTE Apart from the general observations made herein,
stress concentration. These stress concentrations may the section is unable to provide any precise guidance in
estimating the probabilistic behaviour and response of
be caused by or associated with holes (such as, bolt or structures of various types arising out of repetitive loading
rivet holes in steel structures), welds including stray approaching fatigue conditions in structural members, joints,
or fusions in steel structures, defects in materials, and materials, etc.
local and general changes in geometry of members.
The cracks usually propogate, if loading is continuous. 7.5 Structural Safety During Construction
Where there is such loading cycles, sudden changes 7.5.1 All loads required to be carried by the structures
of shape of a member or part of a member, especially or any part of it due to storage or positioning of
in regions of tensile stress and/or local secondary construction materials and erection equipment
bending, shall be avoided. Suitable steps shall be taken including all loads due to operation of such equipment,
to avoid critical vibrations due to wind and other shall be considered as erection loads. Proper provision
causes. shall be made, including temporary bracings, to take
care of all stresses due to erection loads. The
7.4.2 Where necessary, permissible stresses shall be conjunction with the temporary bracings shall be
reduced to allow for the effects of fatigue. Allowance capable of sustaining these erection loads, without
for fatigue shall be made for combinations of stresses exceeding the permissible stresses specified in
due to dead load and imposed load. Stresses due to respective codes of practice. Dead load, wind load and
wind and earthquakes may be ignored when fatigue is such parts of imposed load, as would be imposed on
7.6.1 Impact and Collisions With regard to safety, railings put up to protect
structures against collision due to road traffic, it should
7.6.1.1 General be shown that the railings are able to resist the impact
During an impact, the kinetic impact energy has to be as described in 7.6.1.2.
absorbed by the vehicle hitting the structure and by NOTE When a vehicle collides with safety railings, the
the structure itself. In an accurate analysis, the kinetic energy of the vehicle will be absorbed partly by the
probability of occurrence of an impact with a certain deformation of the railings and partly by the deformation of
energy object hitting the structure and the structure the vehicle. The part of the kinetic energy which the railings
itself at the actual place must be considered. Impact should be able to absorb without breaking down may be
determined on the basis of the assumed rigidity of the vehicle
energies for dropped object should be based on the during compression.
actual loading capacity and lifting height.
Common sources of impact are: 7.6.1.4 Crane impact load on buffer stop
A-1 The total imposed loads from different floor levels floor levels using 3.3.2.1. Floor loads do not exceed
(including the roof) combing on the central column of 5.0 kN/m2.
a multi-storeyed building (with mixed occupancy) is A-1.1 Applying reduction coefficients in accordance
shown in Fig. 20. Calculate the reduced imposed with 3.3.2.1, total reduced floor loads on the column
load for the design of column members at different at different levels is indicated along with Fig. 18.
FIG. 18
ANNEX C
(Clause 4.4.2)
BASIC WIND SPEED A 10 m HEIGHT FOR SOME IMPORTANT CITIES/TOWNS
ANNEX D
[Clause 4.4.3.2(d)]
CHANGES IN TERRAIN CATEGORIES
D-1 LOW TO HIGH NUMBER determined in relation to the less rough (more
distant) terrain.
D-1.1 In cases of transitions from a low category
number (corresponding to a low terrain roughness) to D-2 HIGH TO LOW NUMBER
a high category number (corresponding to a rougher
terrain), the velocity profile over the rougher terrain D-2.1 In cases of transitions from a more rough to a
shall be determined as follows: less rough terrain, the velocity profile shall be
determined as follows:
a) Below height hx, the velocities shall be
determined in relation to the rougher terrain; a) Above height h x, the velocities shall be
and determined in accordance with the rougher
b) Above height h x, the velocities shall be (more distant) terrain; and
ANNEX E
(Clause 4.4.3.3)
EFFECT OF A CLIFF OR ESCARPMENT ON THE EQUIVALENT HEIGHT
ABOVE GROUND (k3 FACTOR)
ANNEX F
[Clause 4.5.3.2 (b)]
WIND FORCE ON CIRCULAR SECTIONS
F-1 The wind force on any object is given by: pd = Design pressure of the wind.
ANNEX G
(Clause 5.0)
SYMBOLS
The symbols and notations given below apply to the bi ith Floor plan dimension of the building
provisions of this Code: perpendicular to the direction of force
c Index for the closely-spaced
Ah Design horizontal seismic coefficient
d Base dimension of the building, in metres,
Ak Design horizontal acceleration spectrum
in the direction in which the seismic force
value for mode k of vibration
is considered.
ANNEX H
(Clause 5.1.15)
COMPREHENSIVE INTENSITY SCALE (MSK 64)
The scale was discussed generally at the inter- Type A Building in field-stone, rural
governmental meeting convened by UNESCO in April structures, unburnt-brick houses,
1964. Though not finally approved the scale is more clay houses.
comprehensive and describes the intensity of Type B Ordinary brick buildings, buildings
earthquake more precisely. The main definitions used of large block and prefabricated
are followings: type, half timbered structures,
a) Type of Structures (Buildings) buildings in natural hewn stone.
ANNEX K
(Clauses 6.4.2.4 and 6.4.3)
SHAPE COEFFICIENTS FOR MULTILEVEL ROOFS
A more comprehensive formula for the shape coefficient for multilevel roofs
1 Restriction:
w = 1 + (m1l1 + m2l2 ) (l2 2h)
h kh
w
1 = 0.8 So
l3 = 2h where
(h and l being in metres) So is in kilopascals (kilonewtons per square metre)
ANNEX L
(Clause 7.7)
VIBRATIONS IN BUILDINGS
L-1 GENERAL L-2 SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE
VERIFICATION OF STRUCTURE SUSCEPTIBLE
In order to design the buildings safe against vibrations,
TO VIBRATIONS
it is necessary to identify the source and nature of
vibration. Vibrations may be included in the buildings L-2.1 While giving guidance for serviceability limit
due to various actions, such as: state verification of structure susceptible to vibrations,
a) human induced vibrations, for example, the here it is proposed to deal with the treatment of the
walking or running or a single person or a action side, the determination of the structural response
number of persons or dancing or motions in and the limits to be considered for the structural
stadia or concert halls; response to ensure that vibrations are not harmful or
do not lead to discomfort.
b) machine induced vibrations;
c) wind induced vibrations; L-2.2 Source of Vibrations
d) blast induced vibrations; Vibrations may be included by the following sources:
e) traffic load, for example, due to rail, fork-lift,
trucks, cars, or heavy vehicles; a) by the movement of persons as in pedestrian
bridges, floors where people walk, floors
f) airborne vibrations;
meant for sport or dancing activities, and
g) crane operations; and floors with fixed seating and spectator
h) other dynamic actions, such as, wave loads galleries;
or earthquake actions.
b) by working of machines as in machine
The dynamic response of buildings for the above foundations and supports, vibrations
mentioned causes of vibration of buildings may have transmitted through the ground, and pile
to be evaluated by adopting standard mathematical driving operations;
models and procedures. c) by wind blowing on buildings, towers,
chimneys and masts, guyed masts, pylons,
The severity or otherwise of these actions have to be
bridges, cantilevered roofs, airborne
assessed in terms of the limits set for dynamic response
vibrations;
(frequencies and amplitude of motion) of the buildings
related to (a) human comfort, (b) serviceability d) induced by traffic on rail or road bridges
requirements, such as, deflections and drifts and and car park structures and exhibition halls;
separation distances to avoid damage due to pounding, and
and (c) limits set on the frequencies and amplitude of e) by earthquakes.
motion for machines and other installations.
L-2.3 Modelling of Actions and Structures
In order to verify that the set limits are not exceeded,
For serviceability limit states, the modelling of these
the actions may be modelled in terms of force-time
actions and of the structure depends on how the
histories for which the structural responses may be
serviceability limits are formulated. The serviceability
determined as time histories of displacements or
limit states may refer to:
accelerations by using appropriate analytical/numerical
methods. a) human comfort,
ANNEX M
(Clause 9.2)
SUMMARY OF DISTRICTS HAVING SUBSTANTIAL MULTI-HAZARD RISK AREAS
E.Q. and Flood Cyclone and Flood E.Q. Cyclone and Flood E.Q. and Cyclone
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Andhra Adilabad, Karim Krishna, Nellore, East Godavari, Guntur,
Pradesh Nagar, Khammam Srikakulam, Prakasam, West Godavari
Vishakhapatnam,
Vizianagram
Assam All 22 districts listed No cyclone, but speed
in Table 38 could can be 50 m/s in districts
have M.S.K. IX or of Table 38 causing local
more with flooding damage except Dhubri
Bihar All 25 districts listed
in Table 38
Goa North and South
Goa
Gujarat Banaskantha, Danthe Ahmedabad, Bharuch, Amreli,
GS, Gandhinagar, Surat, Valsad Bhavnagar,
Kheda, Mahesana, Jamnagar, Rajkot,
Panchmahals, Junagad, Kachcha
Vadodara
Haryana All 8 districts listed
in Table 38
1)
Districts liable to cyclonic storm but No Storm Surge
2)
No cyclonic storm in Bihar
3)
No cyclonic storm in Haryana
4)
No cyclonic storm in Punjab
5)
No cyclonic storm in Uttar Pradesh
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards Code.
in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time In the following list, the number appearing in the first
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may column within parentheses indicates the number of the
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance reference in this Part/Section.
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 SITE INVESTIGATION 7
4 CLASSIFICATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF SOILS 11
5 MATERIALS 11
6 TYPE OF FOUNDATIONS 11
7 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 11
8 DRIVEN/BORED CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE PILES 22
9 DRIVEN PRECAST CONCRETE PILES 27
10 BORED PRECAST CONCRETE PILES 28
11 UNDER-REAMED PILES 29
12 TIMBER PILES 31
13 OTHER FOUNDATIONS 32
14 GROUND IMPROVEMENT 32
LIST OF STANDARDS 45
FOREWORD
This Section deals with the structural design aspects of foundations and mainly covers the design principles
involved in different types of foundations.
This Section was published in 1970, and subsequently revised in 1983. In the first revision design considerations
in respect of shallow foundation were modified, provisions regarding pier foundation were added and provisions
regarding draft foundation and pile foundation were revised and elaborated.
As a result of experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of the Code and feed back received as well
as revision of standards and preparation of new standards in the field of soils and foundations, a need to revise
this Section was felt. This revision has therefore been prepared to take into account these developments. The
significant changes incorporated in this revision include:
a) Design considerations in respect of shallow foundations have been modified.
b) Method for determining depth of fixity, lateral deflection and maximum moment have been modified.
c) Reference has been made to ground improvement techniques.
d) References to Indian Standards made in the text have been updated.
For detailed information regarding structural analysis and soil mechanics aspects of individual foundations,
reference should be made to standard textbooks and available literature.
The information contained in this Section is mainly based on the following Indian Standards:
IS No. Title
1080 : 1985 Code of practice for design and construction of shallow foundations in soils
(other than raft, ring and shell) (second revision)
1904 : 1986 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations in soils: General
requirements (third revision)
2911 (Part 1/Sec 1) : 1979 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations: Part 1 Concrete
piles, Section 1 Driven cast in-situ concrete piles (first revision)
2911 (Part 1/Sec 2) : 1979 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations: Part 1 Concrete
piles, Section 2 Bored cast in-situ piles (first revision)
2911 (Part 1/Sec 3) : 1979 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations: Part 1 Concrete
piles, Section 3 Driven precast concrete piles (first revision)
2911 (Part 1/Sec 4) : 1984 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations: Part 1 Concrete
piles, Section 4 Bored precast concrete piles
2911 (Part 3) : 1980 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations: Part 3 Under-
reamed piles (first revision)
2950 (Part 1) : 1981 Code of practice for design and construction of raft foundations: Part 1 Design
(second revision)
9456 : 1980 Code of practice for design and construction of conical hyperbolic paraboidal
types of shell foundations
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
2.2.8 Make-up Ground Refuse, excavated soil or 2.3.5 Bored Pile A pile formed with or without
rock deposited for the purpose of filling a depression or casing by excavating or boring a hole in the ground
raising a site above the natural surface level of the and subsequently filling it with plain or reinforced
ground. concrete.
2.2.9 Offset The projection of the lower step from 2.3.6 Bored Precast Pile A pile constructed in
the vertical face of the upper step. reinforced concrete in a casting yard and subsequently
lowered in the pre-bored holes and the space around
2.2.10 Permanent Load Loads which remain on grouted.
the structure for a period, or a number of periods, long
enough to cause time dependent deformation/ 2.3.7 Cut-off Level It is the level where the installed
settlement of the soil. pile is cut-off to connect the pile caps or beams or any
other structural components at that level.
2.2.11 Shallow Foundation A foundation whose
width is generally equal to or greater than its depth. 2.3.8 Driven Cast in-situ Pile A pile formed within
the ground by driving a casing of permanent or
NOTE These cover such types of foundations in which load
transference is primarily through shear resistance of the bearing
temporary type and subsequently filling in the hole so
strata (the frictional resistance of soil above bearing strata is not formed with plain or reinforced concrete. For
taken into consideration) and are laid normally to depth of 3 m. displacing the subsoil, the casing is installed with a
2.2.12 Spread Foundation A foundation which plug or a shoe at the bottom end. When the casing is
transmits the load to the ground through one or more left permanently, it is termed as cased pile and when
footings. the casing is taken out, it termed as uncased pile.
2.3.9 Driven Precast Pile A pile constructed in
2.3 Pile Foundation concrete (reinforced or prestressed) in a casting yard
2.3.1 Batter Pile (Raker Pile) The pile which is and subsequently driven in the ground when it has
installed at an angle to the vertical. attained sufficient strength.
2.3.2 Bearing Pile A pile formed in the ground for 2.3.10 Efficiency of a Pile Group It is the ratio of
transmitting the load of a structure to the soil by the the actual supporting value of a group of piles to the
resistance developed at its tip and/or along its surface. supporting value arrived at by multiplying the pile
It may be formed either vertically or at an inclination resistance of an isolated pile by their number in the
(Batter Pile) and may be required to take uplift pressure. group.
If the pile supports the load primarily by resistance 2.3.11 Factor of Safety It is the ratio of the ultimate
developed at the pile point or base, it is referred to as load capacity of a pile to the safe load of a pile.
i) Isolated spread footing or raft One and a half times the width (B) (see Fig. 1)
ii) Adjacent footings with clear spacing less One and a half times the length (L) of the footing (see Fig. 1)
than twice the width
iii) Adjacent rows of footings See Fig. 1
iv) Pile and well foundations To a depth of one and a half times the width of structure from the bearing (toe of
pile or bottom of well)
v) a) Road cuts Equal to the bottom width of the cut
b) Fill Two metres below ground level or equal to the height of the fill whichever is greater
Soil Disturbed Chunk samples 3.4.5.1 The following tests shall be carried out in
Auger samples (for accordance with good practice [6-2(4)].
example, in clay) a) Particle size distribution,
Shell samples (for
b) Density,
example, in sand)
Undisturbed Chunk samples c) Natural moisture content,
Tube samples d) Consistency limits,
Rock Disturbed Wash samples from e) Consolidation characteristics,
percussion of rotary f) Strength characteristics,
drilling g) Sulphate, chloride and pH content of soil and
Undisturbed Core barrel sampling
ground water, and
Type I Rock or Hard Soil: Type II Medium Type III Soft Soils:
Well graded gravel and sand Soils: All soils with N All soils other than SP1)
gravel mixtures with or without between 10 and 30, and with N < 10
clay binder, and clayey sands poorly graded sands or
poorly graded or sand clay gravelly sands with little
mixtures (GB, CW, SB, SW, and or no fines (SP1)) with
SC)1) having N2) above 30, where N > 15
N is the standard penetration
value
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
NOTES
1 The allowable bearing pressure shall be determined in accordance with good practice [6-2(7)] and [6-2(8)].
2 If any increase in bearing pressure has already been permitted for forces other than seismic forces, the total increase in allowable
bearing pressure when seismic force is also included shall not exceed the limits specified above.
3 Desirable minimum field values of N If soils of smaller N-values are met, compacting may be adopted to achieve these values or
deep pile foundations going to stronger strata should be used.
4 The values of N (corrected values) are at the founding level and the allowable bearing pressure shall be determined in accordance with
good practice [6-2(7)] and [6-2(8)].
5 15
III, IV and V
5 25 For values of depths between 5 m
and 10 m, linear interpolation is
II 5 15 recommended
(for important
structures only) 10 25
5 The piles should be designed for lateral loads neglecting lateral resistance of soil layers liable to liquefy.
6 Good practice [6-2(5)] and [6-2(9)] may also be referred.
7 Isolated RCC footing without tie beams, or unreinforced strip foundation shall not be permitted in soft soils with N < 10.
1)
See good practice [6-2(5)].
2)
See good practice [6-2(9)].
14
(Clause 7.1.3)
Maximum Differential Angular Maximum Differential Angular Maximum Differential Angular Maximum Differential Angular
settlement settlement distortion settlement settlement distortion settlement settlement distortion settlement settlement distortion
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
i) For steel structure 50 .003 3L 1/300 50 .003 3L 1/300 75 .003 3L 1/300 100 .003 3L 1/300
ii) For reinforced concrete 50 .001 5L 1/666 75 .001 5L 1/666 75 .002 1L 1/500 100 .002 0L 1/500
structures
iii) For multistoreyed
buildings
a) RC or steel framed 60 .002L 1/500 75 .002L 1/500 75 .002 5L 1/400 125 .003 3L 1/300
buildings with panel
walls
b) For load bearing
walls
1) L/H = 2* 60 .000 2L 1/5 000 60 .000 2L 1/5000 Not likely to be encountered
2) L/H = 7* 60 .000 4L 1/2 500 60 .000 4L 1/2500
iv) For water towers and 50 .001 5L 1/666 75 .001 5L 1/666 100 .002 5L 1/400 125 .002 5L 1/400
silos
NOTE The values given in the table may be taken only as a guide and the permissible total settlement/different settlement and tilt (angular distortion) in each case should be decided as per
requirements of the designer.
L denotes the length of deflected part of wall/raft or centre-to-centre distance between columns.
H denotes the height of wall from foundation footing.
* For intermediate ratios of L/H, the values can be interpolated.
7.3.1.9 Rigidity of foundations 7.3.3.1 For fairly small and uniform column spacing
and when the supporting soil is not too compressible a
Rigidity of the foundation tends to iron out uneven flat concrete slab having uniform thickness throughout
deformation and thereby modifies the contact pressure (a true mat) is most suitable (see Fig. 5A).
distribution. High order of rigidity is characterized
by long moments and relatively small, uniform 7.3.3.2 A slab may be thickened under heavy loaded
settlements. A rigid foundation may also generate high columns to provide adequate strength for shear and
secondary stresses in structural members. The effect negative moment. Pedestals may also be provided in
of rigidity shall be taken into account in analysis. such cases (see Fig. 5B).
7.3.1.10 Rigidity of the superstructure 7.3.3.3 A slab and beam type of raft is likely to be
more economical for large column spacing and unequal
Free response of the foundations to soil deformation column loads particularly when the supporting soil is
is restricted by the rigidity of the superstructure. In the very compressive (see Fig. 5C and 5D).
extreme case, a stiff structure may force a flexible
foundation to behave as rigid. This aspect shall be 7.3.3.4 For very heavy structures, provision of cellular
considered to evaluate the validity of the contact raft or rigid frames consisting of slabs and basement
pressure distribution. walls may be considered.
combined action of the superstructure and the In the case of uniform conditions when the variations in
foundation) with relative stiffness factor adjacent column loads and column spacings do not
K > 0.5 (for evaluation of K see Annex C); and exceed 20 percent of the higher value, the raft may be
b) The column spacing is less than 1.75/ (see divided into perpendicular strips of widths equal to the
Annex C). distance between midspans and each strip may be
analysed as an independent beam with known column
The raft is analysed as a whole in each of the two loads and known contact pressures. Such beams will
perpendicular directions. The contact pressure not normally satisfy statics due to shear transfer between
distribution is determined by the procedure outlined adjacent strips and design may be based on suitable
in Annex D. Further analysis is also based on statics. moment coefficients, or by moment distribution.
or wall for cap supporting a concrete column, pedestal be increased to wl , if the beams are not supported.
30
or wall; half way between the centre line and the edge For considering composite action, the minimum height
of the wall for caps under masonry walls and half-way of wall shall be 0.6 times the beam span. The brick
between the face of the column or pedestal and the strength should not be less than 3 N/mm 2 . For
edge of the gusseted base for caps under gusseted bases. concentrated and other loads which come directly over
In computing the external shear or the critical section, the beam, full bending moment should be considered.
8.3 For detailed information on driven/bored cast During hoisting the pile will be suspended at one point
in-situ concrete piles regarding control of piling, near the head and the bending moment will be the least
when it is pulled in a distance of 0.293 L, and the value
installation, defective pile and recording of data,
of bending moment will be:
reference may be made to good practice [6-2 (17)].
b) In the body of the pile not less than soils likely to damage the concrete at the tip of the
0.2 percent of the gross volume of the pile. pile. The shoe can be of steel or cast iron. In uniform
clay or sand, the shoe may be omitted.
The spacing shall be such as to permit free flow of
concrete around it. The transition between the close Where jetting is necessary for concrete piles, a jet tube
spacing of lateral reinforcement near the ends and the may be cast into the pile, the tube, being connected to
maximum spacing shall be gradually over a length of the pile shoe which is provided with jet holes.
3 times the least width of the pile. Generally, a central jet is inadvisable, as it is liable to
become choked. At least two jet holes will be necessary
9.3.3 The cover of concrete over all the reinforcement,
on opposite sides of the shoe, four holes giving best
including ties, should not be less than 40 mm. But
results. Alternatively, two or more jet pipes may be
where the piles are exposed to sea-water or water
attached to the sides of the pile.
having other corrosive content, the cover should be
nowhere less than 50 mm. Cover should be measured 9.4 For detailed information regarding casting and
clear from the main or longitudinal reinforcement. curing, storing and handling, control of pile driving
NOTE Where concrete of the pile is liable to be exposed to
and recording of data, reference may be made to good
the attack of sulphates and chlorides present in the ground water, practice [6-2(20)].
the piles may be coated with a suitable material.
10 BORED PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
9.3.4 Piles should be provided with flat or pointed co-
axial shoes if they are driven into or through ground, 10.1 Provisions of 9 except 9.3 shall generally apply.
such as rock, coarse gravel, clay with cobbles and other 10.2 For grouting the space around the pile, the precast
upon the feasibility of construction and design 11.2.1.6 Under-reamed piles with more than one bulb
requirements. In bored cast in-situ under-reamed piles are not advisable without ensuring their feasibility in
and under-reamed compaction piles, the bulb diameter strata needing stabilization of bore holes by drilling mud.
shall be normally 2.5 and 2 times the stem diameter The number of bulbs in the case of bored compaction
respectively. piles should also not exceed one in such strata.
11.2.1.4 For piles of up to 300 mm diameter, the 11.2.1.7 Under-reamed batter piles without lining in
spacing of the bulbs should not exceed 1.5 times the dry conditions, that is, strata with low water table can
diameter of the bulb. For piles of diameter greater than be constructed with batter not exceeding 15.
300 mm, spacing can be reduced to 1.25 times the bulb
11.2.2 Safe Load
diameter.
Safe load on a pile can be determined:
11.2.1.5 The topmost bulb should be at a minimum
depth of two times the bulb diameter. In expansive a) by calculating the ultimate load from soil
soils it should also be not less than 2.75 m below properties and applying a suitable factor of
ground level. The minimum clearance below the safety as given in Annex J;
underside of pile cap embedded in the ground and b) by load test on pile as good practice [6-2(18)];
the bulb should be a minimum of 1.5 times the bulb and
diameter. c) from safe load tables.
NOTE For timber piles, the load carried shall be determined f c = Reduced allowable stress,
by the Engineering News formula given below. Care shall be fc = Allowable stress,
taken that while counting the number of blows, the head of the
timber pile is not broomed or brushed and in case of interrupted H = Height of pier, and
driving counting shall be done after 300 mm of driving. D = Least lateral dimension.
For piles driven with drop hammer, NOTE The above provision shall not apply for piers where
the least lateral dimension is 1.8 m or greater.
160 WH
P= 13.1.1.3 Reinforced concrete piers
S + 25
For piles driven with single-acting steam hammer, When the height of the pier exceeds 18 times its least
dimension, the maximum load shall not exceed:
160 WH
P=
S + 2.5 H
where
P = P 1.5
36 D
P = Safe load on pile in kN, where
W = Weight of monkey in kN,
H = Free fall of monkey in m, and P' = Permissible load;
S = Penetration of pile in mm to be taken as the average P = Permissible load when calculated as axially
of the last three blows. loaded short column,
H = Height of the pier measured from top of bell,
12.2.4 For detailed information on timber piles
if any, to the level of cut-off of pier; and
regarding spacing, classification, control of pile
driving, storing and handling, reference may be made D = Least lateral dimension.
to good practice [6-2(23)]. 13.2 Design of foundation units not already covered
by this section, such as well foundations, machine
13 OTHER FOUNDATIONS
foundations, shell foundations, etc, may be designed
13.1 Pier Foundations and constructed in accordance with good practice
[6-2(24)].
13.1.1 Design Considerations
13.1.1.1 General 14 GROUND IMPROVEMENT
The design of concrete piers shall conform to the In poor and weak subsoils, the design of conventional
requirements for columns specified in Part 6 Structural shallow foundation for structures and equipment may
Design, Section 5 Concrete. If the bottom of the pier present problems with respect to both sizing of
is to be belled so as to increase its load carrying foundation as well as control of foundation settlements.
capacity, such bell shall be at least 300 mm thick at its A viable alternative in certain situations, developed
edge. The sides shall slope at an angle of not less than over the recent years is to improve the subsoil to an
60 with the horizontal. The least permissible extent such that the subsoil would develop an adequate
dimensions shall be 600 mm, irrespective of the pier bearing capacity and foundations constructed after
being circular, square or rectangular. Piers of smaller subsoil improvement would have resultant settlements
dimensions if permitted shall be designed as piles within acceptance limits. Selection of ground
(see 8 and 9). improvement techniques may be done in accordance
with good practice [6-2(25)].
13.1.1.2 Plain concrete piers
Use of suitable geo-synthetics/geo-textiles may be
The height of the pier shall not exceed 6 times the least made in an approved manner for ground improvement,
lateral dimension. When the height exceeds 6 times where applicable; see also good practice [6-2(26)].
B-1 GENERAL number of plate load tests carried out over the area,
the number and location of the tests depending upon
B-1.1 The modulus of subgrade reaction (k) as
the extent and importance of the structure.
applicable to the case of load through a plate of size
300 mm 300 mm or beams 300 mm wide on the soils B-3 LABORATORY DETERMINATION
is given in Table 6 for cohesionless soils and in Table 7
for cohesive soils. Unless more specific determination B-3.1 For stratified deposits or deposits with lenses
of k is done (see B-2 and B-3) these values may be of different materials, evaluation of k from plate load
used for design of raft foundation in cases where the test will be unrealistic and its determination shall be
depth of the soil affected by the width of the footing based on laboratory tests [see 6-2(4)].
may be considered isotropic and the extra-polation of B-3.2 In carrying out the test, the continuing cell
plate load test results is valid. pressure may be so selected as to be representative of
the depth of the average stress influence zone (about
B-2 FIELD DETERMINATION
0.5 B to B).
B-2.1 In cases where the depth of the soil affected by
B-3.3 The value of k shall be determined from the
the width of the footing may be considered as isotropic,
following relationship:
the value of k may be determined in accordance with
good practice [6-2(27)]. The test shall be carried out 1
Relative Density Standard Penetration Test Value (N) For Dry or Moist State For Submerged State
(Blows per 300 mm)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Loose < 10 15 000 9 000
Medium 10 to 30 15 000 to 47 000 9 000 to 29 000
Dense 30 and over 47 000 to 180 000 29 000 to 108 000
1)
The above values apply to a square plate 300 mm 300 mm or beams 300 mm wide.
1)
The values apply to a square plate 300 mm 300 mm. The above values are based on the assumption that the average loading
intensity does not exceed half the ultimate bearing capacity.
ANNEX C
(Clauses 7.3.4.1, 7.3.4.2 and B-4)
RIGIDITY OF SUPERSTRUCTURE AND FOUNDATION
E1 Ii b
2
( I u + I1)b
2
EI = + E2 b
I 1 + 2
( I b + I u + I f ) I
2
2H
where
E1 = Modulus of elasticity of the infilling
material (wall material) in kN/m2,
Ii = Moment of inertia of the infilling in m4,
b = Length or breadth of the structure in the
direction of bending in m,
H = Total height of the infilling in m,
E2 = Modulus of elasticity of the frame material
in kN/m2,
Ib = Moment of inertia of the beam in m4,
Iu
I u =
hu
I1
I1 =
h1
F IG. 8 DETERMINATION OF RIGIDITY OF STRUCTURE
Ib
I b =
I C-2 RELATIVE STIFFNESS FACTOR, K
I = Spacing of the columns in m, C-2.1 Whether a structure behaves as rigid or flexible
hu = Length of the upper column in m, depends on the relative stiffness of the structure and
hi = Length of the lower column in m, the foundation soil. This relation is expressed by the
relative stiffness factor K given below:
If
I f =
L EI
a) For the whole structure, K = 3
Iu = Moment of inertia of the upper column Es b a
in m4, 3
E d
12 Es b
Ii = Moment of inertia of the lower column b) For rectangular rafts, K =
in m4, and
ANNEX D
(Clause 7.3.4.1)
CALCULATION OF PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION BY CONVENTIONAL METHOD
E-1 CONTACT PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION E-1.2 The contact pressure for the full width of the
strip under an interior column load located at a point i
E-1.1 The distribution of contact pressure is assumed
can be determined as (see Fig. 9 A):
to be linear with the maximum value attained under
the columns and the minimum value at mid span. 5 Pi 48 M i
pi = + 2
l (l )
ANNEX F
(Clause 7.3.4.2)
FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION GENERAL CONDITION
F-1 CLOSED FORM SOLUTION OF ELASTIC where
PLATE THEORY
P = Column load,
F-1.1 For a flexible raft foundation with non-uniform r = Distance of the point under investigation
column spacing and load intensity, solution of the from column load along radius, and
differential equation governing the behaviour of plates
L = Radius of effective stiffness
on elastic foundation (Winkler Type) gives radial
moment (Mr ) tangential moment (Mt ) and deflection D 14
(w) at any point by the following expressions:
k
P ( )
Z 3 r
4 ( )
M r = Z 4 r (1 ) r L
L ( )
where
L k = Modulus of subgrade reaction for footing
of width B,
P ( )
Z 3 r
Mt =
4
Z4 ( )
r
L
+ (1 ) r L
( )
D = Flexural rigidity of the foundation,
L Et
2
2 P = ,
PL
w =
4D
. Z3 r
L( ) 12 (1 2 )
P
Q=
4L
Z 4 r
L ( )
( )
Z 4 r = function for shear (see Fig. 10).
L
F-1.4 When the edge of the raft is located within the
radius of influence, the following corrections are to be
applied. Calculate moments and shears perpendicular FIG. 10 FUNCTIONS FOR SHEAR M OMENT
to the edge of the raft within the radius of influence, AND D EFLECTION
ANNEX G
(Clauses 8.2.1.2 and 8.2.3.2)
LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY STATIC FORMULA
Y (in m ) = ...... for free head pile Fig. 14. The fixed end moment of the equivalent
3 EI cantilever is given by:
Q ( L1 + Lf )
3
r =1
I 1 n by multiplying the safe bearing capacity of
where rock with bearing area of the pile stem plus
the bearing provided by the bulb portion.
Ap = D2/4, where D is stem diameter in m;
NOTE To obtain safe load in compression and uplift
Aa = /4 (D 2u D 2) where D u is the under- from ultimate load capacity generally the factors of safety
reamed bulb diameter in m; will be 2.5 and 3 respectively.
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards (Part 3/Sec 1) : Determination of specific
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The 1980 gravity, Section 1 Fine grained
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time soils (first revision)
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may
(Part 3/Sec 2) : Determination of specific
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
1980 gravity, Section 2 Fine, medium
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
and coarse grained soils (first
Code. revision)
IS No. Title (Part 4) : 1985 Grain size analysis (second
(1) 1892 : 1979 Code of practice for subsurface revision)
investigation for foundation (Part 5) : 1985 Determination of liquid and
(first revision) plastic limits (second
2131 : 1981 Method of standard penetration revision)
test for soils (first revision) (Part 10) : 1991 Determination of unconfined
2132 : 1986 Code of practice for thin walled compressive strength (second
tube sampling of soils (second revision)
revision) (Part 13) : 1986 Direct shear test (second
revision)
4434 : 1978 Code of practice for in-situ
vane shear test for soils (first (Part 15) : 1986 Determination of consolidation
revision) properties (first revision)
4968 Method for sub-surface (Part 28) : 1974 Determination of dry density of
sounding for soils: soils in place, by the sand
replacement method (first
(Part 1) : 1976 Dynamic method using 50 mm
revision)
cone without bentonite slurry
(first revision) (Part 29) : 1975 Determination of dry density of
soils in place, by the core cutter
(Part 2) : 1976 Dynamic method using cone method (first revision)
and bentonite slurry (first
(Part 33) : 1971 Determination of the density
revision)
in-place by the ring and water
(Part 3) : 1976 Static cone penetration test replacement method
(first revision)
(Part 34) : 1972 Determination of density of
8763 : 1978 Guide for undisturbed soils in-place by rubber-
sampling of sands and sandy balloon method
soils
(Part 39/Sec 1) : Direct shear test for soils
9214 : 1979 Method for determination of 1977 containing gravel, Section 1
modulus of subgrade reaction Laboratory test
(k-value) of soils in the field (5) 1498 : 1970 Classification and identification
(2) 10042 : 1981 Code of practice for site- of soils for general engineering
investigations for foundation in purposes (first revision)
gravel boulder deposits (6) 401 : 2001 Code of practice for preservation
(3) 13365 Guidelines for quantitative of timber (fourth revision)
(Part 1) : 1998 classification systems of rock (7) 6403 : 1981 Code of practice for
mass: Part 1 RMR for predicting determination of bearing
of engineering properties capacity of shallow foundations
(4) 2720 Methods of tests for soils: (first revision)
(Part 1) : 1983 Preparation of dry soil samples (8) 1888 : 1982 Method of load tests on soils
for various tests (second (second revision)
revision) (9) 2131 : 1981 Method for standard
(Part 2) : 1973 Determination of water content penetration test for soils (first
(second revision) revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 SYMBOLS 6
4 MATERIALS 7
5 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES 21
6 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 22
7 DESIGN OF COMMON STEEL WIRE NAIL JOINTS 26
8 DESIGN OF NAIL LAMINATED TIMBER BEAMS 32
9 DESIGN OF BOLTED CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 34
10 DESIGN OF TIMBER CONNECTOR JOINTS 37
11 GLUED LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION AND FINGER JOINTS 40
12 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER 41
13 DESIGN OF GLUED LAMINATED BEAMS 42
14 STRUCTURAL USE OF PLYWOOD 43
15 TRUSSED RAFTER 43
16 STRUCTURAL SANDWICHES 45
17 LAMELLA ROOFING 46
18 NAIL AND SCREW HOLDING POWER OF TIMBER 48
19 PROTECTION AGAINST TERMITE ATTACK IN BUILDINGS 48
LIST OF STANDARDS 49
FOREWORD
This Section deals with the structural design aspect of timber structures. In this section, the various Species of
Indian timber, classified into three groups depending on the structural properties influencing the design, most are
included.
In the previous version of the Code, timber was covered under Section 3 of Part 6 under the title Wood, which
did not cover bamboo. Now this Section 3 has been enlarged as Section 3 Timber and Bamboo, which has been
sub-divided into sub-section 3A Timber and sub-section 3B Bamboo. This sub-section pertains to 3A Timber.
This Section was first published in 1970 which was subsequently revised in 1983. In the first revision provisions
of this Section were updated and design of nailed laminated timber beams were included and information on
bolted construction joints was added. As a result of experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of this
Code and feedback received as well as formulation of new standards in the field and revision of some of the
existing standards, a need to revise this Section was felt. This revision has, therefore, been brought out to take
care of these aspects. The significant changes incorporated in this revision include the following:
a) A number of terminologies related to timber for structural purpose have been added.
b) Strength data of additional species of timber have been included.
c) Requirements for structural timber and preferred cut sizes thereof have been modified.
d) Requirements for glued laminated construction and finger joints have been introduced.
e) Requirements for laminated veneer lumber have been introduced.
f) Brief details have been included for structural sandwiches, glued laminated beams, lamella roofing, nail
and screw holding power of timber, structural use of plywood and trussed rafter; these are proposed to
be further elaborated in future revisions of this Section.
g) Guidelines for protection against termite attack in buildings have been added.
h) Reference to all the concerned Indian Standards have been updated.
In the present day context of dwindling forest resources, all efforts are being made to effect judicious use of timber.
In this context, the Indian Standards now permit use of plantation timbers including certain fast growing species and
suitable guidelines in terms of their seasoning, sawing, treatment, etc have been made available. In the same way,
use of finger jointing and glued laminated timber is important and standardization on the same is desirable and is
under due consideration. However, in the absence of detailed Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of practice
in these areas at present, general details on the same have been incorporated in the revision of this part.
The information contained in this Section is largely based on the following Indian Standards:
IS No. Title
399 : 1963 Classification of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution (revised)
883 : 1994 Code of practice for design of structural timber in building (fourth revision)
1150 : 2000 Trade names and abbreviated symbols for timber species (third revision)
2366 : 1983 Code of practice for nail-jointed timber construction (first revision)
4891 : 1988 Specification for preferred cut sizes of structural timber (first revision)
4983 : 1968 Code of practice for design and construction of nailed laminated timber beams
11096 : 1984 Code of practice for design and construction of bolt-jointed timber construction
14616 : 1999 Specification for laminated veneer lumber
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
Species Locality Average Modulus of Permissible Stress in N/mm 2 for Grade I Preservative Characters
from Density at Elasticity
Botanical Name Trade Name Where 12 percent (All Grades Bending and Shear Compression Compression Durability Treat- Refrac-
Tested Moisture and All Tension Along all Locations Parallel Perpendicular Class ability teriness
Content Locations Grain, Extreme to Grain to Grain Grade to All
103 Fibre Stress Seasoning
kg/m3 N/mm2
Inside Location
Outside Location
Wet Location
Horizontal
Along Grain
Inside Location
Outside Location
Wet Location
Inside Location
Outside Location
Wet Location
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
GROUP A
Acacia catecthu Khair (KHA) U.P. 1 009 13.44 20.1 16.8 13.4 1.6 2.2 13.8 12.3 10.1 7.7 6.0 4.9 I A
Acacia chundra Red kutch M.P. 1 086 16.79 26.5 22.0 17.6 2.2 3.2 17.9 15.9 13.0 10.9 8.4 6.9 A
Albizia odoratissima Kala siris (KSI) Chennai 737 13.54 18.7 15.6 12.5 1.5 2.2 13.3 11.8 9.6 7.3 5.6 4.6 I e B
Bruguiera spp. Bruguiera (BSV) Andmans 897 17.68 21.9 18.3 14.6 1.2 1.7 14.3 12.7 10.4 5.5 4.3 3.5 III
(Mangrove)
Grewia tiliifolia Dhaman (DHA) Chennai 788 14.82 18.3 15.2 12.2 1.3 1.9 12.0 10.7 8.7 6.0 4.7 3.8 III d B
Hopea utilis Karung Chennai 987 16.91 25.1 20.9 16.7 1.5 2.2 16.4 14.6 11.9 9.3 7.3 5.9
(Balano carpus utilis)
Hopea glabra Hopea (HOP) Chennai 1 081 14.79 21.3 17.8 14.2 1.5 2.2 14.5 12.9 10.6 9.9 7.7 6.3 I A
Hopea parviflora Hopea (HOP) Chennai 923 13.03 18.6 15.5 12.4 1.3 1.8 13.2 11.8 9.6 9.2 7.3 6.0 I e A
GROUP B
Albizzia lebbeck Kokko (KOK) Andaman 642 11.17 13.4 11.2 9.0 1.1 1.5 9.0 8.0 6.5 4.4 3.4 2.8 I e B
9
Table 1 Continued
10
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
Anogeissus latifolia Dhaura, Axle wood U.P. 892 10.55 16.1 13.4 10.7 1.1 1.6 9.1 8.1 6.6 4.7 3.7 3.0 I e A
(AXL) (Bakli)
Artocarpus hirsulus Aini (AIH) Chennai 600 10.45 15.0 12.5 10.0 0.7 1.1 10.4 9.2 7.5 3.3 2.6 2.1 I B
Acacia nilotica Babul (BAB) U.P. 797 12.9 10.3 1.4 2.1 8.9 7.9 6.4 5.2 4.0 3.3 I b B
Acacia ferruginea Safed khair Maharashtra 993 12.28 23.0 19.2 15.3 1.7 2.4 13.9 12.4 10.1 9.9 7.7 6.3
Acrocarpus fraxinifolius Mundani (MUN) Chennai 690 12.59 16.1 13.4 10.8 1.2 1.8 10.5 9.4 7.7 4.6 3.6 2.9 III c B
Aglaia odulis Aglaia (AGL) Assam 815 12.56 18.2 15.2 12.1 1.4 2.0 10.1 8.9 7.3 4.4 3.4 2.8 A
Anogeissus acuminota Yon Orissa 844 11.67 17.6 14.7 11.7 1.3 1.8 10.8 9.6 7.9 5.1 4.0 3.3 A
Atalanlia monophylla Jungli-nimbu (JHI) Orissa 897 10.31 16.7 13.9 11.1 1.5 2.1 11.3 10.0 8.2 6.3 4.9 4.0
Altingia excelsa Jutili (JUT) Assam 795 11.37 17.1 14.3 11.4 1.2 1.8 11.0 9.8 8.0 6.8 5.3 4.4 II e A
Amoora spp. Amari (AMA) W. Bengal 625 1.05 13.4 1.1 9.2 0.9 1.3 8.4 7.4 6.0 3.7 2.9 2.4 II d B
Bucklandia populnea (Syn Pipli (PIP) W. Bengal 672 9.89 12.8 10.7 8.6 1.1 1.5 7.9 7.0 5.7 3.5 2.7 2.2 III e C
Exbucklandia populnea)
Cassia fistula Amaltas (AMT) U.P. 865 11.80 19.2 16.0 12.8 1.4 2.0 12.3 10.9 8.9 7.2 5.6 4.6 I A
Carallia lucida Maniawaga Assam 748 12.60 18.4 15.3 12.3 1.2 1.7 11.4 10.1 8.3 5.9 4.6 3.8
Canarium strictum Dhup Chennai 655 11.86 13.3 11.1 8.9 0.9 1.2 8.1 7.2 5.9 2.8 2.2 1.8 III C
Cassia sienea Kasod M.P. 820 10.50 15.4 12.8 10.9 1.0 1.4 10.8 9.6 7.9 5.5 4.3 3.5
Casuerina equisetifolia Casuarina (CAS) Orissa 769 11.44 14.6 12.2 9.8 1.3 1.8 8.2 7.3 5.9 4.0 3.1 2.5 III e A
Celophyllum temculosum Poon (POO) Maharashtra 657 9.77 13.4 11.2 9.0 0.8 1.1 8.6 7.7 6.3 2.8 2.2 1.8 II B
Chloroxylon swielenia Satin wood (CFI) M.P. 865 11.69 18.2 15.1 12.1 1.4 2.0 10.9 9.7 8.0 6.3 4.9 4.0 III A
Cullenia resayoana Karani (KAP) Chennai 625 12.43 14.7 12.3 9.8 0.6 0.9 9.0 8.0 6.6 2.7 2.1 1.7 III b C
(Syn C. execelsa)
Diploknema butyracea Hill mahua (HMA) S. Andaman 780 10.64 15.3 12.8 10.2 1.0 1.5 9.9 8.8 7.2 6.6 5.2 4.2
(Syn Bassia butyrance)
Dyscxylum malebaricum White ceda (WCE) Chennai 745 10.92 13.2 11.0 8.8 1.0 1.4 8.0 7.1 5.8 3.1 2.4 1.9 I B
Dipterocarpus grandiflorus Gurjan (GUR) N. Andaman 758 11.71 12.5 10.5 8.4 0.8 1.1 7.9 7.1 5.8 2.7 2.1 1.7 I B
Dipterocarpus macrocarpus Hollong (HOL) Assam 726 13.34 14.5 12.0 9.6 0.8 1.1 8.8 7.9 6.4 3.5 2.7 2.2 III a B
Dichopsis polyantha (Syn Tali (TAL) Assam 734 11.24 14.9 12.4 10.0 1.1 1.6 9.9 8.8 7.2 4.7 3.7 3.0 B
Palaquium polyanthum)
Dichopsis elliptica Pali (PAL) Chennai 606 11.86 13.9 11.6 9.3 0.7 1.0 8.5 7.5 6.2 2.9 2.2 1.8 I e B
(Syn Palaquium ellipticum)
Diospyros micropylla Ebony (EBO) Maharashtra 776 12.15 14.2 11.9 9.5 0.9 1.3 8.3 7.3 6.0 3.3 2.6 2.1 A
Diospyros pyrrhocarpus Ebony (EBO) N. Andaman 843 9.93 13.5 11.2 9.0 1.0 1.4 7.9 7.0 5.7 4.0 3.1 2.5 III A
Dipterocarpus bourdilloni Gurjan (GUR) Kerala 699 12.71 13.6 11.3 9.0 0.7 1.0 7.8 6.9 5.7 2.5 1.9 1.6 B
Eucalyptus globulus Eucalyptus Chennai 912 14.83 15.9 13.2 10.6 10.3 1.5 9.0 8.0 6.5 3.4 2.6 2.1 I e A
(Blue gum) (BLN)
Eucalyptus ougenioides Eucalyptus Chennai 853 11.47 16.4 13.6 10.9 1.2 1.7 11.3 10.0 8.2 7.6 5.9 4.8
Eugenia gardnery Jaman (JAM) Chennai 952 11.94 14.8 12.3 9.8 1.1 1.6 9.2 8.2 6.7 5.8 4.5 3.7 III d
Eugenia jambolana Jaman (JAM) U.P. 778 10.94 16.0 13.3 10.6 1.2 1.7 9.7 8.6 7.1 4.7 3.7 3.0
Gluta travancorice Gluta (GLU) Chennai 726 12.73 13.5 11.3 9.0 0.9 1.3 9.0 8.0 6.6 4.0 3.1 2.5 I A
Grewia veslita Dhaman (DHA) W. Bengal 758 12.00 15.4 12.6 10.3 1.4 2.0 9.1 8.1 6.6 4.1 3.2 2.6 III d B
Heritiera spp. Sundri (SUN) Assam 872 13.37 17.9 14.9 11.9 1.3 1.8 11.0 9.8 8.0 6.5 5.0 4.1 I A
Kingiodendron pinnatum Piney (PIN) Chennai 617 10.62 13.2 11.0 8.8 0.4 1.3 8.2 7.3 6.0 2.9 2.2 1.8 B
(Syn Hardwickia pinnata)
Kayea floribund Karal Assam 813 10.88 16.8 14.0 1.1 1.1 1.6 10.1 9.0 7.3 4.4 3.4 2.8 III
Lagerstromia lanceolata Benteak (BEN) Chennai 617 10.76 12.7 10.6 8.5 0.8 1.2 8.2 7.3 5.9 3.4 2.6 2.2 I e B
Lagerstromia parviflora Lendi (LEN) U.P. 734 10.97 14.3 11.9 9.5 1.1 1.6 8.7 7.7 6.3 3.7 2.9 2.4 I e A
Mimusops elengi Bakul (BKL) Chennai 885 12.39 17.3 14.4 11.5 1.3 1.8 11.0 9.8 8.0 5.6 4.3 3.6 I A
Machilus macrantha Machilus (MAC) W. Bengal 692 10.00 12.4 10.3 8.3 1.0 1.5 8.2 7.3 6.0 3.5 2.7 2.2 III e B/C
Miliuse tyomentosa Hoom (HOO) Maharashtra 745 11.06 14.8 12.3 9.9 0.9 1.3 9.7 8.6 7.0 3.5 2.7 2.2 III B
(Syn Saccopapetalum
tomentosum)
Pommetia pinnata Andaman 788 12.90 14.3 11.9 9.5 1.1 1.6 9.1 8.0 6.6 4.0 3.1 2.5
Pterocarpus dolbergioides Padauk (PAD) N. Andaman 721 11.24 17.1 14.3 11.4 1.0 1.5 12.0 10.7 8.7 5.5 4.3 3.5 I c B
Mesua assamica Kayea Assam 842 12.83 17.4 14.5 11.6 1.0 1.4 11.7 10.4 8.5 5.3 4.1 3.3 II e
Pterocarpus marsupium Bijasal (BIJ) Maharashtra 803 10.25 14.9 12.4 9.9 0.9 1.3 9.1 8.1 6.6 4.1 3.2 2.6 I e B
Fraxlnus macrantha Ash (ASH) U.P. 712 10.69 15.0 12.5 10.0 1.2 1.7 8.5 7.6 6.2 4.3 3.3 2.7 III B
Fraxlnus execlsior Ash (ASH) Punjab 719 10.41 14.8 12.3 9.8 1.2 1.7 8.1 7.2 5.8 3.3 2.6 2.1 III B
Planchonia valida Red bombwe (RBO) Andaman 913 13.10 16.1 13.4 10.7 1.0 1.4 10.8 9.6 7.9 4.9 3.8 3.1 III
(Syn P. andamanica)
Quercus lamellosa Oak W. Bengal 87 12.44 14.5 12.1 9.7 1.2 1.7 8.7 7.8 6.4 3.8 2.9 2.4 II c A
Quercus griffithii Oak Meghalaya 974 10.06 13.1 10.9 8.8 1.1 1.6 8.0 7.1 5.8 4.6 3.6 2.9 A
11
Table 1 Continued
12
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
Terminalia citrina Assam 755 11.89 17.1 14.3 11.4 1.1 1.6 10.8 9.6 7.9 5.0 3.9 3.2
Terminalia manii Black-chuglam (BCH) S. Andaman 822 12.66 16.8 14.0 11.2 1.1 1.6 10.3 9.2 7.5 5.1 4.0 3.2 II a B
Tectona grandis Teak (TEA) U.P. 660 9.97 15.5 12.9 10.3 1.2 1.6 9.4 8.3 6.8 4.5 3.5 2.8 I e B
Terminalia paniculate Kindal (KIN) Maharashtra 765 10.57 13.1 10.9 8.7 0.9 1.3 8.6 7.7 6.3 3.6 2.8 2.3 I c A
Alreminalia alata Laurel (LAU), Sain Chennai 906 10.54 15.1 12.5 10.0 1.1 1.6 9.4 8.4 6.8 6.2 4.8 4.0 I b A
Terminalia bilata White-chuglam (WCH) S. Andaman 690 12.38 15.5 13.0 10.4 0.9 1.2 9.8 8.7 7.1 3.6 2.8 2.3 III e B
Thespesia populnea Bhendi (BHE) Maharashtra 766 10.36 18.9 15.8 12.6 1.3 1.9 11.3 10.0 8.2 4.4 3.4 2.8 B
Xylia xylocarpa Irul (IRU) Maharashtra 839 11.63 16.2 13.5 10.8 1.3 1.8 10.9 9.7 7.9 7.8 6.0 4.9 I e A
Zanthoxylum budranga Mullilam (MUL) W. Bengal 587 10.65 14.7 12.2 9.8 0.9 1.2 9.5 8.4 6.9 3.4 2.6 2.1 I e B
Adina oligocephala Arunachal 715 11.17 15.2 12.7 10.1 1.2 1.7 10.3 9.2 7.5 4.0 3.1 2.4
Castanopsis indica Chestnut Meghalaya 688 12.54 14.8 12.3 9.9 1.0 1.4 9.8 8.7 7.1 3.4 2.7 2.2 B
Eucalyptus citriodara Eucalyptus Nilgiri 831 12.12 17.3 14.4 11.5 1.4 2.0 11.0 9.8 8.0 4.2 3.3 2.7
Eucalyptus citriodata Eucalyptus Ooty 725 9.35 15.4 12.9 10.3 1.0 1.4 8.6 7.6 6.3 3.0 2.4 2.0
Eucalytus tereticornis Eucalyptus Chennai 777 11.05 16.7 13.9 11.1 1.0 1.4 9.7 8.6 7.1 3.4 2.6 2.2 III e
GROUP C
Tbizia procera White siris U.P. 643 9.02 13.4 11.2 8.9 1.0 1.4 8.5 7.6 6.2 4.3 3.3 2.7 I c B
Artocarpus lakocha Lakooch (LAK) U.P. 647 6.14 10.0 8.3 6.7 1.0 1.4 5.3 4.7 3.8 2.8 2.2 1.8 I B
Artocarpus hetarophyllus Jack, kathal (KAT) Chennai 617 9.46 13.9 11.6 9.2 1.0 1.5 9.3 8.3 6.8 4.5 3.5 2.9 I d B
(Syn. A. Integrifolia)
Aphanamixis polystachya Pitraj (PIT) West Bengal 668 8.98 12.3 10.2 8.2 1.1 1.5 8.0 7.1 5.8 4.0 3.1 2.6 I B
(Syn. Amoora rehituka)
Adina cordifolia* Haldu (HAL) U.P. 663 8.54 13.3 11.1 8.9 1.0 1.4 8.7 7.7 6.3 4.4 3.4 2.8 III a B
Anthocephyalus chinensis Kadam (KAD) 485 1.88 9.7 8.1 5.4 0.7 1.0 5.9 5.3 4.3 1.9 1.5 1.2 III a
(Syn. A. Cadamba)
Arlocarpus chaplasha Chaplash (CHP) Assam 515 9.11 13.2 11.0 8.8 0.9 1.2 8.5 7.5 6.2 3.6 2.8 2.3 III d B
Acacia leucophloea Hiwar (HIW) M.P. 737 7.85 13.4 11.2 9.0 1.0 1.5 7.5 6.7 5.4 4.5 3.5 2.8 A
Acacia melanoxylone Black wood Chennai 630 9.45 13.0 10.8 8.7 1.1 1.5 7.6 6.8 5.5 3.2 2.5 2.0
Acacia mearnsii Black wattle Chennai 669 6.10 10.4 8.6 6.9 0.8 1.2 6.0 5.4 4.4 2.3 1.8 1.5
(Syn. A. mollissima)
Accer spp. Maple (MAP) Punjab, U.P. 551 7.35 9.9 8.2 6.5 0.9 1.3 5.5 4.9 4.0 2.1 1.7 1.4 III B
Aegla marmalos Bael (BEL) U.P. 890 8.81 13.5 11.2 9.0 1.4 2.0 8.8 7.8 6.4 6.8 5.3 4.3 III B
(Syn. Intsia bijuga)
Afzelia bijuga Andaman 705 9.16 13.2 11.0 8.8 1.1 1.5 7.9 7.1 5.8 4.0 3.1 2.6
Ailanthus grandis Gokul (GOK) W. Bengal 404 7.94 8.3 6.9 5.5 0.6 0.8 5.3 4.7 3.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 III C
Anogeissus pendula Kardhai (KAH) U.P. 929 9.75 17.0 14.2 11.4 1.3 1.8 9.8 8.7 7.1 6.5 5.1 4.2 III A
Areca nut Kerala 833 9.48 15.2 12.7 10.2 1.2 1.6 10.8 9.6 7.8 7.3 5.7 4.7
Albizia lucida Arunachal, 566 8.51 10.7 8.9 7.1 8.2 1.2 7.3 6.3 5.3 2.3 1.8 1.5
A.P.
Azadirachta indica Neem (NEE) U.P. 836 8.52 14.6 12.1 9.7 1.3 1.8 10.0 8.9 7.3 5.0 3.9 3.2
Boswellia seriata Salai (SAA) Bihar 551 7.21 9.4 7.9 6.3 0.7 1.1 5.5 4.9 4.0 2.1 1.6 1.3 I e C
Bridelia retusa Kassi (KAS) Bihar 584 9.42 11.6 9.7 7.7 0.9 1.3 7.1 6.3 5.1 4.0 3.1 2.6 I e B
Betula lnoides Birch (BIR) West Bengal 625 9.23 9.6 8.0 6.4 0.8 1.1 5.7 5.0 4.1 2.2 1.7 1.4 B
Bischofia javanica Uriam Bishopwood Chennai 769 8.84 9.6 8.2 6.5 0.8 1.1 5.9 5.3 4.3 3.6 2.8 2.3 III A
(URI)
Burserra serrata Muntenga (MUR) A.P. 756 1.17 15.5 13.3 10.5 0.9 1.3 10.1 9.0 7.4 5.3 4.1 3.4 II c
(Syn. Protium serratum)
Careya arbersa Kumbi (KUM) U.P. 889 8.37 13.1 10.9 8.8 1.0 1.5 7.7 6.8 5.6 5.3 4.1 3.4 I e A
Cedrus deodara Deodar (DEO) H.P. 557 9.48 10.2 8.7 7.2 0.7 1.0 7.8 6.9 5.7 2.7 2.1 1.7 I c C
Cupressus torulosa Cypress (CYP) U.P. 506 8.41 8.8 7.6 6.2 0.6 0.8 6.9 6.2 5.0 2.4 1.8 1.5 I e C
Castanopsis hystrix Indian chestnut West Bengal 624 9.85 10.6 8.8 7.0 0.8 1.2 6.4 5.7 4.6 2.7 2.1 1.7 II b B
(ICH)
Chukrasia vclutina Chickrassy (CHI) West Bengal 666 8.35 11.8 9.8 7.9 1.1 1.5 7.1 6.3 5.2 3.9 3.1 2.5 II c B
(Syn. C. Tabularis)
Calophyllum wightianum Poon (POO) Maharashtra 689 8.68 13.5 11.2 9.0 1.0 1.4 8.7 7.8 6.4 4.0 3.1 2.5 II B
Canarium strictum White dhup Assam 569 10.54 10.1 8.4 6.7 0.7 1.1 6.2 5.5 4.5 2.1 1.6 1.3 III C
Chlorophora excelsa
Cocosnucifera Coconut (COC) Kerala 761 7.34 9.2 7.7 6.1 0.7 1.1 9.5 8.4 6.9 3.9 3.0 2.5
Dalbergia latifolia Rosewood (ROS) M.P. 884 8.39 12.9 10.8 8.6 1.1 1.6 8.0 7.1 5.8 4.2 3.3 2.7 I B
Dalbergia sissee Sisso (SIS) Punjab 799 7.14 12.8 10.7 8.5 1.3 1.8 8.2 7.3 6.0 4.2 3.3 2.7 I e B
Dillemia indica Dillenia (DIL) West Bengal 617 8.61 12.1 10.0 8.0 0.8 1.2 7.3 6.5 5.3 2.7 2.1 1.7 III a B
Dillenia pentagyne Dillenia (DIL) West Bengal 622 7.56 11.8 9.9 7.9 0.9 1.3 7.1 6.3 5.2 3.5 2.7 2.2 III d B
Diospyres melanoxylon Ebony (EBO) Maharashtra 818 7.69 10.9 9.1 7.3 0.9 1.2 7.0 6.2 5.1 3.3 2.6 2.1 II A
13
Table 1 Continued
14
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
Heterrophragma rexburghii Palang (PAL) M.P. 616 8.69 12.3 10.2 8.2 0.7 1.0 7.9 7.0 5.7 3.4 2.6 2.1
Juglans spp. Walnut (WAL) U.P. 565 9.00 9.9 8.3 6.6 0.9 1.2 5.8 5.2 4.2 2.2 1.7 1.4 III B
Lagerstrosmia speciosa Jarul (JAAR) N. Andaman 622 8.53 12.1 10.1 8.1 0.8 1.8 7.7 6.8 5.6 3.4 2.6 2.2 II e B
(Syn. L. flesregihal)
Lannea grandis Jhingan (JHI) U.P. 557 5.63 8.5 7.1 5.7 0.6 0.9 4.9 4.4 3.6 2.2 1.7 1.4 III e B
(Syn. L.coromandelica)
Leucanena leucocephala Subabul (SUB) U.P. 673 6.32 11.6 9.7 7.8 1.0 1.5 7.4 6.6 5.4 3.8 3.0 2.4
Lophopatalum wightianum Banati (BAN) Chennai 460 7.33 8.5 7.5 5.6 0.5 0.8 5.3 4.7 3.8 1.8 1.4 1.1 III C
Madhuca longifolia varlatifolia Mahua (MAU) M.P. 936 8.82 13.0 10.8 8.7 1.0 1.4 7.5 6.7 5.5 6.3 4.9 4.0 I e A
(Syn. Bassia latifolia)
Mangifera indica Mango, Aam (MAN) Orissa 661 9.12 12.2 10.2 8.2 1.0 1.4 7.3 6.5 5.3 3.1 2.4 2.0 III a C
Machilus macrantha Machilus (MAC) Chennai 521 7.63 10.2 8.5 6.8 0.7 1.0 6.3 5.6 4.6 2.4 1.9 1.5 III e B
Mallotus philippinensis Raini (RAI) U.P. 662 7.51 10.8 9.0 7.2 1.0 1.4 6.0 5.4 4.4 2.9 2.3 1.8 III B
Manglietia insignia Assam 449 10.37 10.9 9.1 7.3 0.7 1.0 8.0 7.1 5.8 3.4 2.6 2.1
Michelia montana Champ (CHM) West Bengal 512 8.25 10.9 9.1 7.3 0.7 1.0 6.6 5.9 4.8 2.8 2.2 1.8 I B
Mitragyna pervifolia Kaim (KAI) U.P. 651 7.82 12.6 10.5 8.4 1.0 1.5 7.9 7.0 5.7 3.7 2.9 2.4 III b B
(Syn. Stephagyne pervifolia)
Michelia excelsa Champ (CHM) West Bengal 513 10.12 9.8 8.2 6.5 0.7 1.0 6.1 5.5 4.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 II e B
Miliusa velutnia Domsal (DOM) U.P. 747 7.92 11.7 9.7 7.8 1.1 1.6 7.0 6.3 5.1 3.7 2.9 2.4 III
Morus alba Mulberry (MUL) U.P. 743 8.20 11.8 9.8 7.9 1.0 1.4 6.6 5.8 4.8 3.8 2.9 2.4 II B
Morus serrata Mulberry (MUL) H.P. 657 7.03 10.2 8.5 6.8 0.9 1.3 5.6 5.0 4.1 2.6 2.0 1.6 III B
Morus laevigata Bola (BOL) Andaman 588 8.61 12.3 10.2 8.2 1.0 1.5 7.2 6.4 5.3 3.3 2.5 2.1 B
Ougeinia eejeinensis Sandan (SAD) M.P. 784 8.54 13.3 11.1 8.9 1.2 1.7 8.5 7.5 6.2 5.1 3.9 3.2 I B
(Syn. O. delbergioides)
Phoebe hainesiana Bonsum (BOH) Assam 566 9.50 13.2 11.0 8.8 0.8 1.2 8.8 7.8 6.4 2.8 2.1 1.8 II c B
Pinus roxburghii Chir (CHR) U.P. 525 9.82 8.5 7.3 6.0 0.6 0.9 6.0 5.3 4.4 2.0 1.5 1.3 III b C
(Syn. P. longifolia)
Pinus wallichiana Kail (KAL) 515 6.80 6.6 5.6 5.0 0.6 0.8 5.2 4.6 3.8 1.7 1.3 1.0 II c C
Phoebe goalperansis Bonsum (BOH) Assam 511 7.65 9.7 8.1 6.5 0.7 1.0 6.6 5.9 4.8 2.2 1.7 1.4 II c B
Parretiopsis jacquementiena Rohu Parrotia H.P. 761 5.77 12.5 10.4 8.3 1.2 1.7 6.8 6.1 5.0 4.0 3.1 2.5 III B
Pinus kesia Khasi pine (KPI) North East 513 7.38 8.9 7.4 5.9 0.6 0.7 5.8 5.2 4.3 1.5 1.2 1.0 III a B
(Syn. Pinus insularis)
Pistacia integerrima Kikar singhi J&K 881 7.32 13.1 10.9 8.7 1.2 1.7 8.0 7.1 5.8 4.3 3.4 2.8
Podocarpus nerrifolius Thitmin (THT) S. Andaman 533 9.41 12.5 10.4 8.3 6.1 0.9 8.0 7.1 5.8 2.6 2.0 1.6 II
Polyalthia fragrances Debdaru (DEB) Maharashtra 752 9.15 11.9 9.9 7.9 0.8 1.2 6.7 6.0 4.9 3.0 2.3 1.9 III B
(Nedunar)
Polyalthia coreoides M.P. 700 9.29 13.2 11.0 8.8 1.0 1.4 7.1 6.3 5.2 3.2 2.5 2.0
Prunus napeulensis Arupati West Bengal 548 9.41 104.4 8.7 69.6 0.9 1.2 6.7 6.0 4.9 2.4 1.9 1.6
Pterespermum acerifolium Hattipaila (HAT) West Bengal 607 9.55 13.5 11.3 9.0 0.9 1.2 8.7 7.7 6.3 3.2 2.5 2.0 III c B
Qucrcus spp. Oak North East 657 11.65 11.4 9.5 7.6 0.8 1.2 6.7 5.9 4.8 2.0 1.6 1.3 II c B
Raderomachera xylocarpe Vedankonnai Chennai 696 8.52 13.2 11.0 8.8 1.1 1.5 9.0 8.0 6.6 4.3 3.3 2.7 II a
(Syn. Sterosperam xylocarpum)
Schleichera oleosa Kusum (KUS) Bihar 1032 12.12 15.5 13.0 10.4 1.5 2.1 10.9 9.7 7.9 6.1 4.2 3.9 II a A
(Syn. S. trijuga)
Schima wallichii Chilauni (CHL) West Bengal 693 9.57 11.1 9.3 7.4 0.9 1.3 6.6 5.9 4.8 2.3 1.8 1.4 III d B
Shotea assamica Makai (MAK) Assam 548 9.27 11.1 9.2 7.4 0.9 1.3 7.1 6.3 5.2 2.9 2.2 1.8 III c B
Sonneralia apetale Keora (KEO) West Bengal 617 8.63 12.8 10.7 8.5 0.9 1.3 7.4 6.6 5.4 4.8 3.7 3.0 II B
Stereospermum suaveolans Padri (PAD) U.P. 721 8.86 13.3 11.1 8.9 0.9 1.3 7.3 7.0 5.7 3.5 2.7 2.2 III B
Tactona grandis Teak (TEA) M.P. 617 8.49 12.8 10.7 8.5 0.8 1.3 7.9 7.0 5.7 4.0 3.1 2.6 I e B
Terminalia arjuna Arjun (ARJ) Bihar 794 7.71 12.2 10.2 8.2 1.1 1.6 7.4 6.6 5.4 5.2 4.1 3.3 II b B
Terminalia myriocarpa Hollock (HOC) Assam 615 9.62 11.9 9.9 8.0 0.9 1.2 7.6 6.7 5.5 2.9 2.2 1.8 III a B
Terminalia procera White bombwae N.Andaman 626 8.99 11.8 9.8 7.9 0.9 1.3 7.2 6.4 5.3 3.0 2.3 1.9 III b B
(WBO)
Taxus buccata Yew (YEW) West Bengal 705 7.79 14.3 11.9 9.5 1.2 1.7 8.7 7.8 6.4 4.7 3.7 3.0
Tamarindus indica Imli (IML) Chennai 913 5.63 11.4 9.5 7.6 1.2 1.7 7.0 6.2 5.1 5.3 4.1 3.4 B
Toena ciliata Toon (TOO) U.P. 487 6.40 8.7 7.3 5.8 0.7 1.0 5.4 4.8 3.9 2.4 1.8 1.5 II c B
Vateria indica Vellapine (VEL) Chennai 535 10.95 11.5 9.6 7.6 0.7 1.1 7.5 6.7 5.5 2.3 1.8 1.4 III e C
Aeculas indica Horse chestnut U.P. 484 7.55 8.5 7.1 5.7 0.8 1.1 4.8 4.2 3.5 1.8 1.4 1.1 B
(HCH)
Borassus flabelsfer Tad (Palmyra) A.P. 838 8.79 10.5 8.8 7.0 0.7 1.0 10.0 8.8 7.2 4.7 3.6 2.7
(TAD)
Eucalyptus cemaldulensis Eucalyptus Karnataka 804 9.53 12.8 10.6 8.5 0.8 1.1 7.2 6.4 5.2 3.5 2.7 2.2 A
* Species thus marked and tested from other localities show higher strength to enable their categorization in higher group.
For Example
i) Sal tested from West Bengal, Bihar, U.P. and Assam can be classified as Group A species;
ii) Haldu tested from Bihar can be classified as Group B species;
iii) Morus laevigate (Bole) of Assam can be classified in Group B species.
15
Table 1 Concluded
16
Classification for preservation based on durability tests, etc.
Class
I Average life more than 120 months;
II Average life 60 months and above but less than 120 months; and
III Average life less than 60 months.
Treatability Grades
a Heartwood easily treatable;
b Heartwood treatable, but complete penetration not always obtained; in case where the least dimension is more than 60 mm;
c Heartwood only partially treatable;
d Heartwood refractory to treatment; and
e Heartwood very refractory to treatment, penetration of preservative being practically nil even from the ends;
Data based on strength properties at three years of age of tree.
Classifications based on seasoning behaviour of timber and refractoriness w.r.t. cracking, spliting and drying rate:
A Highly refractory (slow and difficulty to season free from surface and end cracking);
B Moderately refractory (may be seasoned free from surface and end cracking within reasonably short periods, given a little protection against rapid drying conditions); and
C Non-refractory may be rapidly seasoned free from surface and end-cracking even in the open air and sun. If not rapidly dried, they develop blue stain and mould on the surface.
NOTES
1 Nails of 3.55 mm diameter are most commonly used. The above values can also be used for 4 mm diameter 100 mm long nails.
2 The values in N are approximate converted values from kgf. For exact conversion the value is 1 kgf = 9.806 65 N.
1)
Species requiring no preboring for nail penetration.
NOTES
1 Nails of 5.00 mm diameter are most commonly used.
2 The values in N are approximate converted values from kgf. For exact conversion the value is 1 kgf = 9.806 65 N.
1)
Species requires no preboring for nail penetration.
NOTE The country has been broadly divided into the following four zones based on the humidity variations in the country:
Zone I Average annual relative humidity less than 40 percent.
Zone II Average annual relative humidity 40 to 50 percent.
Zone III Average annual relative humidity 50 to 67 percent.
Zone IV Average annual relative humidity more than 67 percent.
For detailed zonal classification, tolerances, etc reference may be made to good practice [6-3A(4)].
Thickness Width
mm mm
20 40 50 60 80 100
25 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160
30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160
35 60 80 100 120 140 160
40 60 80 100 120 140 160
50 60 80 100 120 140 160
60 80 100 120 140 160
80 100 120 140 160
NOTES
1 For truss spans marginally above 20 m, preferred cut sizes of structural timber may be allowed.
2 Preferred lengths of timber: 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5 and 3 m.
Thickness Width
mm mm
Thickness Width
mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
10 40 50 60 80
15 40 50 60 80 100
20 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200
25 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
30 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
40 40 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
50 50 80 100 120 160 200 240
60 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
80 80 100 120 160 200 240
iii) Slope of grain Shall not be more than 1 in 20 Shall not be more than 1 in 15 Shall not be more than 1 in 12
Width of Permissible Maximum Size of Permissible Maximum Size of Permissible Maximum Size of
Wide Faces Live Knot on Live Knot on Live Knot on
of Cut Sizes
of Timber Narrow faces and Remaining Narrow faces and Remaining Narrow faces and Remaining central
of the width central half of of the width central half of of the width half of the width
Max face close to the width of the face close to the width of the face close to of the wide faces
edges of cut size wide faces edges of cut size wide faces edges of cut size
of timber of timber of timber
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
75 10 10 19 19 29 30
100 13 13 25 25 38 39
150 19 19 38 38 57 57
200 22 25 44 50 66 75
250 25 29 50 57 66 87
300 27 38 54 75 81 114
350 29 41 57 81 87 123
400 32 44 63 87 96 132
450 33 47 66 93 99 141
500 35 50 69 100 105 150
550 36 52 72 103 108 156
600 38 53 75 106 114 159
i) Bending and Inside 1) 18.0 12.0 8.5 For different durations of design load, the permissible
tension along stresses given in Table 1 shall be multiplied by the
grain modification factor K2 given in Table 11.
ii) Shear 2) All locations 1.05 0.64 0.49
Horizontal NOTE The strength properties of timber under load are time-
dependent.
Along grain All locations 15 0.91 0.70
iii) Compression Inside 1) 11.7 7.8 4.9 Table 11 Modifications Factor K2, for Change
parallel to grain
1)
in Duration of Loading
iv) Compression Inside 4.0 2.5 1.1
perpendicular (Clause 5.4.2)
to grain
Duration of Loading Modification Factor K2
v) Modulus of All locations 12.6 9.8 5.6
elasticity and grade (1) (2)
( 103 N/mm2)
Continuous (Normal) 1.0
1)
For working stresses for other locations of use, that is, outside Two months 1.15
and wet, generally factors of 5/6 and 2/3 are applied. Seven days 1.25
2)
The values of horizontal shear to be used only for beams. In all Wind and earthquake 1.33
other cases shear along grain to be used. Instantaneous or impact 2.00
D 2 + 89 400 1
K 4 = 0.8 + 0.8 y
D 2 + 55 000
where
d) For notched at upper (compression) face,
y = p12 (6 8 p1 + 3 p12 ) (1 q1 ) + q1 where e > D:
All flexural members having a depth exceeding three 6.5.7.2 For concentrated loads:
times its width or a span exceeding 50 times its width 2
10 C ( I x ) ( x / D)
or both shall be laterally restrained from twisting or V=
buckling and the distance between such restraints shall 9 I [2 + ( x / D )2 ]
not exceed 50 times its width.
and for uniformly distributed loads,
6.5.7 Shear
W 2D
6.5.7.1 The following formulae shall apply: V= 1
2 I
a) The maximum horizontal shear, when the load After arriving at the value of V, its value will be
on a beam moves from the support towards substituted in the formula:
the centre of the span, and the load is at a
distance of three to four times the depth of VQ
H=
the beam from the support, shall be calculated Ib
from the following general formula:
6.5.7.3 In determining the vertical reaction V, the
VQ
H= following deductions in loads may be made:
Ib
a) Consideration shall be given to the possible
b) For rectangular beams: distribution of load to adjacent parallel beams,
3V if any;
H=
2 bD b) All uniformly distributed loads within a
distance equal to the depth of the beam from
c) For notched beams, with tension notch at the edge of the nearest support may be
supports (see 6.5.7.3): neglected except in case of beam hanging
3 VD downwards from a particular support; and
H=
2 bD1
2 c) All concentrated loads in the vicinity of the
6.5.9 Deflection
6.5.8 Bearing
The deflection in the case of all flexural members
6.5.8.1 The ends of flexural members shall be supporting brittle materials like gypsum ceilings,
supported in recesses which provide adequate slates, tiles and asbestos sheets shall not exceed 1/360
ventilation to prevent dry rot and shall not be enclosed. of the span. The deflection in the case of other flexural
Flexural members except roof timbers which are members shall not exceed 1/240 of the span and 1/150
supported directly on masonry or concrete shall have of the freely hanging length in the case of cantilevers.
a length of bearing of not less than 75 mm. Members
supported on corbels, offsets and roof timbers on a 6.5.9.1 Usual formula for deflection shall apply:
wall shall bear immediately on and be fixed to wall- 3
KWL
plate not less than 75 mm 40 mm. = (ignoring deflection due to shear strain)
EI
6.5.8.2 Timber joists or floor planks shall not be
supported on the top flange of steel beams unless the K-values =1/3 for cantilevers with load at free
bearing stress, calculated on the net bearing as shaped end,
to fit the beam, is less than the permissible compressive 1/8 for cantilevers with uniformly
stress perpendicular to the grain. distributed load,
f ac f ab
6.6.2.4 For long columns, the permissible compressive + is not greater than 1.
stress shall be calculated by using the following fc fb
formula: 6.7.2 Structural members subjected both to bending
0.329 UE and axial tension shall be designed to comply with the
fc = following formula:
2
S f at f ab
d2 + d2 + is not greater than 1.
1 2 ft fb
6.6.2.5 The following values of U and q, depending 7 DESIGN OF COMMON STEEL WIRE NAIL
upon plank thickness (t) in 6.6.2.3 and 6.6.2.4, shall JOINTS
be used:
7.1 General
t U q
Nail jointed timber construction is suitable for light
mm
and medium timber framings (trusses, etc) up to 15 m
25 0.80 1.00 spans. With the facilities of readily available materials
50 0.60 1.00 and simpler workmanship in mono-chord and split
chord constructions, this type of fabrication has a large
6.6.3 Spaced Columns scope.
6.6.3.1 The formulae for solid columns as specified 7.2 Dimensions of Members
in 6.6.1 are applicable to spaced columns with a
restraint factor of 2.5 or 3, depending upon distances 7.2.1 The dimension of an individual piece of timber
of end connectors in the column. (that is, any single member) shall be within the range
given below:
NOTE A restrained factor of 2.5 for location of centroid
group of fasteners at S/20 from end and 3 for location at S/10 a) The minimum thickness of the main members
to S/20 from end shall be taken. in mono-chord construction shall be 30 mm.
6.6.3.2 For intermediate spaced column, the b) The minimum thickness of an individual piece
permissible compressive stress shall be: of members in split-chord construction shall
The fabrication of nail-jointed timber construction shall 8.3.1.1 The deflection in the case of nailed laminated
be done in accordance with good practice [6-3A(7)]. timber beams, joists, purlins, battens and other flexural
members supporting brittle materials like gypsum,
8 DESIGN OF NAIL LAMINATED TIMBER ceiling slates, tiles and asbestos sheets shall not exceed
BEAMS 1/480 of the span. The deflection in case of other
8.1 Method of Arrangement flexural members shall not exceed 1/360 of the span
in the case of beams and joists, and 1/225 of the freely
8.1.1 The beam is made up of 20 mm to 30 mm thick hanging length in case of cantilevers.
planks placed vertically with joints staggered in the
adjoining planks with a minimum distance of 300 mm. 8.3.2 Permissible lateral strength of mild steel wire
The planks are laminated with the help of wire nails at nails shall be as given in Table 2 and Table 3 for Indian
regular intervals to take up horizontal shear developed Species of timber, which shall apply to nails that have
in the beam besides keeping the planks in position their points cut flush with the faces. For nails clenched
(see Fig. 5). across the grains the strength may be increased by 20
percent over the values for nails with points cut flush.
8.1.2 The advantage in laminations lies in dimensional
stability, dispersal of defects and better structural 8.3.3 Arrangement of Nails
performance. 8.3.3.1 A minimum number of four nails in a vertical
8.2 Sizes of Planks and Beams row at regular interval not exceeding 75 mm to take
up horizontal shear as well as to keep the planks in
8.2.1 The plank thickness for fabrication of nailed
position shall be used. Near the joints of the planks
laminated beams recommended are 20, 25 and 30 mm.
this distance may, however, be limited to 5 cm instead
8.2.2 In case of nailed laminated timber beam the of 75 mm.
Table 14 Number and Size of Planks and Nails for Nailed Laminated Beams
(Clause 8.2.3)
Sl Overall Width of Beam No. of Planks Thickness of Each Plank Type and Size of Nail to be Used
No. mm mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 50 2 25 80 long 3.55 dia
ii) 60 3 20 - do -
iii) 70 3 (2 25) - do -
(1 20)
iv) 80 4 20 100 long 4.0 dia
v) 90 3 30 - do -
vi) 100 4 25 125 long 5.0 dia
vii) 110 4 (3 30) - do -
(1 20)
viii) 120 4 30 - do -
ix) 150 5 30 150 long 5.0 dia
NOTE A number of combinations of the different thickness of planks may be adopted as long as the minimum and maximum
thickness of the planks are adhered to.
Strength of Improvized Split Ring Connectors in Mesua (Mesua ferra) (Pilot Study)
No. and No. and Size Side Central Load End Inter- Load per
Diameter of Bolt used in Member Member Direction Distance mediate Pair
of Ring a Joint w.r.t. Distance of
used in a Grains of Connector
Joint Wood
Lap Joint: Bolt in simple tension due to clockwise turning moment on dowel:
Butt Joint: No tilting moment in dowel due to balancing effect [dowels are in shear (no bending, shearing
and tensile stress on bolts)]
Size of dowel for equal strength in both shearing and bearing.
2
d /4 S = d t/2 c
where
d = Mid diameter of the dowel,
t = Thickness of dowel,
s = Safe working stress in shear along grain, and
c = Safe compressive stress along grain.
NOTE Symbols are exclusive to this figure.
100 31
112 37
125 37
62 25
75 25
87 25
Dowels
Sal Babul 680 1 000 1 360 1 815 2 270 2 810 11.2.1 In finger joints the glued surfaces are on the
Sal Sissoo 545 770 1 045 1 360 1 725 2 130
side grain rather than on the end grain and the glue
line is stressed in shear rather in tension.
11 GLUED LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 11.2.1.1 The figures can be cut from edge-to-edge or
AND FINGER JOINTS from face-to-face. The difference is mainly in
appearance, although bending strength increases if
11.1 Developments in the field of synthetic adhesive
several fingers share the load. Thus a joist is slightly
have brought glueing techniques within the range of
stronger with edge-to-edge finger joints and a plank is
engineering practice. Timber members of larger cross-
stronger with face-to-face finger joint.
sections and long lengths can be fabricated from small
sized planks by the process of gluelam. The term glued 11.2.1.2 For structural finger jointed members for
laminated timber construction as applied to structural interior dry locations, adhesives based on melamine
members refers to various laminations glued together, formaldehyde cross linked polyvinyl acetate (PVA) are
either in straight or curved form, having grain of all suited. For high humid and exterior conditions, phenol
laminations essentially parallel to the lengths of the formaldehyde and resorcinol formaldehyde type
member. adhesives are recommended. Proper adhesives should
be selected in consultation with the designer and
11.1.1 Choice of Glue
adhesive manufacturers and assessed in accordance
The adhesive used for glued laminated assembly are with accepted standard [6-3A(11)].
gap filling type. A filler in powder form is
11.2.2 Manufacturing Process
introduced in the adhesive. Structural adhesives are
supplied either in powder form to which water is added In the absence of sophisticated machinery, the finger
or in resin form to which a hardener or catalyst is added. joints shall be manufactured through intermediate
For choice of glues, reference may be made to good technology with the following steps:
practice [6-3A(11)]. However, it is important that only
a) Drying of wood,
boiling water proof (BWP) grade adhesives shall be
used for fabrication of gluelam in tropical, high humid b) Removal of knots and other defects,
climates like India. c) Squaring the ends of the laminating planks,
d) Cutting the profile of finger joint in the end
11.1.2 Manufacturing Schedule grain,
In absence of a systematic flow-line in a factory, e) Applying adhesives on the finger interfaces,
provisions of intermediate technology shall be created f) Pressing the joint together at specified pressure,
for manufacturing structural elements. The schedule g) Curing of adhesive line at specified
involves steps: temperature, and
a) Drying of planks; h) Planning of finger-jointed planks for smooth
b) Planning; surface.
c) End-jointing by scarfs or fingers; 11.2.3 Strength
d) Machining of laminations; Strength of finger joints depends upon the geometry
e) Setting up dry assembly of structural unit; of the profile for structural purpose; this is generally
f) Application of glue; 50 mm long, 12 mm pitch.
11.2.3.1 End joints shall be scattered in adjacent with fibre oriented along a specific direction have
laminations, which shall not be located in very highly been developed and are being adopted for load
stressed outer laminations. bearing applications. Laminated veneer lumber is one
11.2.4 Tip thickness will be as small as practically such product developed as a result of researches in
possible. plantation grown species of wood. Density of
laminated veneer lumber ranges from 0.6 to 0.75
12 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER which is manufactured in accordance with good
12.1 Certain reconstituted lignocellulosic products practice [6-3A(12)].
Trussed rafters require to be supported only at their accepted standard [6-3A(13)]. Introduction of a
ends so that there is no need to provide load bearing plywood gusset simplifies the jointing and in addition
internal walls, Purlins, etc are dispensed with and in provides rigidity to the joint. Preservation of plywood
comparison with traditional methods of construction and other panel products shall be done in accordance
they use less timber and considerably reduces of site with good practice [6-3A(14)].
labour, Mass production or reliable units can be carried
out under workshop controls. 16 STRUCTURAL SANDWICHES
Trussed rafter shall be designed to sustain the dead Sandwich constructions are composites of different
and imposed loads specified in Part 6 Structural materials including wood based materials formed by
Design: Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects and the bonding two thin facings of high strength material to a
combinations expected to occur. Extra stresses/ light weight core which provides a combination of
deflections during handling, transportation and erection desirable properties that are not attainable with the
shall be taken care of. Structural analysis, use of load- individual constituent materials (Fig. 14). The thin
slip and moment, rotation characteristics of the facings are usually of strong dense material since that
individual joints may be used if feasible. Alternatively are the principal load carrying members of the
the maximum direct force in a member may be assessed construction. The core must be stiff enough to ensure
to be given by an idealized pin-jointed framework, fully the faces remain at the correct distance apart. The
loaded with maximum dead and imposed load in the sandwiches used as structural elements in building
combination in which they may reasonably be expected construction shall be adequately designed for their
to occur. intended services and shall be fabricated only where
there are adequate facilities for glueing or otherwise
15.3 Timber bonding cores to facings to ensure a strong and durable
The species of timber including plantation grown product. The entire assembly provides a structural
species which can be used for trussed rafter element of high strength and stiffness in proportion to
construction and permissible stresses thereof shall be its mass.
in accordance with Table 1. Moisture contents to be as Non-structural advantages can also be derived by proper
per zonal requirements in accordance with 4.4. selection of facing and core material for example, an
impermeable facings can be used to serve as a moisture
15.4 Plywood
barrier for walls and roof panels and core may also be
Boiling water resistant (BWR) grade preservative selected to provide thermal and/or acoustic insulation,
treated plywood shall be used in accordance with fire resistance, etc, besides the dimensional stability.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards timber testing and their
in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The conversion (second revision)
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (3) 4970 : 1973 Key for identification of
of the enforcement of the Code. The standards commercial timbers (first
listed may be used by the Authority as a guide in revision)
conformance with the requirements of the referred (4) 287 : 1993 Recommendations for
clauses in the Code. maximum permissible
IS No. Title moisture content of timber
used for different purposes
(1) 707 : 1976 Glossary of terms applicable
(third revision)
to timber technology and
utilization (second revision) (5) 3629 : 1986 Specification for structural
timber in building (first
(2) 1708 Methods of testing small revision)
(Parts 1 to 18) : 1986 clear specimens of timber
(6) 401 : 2001 Code of practice for
(second revision)
preservation of timber
2408 : 1963 Methods of static tests of (fourth revision)
timbers in structural sizes
(7) 2366 : 1983 Code of practice for nail-
2455 : 1990 Methods of sampling of jointed timber construction
model trees and logs for (first revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 SYMBOLS 7
4 MATERIALS 7
5 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES 11
6 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 11
7 DESIGN AND TECHNIQUES OF JOINTS 13
8 STORAGE OF BAMBOO 20
LIST OF STANDARDS 23
FOREWORD
Bamboo is versatile resource characterized by high strength to weight ratio and ease in working with simple
tools. It has a long and well established tradition as a building material throughout the tropical and sub-tropical
regions. It is used in many forms of construction, particularly, for housing in rural areas. But, enough attention
had not been paid towards research and development in bamboo as had been in the case with other materials of
construction including timber. However, of late bamboo is being given its due importance and realization by
national and international organizations. A need is being felt for design and construction code in bamboo for a
number of social and trade advantages, engineering recognition and improved respectability. Forest Research
Institute, Dehra Dun and some other organizations have been engaged in bamboo research to establish its
silviculture, botanical nomenclature, entomological and pathological aspects and utilization base.
Some of the suitable species grown in India and neighbouring countries are enlisted in Annex A along with their
local names and source, for general information.
Analogous to some constructional timbers, bamboo possesses better strength-to-mass and cost ratio. Resilience
coupled with lightness makes bamboo suitable for housing in disaster-prone areas such as areas prone to earthquake.
It has the capacity to absorb more energy and show larger deflections before collapse and as such is safer under
earth tremors. At present, the application of bamboo as an engineering material is largely based on practical and
engineering experience as the design guidelines are inadequate.
The bamboo culm has a tubular structure consisting essentially of nodes and inter-nodes. In the inter-nodes the
cells are axially oriented while the nodes provide the transverse inter-connection. The disposition of the nodes
and the wall thickness are significant in imparting strength to bamboo against bending and crushing. In a circular
cross-section, bamboo is generally hollow and for structural purposes this form is quite effective and advantageous.
Each of the species of bamboo has widely different characteristics affecting its usefulness as constructional
material. The strength of bamboo culms, their straightness, lightness combined with hardness, range and size of
hollowness make them potentially suitable for a variety of applications both structural and non-structural. With
good physical and mechanical properties, low shrinkage and good average density, bamboo is well suited to
replace wood in several applications, especially in slats and panel form.
In the earlier version of this Code, timber was covered under Section 3 of Part 6 under the title Wood, which did
not cover Bamboo. In this revision, this Section has been enlarged and titled as Section 3 Timber and Bamboo.
This has been sub-divided into sub-section 3A Timber and sub-section 3B Bamboo. Bamboo has found a place
in this draft revision of the Code for the first time. This subsection pertains to bamboo and may be read in
conjunction with sub-section 3A Timber.
The information contained in this Section is largely based on the works carried out at Forest Research Institute,
Dehra Dun, Indian Plywood Industries Research and Training Institute, Bangalore, INBAR documents and the
following Indian Standards:
IS No. Title
6874 : 1973 Method of test for round bamboo
8242 : 1976 Method of test for split bamboo
9096 : 1979 Code of practice for preservation of bamboo for structural purposes
13958 : 1994 Specification for bamboo mat board for general purposes
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
Sl Species Properties
No.
In Green Condition In Air Dry Conditions
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
i) Bambusa auriculata 594 65.1 15.01 36.7 670 89.1 21.41 54.3
ii) B. balcooa 783 65.4 7.31 46.7
iii) B. bambos (Syn.B.arundinacea) 559 58.3 5.95 35.3 663 80.1 8.96 53.4
iv) B. burmanica 570 59.7 11.01 39.9 672 105.0 17.81 65.2
v) B. glancescens (Syn.B.nana) 691 82.8 14.77 53.9
vi) B. nutans 603 52.9 6.62 45.6 673 52.4 10.72 47.9
vii) B. pallida 731 55.2 12.90 54.0
viii) B. polymorpha 619 28.3 3.12 32.1 659 35.5 4.40
ix) B. tulda 658 51.1 7.98 40.7 722 66.7 10.07 68.0
x) B. ventricosa 626 34.1 3.38 36.1
xi) B. vulgaris 626 41.5 2.87 38.6
xii) Cephalostachyum pergracile 601 52.6 11.16 36.7 640 71.3 19.22 49.4
xiii) Dendrocalamus giganteous 597 17.2 0.61 35.2
xiv) D. hamiltonii 515 40.0 2.49 43.4
xv) D. longispathus 711 33.1 5.51 42.1 684 47.8 6.06 61.1
xvi) D. membranacaus 551 26.3 2.44 40.5 664 37.8 3.77
xvii) D. strictus 631 73.4 11.98 35.9 728 119.1 15.00 69.1
xviii) Melocanna baccifera 817 53.2 11.39 53.8 751 57.6 12.93 69.9
xix) Oxytenanthera abyssinicia 688 83.6 14.96 46.6
xx) Thyrsostachys oliveri 733 61.9 9.72 46.9 758 90.0 12.15 58.0
NOTES
1 As the strength of split bamboo is more than that of round bamboo, the results of tests on round bamboo can be safely used for designing with spit bamboo.
2 The values of stress in N/mm2 have been obtained by converting the values in kgf/cm2 by dividing the same by 10.
GROUP A
i) Bambusa glancescens (syn. B. nana) 20.7 3.28 15.4
ii) Dendrocalamus strictus 18.4 2.66 10.3
iii) Oxytenanthera abyssinicia 20.9 3.31 13.3
GROUP B
iv) Bambusa balcooa 16.4 1.62 13.3
v) B. pallida 13.8 2.87 15.4
vi) B. nutans 13.2 1.47 13.0
vii) B. tulda 12.8 1.77 11.6
viii) B. auriculata 16.3 3.34 10.5
ix) B. burmanica 14.9 2.45 11.4
x) Cephalostachyum pergracile 13.2 2.48 10.5
xi) Melocanna baccifera (Syn. M. bambusoides) 13.3 2.53 15.4
xii) Thyrsotachys oliveri 15.5 2.16 13.4
GROUP C
xiii) Bambusa arundinacea (Syn. B. bambos) 14.6 1.32 10.1
xiv) B. ventricosa 8.5 0.75 10.3
xv) B. vulgaris 10.4 0.64 11.0
xvi) Dendrocalamus longispathus 8.3 1.22 12.0
NOTE The values of stress in N/mm2 have been obtained by converting the values in kgf/cm2 by dividing the same by 10.
1)
The values given pertain to testing of bamboo in green condition.
bamboo increases exponentially and bamboo has an 4.3.2 Accelerated air seasoning method gives good
intersection point (fibre saturation point) at around 25 results. In this method, the nodal diaphragm (septa)
percent moisture content depending upon the species. are punctured to enable thorough passage of hot air
A typical moisture-strength relationship is given at from one end of the resulting bamboo tube to the other
Fig. 1. The moisture content of bamboo shall be end.
determined in accordance with good practice [6-3B(1)]. NOTE For details, reference may be made to relevant
Matured culms shall be seasoned to about 20 percent publications of Forest Research Institute, Dehra Dun.
moisture content before use.
4.4 Grading of Structural Bamboo
4.3.1 Air seasoning of split or half-round bamboo does
not pose much problem but care has to be taken to 4.4.1 Grading is sorting out bamboo on the basis of
prevent fungal discolouration and decay. However, characteristics important for structural utilization as
rapid drying in open sun can control decay due to under:
fungal and insect attack. Seasoning in round form a) Diameter and length of culm,
presents considerable problem for several of Indian b) Taper of culm,
species of bamboo as regards mechanical degrade due
c) Straightness of culm,
to drying defects.
d) Inter nodal length,
NOTE A general observation has been that immature bamboo
gets invariably deformed in cross-section during seasoning and
e) Wall thickness,
thick walled immature bamboo generally collapses. Thick f) Density and strength, and
mature bamboo tends to crack on the surface, with the cracks
g) Durability and seasoning.
originating at the nodes and at the decayed points. Moderately
thick immature and thin and moderately thick mature bamboos One of the above characteristics or sometimes
season with much less degrade. Bamboo having poor initial
condition on account of decay, borer holes, etc generally suffers
combination of 2 or 3 characteristics form the basis of
more drying degrades. grading. The culms shall be segregated species-wise.
4.4.2 Diameter and Length 4.4.2.2 The minimum length of culms shall be
preferably 6 m for facilitating close fittings at joints, etc.
4.4.2.1 Gradation according to the mean outer
diameter 4.4.3 Taper
For structural Group A and Group B species, culms The taper shall not be more than 5.8 mm per metre
shall be segregated in steps of 10 mm of mean outer length (or 0.58 percent) of bamboo in any grade of
diameter as follows: bamboo.
Special Grade 70 mm < Diameter < 100 mm 4.4.4 Curvature
Grade I 50 mm < Diameter < 70 mm The maximum curvature shall not be more than 75 mm
Grade II 30 mm < Diameter < 50 mm in a length of 6 m of any grade of bamboo.
Grade III Diameter < 30 mm
4.4.5 Wall Thickness
For structural Group C species culms shall be
segregated in steps of 20 mm of mean outer diameter Preferably minimum wall thickness of 8 mm shall be
used for load bearing members.
Grade I 80 mm < Diameter < 100 mm
Grade II 60 mm < Diameter < 80 mm 4.4.6 Defects and Permissible Characteristics
Grade III Diameter < 60 mm 4.4.6.1 Dead and immature bamboos, bore/GHOON
6.4.2 The worst combination and location of loads 6.6.4 The moment of inertia, I shall be determined as
shall be considered for design. Wind and seismic forces follows:
shall not be considered to act simultaneously. a) The outside diameter and the wall thickness
shall be measured at both ends, correct up to
6.5 Structural Forms
1 mm for diameter of culm and 0.1 mm for
6.5.1 Main structural components in bamboo may the wall thickness. (For each cross-section the
include roof and floor diaphragms, shear walls, wall diameter shall be taken twice, in direction
panellings, beams, piles, columns, etc. Both from the perpendicular to each other and so the wall
point of view of capacity and deformation, trusses and thickness shall be taken as four times, in the
framed skeltons are much better applications of same places as the diameter has been taken
bamboo. twice.)
6.5.2 Schematization of Bamboo as a Structural b) With these values the mean diameter and the
Material mean thickness for the middle of the beam
shall be calculated and moment of inertia
This shall be based on the principles of engineering determined.
mechanics involving the following assumptions and
practices: 6.6.4.1 The maximum bending stress shall be
calculated and compared with the allowable stress.
a) The elastic behaviour of bamboo, till failure;
(plastic behaviour being considered 6.6.4.2 The deflection shall be calculated, and
insignificant); compared with the allowable deflection. The initial
b) Bamboo culms are analysed on mean wall curvature shall be considered in the calculation of the
thickness basis as hollow tube structure (not deflection.
perfectly straight) member on mean diameter 6.6.4.3 The shear stress in the neutral layer at the small
basis; end shall be checked, if the length of the beam is less
6.7 Bamboo Columns (Predominantly Loaded in 6.8.4 The truss height shall exceed 0.15 times the span
Axial Direction) in case of a triangular truss (pitched roofing) and
0.10 times the span in case of a rectangular (parallel)
6.7.1 Columns and struts are essential components truss.
sustaining compressive forces in a structure. They
6.8.5 For members in compression, the effective
transfer load to the supporting media.
length for in-plane strength verification shall be
6.7.2 Design of columns shall be based on one of the taken as the distance between two adjacent points
following two criteria: of contraflexure. For fully triangulated trusses,
effective length for simple span members without
a) Full scale buckling tests on the same species,
especially rigid end-connection shall be taken as the
size and other relevant variables.
span length.
b) Calculations, based on the following:
1) The moment of inertia shall be as per 6.6.4. 6.8.6 For strength verification of members in
compression and connections, the calculated axial
2) For bamboo columns the best available
forces should be increased by 10 percent.
straight bamboo culms shall be selected.
Structural bamboo components in 6.8.7 The spacing of trusses shall be consistent with
compression should be kept under a use of bamboo purlins (2 m to 3 m).
slenderness ratio of 50. 6.8.8 The ends in open beams, joists, rafters, purlins
3) The bending stresses due to initial shall be suitably plugged. Bamboo roof coverings shall
curvature, eccentricities and induced be considered as non-structural in function. The
deflection shall be taken into account, in common roof covering shall include bamboo mat
addition to those due to any lateral board, bamboo mat corrugated sheet, bamboo tiles/
load. strings, plastered bamboo reeds, thatch, corrugated
6.7.3 Buckling calculation shall be according to Euler, galvanized iron sheeting, plain clay tiles or pan tiles,
with a reduction to 90 percent of moment of inertia, to etc.
take into account the effect of the taper provided it is 7 DESIGN AND TECHNIQUES OF JOINTS
not less than 0.6 percent.
7.1 Connecting the load-bearing elements together for
6.7.4 For strength and stability, larger diameter thick effective transfer of stress is one of the serious problems
walled sections of bamboo with closely spaced nodes confronted by the engineers. The size of the members
shall be used. Alternatively, smaller sections may be in a structure depends not only on the direct loads they
tied together as a bundle-column. are required carry, but also on the ability to join the
members together. Joints are quite critical in
6.8 Assemblies, Roof Trusses
assemblies, and these should be stable in relation to
6.8.1 Elements in structure are generally built-up in time. The main objective is to achieve continuity
the form of assembled members for which a triangle is between elements with controlled displacements. As
a simple figure of stability. Besides sloped chords, joints are a source of weakness in any bamboo
parallel chord construction is also appropriate as structure, they have to be made as strong and rigid as
external profile. possible.
(see Fig. 9). Such joints are also used to transmit angle Alternatively steel bands clamps with integral
thrust. bolt/eye may be fitted around bamboo
sections for jointing.
7.2.1.3 Angled joints
7.2.3 Fixing Methods and Fastening Devices
When two or more members meet or cross other than
at right angles, angled joints are formed. For butt joints, In case of butt joints the tie may be passed through a
the ends of the members may be shaped to fit in as pre-drilled hole or around hardwood or bamboo pegs
saddle joints. Tenons would help in strengthening such or dowels inserted into preformed holes to act as horns.
joints (see Fig. 10). Pegs are driven from one side, usually at an angle to
increase strength and dowels pass right through the
7.2.2 Modern Practices (see Fig. 11)
member, usually at right angles.
Following are some of the modern practices for
7.2.3.1 Normally 1.60 mm diameter galvanized iron
bamboo jointing:
wire may be used for tight lashing.
a) Plywood or solid timber gusset plates may be
used at joint assemblies of web and chord 7.2.3.2 Wire bound joints
connection in a truss and fixed with bamboo Usually galvanized iron 2.00 mm diameter galvanized
pins or bolts. Hollow cavities of bamboo need iron wire is tightened around the joints by binding the
to be stuffed with wooden plugs. respective pieces together. At least two holes are drilled
b) Use of wooden inserts to reinforce the ends in each piece and wire is passed through them for good
of the bamboo before forming the joints. results.
7.2.3.3 Pin and wire bound joints load and geometry, description of all fastening
elements, their sizes and location shall be indicated.
Generally 12 mm dia bamboo pins are fastened to
Data shall be based on full scale tests.
culms and bound by 2.00 mm diameter galvanized iron
wire. 7.2.5 Tests on full scale joints or on components shall
be carried out in a recognized laboratory.
7.2.3.4 Fish plates/gusset plated joints
7.2.6 In disaster high wind and seismic areas, good
At least 25 mm thick hardwood splice plate or 12 mm
construction practice shall be followed taking care of
thick structural grade plywood are used. Solid bamboo
joints, their damping and possible ductility. Bracings
pins help in fastening the assembly.
in walls shall be taken care of in bamboo structures.
7.2.3.5 Horned joints
8 STORAGE OF BAMBOO
Two tongues made at one end of culm may be fastened
Procurement and storage of bamboo stocks are
with a cross member with its mortise grooves to receive
essential for any project work and shall be done in
horns, the assembly being wire bound.
accordance with Part 7 Constructional Practices and
7.2.4 For any complete joint alternative for a given Safety.
NOTES
1 The following abbreviations have been used in the above table:
Asm Assam
Ben Bengali
Guj Gujarati
Hin Hindi
Kan Kannada
Mah Maharashtra
Manip Manipur
MP Madhya Pradesh
Nep Nepali
Sans Sanskrit
2 The above table does not provide an exhaustive list. It only attempts to enlist some of the information readily available in regard to
species of bamboo from India and some of the neighbouring countries, and some connected information.
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards
(1) 6874 : 1973 Method of test for round bamboo
in the fulfillment of the requirements of this Code. The
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (2) 9096 : 1979 Code of practice for preservation
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may of bamboo for structural purposes
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance (3) 6874 : 1973 Method of test for round bamboo
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
8242 : 1976 Method of test for split bamboo
Code.
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 MATERIALS 7
4 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 9
5 STRUCTURAL DESIGN 18
6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 22
7 SPECIAL CONSIDERATION IN EARTHQUAKE ZONES 24
8 GUIDELINES FOR IMPROVING EARTHQUAKE RESISTANCE OF 33
LOW STRENGTH MASONRY BUILDINGS
9 REINFORCED BRICK AND REINFORCED BRICK CONCRETE FLOORS 38
AND ROOFS
10 NOTATIONS AND SYMBOLS 38
LIST OF STANDARDS 42
FOREWORD
This Section primarily covers the structural design of unreinforced masonry elements in buildings. However,
provisions on reinforced brick and reinforced brick concrete floors and roofs have also been included.
This Section was first published in 1970 and revised in 1983. Subsequently the first revision of this Section was
modified in 1987 through Amendment No. 2 to bring this Section in line with the latest revised masonry Code. In
this amendment, certain provisions were updated following the revision of IS 1905 Code of practice for structural
use of unreinforced masonry on which the earlier version was based. In the amendment, requirements of masonry
element for stability were modified; in the design of free standing wall, provisions were made for taking advantage
of the tensile resistance in masonry under certain conditions; provision regarding effective height of masonry
wall between openings was modified; method of working out effective height of wall with a membrane type
DPC was modified; the criteria for working out effective length of wall having openings was modified; some
general guidelines for dealing with concentrated loads for design of walls were included; and provision of cutting
and chases in walls were amplified.
As a result of experience gained in the implementation of this Section and feedback received, as well as in view
of revision of IS 4326 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and construction of buildings and
formulation of some new standards in this field, a need to revise this Section has been felt. This revision has,
therefore, been prepared to take care of these aspects. The significant changes incorporated in this revision
include the following:
a) The provision of special considerations in earthquake zones have been aligned in line with IS 4326 : 1993.
b) A new clause covering guidelines for improving earthquake resistance of low strength masonry buildings
has been added.
c) Reference to design of reinforced brick and reinforced brick concrete floors and roofs has been included.
d) Reference to all the concerned Indian Standards have been updated.
Structural design requirements of this Section are based on IS 1905 : 1987 Code of practice for structural use of
unreinforced masony (third revision) and IS 4326 : 1993 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and
construction of buildings (second revision).
A reference to SP 20 : 1991 Handbook on masonry design and construction (first revision) may be useful.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
2.1 For the purpose of this Section, the following 2.1.8 Effective Thickness The thickness of a wall
definitions shall apply. or column to be considered for calculating slenderness
ratio.
2.1.1 Bed Block A block bedded on a wall, column
or pier to disperse a concentrated load on a masonry 2.1.9 Hollow Unit A masonry unit of which net
element. cross-sectional area in any plane parallel to the bearing
surface is less than 75 percent of its gross cross-
2.1.2 Bond Arrangement of masonry units in sectional area measured in the same plane.
successive courses to tie the masonry together both
longitudinally and transversely; the arrangement is 2.1.10 Grout Mortar of pourable consistency.
usually worked out to ensure that no vertical joint of 2.1.11 Joint A junction of masonry units.
one course is exactly over the one in the next course
above or below it, and there is maximum possible a) Bed joint A horizontal mortar joint upon
amount of lap. which masonry units are laid.
b) Cross joint A vertical joint, normal to the
2.1.3 Column, Pier and Buttress
face of the wall.
a) Column An isolated vertical load bearing c) Wall joint A vertical joint parallel to the
member, width of which does not exceed four face of the wall.
times the thickness.
2.1.12 Leaf Inner or outer section of a cavity wall.
b) Pier A thickened section forming integral
part of a wall placed at intervals along the 2.1.13 Lateral Support A support which enables a
wall, to increase the stiffness of the wall or to masonry element to resist lateral load and/or restrains
carry a vertical concentrated load. Thickness lateral deflection of a masonry element at the point of
of a pier is the overall thickness including the support.
thickness of the wall or, when bonded into a 2.1.14 Load Bearing Wall A wall designed to carry
leaf of a cavity wall, the thickness obtained an imposed vertical load in addition to its own weight,
by treating that leaf as an independent wall together with any lateral load.
(see Fig. 1).
2.1.15 Masonry An assemblage of masonry units
c) Buttress A pier of masonry built as an
properly bonded together with mortar.
integral part of wall and projecting from either
or both surfaces, decreasing in cross-sectional 2.1.16 Masonry Unit Individual units which are
area from base to top. bonded together with the help of mortar to form a
masonry element such as wall, column, pier, buttress,
2.1.4 Cross-Sectional Area of Masonry Unit Net
etc.
cross-sectional area of a masonry unit shall be taken
as the gross cross-sectional area minus the area of 2.1.17 Partition Wall An interior non-load bearing
cellular space. Gross cross-sectional area of cored units wall, one storey or part storey in height.
2.1.18 Panel Wall An exterior non-load bearing each leaf being built of masonry units and
wall in framed construction, wholly supported at each separated by a cavity and tied together with
storey but subjected to lateral loads. metal ties or bonding units to ensure that the
2.1.19 Shear Wall A wall designed to carry two leaves act as one structural unit, the space
horizontal forces acting in its plane with or without between the leaves being either left as
vertical imposed loads. continuous cavity or filled with a non-load
bearing insulating and water-proofing
2.1.20 Slenderness Ratio Ratio of effective height
material.
or effective length to effective thickness of a masonry
element. b) Faced wall A wall in which facing and
backing of two different materials are bonded
2.1.21 Types of Walls together to ensure common action under load
a) Cavity wall A wall comprising two leaves, (see Fig. 3).
NOTE To ensure monolithic action in faced walls, 3.2.1 Masonry units may be of the following types:
shear strength between the facing and the backing shall
be provided by toothing, bonding or other means. a) Common burnt clay building bricks,
c) Veneered wall A wall in which the facing b) Burnt clay fly ash building bricks,
is attached to the backing but not so bonded c) Pulverized fuel ash lime bricks,
as to result in a common action under load.
d) Stones (in regular sized units),
3 MATERIALS e) Sand-lime bricks,
3.1 General f) Concrete blocks (solid and hollow),
The materials used in masonry construction shall be g) Lime based blocks,
in accordance with Part 5 Building Materials. h) Burnt clay hollow blocks,
3.2 Masonry Units j) Gypsum partition blocks,
Masonry units used in construction shall conform to k) Autoclaved cellular concrete blocks, and
accepted standards [6-4(1)]. m) Concrete stone masonry blocks.
3(a) M1 1 0 0 5 5.0
3(b) 1 1 C or B 0 0 6 3.0
3(c) 0 0 1 (LP-40) 0 1 3.0
4(a) M2 1 0 0 0 6 3.0
4(b) 1 2B 0 0 9 2.0
4(c) 0 1A 0 0 2 2.0
4(d) 0 1B 0 1 1 2.0
4(e) 0 1 C or B 0 2 0 2.0
4(f) 0 0 1 (LP-40) 0 1 2.0
5(a) M3 1 0 0 0 7 1.5
5(b) 1 3B 0 0 12 1.5
5(c) 0 1A 0 0 3 1.5
5(d) 0 1B 0 2 1 1.5
5(e) 0 1 C or B 0 3 0 1.5
5(f) 0 0 1 (LP-40) 0 2 1.5
6(a) L1 1 0 0 0 8 0.7
6(b) 0 1B 0 1 2 0.7
6(c) 0 1 C or B 0 2 1 0.7
6(d) 0 0 1 (LP-40) 0 2 0.7
6(e) 0 0 1 (LP-20) 0 1 0.7
7(a) L2 0 1B 0 0 3 0.5
7(b) 0 1 C or B 0 1 2 0.5
7(c) 0 0 1 (LP-7) 0 1 0.5
NOTES
1 Sand for making mortar should be well graded. In case sand is not well graded, its proportion shall be reduced in order to achieve
the minimum specified strength.
2 For mixes in Sl No. 1 and 2, use of lime is not essential from consideration of strength as it does not result in increase in strength.
However, its use is highly recommended since it improves workability.
3 For mixes in Sl No. 3(a), 4(a), 5(a) and 6(a), either lime C or B to the extent of part of cement (by volume) or some plasticizer
should be added for improving workability.
4 For mixes in Sl No. 4(b) and 5(b), lime and sand should first be ground in mortar mill and then cement added to coarse stuff.
5 It is essential that mixes in Sl No. 4(c), 4(d), 4(e), 5(d), 5(e), 6(b), 6(c), 7(a) and 7(b) are prepared by grinding in a mortar mill.
6 Mix in Sl No. 2(b) has been classified to be of same grade as that of Sl No. 2(a), mixes in Sl No. 3(b) and 3(c) same as that in
Sl No. 3(a), mixes in Sl No. 4(b) to 4(f) same as that in Sl No. 4(a), even though their compressive strength is less. This is from
consideration of strength of masonry using different mix proportions.
7 A, B and C denote eminently hydraulic lime, semi-hydraulic lime and fat lime respectively, as specified in appropriate standards
listed in Part 5 Building Materials.
NOTE In case there is an opening taller than 0.5 H in a wall, ends of the wall at the opening shall be considered as free. Cross
walls shall conform to 4.2.2.1(d).
NOTES
1 The table is valid for slenderness ratio up to 6 and loading with zero eccentricity.
2 The values given for basic compressive stress are applicable only when the masonry is properly cured.
3 Linear interpolation is permissible for units having crushing strengths between those given in the table.
4 The permissible stress for random rubble masonry may be taken as 75 percent of the corresponding stress for coarsed walling of
similar materials.
5 The strength of ashlar masonry (natural stone masonry of massive type with thin joints) is closely related to intrinsic strength of the
stone and allowable working stress in excess of those given in the table may be allowed for such masonry at the discretion of the
designer.
6 For calculation of basic compressive stress of stabilized mud block having thickness 100 mm or more, reference to specialist
literature may be made.
NOTES
1 Linear interpolation between values is permitted.
2 Where in special cases the eccentricity of loading lies between 1/3 and 1/2 of the thickness of the member, the stress reduction
factor should vary linearly between unity and 0.20 for slenderness ratio of 6 and 20 respectively.
3 Slenderness ratio of a member for sections within 1/8 of the height of the member above or below a lateral support may be taken to
be 6.
Table 10 Shape Modification Factor tension shall be disregarded for computing the
for Masonry Units load carrying capacity of the member.
(Clause 5.4.1.3) NOTE When resultant eccentricity ratio of loading is
1/24 or less, compressive stress due to bending shall be
Height to Shape Modification Factor (kp) for Units ignored and only axial stress need be computed for the
Width Ratio Having Crushing Strength in N/mm2 is purpose of design.
of Units
(as Laid) 5.4.1.5 Increase in permissible compressive stress for
5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
walls subjected to concentrated loads
Up to 0.75 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 When a wall is subjected to a concentrated load (a load
1.0 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.0 being taken to be concentrated when area of supporting
1.5 1.5 1.3 1.2 1.1 wall equals or exceeds three times the bearing area),
2.0 to 4.0 1.8 1.5 1.3 1.2 certain increase in permissible compressive stress may
NOTE Linear interpolation between values is permissible. be allowed because of dispersal of the load. Since,
according to the present state of art, there is diversity
5.4.1.4 Increase in permissible compressive stresses of views in regard to manner and extent of dispersal,
allowed for eccentric vertical loads, lateral loads under design of walls subjected to concentrated loads may,
certain conditions therefore, be worked out as per the best judgement of
the designer. Some guidelines in this regard are given
In members subjected to eccentric and/or lateral loads, in Annex C.
increase in permissible compressive stress is allowed
as follows: 5.4.2 Permissible Tensile Stress
a) When resultant eccentricity ratio exceeds As a general rule, design of masonry shall be based on
1/24 but does not exceed 1/6, 25 percent the assumption that masonry is not capable of taking
increase in permissible compressive stress is any tension. However, in case of lateral loads normal
allowed in design. to the plane of wall, which causes flexural tensile stress,
b) When resultant eccentricity ratio exceeds as for example, panel, curtain partition and free
1/6, 25 percent increase in permissible stress standing walls, flexural tensile stresses as follows may
is allowed but the area of the section under be permitted in the design for masonry:
Workmanship has considerable effect on strength of Special provision shall be made to control or isolate
masonry and bad workmanship may reduce the strength thermal and other movements so that damage to the
of brick masonry to as low as half the intended strength. fabric of the building is avoided and its structural
The basic compressive stress values for masonry as sufficiency preserved. Design and installation of
given in Table 8 would hold good for commercially joints shall be done according to the appropriate
obtainable standards of workmanship with reasonable recommendations in accordance with good practice
degree of supervision. If the work is inadequately [6-4(5)].
supervised, strength should be reduced to three-fourth
6.5 Chases, Recesses and Holes
or less at the discretion of the designer.
6.5.1 Chases, recesses and holes are permissible in
6.3.2 Bedding of Masonry Units
masonry only if these do not impair strength and
Masonry units shall be laid on a full bed of mortar stability of the structure.
with frog, if any, upward such that cross-joints and
6.5.2 In masonry, designed by structural analysis, all
wall joints are completely filled with mortar. Masonry
chases, recesses and holes shall be considered in
units which are moved after initial placement shall
structural design and detailed in building plans.
be relaid in fresh mortar, discarding the disturbed
mortar. 6.5.3 When chases, recesses and holes have not been
considered in structural design and are not shown in
6.3.3 Bond
drawings, these may be provided, subject to the
Cross-joints in any course of one brick thick masonry constraints and precautions specified in 6.5.3.1
wall shall be not less than one-fourth of a masonry to 6.5.3.10.
unit in horizontal direction from the cross-joints in the
6.5.3.1 As far as possible, services should be planned
course below. In masonry walls more than one brick
with the help of vertical chases and use of horizontal
in thickness, bonding through the thickness of wall
chases should be avoided.
shall be provided by either header units or by other
equivalent means in accordance with good practice 6.5.3.2 For load bearing walls, depth of vertical and
[6-4(4)]. horizontal chases shall not exceed one-third and one-
sixth of the wall thickness respectively.
6.3.4 Verticality and Alignment
6.5.3.3 Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2 m in
All masonry shall be built true and plumb within the
any stretch of wall and shall not be located within
tolerances prescribed below; care shall be taken to keep
345 mm of an opening or within 230 mm of a cross
the perpends properly aligned:
wall that serves as a stiffening wall for stability. Width
a) Deviation from vertical within a storey shall of a vertical chase shall not exceed thickness of wall
not exceed 6 mm per 3 m height. in which it occurs.
6.5.3.10 Chases, recesses or holes shall not be cut into Bricks/Blocks as per the accepted standards [6-4(1)]
walls made of hollow or perforated units, after the units having a crushing strength not less than 3.5 MPa shall
have been incorporated in masonry. be used. However, higher strength of masonry units
may be required depending upon number of storeys
6.6 Corbelling and thickness of walls in accordance with provisions
of this Section.
6.6.1 Where corbelling is required for the support
of some structural element, maximum projection of 7.3 Mortar
masonry unit should not exceed one-half of the
height of the unit or one-half of the built-in part of 7.3.1 Mortars, such as those given in Table 13 or of
the unit and the maximum horizontal projection of equivalent specification, shall preferably be used for
the corbel should not exceed one-third of the wall masonry construction for various categories of
thickness. buildings.
A M2 (Cement-sand 1:6) or
M3 (Lime-cinder 3) 1:3) or richer
B, C M2 (Cement-lime-sand 1:2:9 or
Cement-sand 1:6) or richer
D, E H2 (Cement-sand 1:4) or
M1 (Cement-lime-sand 1:1:6) or richer
No. of Storeys Storey Diameter of HSD Single Bar in mm at Each Critical Section
Four Top 10 10 10
Third 10 10 12 Four storeyed
Second 10 12 16 building not
Bottom 12 12 20 permitted
NOTES
1 The diameters given above are for high strength deformed steel bars. For mild steel plain bars, use equivalent diameters as given in
Table 16 (Note 2).
2 The vertical bars will be covered with concrete M 15 or mortar 1:3 grade in suitably created pockets around the bars. This will
ensure their safety from corrosion and good bond with masonry.
3 In case of floors/roofs with small precast components, also refer good practice [6-4(8)] for floor/roof band details.
For earthquake resistant framed wall construction, beams are located at all floors, roof as well as lintel
(see 7.7). No vertical steel need be provided in levels of the openings. The sequence of construction
category A buildings. between walls and columns will be first to build the
wall up to 4 to 6 courses height leaving toothed gaps
7.6.8.1 The vertical reinforcement shall be properly
(tooth projection being about 40 mm only) for the
embedded in the plinth masonry of foundations and
columns and second to pour M15 (1:2:4) concrete to
roof slab or roof band so as to develop its tensile
fill the columns against the walls using wood forms
strength in bond. It shall be passing through the lintel
only on two sides. The column steel should be
bands and floor level bands in all storeys.
accurately held in position all along. The band
Bars in different storeys may be welded or suitably concrete should be cast on the wall masonry directly
lapped. so as to develop full bond with it.
NOTE Typical details of providing vertical steel in Such construction may be limited to only two storeys
brickwork masonry with rectangular solid units at corners and maximum in view of its vertical load carrying capacity.
T-junctions are shown in Fig. 20.
The horizontal length of walls between cross walls shall
7.6.9 Vertical reinforcement at jambs of window and be restricted to 7 m and the storey height to 3 m.
door openings shall be provided as per Table 17. It
may start from foundation of floor and terminate in 7.8 Reinforcing Details for Hollow Block Masonry
lintel band (see Fig. 21). The following details may be followed in placing the
horizontal and vertical steel in hollow block masonry
7.7 Framing of Thin Load Bearing Walls (see
using cement-sand or cement-concrete blocks.
Fig. 21)
7.8.1 Horizontal Band
Load bearing walls can be made thinner than 200 mm
say 150 mm inclusive of plastering on both sides. U-shaped blocks may be used for construction of
Reinforced concrete framing columns and collar horizontal bands in various levels of the storeys as
beams will be necessary to be constructed to have shown in Fig. 22, where the amount of horizontal
full bond with the walls. Columns are to be located at reinforcement shall be taken 25 percent more than that
all corners and junctions of walls and spaced not more given in Table 16 and provided by using four bars and
than 1.5 m apart but so located as to frame up the 6 mm dia stirrups. Other continuity details shall be
doors and windows. The horizontal bands or ring followed, as shown in Fig. 19.
8.2.2 The mortar should be lime-sand (1:3) or clay a) For Categories A, B and C three storeys
mud of good quality. Where horizontal steel is used with flat roof; and two storeys plus attic for
between courses, cement-sand mortar (1:3) should be pitched roof.
used with thickness so as to cover the steel with 6 mm b) For Category D two storeys with flat roof;
mortar above and below it. Where vertical steel is used, and one storey plus attic for pitched roof.
the surrounding brickwork of 1 1 or 1 1 brick
size depending on wall thickness should preferably be 8.2.5 Special Bond in Brick Walls
built using 1:6 cement-sand mortar.
For achieving full strength of masonry, the usual
8.2.3 The minimum wall thickness shall be one brick bonds specified for masonry should be followed so
in one storey construction, and one brick in top storey that the vertical joints are broken properly from course
and 1 brick in bottom storeys of up to three storey to course. To obtain full bond between perpendicular
construction. It should also not be less than 1/16 of the walls, it is necessary to make a sloping (stepped)
length of wall between two consecutive perpendicular joint by making the corners first to a height of
walls. 600 mm and then building the wall in between them.
8.2.4 The height of the building shall be restricted to Otherwise the toothed joint should be made in both
the following, where each storey height shall not the walls, alternatively in lifts of about 450 mm (see
exceed 3.0 m: Fig. 14).
8.4.3 Where openings do not comply with the Table 19 Strengthening Arrangements
guidelines of Table 18, they should be strengthened Recommended for Low Strength
by providing reinforced concrete lining as shown in Masonry Buildings
Fig. 16 with 2 high strength deformed steel bars of (Clause 8.5.1)
8 mm diameter.
Building Category Number of Storeys Strengthening to
8.4.4 The use of arches to span over the openings is a be Provided
source of weakness and shall be avoided, otherwise, (1) (2) (3)
steel ties should be provided.
A 1 b, c, f, g
2 and 3 b, c, f, g
8.5 Seismic Strengthening Arrangements
B 1 and 2 b, c, f, g
8.5.1 All buildings to be constructed of masonry shall 3 b, c, d, f, g
be strengthened by the methods as specified for various (see Note 1)
categories of buildings, listed in Table 19 and detailed C 1 b, c, f, g
in subsequent clauses. Fig. 17 and Fig. 18 show, 2 and 3 b, c, d, f, g
D 1 and 2 b, c, d, f, g
schematically, the overall strengthening arrangements
to be adopted for category D buildings, which consist Strengthening Method
of horizontal bands of reinforcement at critical levels b Lintel band (see 8.5.2)
and vertical reinforcing bars at corners and junctions c Roof band and gable band where necessary (see 8.5.3
of walls. and 8.5.4)
d Vertical steel at corners and junctions of walls
8.5.2 Lintel band is a band provided at lintel level on (see 8.5.7)
all internal and external longitudinal as well as cross f Bracing in plan at tie level of pitched roofs (see
walls except partition walls. The details of the band Note 2)
are given in 8.5.5. g Plinth band where necessary (see 8.5.6)
No. of Storey Diameter of HSD Single Bar; in mm, at Each Critical Section for
Storeys
Category A Category B Category C Category D
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
One Nil Nil Nil 10
Two Top Nil Nil 10 10
Bottom Nil Nil 10 12
Three Top Nil 10 10 10
Middle Nil 10 10 12
Bottom Nil 12 12 12
NOTES
1 The diameters given above are for High Strength Deformed bars with yield strength 415 MPa. For mild steel plain bars, use
equivalent diameters.
2 The vertical bars should be covered with concrete of M15 grade or with mortar 1:3 (cement-sand) in suitably created pockets around
the bars. This will ensure their safety from corrosion and good bond with masonry.
3 For category B two storey stone masonry buildings, see Note 1 under Table 19.
of 600 mm (see Fig. 27). The pipe is kept loose by rotating it reinforced brick concrete floors and roof shall be in
during masonry construction. It is then raised and the cavity accordance with good practices [6-4(10)].
below is filled with M15 (or 1:2:4) grade of concrete mix and
rodded to compact it.
10 NOTATIONS AND SYMBOLS
9 REINFORCED BRICK AND REINFORCED The various notations and letter symbols used in the
BRICK CONCRETE FLOORS AND ROOFS text of this Section of the Code shall have the meaning
The construction and design of reinforced brick and as given in Annex E.
A-4 Interior walls carrying continuous floors are A-7 For a wall corbel to support some load, the point
assumed to be axially loaded except when carrying of application of the load shall be assumed to be at the
very flexible floor or roof systems. The assumption is centre of the bearing on the corbel.
ANNEX B
(Clause 5.4.1)
CALCULATION OF BASIC COMPRESSIVE STRESS OF
MASONRY BY PRISM TEST
B-1 DETERMINATION OF COMPRESSIVE of mortar joints and workmanship shall be the same
STRENGTH OF MASONRY BY PRISM TEST as will be used in the structure. Assembled specimen
shall be at least 400 mm high and shall have a height
When compressive strength of masonry ( fm ) is to be
established by tests, it shall be done in advance of to thickness ratio (h/t) of at least 2 but not more than
the construction, using prisms built of similar 5. If the h/t ratio of the prisms tested is less than 5 in
materials under the same conditions with the same case of brickwork and more than 2 in case of
bonding arrangement as for the structure. In building blockwork, compressive strength values indicated by
the prisms, moisture content of the units at the time the tests shall be corrected by multiplying with the
of laying, the consistency of the mortar, the thickness factor indicated in Table 21.
1)
Interpolation is valid for intermediate values. Basic compressive stress of masonry shall be
taken to be equal to 0.25 f 'm where f 'm is the value of
Prisms shall be tested after 28 days between sheets of compressive strength of masonry as obtained from
nominal 4 mm plywood, slightly longer than the bed prism test.
ANNEX C
(Clauses 5.3.3 and 5.4.1.5)
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF MASONRY SUBJECTED TO
CONCENTRATED LOADS
ANNEX E
(Clause 10)
NOTATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
E-1 The following notations, letter symbols and kp = Shape modification factor
abbreviations shall have the meaning indicated against ks = Stress reduction factor
each, unless otherwise specified in the text of this L = Actual length of wall
Section of the Code:
L1, L2 = Lower strength mortars
A = Area of a section M1, M2 = Medium strength mortars
b = Width of bearing P = Total horizontal load
DPC = Damp proof course PL = Plinth level
e = Resultant eccentricity RCC = Reinforced cement concrete
fb = Basic compressive stress RS = Rolled steel
fc = Permissible compressive stress Sp = Spacing of piers/buttresses/cross walls
fd = Compressive stress due to dead loads SR = Slenderness ratio
fs = Permissible shear stress t = Actual thickness
fm = Compressive strength of masonry (in tp = Thickness of pier
prism test) tw = Thickness of wall
GL = Ground level W = Resultant load
H = Actual height between lateral supports W1 = Axial load
H = Height of opening W2 = Eccentric load
H1, H2 = High strength mortars wp = Width of piers/buttresses/cross walls
h = Effective height between lateral = Ratio of flexural strength of wall in
supports the vertical direction to that in the
ka = Area factor horizontal direction.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards (1) 1077 : 1992 Specification for common
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The burnt clay building bricks
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (fifth revision)
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may 2180 : 1988 Specification for heavy duty
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance burnt clay building bricks
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the (third revision)
Code.
2185 Specification for concrete
In the following list, the number appearing in the first masonry units:
column within parentheses indicates the number of the (Part 1) : 1979 Hollow and solid concrete
reference in this Part/Section. blocks (second revision)
FOREWORD 5
1 SCOPE 7
2 TERMINOLOGY 7
3 SYMBOLS 7
4 MATERIALS 8
5 CONCRETE 11
6 WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE 12
7 DURABILITY OF CONCRETE 12
8 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING 17
9 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE 18
10 FORMWORK 20
11 ASSEMBLY OF REINFORCEMENT 21
12 TRANSPORTING, PLACING, COMPACTION AND CURING 22
13 CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS 23
14 SAMPLING AND STRENGTH OF DESIGNED CONCRETE MIX 24
15 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 25
16 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES 25
27 CONCRETE CORBELS 45
28 DEEP BEAMS 46
29 RIBBED, HOLLOW BLOCK OR VOIDED SLAB 47
30 FLAT SLABS 48
LIST OF STANDARDS 88
FOREWORD
Section 5 of Part 6 of the Code covers plain and reinforced concrete as also the prestressed concrete. The Section
has been subdivided into the following sub-sections:
5 A Plain and Reinforced Concrete
5 B Prestressed Concrete
This sub-section 5A covers the structural design aspects of plain and reinforced concrete.
This sub-section 5A was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983, to bring it in line with
revised version of IS 456 : 1978 on which this chapter was based. Now this revision is intended to bring this
subsection in line with the revised version of IS 456 : 2000.
This revision incorporates a number of important changes. The major thrust in the revision is on the following lines:
a) In recent years, durability of concrete structures have become the cause of concern to all concrete
technologists. This has led to codify the durability requirements world over. In this revision of the
Code, in order to introduce in-built protection from factors affecting a structure, earlier clause on durability
has been elaborated and a detailed clause covering different aspects of design of durable structure has
been incorporated.
b) Sampling and acceptance criteria for concrete have been revised. With this revision acceptance criteria
has been simplified in line with the provisions given in BS 5328 (Part 4) : 1990 Concrete: Part 4
Specification for the procedures to be used in sampling, testing and assessing compliance of concrete.
Some of the significant changes incorporated in Section 5A (b) are as follows:
a) All the three grades of ordinary Portland cement, namely 33 grade, 43 grade and 53 grade and sulphate
resisting Portland cement have been included in the list of types of cement used (in addition to other
types of cement).
b) The permissible limits for solids in water have been modified keeping in view the durability requirements.
c) The clause on admixtures has been modified in view of the availability of new types of admixtures
including superplasticizers.
d) In Table 2 Grades of Concrete, grades higher than M 40 have been included.
e) It has been recommended that minimum grade of concrete shall be not less than M 20 in reinforced
concrete work (see also 5.1.3).
f) The formula for estimation of modulus of elasticity of concrete has been revised.
g) In the absence of proper correlation between compacting factor, vee-bee time and slump, workability
has now been specified only in terms of slump in line with the provisions in BS 5328 (Parts 1 to 4).
h) Durability clause has been enlarged to include detailed guidance concerning the factors affecting
durability. The table on Environmental Exposure Conditions has been modified to include very severe
and extreme exposure conditions. This clause also covers requirements for shape and size of member,
depth of concrete cover, concrete quality, requirement against exposure to aggressive chemical and
sulphate attack, minimum cement requirement and maximum water cement ratio, limits of chloride
content, alkali silica reaction, and importance of compaction, finishing and curing.
j) A clause on Quality Assurance Measures has been incorporated to give due emphasis to good practices
of concreting.
k) Proper limits have been introduced on the accuracy of measuring equipments to ensure accurate batching
of concrete.
m) The clause on Construction Joints has been modified.
n) The clause on Inspection has been modified to give more emphasis on quality assurance.
4.3 Aggregates Water use for mixing and curing shall be clean and
free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts,
Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of sugar, organic materials or other substances that may
accepted standards [6-5A(7)]. As far as possible be deleterious to concrete or steel.
preference shall be given to natural aggregates.
Potable water is generally considered satisfactory
4.3.1 Other types of aggregates such as slag and for mixing concrete. As a guide the following
crushed overburnt brick or tile, which may be found concentrations represent the maximum permissible
suitable with regard to strength, durability of concrete values:
and freedom from harmful effects may be used for plain
concrete members, but such aggregates should not a) To neutralize 100 ml sample of water, using
contain more than 0.5 percent of sulphates as SO3 and phenolphthalein as an indicator, it should not
should not absorb more than 10 percent of their own require more than 5 ml of 0.02 normal NaOH.
mass of water. The details of test are given in 7.1 of good
practice [6-5A(8)].
4.3.2 Heavy weight aggregates or light weight
b) To neutralize 100 ml sample of water, using
aggregates such as bloated clay aggregates and sintered
fly ash aggregates may also be used provided the mixed indicator, it should not require more
engineer-in-charge is satisfied with the data on the than 25 ml of 0.02 normal H2SO4. The details
properties of concrete made with them. of test shall be as given in 7 of good practice
[6-5A(8)].
NOTE Some of the provisions of the Code would require
modification when these aggregates are used; specialist c) Permissible limits for solids shall be as given
literature may be consulted for guidance. in Table 1.
The shape or design details of exposed structures Where freezing and thawing actions under wet
should be such as to promote good drainage of water conditions exist, enhanced durability can be obtained
and to avoid standing pools and rundown of water. by the use of suitable air entraining admixtures. When
Care should also be taken to minimize any cracks that concrete lower than grade M 50 is used under these
may collect or transmit water. Adequate curing is conditions, the mean total air content by volume of
essential to avoid the harmful effects of early loss of the fresh concrete at the time of delivery into the
moisture (see 12.5). Member profiles and their construction should be:
intersections with other members shall be designed and
Nominal Maximum Size Entrained Air
detailed in a way to ensure easy flow of concrete and
Aggregate (mm) Percentage
proper compaction during concreting.
20 51
Concrete is more vulnerable to deterioration due to
40 41
chemical or climatic attack when it is in thin sections,
in sections under hydrostatic pressure from one side
Since air entrainment reduces the strength, suitable
only, in partially immersed sections and at corners and
adjustments may be made in the mix design for
edges of elements. The life of the structure can be
achieving required strength.
lengthened by providing extra cover to steel, by
chamfering the corners or by using circular cross- 7.2.2.4 Exposure to sulphate attack
sections or by using surface coatings which prevent or
Table 4 gives recommendations for the type of cement,
reduce the ingress of water, carbon dioxide or
maximum free water/cement ratio and minimum
aggressive chemicals.
cement content, which are required at different sulphate
i) 1 Traces Less Less Ordinary Portland cement or Portland slag 280 0.55
(<0.2) than 1.0 than 0.3 cement or Portland pozzolana cement
ii) 2 0.2 to 0.5 1.0 to 1.9 0.3 to 1.2 Ordinary Portland cement or Portland slag 330 0.50
cement or Portland pozzolana cement
Supersulphated cement or sulphate resisting 310 0.50
Portland cement
iii) 3 0.5 to 1.0 1.9 to 3.1 1.2 to 2.5 Supersulphated cement or sulphate resisting 330 0.50
Portland cement
Portland pozzolana cement or Portland slag 350 0.45
cement
iv) 4 1.0 to 2.0 3.1 to 5.0 2.5 to 5.0 Supersulphated or sulphate resisting Portland 370 0.45
cement
v) 5 More More More Sulphate resisting Portland cement or 400 0.40
than 2.0 than 5.0 than 5.0 supersulphated cement with protective coatings
NOTES
1 Cement content given in this table is irrespective of grades of cement.
2 Use of supersulphated cement is generally restricted where the prevailing temperature is above 40C.
3 Supersulphated cement gives an acceptable life provided that the concrete is dense and prepared with a water-cement ratio of 0.4
or less, in mineral acids, down to pH 3.5.
4 The cement contents given in col 6 of this table are the minimum recommended. For SO3 contents near the upper limit of any class,
cement contents above these minimum are advised.
5 For severe conditions, such as thin sections under hydrostatic pressure on one side only and sections partly immersed, considerations
should be given to a further reduction of water-cement ratio.
6 Portland slag cement conforming to accepted standard [6-5A(3)] with slag content more than 50 percent exhibits better sulphate
resisting properties.
7 Where chloride is encountered along with sulphates in soil or ground water, ordinary Portland cement with C3A content from 5
to 8 percent shall be desirable to be used in concrete, instead of sulphate resisting cement. Alternatively, Portland slag cement
conforming to accepted standard [6-5A(3)] having more than 50 percent slag or a blend of ordinary Portland cement and slag may be
used provided sufficient information is available on performance of such blended cements in these conditions.
concentrations in near-neutral ground water having pH 7.2.3.2 The nominal cover to the reinforcement shall
of 6 to 9. be provided as per 25.4.
For the very high sulphate concentrations in Class 5 7.2.4 Concrete Mix Proportions
conditions, some form of lining such as polyethylene
or polychloroprene sheet; or surface coating based on 7.2.4.1 General
asphalt, chlorinated rubber, epoxy; or polyurethane
The free water-cement ratio is an important factor in
materials should also be used to prevent access by the
governing the durability of concrete and should always
sulphate solution.
be the lowest value. Appropriate values for minimum
7.2.3 Requirement of Concrete Cover cement content and the maximum free water-cement
7.2.3.1 The protection of the steel in concrete against ratio are given in Table 5 for different exposure
corrosion depends upon an adequate thickness of good conditions. The minimum cement content and
quality concrete. maximum water-cement ratio apply to 20 mm nominal
Minimum Maximum Free Minimum Grade Minimum Maximum Free Minimum Grade
Cement Content Water-Cement of Concrete Cement Content Water-Cement of Concrete
kg/m3 Ratio kg/m3 Ratio
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Mild 220 0.60 300 0.55 M 20
ii) Moderate 240 0.60 M 15 300 0.50 M 25
iii) Severe 250 0.50 M 20 320 0.45 M 30
iv) Very Severe 260 0.45 M 20 340 0.45 M 35
v) Extreme 280 0.40 M 25 360 0.40 M 40
NOTES
1 Cement content prescribed in this table is irrespective of the grades of cement and it is inclusive of additions mentioned in 4.2. The
additions such as fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag may be taken into account in the concrete composition with respect
to the cement content and water-cement ratio if the suitability is established and as long as the maximum amounts taken into account
do not exceed the limit of pozzolana and slag specified in accordance with accepted standard [6-5A(19)].
2 Minimum grade for plain concrete under mild exposure condition is not specified.
maximum size aggregate. For other sizes of aggregate higher the chloride content, or if subsequently exposed
they should be changed as given in Table 6. to warm moist conditions, the greater the risk of
corrosion. All constituents may contain chlorides and
Table 6 Adjustments to Minimum Cement concrete may be contaminated by chlorides from the
Contents for Aggregates Other Than 20 mm external environment. To minimize the chances of
Nominal Maximum Size deterioration of concrete from harmful chemical salts,
(Clause 7.2.4.1) the levels of such harmful salts in concrete coming
from concrete materials, that is, cement, aggregates
Sl Nominal Maximum Adjustments to Minimum Cement water and admixtures, as well as by diffusion from the
No. Aggregate Size Contents Given in Table 5
environment should be limited. The total amount of
mm kg/m3
chloride content (as Cl) in the concrete at the time of
(1) (2) (3)
placing shall be as given in Table 7.
i) 10 + 40
ii) 20 0 The total acid soluble chloride content should be
iii) 40 30 calculated from the mix proportions and the measured
chloride contents of each of the constituents. Wherever
7.2.4.2 Maximum cement content possible, the total chloride content of the concrete
Cement content not including fly ash and ground should be determined.
granulated blast furnace slag in excess of 450 kg/m3 Table 7 Limits of Chloride Content of Concrete
should not be used unless special consideration has
(Clause 7.2.5.2)
been given in design to the increased risk of cracking
due to drying shrinkage in thin sections, or to early Sl Type or Use of Concrete Maximum Total Acid
thermal cracking and to the increased risk of damage No. Soluble Chloride
due to alkali silica reactions. Content Expressed as
kg/m3 of Concrete
7.2.5 Mix Constituents (1) (2) (3)
7.2.5.1 General i) Concrete containing metal and 0.4
steam cured at elevated
For concrete to be durable, careful selection of the mix temperature and prestressed
and materials is necessary, so that deleterious concrete
constituents do not exceed the limits. ii) Reinforced concrete or plain 0.6
concrete containing embedded
7.2.5.2 Chlorides in concrete metal
iii) Concrete not containing 3.0
Whenever there is chloride in concrete there is an embedded metal or any material
increased risk of corrosion of embedded metal. The requiring protection from chloride
Grade of Total Quantity of Dry Aggregates by Proportion of Fine Aggregate to Quantity of Water per
Concrete Mass per 50 kg of Cement, to be Coarse Aggregate 50 kg of Cement,
Taken as the Sum of the Individual (by Mass) Max
Masses of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates, kg,
Max
(1) (2) (3) (4)
M5 800 Generally 1:2 but subject to an upper 60
M 7.5 625 limit of 1:1 and a lower limit of 1:2 45
M 10 480 34
M 15 330 32
M 20 250 30
NOTE The proportion of the fine to coarse aggregates should be adjusted from upper limit to lower limit progressively as the
grading of fine aggregates becomes finer and the maximum size of coarse aggregate becomes larger. Graded coarse aggregate shall be
used.
Example
For an average grading of fine aggregate (that is, Zone II of Table 4 of IS 383), the proportions shall be 1:1, 1:2 and 1:2 for
maximum size of aggregates 10 mm, 20 mm and 40 mm respectively.
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable Where high shear resistance is required at the
in its final position to avoid rehandling. The concrete construction joints, shear keys may be provided.
shall be placed and compacted before initial setting of Sprayed curing membranes and release agents should
concrete commences and should not be subsequently be thoroughly removed from joint surfaces.
disturbed. Methods of placing should be such as to
preclude segregation. Care should be taken to avoid 12.5 Curing
displacement of reinforcement or movement of
Curing is the process of preventing the loss of moisture
formwork. As a general guidance, the maximum
from the concrete whilst maintaining a satisfactory
permissible free fall of concrete may be taken as 1.5 m.
temperature regime. The prevention of moisture loss
12.3 Compaction from the concrete is particularly important if the water-
cement ratio is low, if the cement has a high rate of
Concrete should be thoroughly compacted and fully strength development, if the concrete contains
worked around the reinforcement, around embedded granulated blast furnace slag or pulverized fuel ash.
fixtures and into corners of the formwork. The curing regime should also prevent the development
12.3.1 Concrete shall be compacted using mechanical of high temperature gradients within the concrete.
vibrators complying with accepted standard The rate of strength development at early ages of
[6-5A(28)]. Over vibration and under vibration of concrete made with supersulphated cement is
concrete are harmful and should be avoided. Vibration significantly reduced at lower temperatures.
of very wet mixes should also be avoided. Supersulphated cement concrete is seriously affected
Whenever vibration has to be applied externally, the by inadequate curing and the surface has to be kept
design of formwork and the disposition of vibrators moist for at least seven days.
should receive special consideration to ensure efficient 12.5.1 Moist Curing
compaction and to avoid surface blemishes.
Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be kept continuously
12.4 Construction Joints and Cold Joints in a damp or wet condition by ponding or by covering
with a layer of sacking, canvas, hessian or similar
Joints are a common source of weakness and, therefore,
materials and kept constantly wet for at least seven
it is desirable to avoid them. If this is not possible,
days from the date of placing concrete in case of
their number shall be minimized. Concreting shall be
ordinary Portland Cement and at least 10 days where
carried out continuously up to construction joints, the
mineral admixtures or blended cements are used. The
position and arrangement of which shall be indicated
period of curing shall not be less than 10 days for
by the designer. Construction joints should comply
concrete exposed to dry and hot weather conditions.
with accepted standard [6-5A(29)].
In the case of concrete where mineral admixtures or
Construction joints shall be placed at accessible blended cements are used, it is recommended that
locations to permit cleaning out of laitance, cement above minimum periods may be extended to 14 days.
slurry and unsound concrete, in order to create rough/
12.5.2 Membrane Curing
uneven surface. It is recommended to clean out laitance
and cement slurry by using wire brush on the surface Approved curing compounds may be used in lieu of
14.4 Test Results of Sample For the individual test result requirements given in col 3
of Table 11 or in 15.2 (b), only the particular batch
The test results of the sample shall be the average of from which the sample was taken shall be at risk.
the strength of three specimens. The individual
variation should not be more than 15 percent of the Where the mean rate of sampling is not specified the
average. If more, the test results of the sample are maximum quantity of concrete that four consecutive
invalid. test results represent shall be limited to 60 m3.
Specified Grade Mean of the Group of 4 Non-Overlapping Consecutive Individual Test Results
Test Results in N/mm2 in N/mm2
(1) (2) (3)
M 15 > fck + 0.825 established standard deviation (rounded off to nearest 0.5 N/mm2) > fck 3 N/mm2
or
fck + 3 N/mm2, whichever is greater
M 20 or above > fck + 0.825 established standard deviation (rounded off to nearest 0.5 N/mm2) > fck 4 N/mm2
or
fck + 4 N/mm2, whichever is greater
NOTE In the absence of established value of standard deviation, the values given in Table 8 may be assumed, and attempt should
be made to obtain results of 30 samples as early as possible to establish the value of standard deviation.
NOTES
1 These minimum dimensions relate specifically to the covers given in Table 16A.
2 p is the percentage of steel reinforcement.
1 1 1 1
Dead load and imposed load (fixed) + +
12 16 10 12
1 1 1 1
Imposed load (not fixed) + +
10 12 9 9
NOTE For obtaining the bending moment, the coefficient shall be multiplied by the total design load and effective span.
Type of Load At End Support At Support Next to the End Support At All Other Interior
Supports
Outer Side Inner Side
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Dead load and imposed load (fixed) 0.4 0.6 0.55 0.5
Imposed load (not fixed) 0.45 0.6 0.6 0.6
NOTE For obtaining the shear force, the coefficient shall be multiplied by the total design load.
For moments at supports where two unequal spans meet be used in the design of the member at that section
or in case where the spans are not equally loaded, the except as in 21.6.2.1.
average of the two values for the negative moment at
21.6.2.1 When the reaction in the direction of the
the support may be taken for design.
applied shear introduces compression into the end
Where coefficients given in Table 12 are used for region of the member, sections located at a distance
calculation of bending moments, redistribution referred less than d from the face of the support may be designed
to in 21.7 shall not be permitted. for the same shear as that computed at distance d
(see Fig. 2).
21.5.2 Beams and Slabs Over Free End Supports
NOTE The above clauses are applicable for beams generally
Where a member is built into a masonry wall which carrying uniformly distributed load or where the principal load
is located farther than 2d from the face of the support.
develops only partial restraint, the member shall be
designed to resist a negative moment at the face of the 21.7 Redistribution of Moments
support of Wl/24 where W is the total design load and
l is the effective span, or such other restraining moment Redistribution of moments may be done in accordance
as may be shown to be applicable. For such a condition with 36.1.1 for Limit State Method and in accordance
shear coefficient given in Table 13 at the end support with B-1.2 for Working Stress Method. However,
where simplified analysis using coefficients is adopted,
may be increased by 0.05.
redistribution of moments shall not be done.
21.6 Critical Sections for Moment and Shear
22 BEAMS
21.6.1 For monolithic construction, the moments
22.0 Effective Depth
computed at the face of the supports shall be used in
the design of the members at those section. For non- Effective depth of a beam is the distance between the
monolithic construction the design of the member shall centroid of the area of tension reinforcement and the
be done keeping in view 21.2. maximum compression fibre, excluding the thickness
of finishing material not placed monolithically with
21.6.2 Critical Section for Shear
the member and the thickness of any concrete provided
The shears computed at the face of the support shall to allow for wear. This will not apply to deep beams.
b) For spans above 10 m, the values in (a) may For a cantilever, the clear distance from the free end
be multiplied by 10/span in metres, except of the cantilever to the lateral restraint shall not
2
for cantilever in which case deflection 100 b
calculations should be made. exceed 25 b or whichever is less.
d
c) Depending on the area and the stress of steel
for tension reinforcement, the values in (a) 23 SOLID SLABS
or (b) shall be modified by multiplying with
23.1 General
the modification factor obtained as per Fig. 4.
d) Depending on the area of compression The provisions of 22.2 for beams apply to slabs also.
reinforcement, the value of span to depth ratio NOTES
be further modified by multiplying with the 1 For slabs spanning in two directions, the shorter of the two
modification factor obtained as per Fig. 5. spans should be used for calculating the span to effective depth
ratios.
e) For flanged beams, the values of (a) or (b) be
2 For two-way slabs of shorter spans (up to 3.5 m) with mild
modified as per Fig. 6 and the reinforcement steel reinforcement, the span to overall depth ratios given below
percentage for use in Fig. 4 and 5 should be may generally be assumed to satisfy vertical deflection limits
based on area of section equal to bf d. for loading class up to 3 kN/m 2.
NOTE When deflections are required to be Simply supported slabs 35
calculated, the method given in Annex C may be used. Continuous slabs 40
22.3 Slenderness Limits for Beams to Ensure For high strength deformed bars of grade Fe 415, the values
given above should be multiplied by 0.8.
Lateral Stability
A simply supported or continuous beam shall be so 23.2 Slabs Continuous Over Supports
proportioned that the clear distance between the lateral Slabs spanning in one direction and continuous over
2
250 b supports shall be designed according to the provisions
restraints does not exceed 60 b or whichever applicable to continuous beams.
d
is less, where d is the effective depth of the beam and
23.3 Slabs Monolithic with Supports
b the breadth of the compression face midway between
the lateral restraints. Bending moments in slabs (except flat slabs)
23.4.1 Restrained Slab with Unequal Conditions at FIG. 7 L OAD CARRIED BY SUPPORTED B EAMS
Adjacent Panels
24 COMPRESSION MEMBERS
In some cases the support moments calculated from
Table 26 for adjacent panels may differ significantly. 24.1 Definitions
The following procedure may be adopted to adjust 24.1.1 Column or strut is a compression member, the
them: effective length of which exceeds three times the least
a) Calculate the sum of moments at midspan and lateral dimension.
supports (neglecting signs). 24.1.2 Short and Slender Compression Members
b) Treat the values from Table 26 as fixed end
moments. A compression member may be considered as short
l ley
c) According to the relative stiffness of adjacent when both the slenderness ratios ex and are less
spans, distribute the fixed end moments D b
across the supports, giving new support than 12:
moments.
where
d) Adjust midspan moment such that, when
added to the support moments from (c) lex = Effective length in respect of the major axis,
(neglecting signs), the total should be equal D = Depth in respect of the major axis,
to that from (a). ley = Effective length in respect of the minor axis,
If the resulting support moments are significantly and
greater than the value from Table 26, the tension steel b = Width of the member.
D = Depth of the cross-section measured in the 25.2.1.1 Design bond stress in limit state method for
plane under consideration. plain bars in tension shall be as below:
a) Lap splices shall not be used for bars larger The following values may be used where the strength
than 36 mm; for larger diameters, bars may of the weld has been proved by tests to be at least as
be welded (see 11.4); in cases where welding great as that of the parent bar.
is not practicable, lapping of bars larger than a) Splices in compression For welded splices
36 mm may be permitted, in which case and mechanical connection, 100 percent of
additional spirals should be provided around the design strength of joined bars.
the lapped bars.
b) Splices in tension
b) Lap splices shall be considered as staggered 1) 80 percent of the design strength of welded
if the centre to centre distance of the splices bars (100 percent if welding is strictly
is not less than 1.3 times the lap length supervised and if at any cross-section of
calculated as described in (c). the member not more than 20 percent of
c) Lap length including anchorage value of the tensile reinforcement is welded).
hooks for bars in flexural tension shall be Ld 2) 100 percent of design strength of
(see 25.2.1) or 30 whichever is greater. The mechanical connection.
straight length of the lap shall not be less than
15 or 200 mm. The following provisions 25.2.5.3 End-bearing splices
shall also apply:
End-bearing splices shall be used only for bars in
Where lap occurs for a tension bar located at: compression. The ends of the bars shall be square cut
1) top of a section as cast and the minimum and concentric bearing ensured by suitable devices.
cover is less than twice the diameter of
the lapped bar, the lap length shall be 25.3 Spacing of Reinforcement
increased by a factor of 1.4. 25.3.1 For the purpose of this clause, the diameter of
2) corner of a section and the minimum a round bar shall be its nominal diameter, and in the
cover to either face is less than twice the case of bars which are not round or in the case of
diameter of the lapped bar or where the deformed bars or crimped bars, the diameter shall be
clear distance between adjacent laps is taken as the diameter of a circle giving an equivalent
less than 75 mm or 6 times the diameter effective area. Where spacing limitations and minimum
of lapped bar, whichever is greater, the concrete cover (see 25.4) are based on bar diameter, a
lap length should be increased by a factor group of bars bundled in contact shall be treated as a
of 1.4. single bar of diameter derived from the total equivalent
Where both conditions (1) and (2) apply, area.
the lap length should be increased by a
25.3.2 Minimum Distance Between Individual Bars
factor of 2.0.
NOTE: Splices in tension members shall be The following shall apply for spacing of bars:
enclosed in spirals made of bars not less than 6 mm
diameter with pitch not more than 100 mm. a) The horizontal distance between two parallel
main reinforcing bars shall usually be not less
d) The lap length in compression shall be equal than the greatest of the following:
to the development length in compression,
1) The diameter of the bar if the diameters
calculated as described in 25.2.1, but not less
are equal,
than 24 .
2) The diameter of the larger bar if the
e) When bars of two different diameters are to
diameters are unequal, and
be spliced, the lap length shall be calculated
on the basis of diameter of the smaller bar. 3) 5 mm more than the nominal maximum
size of coarse aggregate.
f) When splicing of welded wire fabric is to be
carried out, lap splices of wires shall be made NOTE This does not preclude the use of larger
size of aggregates beyond the congested
so that overlap measured between the extreme reinforcement in the same member; the size of
cross wires shall be not less than the spacing aggregates may be reduced around congested
of cross wires plus 100 mm. reinforcement to comply with this provision.
b) Slabs NOTES
1) The horizontal distance between parallel 1 For main reinforcement up to 12 mm diameter bar for mild
exposure the nominal cover may be reduced by 5 mm.
main reinforcement bars shall not be
more than three times the effective depth 2 Unless specified otherwise, actual concrete cover should not
+10
of solid slab or 300 mm whichever is deviate from the required nominal cover by 0 mm .
smaller. 3 For exposure condition severe and very severe, reduction
of 5 mm may be made, where concrete grade is M 35 and
2) The horizontal distance between parallel above.
reinforcement bars provided against
NOTES
1 The nominal covers given relate specifically to the minimum member dimensions given in Fig. 1.
2 Cases that lie below the bold line require attention to the additional measures necessary to reduce the risks of spalling (see 20.3.1).
25.5 Requirements of Reinforcement for two faces. The total area of such reinforcement shall
Structural Members be not less than 0.1 percent of the web area and
shall be distributed equally on two faces at a spacing
25.5.1 Beams
not exceeding 300 mm or web thickness whichever is
25.5.1.1 Tension reinforcement less.
a) Minimum reinforcement The minimum 25.5.1.4 Transverse reinforcement in beams for shear
area of tension reinforcement shall be not less and torsion
than that given by the following:
The transverse reinforcement in beams shall be taken
As 0.85 around the outer-most tension and compression bars.
= In T-beams and I-beams, such reinforcement shall pass
bd fy
around longitudinal bars located close to the outer face
where of the flange.
As = Minimum area of tension reinforcement, 25.5.1.5 Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement
b = Breadth of beam of the breadth of the
The maximum spacing of shear reinforcement
web of T-beam,
measured along the axis of the member shall not exceed
d = Effective depth, and 0.75 d for vertical stirrups and d for inclined stirrups
fy = Characteristic strength of reinforcement at 45, where d is the effective depth of the section
in N/mm2. under consideration. In no case shall the spacing exceed
b) Maximum reinforcement The maximum 300 mm.
area of tension reinforcement shall not exceed
25.5.1.6 Minimum shear reinforcement
0.04 bD.
Minimum shear reinforcement in the form of stirrups
25.5.1.2 Compression reinforcement
shall be provided such that:
The maximum area of compression reinforcement shall
Asv 0.4
not exceed 0.04 bD. Compression reinforcement in
beams shall be enclosed by stirrups for effective lateral bsv 0.87 f y
restraint. The arrangement of stirrups shall be as
where
specified in 25.5.3.2.
Asv = Total cross-sectional area of stirrups legs
25.5.1.3 Side face reinforcement effective in shear,
Where the depth of the web in a beam exceeds 750 mm, sv = Stirrup spacing along the length of the
side face reinforcement shall be provided along the member,
FIG . 10
FIG . 9
l 29.3 Shear
0.5 0.5
D Where hollow blocks are used, for the purpose of
calculating shear stress, the rib width may be increased
where
to take account of the wall thickness of the block on
l = Clear span, and one side of the rib; with narrow precast units, the width
D = Overall depth. of the jointing mortar or concrete may be included.
2) A zone measuring 0.3 D on either side 29.4 Deflection
of the mid-depth of the beam, which shall
contain the remainder of the tension steel, The recommendations for deflection in respect of
evenly distributed. solid slabs may be applied to ribbed, hollow block or
For span to depth ratios less than unity, voided construction. The span to effective depth ratios
the steel shall be evenly distributed over given in 22.2 for a flanged beam are applicable but
a depth of 0.8 D measured from the when calculating the final reduction factor for web
tension face. width, the rib width for hollow block slabs may be
assumed to include the walls of the blocks on both
28.3.3 Vertical Reinforcement sides of the rib. For voided slabs and slabs constructed
of box or I-section units, an effective rib width shall
If forces are applied to a deep beam in such a way that be calculated assuming all material below the upper
hanging action is required, bars or suspension stirrups flange of the unit to be concentrated in a rectangular
shall be provided to carry all the forces concerned. rib having the same cross-sectional area and depth.
28.3.4 Side Face Reinforcement 29.5 Size and Position of Ribs
Side face reinforcement shall comply with requirements In-situ ribs shall be not less than 65 mm wide. They
of minimum reinforcement of wall (see 31.4). shall be spaced at centres not greater than 1.5 m apart
and their depth, excluding any topping, shall be not
29 RIBBED, HOLLOW BLOCK OR VOIDED
more than four times their width. Generally ribs shall
SLAB
be formed along each edge parallel to the span of one
29.1 General way slabs. When the edge is built into a wall or rests
on a beam, a rib at least as wide as the bearing shall be
This covers the slabs constructed in one of the ways
formed along the edge.
described below:
29.6 Hollow Blocks and Formers
a) As a series of concrete ribs with topping cast
on forms which may be removed after the Blocks and formers may be of any suitable material.
concrete has set; Hollow clay tiles for the filler type shall conform
b) As a series of concrete ribs between precast to accepted standard [6-5A(42)]. When required
blocks which remain part of the completed to contribute to the structural strength of a slab they
structure; the top of the ribs may be connected shall:
by a topping of concrete of the same strength a) be made of concrete or burnt clay; and
as that used in the ribs; and
b) have a crushing strength of at least 14 N/mm2
c) With a continuous top and bottom face but measured on the net section when axially
containing voids of rectangular, oval or other loaded in the direction of compressive stress
shape. in the slab.
29.2 Analysis of Structure 29.7 Arrangement of Reinforcement
The moments and forces due to design loads on The recommendations given in 25.3 regarding
continuous slabs may be obtained by the methods given maximum distance between bars apply to areas of solid
in Section 5A (c) for solid slabs. Alternatively, the slabs concrete in this form of construction. The curtailment,
may be designed as a series of simply supported spans anchorage and cover to reinforcement shall be as
provided they are not exposed to weather or corrosive described below:
the stiffness of the adjoining parts. c is the ratio of flexural stiffness of the
30.4.4 Distribution of Bending Moments Across the columns above and below the slab to the
Panel Width flexural stiffness of the slabs at a joint taken in
the direction moments are being determined
Bending moments at critical cross-section shall be and is given by:
distributed to the column strips and middle strips as
specified in 30.5.5 as applicable. Kc
c =
30.4.5 Moments in Columns Ks
30.4.5.1 Columns built integrally with the slab system where Kc and Ks are flexural stiffnesses of
shall be designed to resist moments arising from loads column and slab respectively.
on the slab system.
Table 17 Minimum Permissible Values of c
30.4.5.2 At an interior support, the supporting (Clause 30.4.6)
members above and below the slab shall be designed
to resist the moment M given by the following equation, l2
Imposed Load/ Ratio Value of c min
l1
in direct proportion to their stiffnesses unless a general Dead Load
analysis is made: (1) (2) (3)
( wd + 0.5 wl ) l2 ln wd l2ln
2 2
0.5 0.5 to 2.0 0
M = 0.08 1.0 0.5 0.6
1
1+ 1.0 0.8 0.7
c
1.0 1.0 0.7
where 1.0 1.25 0.8
1.0 2.0 1.2
wd, wl = Design dead and live loads respectively, 2.0 0.5 1.3
per unit area; 2.0 0.8 1.5
l2 = Length of span transverse to the direction 2.0 1.0 1.6
of M; 2.0 1.25 1.9
ln = Length of the clear span in the direction 2.0 2.0 4.9
3.0 0.5 1.8
of M, measured face to face of supports;
3.0 0.8 2.0
Kc 3.0 1.0 2.3
c = where Kc and Ks are as defined
Ks 3.0 1.25 2.8
3.0 2.0 13.0
in 30.4.3.3; and
Mark a b c d e f g
Length 0.14 ln 0.20 ln 0.22 ln 0.30 ln 0.33 ln 0.20 ln 0.24 ln
31.5.1 For walls having thickness more than 200 mm, 32.2 Distribution of Loading on Stairs
the vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall be
In the case of stairs with open wells, where spans partly
provided in two grids, one near each face of the wall.
crossing at right angles occur, the load on areas
31.5.2 Vertical reinforcement need not be enclosed common to any two such spans may be taken as one-
by transverse reinforcement as given in 25.5.3.2 for half in each direction as shown in Fig. 18. Where flights
column, if the vertical reinforcement is not greater or landings are embedded into walls for a length of
than 0.01 times the gross sectional area or where the not less than 110 mm and are designed to span in the
vertical reinforcement is not required for compression. direction of the flight, a 150 mm strip may be deducted
from the loaded area and the effective breadth of the
32 STAIRS section increased by 75 mm for purposes of design (see
32.1 Effective Span of Stairs Fig. 19).
The effective span of stairs without stringer beams shall 32.3 Depth of Section
be taken as the following horizontal distances:
The depth of section shall be taken as the minimum
a) Where supported at top and bottom risers by thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the staircase.
beams spanning parallel with the risers, the
distance centre-to-centre of beams; 33 FOOTINGS
b) Where spanning on to the edge of a landing 33.1 General
slab, which spans parallel, with the risers (see
Footings shall be designed to sustain the applied loads,
Fig. 17), a distance equal to the going of the
moments and forces and the induced reactions and to
stairs plus at each end either half the width of
ensure that any settlement which may occur shall be
the landing or one metre, whichever is
as nearly uniform as possible, and the safe bearing
smaller; and
capacity of the soil is not exceeded {see good practice
c) Where the landing slab spans in the same
[6-5A(35)] }.
direction as the stairs, they shall be considered
as acting together to form a single slab and 33.1.1 In sloped or stepped footings the effective
the span determined as the distance centre- cross-section in compression shall be limited by the
to-centre of the supporting beams or walls, area above the neutral plane, and the angle of slope or
the going being measured horizontally. depth and location of steps shall be such that the design
requirements are satisfied at every section. Sloped and 33.1.3 In the case of plain concrete pedestals, the angle
stepped footings that are designed as a unit shall be between the plane passing through the bottom edge of
constructed to assure action as a unit. the pedestal and the corresponding junction edge of
the column with pedestal and the horizontal plane (see
33.1.2 Thickness at the Edge of Footing
Fig. 20) shall be governed by the expression:
In reinforced and plain concrete footings, the thickness
at the edge shall be not less than 150 mm for footings 100 q
on soils, nor less than 300 mm above the tops of piles tan / 0.9 +1
f ck
for footings on piles.
d) The tensile strength of the concrete is ignored. Pu = 0.4 fck . Ac + 0.67 fy . Asc
e) The stresses in the reinforcement are derived where
from representative stress-strain curve for the
Pu = Axial load on the member,
type of steel used. Typical curves are given
in Fig. 23. For design purposes the partial fck = Characteristic compressive strength of the
safety factor m, equal to 1.15 shall be applied. concrete,
f) The maximum strain in the tension Ac = Area of concrete
reinforcement in the section at failure shall fy = Characteristic strength of the compression
not be less than: reinforcement, and
Asc = Area of longitudinal reinforcement for 38.4.1 The ratio of the volume of helical reinforcement
columns. to the volume of the core shall not be less than
0.36 (Ag /Ac1) fck / fy
38.4 Compression Members with Helical
Reinforcement where
The strength of compression members with helical Ag = Gross area of the section,
reinforcement satisfying the requirement of 38.4.1 Ac = Area of the core of the helically reinforced
shall be taken as 1.05 times the strength of similar column measured to the outside diameter of
member with lateral ties. the helix,
concrete, and M ax = u ex
2 000 D
fy = Characteristic strength of the helical
reinforcement but not exceeding 415 N/mm2. 2
P b ley
M ay = u
38.5 Members Subjected to Combined Axial Load 2 000 b
and Uniaxial Bending
where
A member subjected to axial force and uniaxial bending
Pu= Axial load on the member,
shall be designed on the basis of 38.1 and 38.2.
= Effective length in respect of the major axis,
lex
NOTE The design of member subject to combined axial
load and uniaxial bending will involve lengthy calculation by ley
= Effective length in respect of the minor axis,
trial and error. In order to overcome these difficulties D = Depth of the cross-section at right angles to
interaction diagrams may be used. These have been prepared the major axis, and
and published by BIS in SP 16 Design aids for reinforced
concrete to IS 456. b = Width of the member.
38.6 Members Subjected to Combined Axial Load For design of section, 38.5 or 38.6 as appropriate shall
and Biaxial Bending apply.
NOTES
The resistance of a member subjected to axial force
1 A column may be considered braced in a given plane if lateral
and biaxial bending shall be obtained on the basis of stability to the structure as a whole is provided by walls or
assumptions given in 38.1 and 38.2 with neutral axis bracing or buttressing designed to resist all lateral forces in that
so chosen as to satisfy the equilibrium of load and plane. It should otherwise be considered as unbraced.
moments about two axes. Alternatively such members 2 In the case of a braced column without any transverse loads
occurring in its height, the additional moment shall be added to
may be designed by the following equation:
an initial moment equal to sum of 0.4 Mu 1 and 0.6 Mu 2 where
M u2 is the larger end moment and Mu1 is the smaller end moment
M ux n M uy
n
(assumed negative if the column is bent in double curvature).
+ 1.0 In no case shall the initial moment be less than 0.4 Mu2 nor the
M ux1 M uy1 total moment including the initial moment be less than Mu2. For
unbraced columns, the additional moment shall be added to the
where end moments.
3 Unbraced compression members, at any given level or storey,
Mux, Muy = Moments about x and y axes due to
subject to lateral load are usually constrained to deflect equally.
design loads, In such cases slenderness ratio for each column may be taken
Mux1, Muy1 = Maximum uniaxial moment capacity as the average for all columns acting in the same direction.
for an axial load of Pu, bending about 38.7.1.1 The values given by equation 38.7.1 may be
x and y axes respectively, and n is multiplied by the following factor:
related to Pu /Puz
Puz Pu
where k= 1
Puz Pb
Puz = 0.45 fck . Ac + 0.75 fy . Asc
where
For values of Pu /Puz = 0.2 to 0.8, the values of n vary
linerly from 1.0 to 2.0. For values less than 0.2 n is Pu = Axial load on compression member,
1.0; for values greater than 0.8, n is 2.0. Puz = As defined in 38.6, and
Pb = Axial load corresponding to the condition
38.7 Slender Compression Members of maximum compressive strain of 0.003 5
The design of slender compression members in concrete and tensile strain of 0.002 in
(see 24.1.1) shall be based on the forces and the outer most layer of tension steel.
moments determined from an analysis of the structure,
39 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: SHEAR
including the effect of deflections on moments and
forces. When the effect of deflections are not taken 39.1 Nominal Shear Stress
into account in the analysis, additional moment given
The nominal shear stress in beams of uniform depth
in 38.7.1 shall be taken into account in the appropriate
shall be obtained by the following equation:
direction.
Vu
38.7.1 The additional moments Max and May shall be v =
calculated by the following formulae: bd
Ag Concrete Code
100
bd
M 15 M 20 M 25 M 30 M 35 M 40 and above
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
NOTE The term Ag is the area of longitudinal tension reinforcement which continues at least one effective depth beyond the
section being considered except at support where the full area of tension reinforcement may be used provided the detailing conforms
to 25.2.2 and 25.2.3.
Shear reinforcement shall be provided to carry a shear The enhancement of shear strength may be taken into
equal to Vu cbd. The strength of shear reinforcement account in the design of sections near a support by
Vus shall be calculated as below: increasing design shear strength of concrete
to 2d c/av provided that design shear stress at the face
a) For vertical stirrups: of the support remains less than the values given in
Table 20. Account may be taken of the enhancement
0.87 f y Asv d
Vus = in any situation here the section considered is closer
Sv to the face of a support or concentrated load than twice
b) For inclined stirrups or a series of bars bent- the effective depth, d. To be effective, tension
up at different cross-sections: reinforcement should extend on each side of the point
where it is intersected by a possible failure plane for a
0.87 f y Asv d distance at least equal to the effective depth, or be
Vus = (sin + cos )
Sv provided with an equivalent anchorage.
c) For single bar or single group of parallel bars, 39.5.2 Shear Reinforcement for Sections Close to
all bent-up at the same cross-section: Supports
Vus = 0.87 fy Asv sin If shear reinforcement is required, the total area of this
is given by
where
Asv = Total cross-sectional area of stirrup legs or As = av b (v 2 dc /av )/0.87 fy > 0.4 av b / 0.87 fy
bent-up bars within a distance sv, This reinforcement should be provided within the
Sv = Spacing of the stirrups or bent-up bars along middle three quarters of av, where av is less than d,
with the length of the member, horizontal shear reinforcement will be effective than
v = Nominal shear stress, vertical.
39.5.3 Enhanced Shear Strength Near Supports 40.1.1 The design rules laid down in 40.3 and 40.4
(Simplified Approach) shall apply to beams of solid rectangular cross-section.
However, these clauses may also be applied to flanged
The procedure given in 39.5.1 and 39.5.2 may be used
beams, by substituting bw for b in which case they are
for all beams. However for beams carrying generally
generally conservative; therefore specialist literature
uniform load or where the principal load is located
may be referred to.
farther than 2d from the face of support, the shear stress
may be calculated at a section a distance d from the 40.2 Critical Section
face of support. The value of c is calculated in
accordance with Table 19 and appropriate shear Sections located less than a distance d, from the face
reinforcement is provided at sections closer to the of the support may be designed for the same torsion
support, no further check for shear at such sections is as computed at a distance d, where d is the effective
required. depth.
In structures, where torsion is required to maintain Equivalent shear V e, shall be calculated from the
equilibrium, members shall be designed for torsion in formula:
accordance with 40.2 to 40.4. However, for such
u
indeterminate structures where torsion can be Ve = Vu + 1.6
eliminated by releasing redundant restraints, no specific b
design for torsion is necessary, provided torsional where
stiffness is neglected in the calculation of internal Ve = Equivalent shear,
forces. Adequate control of any torsional cracking is
Vu = Shear,
provided by the shear reinforcement as per 39.
u = Torsional moment, and
NOTE The approach to design in this clause is as follows:
b = Breadth of beam.
Torsional reinforcement is not calculated separately from that
required for bending and shear. Instead the total longitudinal The equivalent nominal shear stress ve in this case
reinforcement is determined for a fictitious bending moment
shall be calculated as given in 40.1, except for
which is a function of actual bending moment and torsion;
similarly web reinforcement is determined for a fictitious shear substituting Vu by Ve. The values of ve shall not exceed
which is a function of actual shear and torsion. the values of c max given in Table 20.
A-1 Self compacting concrete is concrete that is A-3 CHARACTERISTICS OF FRESH SELF
able to flow under its own weight and completely COMPACTING CONCRETE
fill the formwork, even in the presence of dense The level of fluidity of self compacting concrete
reinforcement, without segregation, whilst maintaining is governed chiefly by the dosing and type of
homogeneity. superplasticizer. Due to the high fluidity of self
compacting concrete, the risk of segregation and
A-2 APPLICATION AREA blocking is very high. Preventing segregation is
Self compacting concrete may be used in precast- therefore an important feature of the control regime.
applications or for concrete placed on site. It can be The tendency to segregation can be reduced by the
manufactured in a site batching plant or in a ready mix use of a sufficient amount of fines (< 0.125 mm), or
concrete plant and delivered to site by truck. It can using a Viscosity Modifying Admixture (VMA).
then be placed either by pumping or pouring into Features of fresh self compacting concrete
horizontal or vertical structures. In designing the mix,
the size and the form of the structure, the dimension a) Slump about 600 mm
b) Sufficient amount of fines (<0.125 mm)
and density of reinforcement and cover should be taken
c) Use of Viscosity Modifying Admixture
in consideration.
d) Segregation resistance
ANNEX B
(Clauses 17.2.2, 21.3.1, 21.7, 25.2.1 and 31.1)
STRUCTURAL DESIGN (WORKING STRESS METHOD)
M 10
M 15
M 20
M 25
M 30
M 35
M 40
M 45
M 50
M 55
Table 22.
of
Concrete B-2.3 Increase in Permissible Stresses
Tensile Where stresses due to wind (or earthquake) temperature
Stress, 1.2 2.0 2.8 3.2 3.6 4.0 4.4 4.8 5.2 5.6 and shrinkage effects are combined with those due to
N/mm2
dead, live and impact load, the stresses specified in
Ft Tables 21, 22 and 23 may be exceeded up to a limit of
The tensile stress shall be calculated as 33 13 percent. Wind and seismic forces need not be
Ae + m Ast
considered as acting simultaneously.
where
B-3 PERMISSIBLE LOADS IN COMPRESSION
Ft = Total tension on the member minus pretension MEMBERS
in steel, if any, before concreting;
Ae = Cross-sectional area of concrete excluding B-3.1 Pedestals and Short Columns with Lateral
any finishing material and reinforcing steel; Ties
m = Modular ratio; and The axial load P permissible on a pedestal or short
Ast = Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel in column reinforced with longitudinal bars and lateral
tension. ties shall not exceed that given by the following
equation:
B-2.1.2 Bond Stress for Deformed Bars
P = cc Ac + sc Asc
In the case of deformed bars conforming to accepted
standard [6-5A(40)], the bond stresses given in where
Table 21 may be increased by 60 percent. cc = Permissible stress in concrete in direct
compression,
Table 21 Permissible Stresses in Concrete
Ac = Cross-sectional area of concrete excluding
(Clauses B-1.3, B-2.1, B-2.1.2, B-2.3 and B-4.2)
any finishing material and reinforcing steel,
Grade of Permissible Stress in Permissible Stress in Asc = Cross-sectional area of the longitudinal steel.
Concrete Compression Bond (Average) for
Plain Bars in Tension NOTE The minimum eccentricity mentioned
Bending Direct in 24.4 may be deemed to be incorporated in the above
cbc cc bd equation.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
B-3.2 Short Columns with Helical Reinforcement
M 10 3.0 2.5
M 15 5.0 4.0 0.6 The permissible load for columns with helical
M 20 7.0 5.0 0.8
M 25 8.5 6.0 0.9 reinforcement satisfying the requirement of 38.4.1
M 30 10.0 8.0 1.0 shall be 1.05 times the permissible load for similar
M 35 11.5 9.0 1.1 member with lateral ties or rings.
M 40 13.0 10.0 1.2
M 45 14.5 11.0 1.3
M 50 16.0 12.0 1.4
B-3.3 Long Columns
M 55 17.5 13.0 1.5
The maximum permissible stress in a reinforced
NOTES concrete column or part thereof having a ratio of
1 The values of permissible shear stress in concrete are given in effective column length to least lateral dimension
Table 23. above 12 shall not exceed that which results from the
2 The bond stress given in col 4 shall be increased by 25 percent
for bars in compression.
multiplication of the appropriate maximum permissible
stress as specified under B-2.1 and B-2.2 by the
coefficient Cr given by the following formula:
B-2.2 Permissible Stresses in Steel Reinforcement
Permissible stresses in steel reinforcement shall not lef
Cr = 1.25
exceed the values specified in Table 22. 48 b
B-2.2.1 In flexural member the value of st given in where
Table 22 is applicable at the centroid of the tensile
Cr = Reduction coefficient;
reinforcement subject to the condition that when more
lef = Effective length of column; and
than one layer of tensile reinforcement is provided,
the stress at the centroid of the outermost layer shall b = Least lateral dimension of column; for
NOTES
1 For high yield strength deformed bars of Grade Fe 500 the permissible stress in direct tension and flexural tension shall be 0.55 fy.
The permissible stresses for shear and compression reinforcement shall be as for Grade Fe 415.
2 For welded wire fabric conforming to accepted standard [6-5A(46)], the permissible value in tension st is 230 N/mm2.
3 For the purpose of this Section, the yield stress of steels for which there is no clearly defined yield point should be taken to be 0.2
percent proof stress.
4 When mild steel conforming to Grade II of accepted standard [6-5A(45)] is used, the permissible stresses shall be 90 percent of the
permissible stresses in col 3, or if the design details have already been worked out on the basis of mild steel conforming to Grade 1 of
accepted standard [6-5A(45)]; the area of reinforcement shall be increased by 10 percent of that required for Grade 1 steel.
The nominal shear stress v in beams or slabs of B-5.2 Design Shear Strength of Concrete
uniform depth shall be calculated by the following
B-5.2.1 The permissible shear stress in concrete in
equation:
beams without shear reinforcement is given in
V Table 23.
v =
bd B-5.2.1.1 For solid slabs the permissible shear stress
where
in concrete shall be kc where k has the value given
V = Shear force due to design loads, below:
b = Breadth of the member, which for flanged
sections shall be taken as the breadth of the Overall 300 275 250 225 200 175 150
web, and Depth of or or
Slab, mm more less
d = Effective depth.
k 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30
B-5.1.1 Beams of Varying Depth
In the case of beams of varying depth, the equation NOTE This does not apply to flat slabs for which 30.6 shall
apply.
shall be modified as:
B-5.2.2 Shear Strength of Members Under Axial
M tan
V Compression
v = d
bd For members subjected to axial compression P, the
where permissible shear stress in concrete c given in
v, V, b and d are the same as in B-5.1. Table 23, shall be multiplied by the following factor:
M = Bending moment at the section, and 5P
= Angle between the top and the bottom edges = 1+ ,
Ag f ck but not exceeding 1.5.
of the beam.
NOTE As is that area of longitudinal tension reinforcement which continues at least one effective depth beyond the section being
considered except at supports where the full area of tension reinforcement may be used provided the detailing conforms to 25.2.2
and 25.2.3.
B-6.3 Shear and Torison Two legged closed hoops enclosing the corner
longitudinal bars shall have an area of cross-section
B-6.3.1 Equivalent Shear Asv, given by
Equivalent shear, Ve shall be calculated from the
T . Sv V . Sv
formula: Asv = + ,
b1d1 sv 2.5d1 sv but the total transverse
T
Ve = V + 1.6 reinforcement shall not be less than
b
ANNEX C
(Clauses 21.3.2, 22.2.1 and 41.1)
CALCULATION OF DEFLECTION
ANNEX D
(Clauses 23.4 and 36.1.2)
SLABS SPANNING IN TWO DIRECTIONS
D-1 RESTRAINED SLABS apply only to the middle strips and no re-distribution
shall be made.
D-1.0 When the corners of a slab are prevented from
lifting, the slab may be designed as specified in D-1.1 D-1.4 Tension reinforcement provided at mid-span in
to D-1.11. the middle strip shall extend in the lower part of the
slab to within 0.25 l of a continuous edge, or 0.15 l of
D-1.1 The maximum bending moments per unit width
a discontinuous edge.
in a slab are given by the following equations:
D-1.5 Over the continuous edges of a middle strip,
2
M x = x w lx the tension reinforcement shall extend in the upper part
of the slab a distance of 0.15 l from the support, and at
2
M y = y w ly least 50 percent shall extend a distance of 0.3 l.
where D-1.6 At a discontinuous edge, negative moments may
arise. They depend on the degree of fixity at the edge
x and y are coefficients given in Table 26,
of the slab but, in general, tension reinforcement equal
w = Total design and load per unit area. to 50 percent of that provided at mid-span extending
Mx, My = Moments on strips of unit width 0.1 l into the span will be sufficient.
spanning lx and ly respectively, and
D-1.7 Reinforcement in edge strip, parallel to that
lx and ly = Lengths of the shorter span and longer
edge, shall comply with the minimum given in
span respectively.
Section 3 and the requirements for torsion given
D-1.2 Slabs are considered as divided in each direction in D-1.8 to D-1.10.
into middle strips and edge strips as shown in Fig. 25
D-1.8 Torsion reinforcement shall be provided at any
the middle strip being three-quarters of the width and
corner where the slab is simply supported on both edges
each edge strip one-eight of the width.
meeting at that corner. It shall consist of top and bottom
D-1.3 The maximum moments calculated as in D-1.1 reinforcement, each with layers of bars placed parallel
to the sides of the slab and extending from the edges a adequate provision to resist torsion at corners and to
minimum distance of one-fifth of the shorter span. The prevent the corners from lifting, the maximum
area of reinforcement in each of these four layers shall moments per unit width are given by the following
be three-quarters of the area required for the maximum equation:
mid-span moment in the slab.
2
D-1.9 Torsion reinforcement equal to half that M x = x w lx
described in D-1.8 shall be provided at a corner 2
contained by edges over only one of which the slab is M y = y w lx
continuous. where
D-1.10 Torsion reinforcements need not be provided Mx, M y, l y, l x are same as those in D-1.1, and
at any corner contained by edges over both of which x and y are moment coefficients given in
the slab is continuous. Table 27.
D-1.11 Where ly /lx is greater than 2, the slabs shall be D-2.1.1 At least 50 percent of the tension
designed as spanning one way. reinforcement provided at mid-span should extend
to the supports. The remaining 50 percent should
D-2 SIMPLY SUPPORTED SLABS
extend to within 0.1 l x or 0.1 ly of the support, as
D-2.1 When simply supported slabs do not have appropriate.
lx/ly 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 3.0
x 0.062 0.074 0.084 0.093 0.099 0.104 0.113 0.118 0.122 0.124
y 0.062 0.061 0.059 0.055 0.051 0.046 0.037 0.029 0.020 0.014
u = Elastically computed first order lateral If Q < 0.04, then the column in the frame may be taken
deflection, as no sway column, otherwise the column will be
Hu = Total lateral force acting within the storey, considered as sway column.
and E-3 For normal usage assuming idealized conditions,
hs = Height of the storey. the effective length lef of in a given plane may be
assessed on the basis of Table 28.
Provided that the strain in the tension reinforcement is distributions, having a value of zero at the neutral axis
limited to 0.8 Fy /Es, the design surface crack width, and a value at the centroid of the tension steel of
which should not exceed the appropriate value given 1 N/mm2 instantaneously, reducing to 0.55 N/mm2 in
in 34.3.2 may be calculated from the following the long-term, acting over the tension zone divided by
equation: the steel area.
Design surface crack width These assumptions are illustrated in Fig. 28,
3 acr m where
Wcr =
2(acr Cmin )
1+ h = Overall depth of the section,
hx
x = Depth from the compression face to the
where neutral axis.
acr = Distance from the point considered to the fc = Maximum compressive stress in the concrete,
surface of the nearest longitudinal bar, fs = Tensile stress in the reinforcement, and
Cmin = Minimum cover to the longitudinal bar, Es = Modulus of elasticity of the reinforcement.
m = Average steel strain at the level considered,
For a rectangular tension zone, this gives
h = Overall depth of the member, and
x = Depth of the neutral axis. b (h x ) (a x )
m = 1
3 Es As (d x )
The average steel strain m may be calculated on the
basis of the following assumption: where
The concrete and the steel are both considered to be As = Area of tension reinforcement,
fully elastic in tension and in compression. The elastic b = Width of the section at the centroid of the
modulus of the steel may be taken as 200 kN/mm2 and tension steel,
the elastic modulus of the concrete is as derived from 1 = Strain at the level considered, calculated
the equation given in 5.2.3.1 both in compression and ignoring the stiffening of the concrete in the
in tension. tension zone,
Alternatively, as an approximation, it will normally a = Distance from the compression face to the
be satisfactory to calculate the steel stress on the basis point at which the crack width is being
of a cracked section and then reduce this by an amount calculated, and
equal to the tensile force generated by the triangular d = Effective depth.
FIG. 28
a) Determine the depth of neutral axis from the xu, max = Limiting value of xu from 37.1.
following equation: Asc = Area of compression reinforcement,
and
xu 0.87 f y Ast
= d' = Depth of compression reinforcement
d 0.36 f ck b.d
from compression face.
b) If the value of xu /d is less than the limiting
The total area of tension reinforcement shall be
value (see Note below 37.1), calculate the
obtained from the following equation:
moment of resistance by the following
expression: Ast = Ast1 + Ast2
Ast f y where
M u = 0.87 f y Ast d 1
bd f ck Ast = Area of the total tensile reinforcement,
c) If the value of xu /d is equal to the limiting Ast1 = Area of the tensile reinforcement for a singly
value, the moment of resistance of the section reinforced section for Mu, lim, and
is given by the following expression: Ast2 = Asc fsc /0.87 fy.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards (Part 4) : 1972 Types of concrete
in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The
(Part 5) : 1972 Formwork for concrete
standards listed may be used by the Authority as a guide
in conformance with the requirements of the referred (Part 6) : 1972 Equipment, tool and plant
clauses in the Code. (Part 7) : 1973 Mixing, laying, compaction,
curing and other construction
IS No. Title
aspect
(1) 3370 Code of practice for concrete
(Part 8) : 1973 Properties of concrete
structures for the storage of
liquid: (Part 9) : 1973 Structural aspects
(Part 1) : 1965 General requirements (Part 10) : 1973 Tests and testing apparatus
(Part 2) : 1965 Reinforced concrete structures (Part 11) : 1973 Prestressed concrete
2210 : 1998 Criteria for design of reinforced (Part 12) : 1973 Miscellaneous
concrete shell structures and (3) 269 : 1989 Specification for ordinary
folded plates (first revision) Portland cement, 33 grade
3201 : 1988 Criteria for design and (fourth revision)
construction of precast-trusses 8112 : 1989 Specification for 43 grade
and purlins (first revision) ordinary Portland cement (fist
4090 : 1967 Criteria for design of reinforced revision)
concrete arches 12269 : 1987 Specification for 53 grade
4995 Criteria for design of reinforced ordinary Portland cement
concrete bins for Storage 8041 : 1990 Specification for rapid
of granular and powdery hardening Portland cement
materials (second revision)
(Part 1) : 1974 General requirements and bin 455 : 1989 Specification for Portland slag
loads cement (fourth revision)
(Part 2) : 1974 Design criteria 1489 Specification for Portland
4998 Criteria for design of reinforced pozzolana cement:
(Part 1) : 1992 concrete chimneys: Part 1 (Part 1) : 1991 Fly ash based (third revision)
Assessment of loads (second (Part 2) : 1991 Calcined clay based (third
revision) revision)
(2) 4845 : 1968 Definitions and terminology
8043 : 1991 Specification for hydrophobic
relating to hydraulic cement
Portland cement (second
6461 Glossary of terms relating to revision)
cement:
12600 : 1989 Specification for low heat
(Part 1) : 1972 Concrete aggregates Portland cement
(Part 2) : 1972 Materials 12330 : 1988 Specification for sulphate
(Part 3) : 1972 Concrete reinforcement resisting Portland cement
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 STRUCTURAL DESIGN USING PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 5
FOREWORD
This sub-section covers the structural design aspects of prestressed concrete.
This sub-section is largely based on IS 1343 : 1980 Code of practice for prestressed concrete (first revision),
which is under revision at the time of publication of this Code. Major changes have been envisaged in the
revision of IS 1343. In the absence of availability of finalized version of revised IS 1343, at the time of revision
of this Code, the provision of design as per existing IS 1343 : 1980 have been continued through appropriate
reference to the same.
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 PLANS AND DRAWINGS 5
4 MATERIALS 5
5 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION IN STEEL 5
6 DESIGN USING LIMIT STATE METHOD 5
7 SPACE FRAME 6
LIST OF STANDARDS 6
FOREWORD
This Section covers the structural design aspect of steel structures in buildings.
This Section covers the use of hot-rolled structural steel sections and steel tubes in buildings. It permits the
design by working stress method and plastic theory, and now in this revision by limit state method. Further,
reference to space frame has now found place in this Section.
This Section is based on IS 800 : 1984 Code of practice for general construction in steel (second revision) and
IS 806 : 1968 Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building construction (first revision), and also
enables design using limit state method.
More rigorous analytical procedures than envisaged as per this Section are available and can be made use of for
finding effective lengths of compression members in determining elastic critical loads.
The Indian Standard IS 800, on which this Section is largely based is under revision at the time of publication of
this Code. Major changes have been envisaged in the revision of IS 800 including introduction of limit state
method. In the absence of availability of finalized version of revised IS 800 at the time of revision of this Section,
in this revision, the provisions of design as per existing IS 800 : 1984 have been continued through appropriate
reference to the same; similarly reference has been made to IS 806. At the same time, the limit state method
having already gained acceptance has been taken into account in this revision by providing suitable enabling
provisions and also covering certain general principles thereof.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
6.1.2 In this method, the factored loads, in different 6.2 The detailed design procedure shall be as agreed
combinations, are applied to the structure to determine between the parties concerned.
the load effects. The latter are then compared with the
NOTE At the time of publication of this Section IS 800
design strength of the elements. was under revision and once the revised IS 800 is published,
the same shall replace the provisions given in this section.
This is expressed mathematically as:
The effects of 7 SPACE FRAME
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards (Part 1) : 1985 Tolerances of form, orientation,
in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The location and run-out, and
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time appropriate geometrical
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may definitions (first revision)
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance (Part 2) : 1992 Maximum material principles
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the (first revision)
Code.
(Part 3) : 1992 Dimensioning and tolerancing
In the following list, the number appearing in the first of profiles (second revision)
column within parentheses indicates the number of the (Part 4) : 1976 Practical examples of indications
reference in this Part/Section. on drawings
IS No. Title IS 8976 : 1978 Guide for preparation and
(1) 800 : 1984 Code of practice for general arrangement of sets of drawings
construction in steel (second and parts list
revision) (3) Structural Steel
(2) 962 : 1989 Code of practice for architectural 1977 : 1996 Specification for low tensile
and building drawings (second structural steels (third revision)
revision) 2062 : 1999 Specification for steel for
8000 Geometrical tolerancing on general structural purpose (fifth
technical drawings: revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 MATERIALS, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 6
4 MODULAR CO-ORDINATION, ARCHITECTURAL TREATMENT 6
AND FINISHES
5 COMPONENTS 7
6 PREFABRICATION SYSTEMS AND STRUCTURAL SCHEMES 8
7 JOINTS 12
8 TESTS FOR COMPONENTS/STRUCTURES 13
9 MANUFACTURE, STORAGE, TRANSPORT AND ERECTION OF 14
PRECAST ELEMENTS
10 EQUIPMENT 20
11 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 21
LIST OF STANDARDS 21
FOREWORD
Prefabrication, though desirable for large scale building activities, has yet to take a firm hold in the country. Two
aspects of prefabrication specifically to be borne in mind are the system to be adopted for the different categories
of buildings and the sizes of their components. Here the principle of modular co-ordination is of value and its use
is recommended.
Advantages of recent trends in prefabrication have been taken note of and also the hazards attended to such
construction. A few recommendations on the need to avoid progressive collapse of the structure have been
included. This has become necessary in view of such collapses in the past. A specific point to be borne in mind,
therefore, is the need to make the structure reasonably safe against such a collapse.
Prefabricated constructions being comparatively a new technique, some of the essential requirements for the
manufacture of the prefabricated components and elements are also included in this Section.
Since the aim of prefabrication is to effect economy, improvement in quality and speed in construction, the
selection of proper materials for prefabrication is also an important factor in the popularization of this technique.
The use of locally available materials with required characteristics and those materials which, due to their innate
characteristics like lightweight, easy workability, thermal insulation, non-combustibility, etc, effect economy
and improved quality, may be tried. However, this Section pertains to prefabricated elements with cementatious
materials.
It is possible to achieve or evolve aesthetically satisfying designs using prefabricated construction. A careful and
judicious handling of materials and use of finishes on a prefabricated building can help the designer a great deal
in ensuring that the appearance of the building as aesthetically appealing. The purpose of finishes and architectural
treatment is not only to give prefabricated buildings an individual character but also to effect better performance
and greater user satisfaction.
The design of prefabricated buildings shall include provision for all installations of services and their required
piping, wiring and accessories to be installed in the building.
This Section was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983. In the last revision the following
main changes were made:
a) A brief provision regarding importance of architectural treatment and finishes as applicable to
prefabricated buildings were included;
b) A brief clause was added on the requirements of materials for use in prefabrication;
c) The clause on prefabricating systems and structural elements was elaborated;
d) The clause on testing of components was revised to include testing of structure or part of structure; and
e) A brief clause on the manufacture of cellular concrete was added.
In this revision, this Section, earlier named as Prefabrication and Systems Building has been named and restructured
as follows:
Section 7 Prefabrication, Systems Building and Mixed/Composite Construction
7A Prefabricated Concrete
7B Systems Building and Mixed/Composite Construction
This sub-section covers Prefabricated concrete. In this revision the following main changes have been made:
a) Modular coordination and modular dimension of the components have been revised to have more
flexibility for planning.
b) The provisions on tolerance has been revised to include different types of prefabricated components.
2.1.1 Authority Having Jurisdiction The Authority 2.1.11 Multi-module A module whose size is a
which has been created by a statute and which, for the selected multiple of the basic module.
purpose of administering the Code/Part, may authorize 2.1.12 Prefabricate To fabricate components or
a committee or an official or an agency to act on its assembled units prior to erection or installation in a
behalf; hereinafter called the Authority. building.
2.1.2 Basic Module The fundamental module used 2.1.13 Prefabricated Building The partly/fully
in modular co-ordination, the size of which is selected assembled and erected building, of which the structural
for general application to building and its components. parts consist of prefabricated individual units or
NOTE The value of the basic module has been chosen as assemblies using ordinary or controlled materials,
100 mm for the maximum flexibility and convenience. The including service facilities; and in which the service
symbol for the basic module is M. equipment may be either prefabricated or constructed
2.1.3 Cellular Concrete The material consisting of in-situ.
an inorganic binder (such as, lime or cement or both) 2.1.14 Sandwich Concrete Panels Panels made by
in combination with a finely ground material sandwiching an insulation material between two layers
containing siliceous material (such as sand), gas of reinforced concrete to act as insulation for concrete
generating material (for example, aluminium powder), panels.
water and harmless additives (optional); and steam
cured under high pressure in autoclaves. 2.1.15 Self Compacting Concrete Concrete that is
able to flow under its own weight and completely fill
2.1.4 Components A building product formed as a
the voids within the formwork, even in the presence
distinct unit having specified sizes in three dimensions.
of dense reinforcement without any vibration, whilst
2.1.5 Composite Members Structural members maintaining homogeneity without segregation.
comprising prefabricated structural units of steel,
2.1.16 Shear Connectors Structural elements, such
prestressed concrete or reinforced concrete and cast
as anchors, studs, channels and spirals, intended to
in-situ concrete connected together in such a manner
transmit the horizontal shear between the prefabricated
that they act monolithically.
member and the cast in-situ concrete and also to
2.1.6 Increments Difference between two prevent vertical separation at the interface.
homologous dimensions of components of successive
sizes. 2.1.17 System It is a particular method of
construction of buildings with certain order and
2.1.7 Light Weight Concrete Concrete of discipline using the prefabricated components, tunnel
substantially lower unit weight than that made from form or large panel shutters which are inter-related in
gravel or crushed stone. functions and are produced based on a set of
2.1.8 Module A unit of size used in dimensional instructions.
co-ordination. 2.1.18 Unit Building material formed as a simple
2.1.9 Modular Co-ordination Dimensional article with all three dimensions specified, complete
All materials shall conform to Part 5 Building Materials. These rules relate to the following basic elements:
3.1.1 While selecting the materials for prefabrication, a) The planning grid in both directions of the
the following characteristics shall be considered: horizontal plan shall be:
1) 15 M for industrial buildings,
a) Easy availability;
2) 3 M for other buildings.
b) Light weight for easy handling and transport;
The centre lines of load bearing walls should
c) Thermal insulation property;
preferably coincide with the gridlines.
d) Easy workability;
b) The planning module in the vertical direction
e) Durability; shall be 2 M for industrial buildings and 1 M
f) Non-combustibility; for other buildings.
g) Sound insulation; c) Preferred increments for sill heights, doors,
h) Economy; and windows and other fenestration shall be 1 M.
j) Any other special requirement in a particular d) In the case of internal columns, the grid lines
application. shall coincide with the centre lines of
columns. In case of external columns and
3.2 Plans and Specifications columns near the lift and stair wells, the grid
The detailed plans and specifications shall cover the lines shall coincide with centre lines of the
following: column in the topmost storey.
a) Such drawings shall describe the elements and 4.2 Architectural Treatment and Finishes
the structure and assembly including all
Treatment and finishes have to be specified keeping
required data of physical properties of
in view the requirements of protection, function and
component materials. Material specification,
aesthetics of internal and external spaces and surfaces.
age of concrete for demoulding, casting/erection
tolerance and type of curing to be followed. While deciding the type of architectural treatment and
b) Details of connecting joints of prefabricates finishes for prefabricated buildings, the following
shall be given to an enlarged scale. points should be kept in view:
c) Site or shop location of services, such as a) Suitability for mass production techniques;
installation of piping, wiring or other b) Recognition of the constraints imposed by the
accessories integral with the total scheme shall level of workmanship available;
be shown separately.
c) Possibility of using different types of finishes;
d) Data sheet indicating the location of the inserts
d) Use of finishes and architectural treatment
and acceptable tolerances for supporting the
for the creation of a particular architectural
prefabricate during erection, location and
character in individual buildings and in
position of doors/windows/ventilators, etc, if
groups of buildings by the use of colour,
any.
texture, projections and recesses on surfaces,
e) The drawings shall also clearly indicate etc;
location of handling arrangements for lifting
e) Incorporation of structural elements like
and handling the prefabricated elements.
joists, columns, beams, etc, as architectural
Sequence of erection with critical check points
features and the treatment of these for better
and measures to avoid stability failure during
overall performance and appearance;
construction stage of the building.
f) Satisfactory finishing of surfaces; and
4 MODULAR CO-ORDINATION, g) Use of light weight materials to effect
ARCHITECTURAL TREATMENT AND economy in the structural system.
FINISHES
Some of the acceptable methods of finishes integral
4.1 Modular Co-ordination with the precasting are:
The basic module is to be adopted. After adopting this, a) Concrete surface moulded to design; shape;
c) Limited sizes and numbers of components; 6.3.2 There are two categories of open prefab system
d) Limited opening in bearing walls; depending on the extent of prefabrication used in the
construction as given in 6.3.2.1 and 6.3.2.2.
e) Regulated locations of partitions;
f) Standardized service and stair units; 6.3.2.1 Partial prefabrication system
g) Limited sizes of doors and windows with This system basically uses precast roofing and flooring
regulated positions; components and other minor elements like lintels,
h) Structural clarity and efficiency; CHAJJAS, kitchen sills in conventional building
j) Suitability for adoption in low rise and high construction. The structural system could be in the form
rise building; of in-situ framework or load bearing walls.
k) Ease of manufacturing, storing and 6.3.2.2 Full prefabrication system
transporting;
In this system almost all the structural components are
m) Speed and ease of erection; and prefabricated. The filler walls may be of brick/block
n) Simple jointing system. masonry or of any other locally available material.
The tie should be capable to resisting a tensile force of Each column and each wall carrying vertical load
Ft equal to 60 kN or (20 + 4N) kN whichever is less, should be tied continuously from the foundation to the
where N is the number of storeys (including basement) roof level. The reinforcement provided is required only
to resist a tensile force equal to the maximum design
ultimate load (dead and imposed) received from any
one storey.
In situation where provision of vertical ties cannot be
done, the element should be considered to be removed
and the surrounding members designed to bridge the
gap.
NOTE If there are cantilever slabs, supporting external For buildings of five or more storeys, the layout should
cladding, projecting in front of the columns and these are more be checked to identify key elements. A key element is
than 1.2 m, than the peripheral tie shall go in the slab. such that its failure would cause the collapse of more
F IG. 2 POSITION FOR PERIPHERAL TIE than a limited area close to it.
6.5.3.2 Internal ties The limited area defined above may be taken equal to
70 m2 or 15 percent of the area of the storey whichever
These are to be provided at each floor and roof level is lesser.
in two directions approximately at right angles. Ties
should be effectively continuous throughout their If key elements exists, it is preferable to modify the
length and be anchored to the peripheral tie at both layout so that the key element is avoided.
ends, unless continuing as horizontal ties to columns
6.6 Bearing for Precast Units
or walls (see Fig. 3). The tensile strength, in kN/m
width shall be the greater of Precast units shall have a bearing at least of 100 mm
on masonry supports and of 75 mm at least on steel or
( g k + qk ) lr Ft
and 1.5 Ft concrete. Steel angle shelf bearings shall have a
7.5 5 100 mm horizontal leg to allow for a 50 mm bearing
where (gk + qk ) is the sum of average characteristic exclusive of fixing clearance. When deciding to what
dead and imposed floor loads in kN/m2 and lr is the extent, if any, the bearing width may be reduced in
greater of the distance between the centre of columns, special circumstances, factors, such as, loading, span,
frames or walls supporting any two adjacent floor spans height of wall and provision of continuity, shall be
in the direction of the tie under consideration. taken into consideration.
NOTE For continuity in continuous slabs, bars are distributed evenly in a floor slab by means of lapping
some bottom steel at supports, either by extending existing bars or by the addition of splice bars.
All the units selected at random in accordance with 8.3.1.1 If within 24 h of the removal of the load, a
col 1 and 2 of Table 1 shall be subjected to the reinforced concrete structure does not show a recovery
dimensional requirements. A unit failing to satisfy any of at least 75 percent of the maximum deflection shown
of the dimensional requirements shall be termed as during the 24 h under load, test loading should be
defective. The lot shall be considered as conforming repeated after a lapse of 72 h. If the recovery is less
9.1.6 The various accepted methods of manufacture 9.2 Preparation and Storage of Materials
of precast units can be broadly classified into two Storage of materials is of considerable importance in
methods: the precasting industry, as a mistake in planning in this
a) The Stand Method where the moulds remain aspect can greatly influence the economics of production.
stationary at places, when the various From experience in construction, it is clear that there
processes involved are carried out in a cyclic will be very high percentages of loss of materials as well
order at the same place, and as poor quality due to improper storage and transport.
So, in a precast factory where everything is produced
b) The Flow Method where the precast unit
with special emphasis on quality, proper storage and
under consideration is in movement according
preservation of building materials, especially cement,
to the various processes involved in the work
coarse and fine aggregates, is of prime importance.
which are carried out in an assembly-line Storage of materials shall be done in accordance with
method. Part 7 Constructional Practices and Safety.
The various accepted precasting methods are listed in
9.3 Moulds
Table 3 with details regarding the elements that can be
manufactured by these methods. 9.3.1 Moulds for the manufacture of precast elements
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are In the following list the number appearing in the first
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards column within parentheses indicates the number of the
in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The reference in this Part/Section.
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time IS No. Title
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may (1) 2185 Specification for concrete
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance masonry units:
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the (Part 1) : 1979 Hollow and solid concrete
Code. blocks (second revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 MATERIALS, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 6
4 MODULAR CO-ORDINATION, ARCHITECTURAL TREATMENT AND 6
FINISHES
5 COMPONENTS 6
6 FORMWORK SYSTEMS 6
7 SYSTEM AND STRUCTURAL SCHEMES 6
8 JOINTS 8
9 TESTS FOR COMPONENTS/STRUCTURES 8
10 CONSTRUCTIONAL ASPECTS 8
11 EQUIPMENT 8
12 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 8
LIST OF STANDARDS 11
FOREWORD
Systems building and mixed/composite construction is an upcoming field as far as its development and use in the
country is concerned. Two aspects specifically to be borne in mind are the system to be adopted for the different
categories of buildings and the sizes of their components. Here the principle of modular co-ordination is of value
and its use is recommended.
This section was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983.
In this second revision, this section, earlier named as Prefabrication and Systems Building has been renamed and
restructured as follows:
Section 7 Prefabrication, Systems Buildings and Mixed/Composite Construction
7A Prefabricated Concrete
7B Systems Buildings and Mixed/Composite Construction
This sub-section covers systems building and mixed/composite construction, while such systems approach using
predominantly concrete as material for components is being dealt with in sub-section 7A.
In this sub-section, an attempt has been made to prescribe general requirements applicable to all valid existing
systems and mixed/composite constructions as also to accommodate any new system introduced in the country
in future.
All standards cross referred to in the main text of this sub-section, are subject to revision. The parties to agreement
based on this sub-section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the
standards.
5.3 For permissible tolerances of steel and masonry, Any other/new system may be used for systems
reference may be made to relevant Indian Standards. building after due examination and approval by the
Authority.
6 FORMWORK SYSTEMS
7 SYSTEM AND STRUCTURAL SCHEMES
The formwork systems which are utilized in buildings
shall be as given in 6.1 to 6.5. 7.1 Several schemes are possible, with certain
constraints, using the same set of components. The
6.1 Tunnel Form degree of flexibility varies from system to system.
However, in all the systems there is a certain order
This is a system which casts walls and slab together
and discipline.
like a portal in a single pour. Faade walls are precast
or of block masonry to enable removal of tunnel form. 7.2 The following aspects, among others, are to be
All components are made up of steel. This produces considered in devising a system:
ANNEX A
(Clause 10.2)
CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE FOR DECKING
A-1 RECEIVING, STORING AND LIFTING manufacturer. The information on each tag shall be
DECKING checked immediately upon arrival, to prevent incorrect
sheets being used, or unnecessary delays if changes
A-1.1 Receiving Decking are necessary. In particular, the stated sheet thickness
Decking is packed by the manufacturer into bundles shall be checked against the requirement specified on
of up to 24 sheets, and the sheets are normally secured the drawings, and a visual inspection shall be made to
with metal banding. Each bundle may be up to 1 m ensure that there is no damage.
wide (the width of a single sheet) by 750 mm deep, The bundles shall be lifted from the vehicle. Bundles
and may weigh up to 2.5 t, depending on sheet length shall never be off-loaded by tipping, dragging,
(average mass of sheet being about 1.5 t). Loads dropping or other improvized means.
are normally delivered by articulated vehicles
approximately 16 m long with a maximum gross mass A-1.2 Storing Decking
of up to 40 t, and a turning circle of approximately
The decking shall not be delivered more than one
19 m. It shall be ensured that there is suitable access
month before its anticipated use, as it may be vulnerable
and appropriate standing and off-loading areas.
to abuse and damage if stored for longer periods on
Each bundle will be given an identification tag by the site. If it is not for immediate use, the decking shall be
The support steelwork shall be prepared to receive the Individual sheets shall be slid into place and, where
decking before lifting the bundles onto it. The top possible, fixed to the steelwork before moving onto
surface of the underlying beams shall be reasonably the next sheet. This will minimize the risk of an
clean. When through-deck welding of shear studs is accident occurring as a result of movement of a sheet
specified, the tops of the flanges shall be free of primer, when it is being used as a platform. However, for
paint and galvanising. setting-out purposes, it may be necessary to lay out an
entire bay using a minimum number of temporary
The identification tags shall be used to ensure that fixings before fully securing the sheets later.
bundles are positioned on the frame at the correct floor
Sheets shall be positioned to provide a minimum
level, and in the nominated bay shown on the deck
bearing of 50 mm on the steel support beams. The ends
layout drawing. The bundles shall be positioned such
of adjacent sheets shall be butted together. A gap of
that the interlocking side laps are on the same side.
up to 5 mm is generally considered not to allow
This will enable the decking to be laid progressively
excessive seepage, but, if necessary, the ends of the
without the need to turn the sheets. The bundles shall
sheets may be taped together. When end gaps are
also be positioned in the correct span orientation, and
greater than 5 mm, it is normally sufficient to seal them
not at 90 to it. Care shall be taken to ensure that the
with an expanding foam filler. The longitudinal edges
bundles are not upside down, particularly with
shall be overlapped, to minimize concrete seepage
trapezoidal profiles. For most trapezoidal decking
along the seams. Although not normally required, seam
profiles, the embossments shall be oriented so that they
fixings may be necessary in some circumstances.
project upwards.
Sheets projecting freely more than 600 mm shall be
Care is needed when lifting the decking bundles; avoided.
protected chain slings are recommended for the same. If necessary, sheets shall be cut using a grinder or a
Unprotected chain slings can damage the bundle nibbler. However, field cutting shall be kept to a
during lifting. When synthetic slings are used there minimum and shall only be necessary where a column
is a risk of the severing them on the edges of the or other obstruction interrupts the decking. Gaps
decking sheets. adjacent to the webs of columns shall be filled in with
If timber packers are used, they shall be secured to the off-cuts or thin strips of steel. Decking sheets shown
bundle before lifting so that when the slings are as continuous on the decking layout drawing shall
released they do not fall to the ground (with potentially never be cut into more than one length. Also, sheets
disastrous results). Bundles shall never be lifted using shall never be severed at the location of a temporary
metal banding. support, and the decking shall never be fastened to a
temporary support.
A-2 DECK INSTALLATION
As the work progresses, scraps and off-cuts shall be
A-2.1 Placement of Decking disposed of in a skip placed alongside the appropriate
level of working. The skip shall be positioned carefully
Breaking open the bundles and installing the decking
over a support beam to avoid overloading the decking.
shall be done only when all the sheets can be positioned
If a skip is not available, scraps shall be gathered for
and secured. The decking layout drawing shall also be
collection as soon as is possible. Partially used bundles
checked to ensure that any temporary support that need
shall be secured, to avoid individual sheets moving in
to be in position prior to deck laying, is in place.
strong winds.
Access for installation may normally be achieved using
A-2.2 Fixing of Decking
ladders connected to the steel frame. Once the laying
out the sheets is started by erectors, they shall create Decking sheets shall be fixed to the top of the
ANNEX B
(Clause 10.3)
CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE FOR CONCRETING ON DECKING
B-1 PLACING CONCRETE decking sheet are not balanced either side of the
intermediate support beam.
B-1.1 Preparation
Stop ends, usually in the form of timber or plastic
Prior to beginning work on the decking, guardrails shall
inserts, are used to create the construction joints. As
be in position at all perimeters, internal edges and
with all the joints and ends of the decking, they shall
voids. The positions of any props (and back props)
be checked for potential grout loss.
shall be checked against the details shown on the
decking layout drawings to ensure that adequate B-1.4 Reinforcement
support has been provided.
All reinforcement shall be properly supported so that
B-1.2 Cleaning the Decking it does not get displaced during concreting. Plastic
stools, loops or preformed mesh may be used as
The surface of the decking shall be reasonably free of
chairs, but not plastic channels, which can induce
dirt, oil, etc prior to concreting.
cracking. Chairs shall be robust. In particular, the
B-1.3 Construction Joints handling and movement of concrete carrying pipes
during pumping can cause significant local impacts
Although there is no technical limitation to the area on the reinforcement.
that may be concreted, the usual pour area is up to
1 000 m2/day. Where the limits of the pour do not The reinforcement that has been fixed shall be checked.
coincide with permanent slab edges, construction joints Particular attention shall be given to checking any
are used to define the extent of the pour. additional bar reinforcement, such as may be needed
around openings.
The locations and details of the construction joints may
have an effect on the cracking. The layout and details B-1.5 Grout Loss
of the joints shall be determined by the structural The decking joints shall be closely butted and exposed
designer. For example, when brittle bonded finishes ends shall be stopped with proprietary filler pieces
are used, the relationship between the joints in the to avoid grout loss. Gaps greater than 5 mm shall be
concrete and the joints in the finishes shall be sealed.
considered at the outset, to reduce the risk of cracking
in undesirable locations. B-2 PLACEMENT
Where possible, the construction joints shall be located B-2.1 Concrete shall be placed in a way that minimizes
close to butt joints in the decking. Where shear the permanent deformation of the decking. This is
connectors are used, it is preferable to create the joint particularly important for spans greater than 3 m. When
to one side of the line of the shear connectors, to ensure concreting is progressed in the same direction as the
sound concrete around the studs. If the construction span of the decking (that is, parallel to the decking
joint cannot be made near a butt joint, it is suggested ribs), it shall be placed first over supports where the
that no more than one-third of the decking span from decking is continuous, followed by the mid-span region
a butt joint shall be left unpoured. Concreting shall and finally the areas above the end supports. When
not be stopped within a sheet length, because excessive concreting is progressed in a direction perpendicular
deflections may occur when the loads on a continuous to the decking span (that is, transverse to the decking
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards doubly-curved shell units (first
in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The revision)
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time
10297 : 1982 Code of practice for design
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may
and construction of floors and
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
roofs using precast reinforced/
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
prestressed concrete ribbed or
Code.
cored units
IS No. Title 10505 : 1983 Code of practice for construction
(1) 3935 : 1966 Code of practice for composite of floors and roofs using
construction precast reinforced concrete
(2) 3201 : 1988 Criteria for the design and waffle units
construction of precast trusses 13994 : 1994 Code of practice for design and
and purlins (first revision) construction of floor and roof
(3) 6332 : 1984 Code of practice for construction with precast reinforced concrete
of floor and roofs using precast planks and RC joists
FOREWORD 5
1 SCOPE 7
3 GENERAL 11
4 STORAGE, STACKING AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS 12
5 UNLOADING RAIL/ROAD WAGONS AND MOTOR VEHICLES 21
6 GENERAL 22
7 TERMINOLOGY 22
8 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, USE OF SIDE WALLS AND 23
TEMPORARY ENCROACHMENTS
9 TESTING 23
10 INSPECTION AND RECTIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS DEFECTS 23
11 FOUNDATIONS 24
12 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND COMMON HAZARDS DURING 24
EXCAVATION
13 PILING AND OTHER DEEP FOUNDATIONS 25
14 WALLS 27
15 COMMON HAZARDS DURING WALLING 28
16 ROOFING 29
17 ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION OF 30
CONCRETE FRAMED STRUCTURES (HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS)
18 ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION OF 33
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
19 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 36
20 FINISHES 38
21 FRAGILE FIXTURES 38
22 SAFETY IN SPECIAL OPERATIONS 38
23 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND LIFTS 38
24 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 38
25 CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY 40
26 MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT 40
29 GENERAL 48
30 PRECAUTIONS PRIOR TO DEMOLITION 49
31 PRECAUTIONS DURING DEMOLITION 50
32 SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION OPERATIONS 50
33 WALLS 50
34 FLOORING 50
35 DEMOLITION OF STEEL STRUCTURES 50
36 CATCH PLATFORM 51
37 STAIRS, PASSAGEWAYS AND LADDERS 51
38 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 51
39 DEMOLITION OF CERTAIN SPECIAL TYPES AND ELEMENTS OF 51
STRUCTURES
40 LOWERING, REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS 52
41 MISCELLANEOUS 53
42 FIRST-AID 53
LIST OF STANDARDS 60
FOREWORD
This Part of the Code emphasizes the importance of carrying out all constructional operations in a safe and
efficient manner. Workers in large number, both skilled and unskilled, are engaged in the innumerable construction
works. Due to increased tempo of such a building activity and large scale mechanization, hazards of accidents
could increase considerably. It is, therefore, imperative that adequate safety rules are laid down for every phase
of construction work.
Planning the various constructional operations before hand and making adequate arrangements for procurement
and storage of materials, and the machinery to get work done is as important as carrying out these constructional
operations in accordance with good practice. Lack of planning or defective planning may result in avoidable
delay in the completion of work and consequently increased hazards from the point of view of fire, health and
structural soundness.
The first version of this Part was prepared in 1970, which was subsequently revised in 1983. In the first revision,
information regarding handling operations, that is unloading, stacking, lifting, loading and conveying of building
materials, was also given along with the storage practices. Additional information regarding the use of ladders;
safety requirements for floor and wall openings, railings and toe boards; piling and other deep foundations;
constructions involving use of hot bituminous materials; and erection of structural steel work and concrete framed
structures, etc, were included.
As a result of experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of this part and feedback received as well as
in view of formulation of new standards in the field of constructional practices and safety and revision of some
existing standards, a need to revise this Part was felt. This revision has, therefore, been prepared to take care of
these aspects. The significant changes incorporated in this revision include:
a) The Section 1 Constructional Practices have been revamped and now includes the Planning and
Management aspects.
b) The provisions with regard to stacking and storage of building materials and components have been
updated and comprehensively covered in line with IS 4082 : 1996. This revision now also covers
provisions for materials like stones, blocks, roof tiles, partially prefabricated wall and roof components,
cinder, aluminium section, cast iron and aluminium sheets, plastic sheets, doors and windows, etc.
c) Provisions on constructional practices using bamboo have been included.
d) Provisions of safety requirements of hoists/lifts for worker during construction have been added.
e) Provisions with regard to safety at work site have been detailed incorporating aspects like preventive
measures, such as, falling material hazards prevention, fall prevention, disposal of debris, fire protection,
etc.
f) Provisions regarding safety management at work sites have been added.
g) A new section on Maintenance management, repairs, retrofitting and strengthening of buildings has
been added, covering aspects like maintenance management, prevention of cracks, and repairs and
seismic strengthening of buildings.
h) Safety provisions with respect to demolition of buildings have been updated.
j) Reference to all the concerned Indian Standards have been updated.
Bamboo is a versatile renewable resource having low gestation period, characterized by high strength, low mass
and ease of working with simple tools. Resilience coupled with lightness makes it suitable for housing in
earthquake-prone and disaster-prone areas. It has the capacity to absorb more energy and shows larger deflections
before collapse and as such is safer under earth tremors. In this revision of this Part, therefore, provisions on
construction using bamboo have been incorporated. The structural design aspects are covered in Part 6 Structural
Design, Section 3 Timber and Bamboo, 3B Bamboo.
2.3.6 Use of New/Alternative Construction Techniques the layout for stacking and storage of different
materials, components and equipments with proper
The provisions of this part are not intended to prevent
access and proper manoeuvrability of the vehicles
use of any construction techniques including any
carrying the material. While planning the layout, the
alternative materials, not specifically prescribed by the
requirements of various materials, components and
Code, provided any such alternative has been approved.
equipments at different stages of construction shall be
The Authority may approve any such alternative such
considered.
as ferrocement construction, row-lock (rat trap) bond
in masonry, stretcher bond in filler slab and filler slab 3.1.2 Materials shall be segregated as to kind, size and
provided it is found that the proposed alternative is length and placed in neat, orderly piles that are safe
satisfactory and conforms to the provisions of relevant against falling. If piles are high they shall be stepped
parts regarding material, design and construction and back at suitable intervals in height. Piles of materials
that material, method, or work offered is, for the shall be arranged so as to allow a passageway of not
purpose intended, at least equivalent to that prescribed less than 1 m width in between the piles or stacks for
in the Code in quality, strength, compatibility, inspection or removal. All passageways shall be kept
effectiveness, fire and water resistance, durability and clear of dry vegetation.
safety. 3.1.3 Materials shall be stored, stacked and handled
in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion
SECTION 2 STORAGE, STACKING AND of foreign matter and to ensure the preservation of their
HANDLING PRACTICES quality and fitness for the work.
3 GENERAL 3.1.4 Materials shall be stacked on well drained, firm
and unyielding surface. Materials shall not be stacked
3.1 Planning and Storage Layout
so as to impose any undue stresses on walls or other
3.1.1 For any site, there should be proper planning of structures.
shall be stored on plane level ground, as far plan. Proper access shall be provided for the
as possible near the concrete mixing place. replacement of silos.
After taking out the required quantity of Different types of cements shall be stacked
cement, the lid of the drum shall be securely and stored separately.
tied to prevent ingress of moisture. b) Handling Hooks shall not be used for
In case cement is received in silos, the silos handling cement bags unless specifically
shall be placed near the concrete batching permitted by the engineer-in-charge.
Polymeric materials such as coatings, sheetings, 5.1 Loading and Unloading Rail/Road Wagons
reflective surfacings/sheetings, etc shall be stored as 5.1.1 Appropriate warning signals shall be displayed
per the manufacturers instructions. Special precautions to indicate that the wagons shall not be coupled or
shall be taken in case of storage, handling and usage moved.
of toxic materials.
5.1.2 The wheels of wagons shall always be sprigged
Small articles like screws, bolts, nuts, door and window or chained while the wagons are being unloaded. The
fittings, polishing stones, protective clothing, spare brakes alone shall not be depended upon.
parts of machinery, linings, packings, water supply and
sanitary fittings, and electrical fittings, insulation 5.1.3 Special level bars shall preferably be used for
board, etc, shall be kept in suitable and properly moving rail wagons rather than ordinary crow bars.
protected containers or store rooms. Valuable small 5.1.4 Where gangplanks are used between wagons and
materials shall be kept under lock and key. platforms of piles (heaps), cleats at lower end of
gangplank, or pin through end of gangplanks, shall be
4.32 Special Considerations
used to prevent sliding. If gangplank is on a gradient,
4.32.1 Materials constantly in use shall be relatively cleats or abrasive surface shall be provided for the
nearer the place of use. entire length.
5.2 Loading and Unloading from Motor Vehicles 6.3 Safety Management
5.2.1 The motor vehicles shall be properly blocked 6.3.1 The safety of personnel engaged in building
while being loaded or unloaded; brakes alone shall not construction should be ensured through a well planned
be depended upon to hold them. and well organized mechanism. For this, depending
on the size and complexity of building construction
5.2.2 When motor vehicles are being loaded or
project, safety committee shall be constituted to
unloaded near passageways or walkways, adequate
efficiently manage all safety related affairs. The site
warning signs shall be placed on each end of the vehicle
in-charge or his nominee of a senior rank shall head
to warn the pedestrians.
the committee and a safety officer shall act as member-
5.3 Handling Heavy/Long Items secretary. The meetings of the safety committee shall
be organized regularly say fortnightly or monthly
5.3.1 Loading and unloading of heavy items, shall, as depending on the nature of the project, however,
far as possible, be done with cranes or gantries. The emergency meetings shall be called as and when
workman shall stand clear of the material being moved required. The safety committees shall deal with all the
by mechanical equipment. The slings and the ropes safety related issues through well structured agenda,
used shall be of adequate load carrying capacity, so as in the meetings and all safety related measures installed
not to give way and result in accidents. at the site and implementation thereof shall be
5.3.2 While heavy and long components are being periodically reviewed.
manually loaded into motor vehicle, wagons, trailer, 6.3.2 Notwithstanding the guidelines given in 6.3.1,
etc, either wooden sleepers or steel rails of sufficient all provisions given in relevant Act/Rules/Regulations
length and properly secured in position shall be put in as amended from time to time shall be followed; in
a gentle slope against the body of the wagon/vehicle this regard, reference shall also be made to the Building
at 3 or 4 places for loading. These long items shall be and Other Construction Workers Act, 1996 and the
dragged, one by one, gently and uniformly along these Rules/Regulations framed thereunder.
supports by means of ropes, being pulled by men with
feet properly anchored against firm surface. As soon 7 TERMINOLOGY
as the items come on the floor of the vehicle, the same
7.1 For the purpose of this Part the following
may be shifted by crowbars and other suitable leverage
definitions shall apply.
mechanism, but not by hands to avoid causing accident
to the workmen. 7.2 Authority Having Jurisdiction The Authority
which has been created by a statute and which for the
5.3.3 Similar procedure as outlined in 5.3.2 shall
purpose of administering the Code/Part, may authorize
be followed for manual unloading of long or heavy
a committee or an official to act on its behalf;
items.
hereinafter called the Authority.
SECTION 3 SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION 7.3 Construction Equipment All equipment,
OF ELEMENTS OF A BUILDING machinery, tools and temporary retaining structures
and working platforms, that is, tools, derricks, staging,
6 GENERAL
scaffolds, runways, ladders and all material, handling
6.1 The provisions of this Section shall apply to the equipment including safety devices.
erection/alterational of the various parts of a building
7.4 Floor Hole An opening measuring less than
or similar structure. The construction of the different
300 mm but more than 25mm in its least dimension,
elements shall conform to 2.3.2.
in any floor, platform, pavement, or yard, through
6.2 Other Laws which materials but not persons may fall; such as, a
belt hole, pipe opening or slot opening.
Nothing herein stated shall be construed to nullify any
rules, regulations, safety standards or statutes of the 7.5 Floor Opening An opening measuring 300 mm
local state governments or those contained in the or more in its least dimension, in any floor, platform,
various Acts of the Government of India. The specific pavement or yard through which person may fall; such
Rules, Regulations and Acts pertaining to the as hatch way, stair or ladder opening, pit or large
protection of the public or workmen from health and manhole.
17.2.1 Formwork shall be designed after taking into 17.2.11 Sills under the supports shall be set on firm
consideration spans, setting temperature of concrete, soil or other suitable material in a pattern which assures
dead load and working load to be supported and safety adequate stability for all props. Care shall be taken not
factor for the materials used for formwork {see also to disturb the soil under the supports. Adequate
good practice [7(6)] }. drainage shall be provided to drain away water coming
due to rains, washing of forms or during the curing of
17.2.2 All timber formwork shall be carefully the concrete to avoid softening of the supporting soil
inspected before use and members having cracks and starta.
excessive knots shall be discarded.
17.2.12 All centering shall be finally, inspected to
17.2.3 As timber centering usually takes an initial set
ensure that:
when vertical load is applied, the design of this
centering shall make allowance for this factor. a) footings or sills under every post of the
centering are sound.
17.2.4 The vertical supports shall be adequately braced
or otherwise secured in position that these do not fall b) all lower adjustment screws or wedges are
when the load gets released or the supports are sung against the legs of the panels.
accidently hit. c) all upper adjustment screws or heads of jacks
are in full contact with the formwork.
17.2.5 Tubular steel centering shall be used in
d) panels are plumb in both directions.
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. When
tubular steel and timber centering is to be used in e) all cross braces are in place and locking
combination necessary precautions shall be taken to devices are in closed and secure position.
avoid any unequal settlement under load. f) In case of CHHAJAS and balconies, the props
shall be adequate to transfer the load to the
17.2.6 A thorough inspection of tubular steel centering
supporting point.
is necessary before its erection and members showing
evidence of excessive resting, kinks, dents or damaged 17.2.13 During pouring of the concrete, the centering
welds shall be discarded. Buckled or broken members shall be constantly inspected and strengthened, if
shall be replaced. Care shall also be taken that locking required, wedges below the vertical supports tightened
devices are in good working order and that coupling and adjustment screws properly adjusted as necessary.
pins are effectively aligned to frames. Adequate protection of centering shall be secured from
moving vehicles or swinging loads.
17.2.7 After assembling the basic unit, adjustment
screws shall be set to their approximate final adjustment 17.2.14 Forms shall not be removed earlier than as
17.5.7 Wedges and other temporary anchoring devices 17.8.3 Levelling devices, such as wedges and nuts
shall be inspected before use. which have no load bearing function in the completed
structure shall be released or removed as necessary
17.5.8 The prestressing jacks shall be periodically prior to integrating the joints.
examined for wear and tear.
17.8.4 If it becomes necessary to use electric power
17.6 Erection of Prefabricated Members for in-situ work, the same should be stepped down to
17.6.1 A spreader beam shall be used wherever a safe level as far as possible.
possible so that the cable can be as perpendicular to
17.9 General
the members being lifted as practical. The angle
between the cable and the members to be lifted shall Workmen working in any position where there is a
not be less than 60. falling hazard shall wear safety belts or other adequate
protection shall be provided.
17.6.2 The lifting wires shall be tested for double the
load to be handled at least once in six months. The 18 ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
guy line shall be of adequate strength to perform its FOR ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
function of controlling the movement of members WORK
being lifted.
18.1 Safety Organization
17.6.3 Temporary scaffolding of adequate strength
shall be used to support precast members at The agency responsible for erecting the steel work
predetermined supporting points while lifting and should analyze the proposed erection scheme for
placing them in position and connecting them to other safety; the erection scheme should cover safety aspects
members. right from the planning stage up to the actual execution
of the work.
17.6.4 After erection of the member, it shall be guyed
and braced to prevent it from being tipped or dislodged 18.2 Safety of Workpersons
by accidental impact when setting the next member.
18.2.1 General
17.6.5 Precast concrete units shall be handled at
While engaging persons for the job the supervisor
specific picking points and with specific devices.
should check up and make sure that they are skilled in
Girders and beams shall be braced during transportation
the particular job they have to perform.
and handled. In such a way as to keep the members
upright. 18.2.1.1 The helmets shall be worn properly and at
all times during the work and shall conform to the
17.6.6 Methods of assembly and erection specified by
accepted standards [7(9)].
the designer, shall be strictly adhered to at site.
Immediately on erecting any unit in position, temporary 18.2.1.2 The safety goggles shall be used while
connections or supports as specified shall be provided performing duties which are hazardous to eye like
An owner responsible for a large number of buildings 26.3.8 Means of Effecting Maintenance
may have established procedures for maintenance. 26.3.8.1 Responsibility
When an owner is responsible for the maintenance of
only one building or a small number of buildings, the Some maintenance work will be carried out by
preparation of a guide tailored to suit each particular the occupier of a building or by the occupiers
building, can offer significant advantages. Such a guide representative. In the case of leasehold or similar
should take into account the following: occupation not all maintenance may be the
responsibility of occupier. Responsibility of common
a) type of construction and residual life of the areas may be clearly defined.
building, and
b) environment and intensity of use (see 26.3.2). 26.3.8.2 Maintenance work sub-divided into major
repair, restoration, periodical and routine or day-to-day
The guide may form part of a wider manual covering operations will be undertaken by one of the following:
operational matters.
a) Directly employed labour,
26.3.6 Planning of Maintenance Work b) Contractors, and
Work should take account of the likely maintenance c) Specialist contractors under service agreement
cycle of each building element and be planned or otherwise.
logically, with inspections being made at regular
intervals. Annual plans should take into account 26.3.8.3 The merits of each category for typical
subsequent years programmes to incorporate items maintenance work must be considered because
and to prevent additional costs. It should be stressed optimum use of resources appropriate to tasks in a
that the design of some buildings can lead to high given situation is an important element of policy.
indirect costs in maintenance contracts and therefore, 26.3.8.4 The success of contracting out depends on
careful planning can bring financial benefits. Decisions the nature of the services, conditions in which
to repair or replace should be taken after due contracting is undertaken (the tendering process), how
consideration. the contract is formulated and subsequent monitoring
26.3.7 Feed Back of service quality. The important consideration in the
decision to contract out is whether a contractor can
26.3.7.1 Feed back is normally regarded as an ensure a socially desirable quantity and quality of
important procedure of providing information about service provision at a reasonable cost to the
the behaviour of materials and detailing for the benefit consumers.
of the architect/engineer designing new buildings,
which will result in lessening maintenance costs. It is 26.4 Access
an equally valuable source of information for
26.4.1 General
the persons responsible for maintenance. Every
maintenance organization should develop a sample All maintenance activities including any preliminary
way of communicating its know how, firstly for benefit survey and inspection work require safe access and in
of others in the organization and secondly for the some situations this will have to be specially designed.
benefit of the building industry as a whole. There Maintenance policy, and maintenance costs, will be
should be frank and recorded dialogue on an on-going much influenced by ready or difficult access to the
basis between those who occupy and care for buildings fabric and to building services. Special precautions and
and those who design and construct them. access provisions may also need to be taken for roof
26.7.1.2 Repetitive nature of jobs involve little or no 26.8 Operating and Maintenance Manuals
pre-planning whereas infrequent nature of jobs may The engineering services within buildings frequently
need careful planning even if the person attending the are dynamic, involving complex systems of integrated
job is technically competent. plant items. Operation of such plant can require detailed
26.7.1.3 Planned routine maintenance will facilitate knowledge and direction. Maintenance can also require
continued safe and acceptable operation of an electrical extensive information to be available. It is, therefore,
system with a minimum risk of breakdown and important to have suitable operating and maintenance
consequent interruption of supply. manuals to provide the necessary guidance. These
should be included as part of the contractual
26.7.1.4 As far as the electrical equipments/ requirements for new installations and should ideally
installations are concerned, it is not possible to laydown be prepared as reference documents for existing
precise recommendations for the interval between the installations where no such information exists.
maintenance required. The recommendation for
frequency of maintenance in this regard from the 26.9 For details on labour management concerning
manufacturer is more relevant. The manufacturer building maintenance, reference shall be made to good
should be requested to specify minimum maintenance practice [7(32)].
frequency under specified conditions. These intervals 26.10 For details on financial management concerning
depend greatly upon the design of the equipment, the building maintenance, reference shall be made to good
duty that it is called on to perform and the environment practice [7(33)].
in which it is situated.
27 PREVENTION OF CRACKS
26.7.2 Following two types of maintenance are
envisaged. 27.1 Cracks in buildings are of common occurrence.
A building component develops cracks whenever stress
26.7.2.1 Routine maintenance
in the component exceeds its strength. Stress in a
Routine maintenance of the electrical equipments goes building component could be caused by externally
alongwith the regular inspections of the equipments. applied forces, such as dead, imposed, wind or seismic
Inspections shall reveal the undue damage and excessive loads, or foundation settlement or it could be induced
37.2 All ladders shall be secured against, slipping out 39.4 Brick Arches
at the bottom and against movement in any direction Expert advice should be obtained and, at all stages of
at the top. the demolition, the closet supervision should be given
by persons fully experienced and conversant in the type
38 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
of work to ensure that the structure is stable at all times.
When demolition is to be performed by mechanical
However, the following points may be kept in view.
devices, such as weight ball and power shovels, the
following additional precautions may be observed: 39.4.1 On no account should the restraining influence
of the abutments be removed before the dead load of
a) The area shall be barricaded for a minimum
the spandrel fill and the arch rings are removed.
distance of 1 times the height of the wall,
b) While the mechanical device is in operation, 39.4.2 A single span arch can be demolished by hand
no workmen shall be allowed to enter the by cutting narrow segments progressively from each
building being demolished, springing parallel to the span of the arch, until the width
c) The device shall be so located as to avoid of the arch has been reduced to a minimum which can
falling debris, and then be collapsed.
d) The mechanical device when being used shall 39.4.3 Where deliberate collapse is feasible, the crown
not cause any damage to adjacent structure, may be broken by the demolition ball method working
power line, etc. progressively from edges to the centre.
Before commencing demolition, the nature and 40.2.1 Wooden or metal chutes may be provided from
condition of the concrete, the condition and position removal of materials. The chutes shall preferably be
of reinforcement, and the possibility of lack of provided at the centre of the building for efficient
continuity of reinforcement should be ascertained. disposal of debris.
Demolition should be commenced by removing 40.2.2 Chutes, if provided at an angle of more than
partitions and external non-load bearing cladding. 45 from the horizontal, shall be entirely enclosed on
all the four sides, except for opening at or about the
39.6.1 Reinforced Concrete Beams floor level for receiving the materials.
A supporting rope should be attached to the beam. 40.2.3 To prevent the descending material attaining a
Then the concrete should be removed from both ends dangerous speed, chute shall not extend in an unbroken
by pneumatic drill and the reinforcement exposed. line for more than two storeys. A gate or stop shall be
The reinforcement should then be cut in such a way provided with suitable means for closing at the bottom
as to allow the beam to be lowered under control to of each chute to stop the flow of materials.
the floor.
40.2.4 Any opening into which workmen dump debris
39.6.2 Reinforced Concrete Columns at the top of chute shall be guarded by a substantial
The reinforcement should be exposed at the base after guard rail extending at least 1 m above the level of the
restraining wire guy ropes have been placed round the floor or other surface on which men stand to dump the
member at the top. The reinforcement should then be materials into the chute.
out in such a way as to allow it to be pulled down to 40.2.5 A toe board or bumper, not less than 50 mm
the floor under control. thick and 150 mm high shall be provided at each chute
39.6.3 Reinforced Concrete Walls openings, if the material is dumped from the wheel
barrows. Any space between the chute and the edge of
These should be cut into strips and demolished as for the opening in the floor through which it passes shall
columns. be solidly planked over.
39.6.4 Suspended Floors and Roofs
40.3 Through Holes in the Floors
The slab should be cut into strips parallel to the main
40.3.1 Debris may also be dropped through holes in
reinforcement and demolished strip by strip. Where
the floor without the use of chutes. In such a case the
ribbed construction has been used, the principle of
total area of the hole cut in any intermediate floor, one
design and method of construction should be
which lies between floor that is being demolished and
determined before demolition is commenced. Care
the storage floor shall not exceed 25 percent of such
should be taken not to cut the ribs inadvertently.
floor area. It shall be ensured that the storage floor is
39.7 Precast Reinforced Concrete of adequate strength to withstand the impact of the
falling material.
Due precautions shall be taken to avoid toppling over
of prefabricated units or any other part of the structure 40.3.2 All intermediate floor openings for passage of
40.4 Removal of Materials 41.2 Warning devices shall be installed in the area to
warn the workers in case of any danger.
40.4.1 As demolition work proceeds, the released
serviceable materials of different types shall be 41.3 Safety devices like industrial safety helmets
separated from the unserviceable lot (hereinafter called conforming to the accepted standards [7(9)] and
MALBA) at suitable time intervals and properly goggles made of celluloid lens, shall be issued to the
stocked clear of the spots where demolition work is workmen. Foreman-in-charge of the work areas shall
being done. ensure that all the workmen are wearing the safety
devices before commencing any work.
40.4.2 The MALBA obtained during demolition shall
be collected in well-formed heaps at properly selected 41.4 Construction sheds and tool boxes shall be so
places, keeping in view safe conditions for workmen located as to protect workers from injuries from the
in the area. The height of each MALBA heap shall be falling debris.
limited to ensure its toppling over or otherwise 41.5 Where there is a likelihood of injuries to hands
endangering the safety of workmen or passersby. of workmen when demolishing RCC, steel structures,
40.4.3 The MALBA shall be removed from the etc, gloves of suitable materials shall be worn by
demolition site to a location as required by the local workmen.
civil authority. Depending on the space available at the 41.6 Sufficient protection by way of both overhead
demolition site, this operation of conveying MALBA to cover and screens shall be provided to prevent injuries
its final disposal location may have to be carried out a to the workmen and the public.
number of times during the demolition work. In any
case, the demolition work shall not be considered as 41.7 Safety belts or ropes shall be used by workmen
completed and the area declared fit for further occupation when working at higher levels.
till all the MALBA has been carried to its final disposal 41.8 Grading of Plot
location and the demolition areas tidied up.
When a building has been demolished and no building
40.4.4 Materials which are likely to cause dust operation has been projected or approved, the vacant
nuisance or undue environmental pollution in any other plot shall be filled, graded and maintained in
way, shall be removed from the site at the earliest and conformity to the established street grades at curb level.
till then they shall be suitable covered. Such materials The plot shall be maintained free from the
shall be covered during transportation also. accumulation of rubbish and all other unsafe and
40.4.5 a) Glass and steel should be dumped or hazardous conditions which endangers the life or health
buried separately to prevent injury. of the public; and provisions shall be made to
prevent the accumulation of water or damage to any
b) Workman should be provided with
foundations on the premises or the adjoining property.
suitable protective gears for personal
safety during works, lie safety helmets, 42 FIRST-AID
boots, hand gloves, goggles, special
attire, etc. 42.1 A copy of all pertinent regulations and notices
concerning accidents, injury and first-aid shall be
c) The work of removal of debris should be
prominently exhibited at the work site.
carried out during day. In case of poor
visibility artificial light may be provided. 42.2 Depending on the scope and nature of the work,
ANNEX A
(Clause 2.1.2)
PROGRAMME EVALUATION AND REVIEW TECHNIQUE, AND
CRITICAL PATH METHOD
ANNEX B
(Clause 4.1)
CHECK LIST FOR STACKING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
12. Boards like Plywood,
Particle Boards, Fibre
Boards, Blockboards and
Gypsum Board
13. Plastic and Rubber Flooring
a) Sheets in rolls
b) Tiles
14. Glass Sheets
15. Glass Bricks/Blocks
16. CI, GI and AC Pipes and
Fittings
a) Pipes
b) CI and GI Fittings
c) AC Fittings
17. Polyethylene Pipes
18. Unplasticized PVC Pipes
19. Bitumen, Road Tar,
Asphalt, etc in Drums
20. Oil Paints
21. Sanitary Appliances
ANNEX C
(Clause 26.3.2.2.2)
COMMON CAUSES FOR MAINTENANCE PROBLEMS
ANNEX D
(Clause 26.6.5)
FORMAT FOR INSPECTION REPORT
Date :
Building/Block :
Condition
Sound Suspect Defective
FLOORS & STAIRCASES
Ground Floor
Finish
Skirting
Structure
Damp-proofing
Ceiling
Under floors, spaces, (Suspended floors)
Termites/insects
Upper Floors
Finish
Structure
Ceiling
Suspended ceiling
Stair cases
Structure
Treads
Finishes
Balustrade
Soffits
Finish
ROOFING
Flat/Pitched
Finish
Insulation
Structure
Condition
Sound Suspect Defective
Roof lights/glazing
Parapets
Cutters
Rain Water Pipes
Mud Phuska
Roof interiors (Pitched)
Growth of vegetation
SANITARY INSTALLATIONS
Plumbing
Fittings/Pipings, WC's
Taps
Sinks
Basins
Urinals
Cisterns
Geysers
Sewage Disposal
Soil pipes
Manholes
Sewerlines
Drainage
Gully chambers
Sewers
Surface drains
Inspection chambers
Structural movement
Failure of material
Design or construction defects
Overhead Tanks/Underground
Sumps/Terrace Tanks
Septic Tanks
Remarks
ANNEX E
(Clause 26.7.3.2)
GUIDELINES FOR MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTS
E-1 In case of electrical appliances, manufacturers be available with the maintenance unit. Following
instructions for the usage and maintenance of the records should be available.
equipment should be strictly followed. a) Manufacturers name
E-2 The detailed/working drawings of all the b) Nameplate of the equipment and its sailent
components of electrical installations should always features such as capacity, rating etc.
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards (Part 3) : 1992 Foundations for rotary type
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The machines (medium and
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time high frequency) (second
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may revision)
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the (Part 4) : 1979 Foundations for rotary type
Code. machines of low frequency
(first revision)
IS No. Title
(Part 5) : 1987 Foundations for impact
(1) a) Foundations machines other than
1080 : 1985 Code of practice for design hammers forging and
and construction of shallow stamping press pig breakers
foundations on soils (other (drop crusher and jolter)
than raft, ring and shell) (first revision)
(second revision) 9456 : 1980 Code of practice for design
1904 : 1986 Code of practice for design and construction of conical
and construction of and hyperbolic paraboidal
foundations in soils: types of shell foundations
General requirements 9556 : 1980 Code of practice for design
(third revision) and construction of
2911 Code of practice for design diaphragm walls
and construction of pile 13094 : 1992 Guidelines for selection of
foundations ground improvement
(Part 1/Sec 1) : 1979 Concrete piles, Section 1 techniques for foundation
Driven cast in-situ concrete in weak soils
piles (first revision) 15284 Design and construction
(Part 1/Sec 2) : 1979 Concrete piles, Section 2 (Part 1) : 2003 for ground improvement:
Board cast in-situ piles Part 1 Stone columns
(first revision) b) Masonry
(Part 1/Sec 3) : 1979 Concrete piles, Section 3 1597 Code of practice for
Driven precast concrete construction of stone
piles (first revision) masonry
(Part 1/Sec 4) : 1984 Concrete piles, Section 4 (Part 1) : 1992 Rubble stone masonry (first
Bored precast concrete revision)
piles (first revision)
(Part 2) : 1992 Ashlar masonry (first
(Part 2) : 1980 Timber piles (first revision) revision)
(Part 3) : 1980 Under-reamed piles (first 2110 : 1980 Code of practice for in-situ
revision) construction of walls in
(Part 4) : 1985 Load test on piles (first buildings with soil-cement
revision) (first revision)
2974 Code of practice for design 2212 : 1991 Code of practice for
and construction of machine brickwork (first revision)
foundations 2250 : 1981 Code of practice for
(Part 1) : 1982 Foundations for recipro- preparation and use of
cating type machines masonry mortars (first
(second revision) revision)
(Part 2) : 1980 Foundations for impact 2572 : 1963 Code of practice for
type machines (hammer construction of hollow
foundations) (first revision) concrete block masonry
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 ORIENTATION OF BUILDING 8
4 LIGHTING 11
5 VENTILATION 35
LIST OF STANDARDS 47
FOREWORD
Illumination levels for different tasks are recommended to be achieved either by daylighting or artificial lighting
or a combination of both. This Section, read together with Part 8 Building Services, Section 2 Electrical and
Allied Installations, adequately covers the illumination levels required and methods of achieving the same.
Ventilation requirements to maintain air quality and control body odours in terms of air changes per hour and to
ensure thermal comfort and heat balance of body are laid for different occupancies and the methods of achieving
the same by natural means are covered in this Section. The provisions on mechanical ventilation are covered in
Part 8 Building Services, Section 3 Air Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation.
Climatic factors which normally help in deciding the orientation of the buildings to get desirable benefits of
lighting and ventilation inside the buildings are also covered in this Section.
This Section was first published in 1970. The first revision of the Section was brought out in 1983. In this
revision, some provisions have been updated based on the information given in the SP 41 : 1987 Handbook on
functional requirements of buildings (other than industrial buildings); other major changes in this revision are:
a) Rationalization of definitions and inclusion of definitions for some more terms.
b) A climatic classification map of India based on a new criteria has been included.
c) Data on total solar radiations incident on various surfaces of buildings for summer and winter seasons
have been updated.
d) Design guidelines for natural ventilation have been included.
e) For guidelines on mechanical ventilation, reference to Part 8 Building Services, Section 3 Air
Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation has been made, where these provisions have now
been covered exhaustively.
f) Rationalized method for estimation of desired capacity of ceiling fans and their optimum height above
the floor for rooms of different sizes have been included.
g) Design sky illuminance values for different climatic zones of India have been incorporated.
Energy efficiency is an important aspect being taken care of in this revision of the Code. Accordingly, the
relevant requirements for energy efficient system for lighting and ventilation have been duly included in the
concerned provisions under this Section.
The provisions of this Section are without prejudice to the various Acts, Rules and Regulations including the
Factories Act, 1948 and Rules and Regulations framed thereunder.
The information contained in this Section in largely based on the following Indian Standards/Special Publications:
IS 2440 : 1975 Guide for daylighting of buildings (second revision)
IS 3103 : 1975 Code of practice for industrial ventilation (first revision)
IS 3362 : 1977 Code of practice for natural ventilation of residential buildings (first revision)
IS 3646 Code of practice for interior illumination: Part 1 General requirements and
(Part 1) : 1992 recommendations for building interiors (first revision)
IS 7662 Recommendations for orientation of buildings: Part 1 Non-industrial buildings
(Part 1) : 1974
IS 11907 : 1986 Recommendations for calculation of solar radiation on buildings
SP 32 : 1986 Handbook on functional requirements of industrial buildings (lighting and ventilation)
SP 41 : 1987 Handbook on functional requirements of buildings other than industrial buildings
Provisions given in National Lighting Code (under preparation) may also be referred.
2.1.1 Altitude () The angular distance of any point 2.1.7 Colour Rendering Index (CRI) Measure of
of celestial sphere, measured from the horizon, on the the degree to which the psychophysical colour of an
great circle passing through the body and the zenith object illuminated by the test illuminant conforms to
(see Fig. 1). that of the same object illuminated by the reference
illuminant, suitable allowance having been made for
2.1.2 Azimuth () The angle measured between the state of chromatic adaptation.
meridians passing through the north point and the point
in question (point C in Fig. 1). 2.1.8 Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT) (Unit:
K) The temperature of the Planckian radiator whose
perceived colour most closely resembles that of a given
stimulus at the same brightness and under specified
viewing conditions.
2.1.9 Daylight Area The superficial area on the
working plane illuminated to not less than a specified
daylight factor, that is, the area within the relevant
contour.
2.1.10 Daylight Factor The measure of total
daylight illuminance at a point on a given plane
expressed as the ratio (or percentage) which the
illuminance at the point on the given plane bears to
the simultaneous illuminance on a horizontal plane due
REFERENCES to clear design sky at an exterior point open to the
O Observers station S Geographical south whole sky vault, direct sunlight being excluded.
C Celestial body E Geographical east
Z Zenith W Geographical west 2.1.11 Daylight Penetration The maximum
NA Nadir N Geographical north distance to which a given daylight factor contour
penetrates into a room.
FIG. 1 ALTITUDE AND AZIMUTH OF A
CELESTIAL B ODY 2.1.12 Direct Solar Illuminance The illuminance
from the sun without taking into account the light from
2.1.3 Brightness Ratio or Contrast The variations
the sky.
or contrast in brightness of the details of a visual task,
such as white print on blackboard. 2.1.13 External Reflected Component (ERC) The
ratio (or percentage) of that part of the daylight
2.1.4 Candela (cd) The SI unit of luminous
illuminance at a point on a given plane which is
intensity.
received by direct reflection from external surfaces as
Candela = 1 lumen per steradian compared to the simultaneous exterior illuminance on
a horizontal plane from the entire hemisphere of an
2.1.5 Central Field The area of circle round the
unobstructed clear design sky.
point of fixation and its diameter, subtending an angle
of about 2 at the eye. Objects within this area are most 2.1.14 Glare A condition of vision in which there
critically seen in both their details and colour. is discomfort or a reduction in the ability to see
2.1.19 Luminance (At a point of a Surface in a Given 2.1.29 Room Index (kr ) An index relating to the shape
Direction) (Brightness) The quotient of the of a rectangular interior, according to the formula:
luminous intensity in the given direction of an L .W
infinitesimal element of the surface containing the kr =
(L + W ) Hm
point under consideration by the orthogonally
projected area of the element on a plane perpendicular where L and W are the length and width respectively
to the given direction. The unit is candela per square of the interior, and Hm is the mounting height, that is,
metre (cd/m2). height of the fittings above the working plane.
2.1.20 Luminous Flux () The quantity characteristic NOTES
of radiant flux which expresses its capacity to produce 1 For rooms where the length exceeds 5 times the width, L
visual sensation evaluated according to the values shall be taken as L = 5W.
of relative luminous efficiency for the light adapted 2 If the reflection factor of the upper stretch of the walls is
less than half the reflection factor of the ceiling, for indirect or
eye:
for the greater part of indirect lighting, the value Hm is measured
a) Effective luminous flux (n ) Total luminous between the ceiling and the working plane.
flux which reaches the working plane. 2.1.30 Sky Component (SC) The ratio (or percentage)
b) Nominal luminous flux (o ) Total luminous of that part of the daylight illuminance at a point on a
flux of the light sources in the interior. given plane which is received directly from the sky as
2.1.21 Maintenance Factor (d) The ratio of the compared to the simultaneous exterior illuminance on
average illuminance on the working plane after a a horizontal plane from the entire hemisphere of an
certain period of use of a lighting installation to the unobstructed clear design sky.
average illuminance obtained under the same 2.1.31 Solar Load The amount of heat received
conditions for a new installation. into a building due to solar radiation which is affected
2.1.22 Meridian It is the great circle passing through by orientation, materials of construction and reflection
the zenith and nadir for a given point of observation. of external finishes and colour.
2.1.23 North and South Points The point in the 2.1.32 Utilization Factor (Coefficient of Utilizaiton)
respective directions where the meridian cuts the ( ) The ratio of the total luminous flux which
horizon. reaches the working plane (effective luminous
2.2.18 Natural Ventilation Supply of outside air 3.1 The chief aim of orientation of buildings is to
into a building through window or other openings due provide physically and psychologically comfortable
to wind outside and convection effects arising from living inside the building by creating conditions which
temperature or vapour pressure differences (or both) suitably and successfully ward off the undesirable
between inside and outside of the building. effects of severe weather to a considerable extent by
judicious use of the recommendations and knowledge
2.2.19 Positive Ventilation The supply of outside of climatic factors.
air by means of a mechanical device, such as a fan.
3.2 Basic Zones
2.2.20 Propeller Fan A fan in which the air leaves
the impeller in a direction substantially parallel to its 3.2.1 For the purpose of design of buildings, the
axis designed to operate normally under free inlet and country may be divided into the major climatic zones
outlet conditions. as given in Table 2, which also gives the basis of this
classification.
2.2.21 Spray-Head System A system of atomizing
water so as to introduce free moisture directly into a Table 2 Classification of Climate
building.
(Clause 3.2.1)
2.2.22 Stack Effect Convection effect arising from
temperature or vapour pressure difference (or both) Sl Climatic Mean Monthly Mean Monthly
No. Zone Maximum Relative Humidity
between outside and inside of the room and the Temperature (C) Percentage
difference of height between the outlet and inlet (1) (2) (3) (4)
openings.
i) Hot-Dry above 30 below 55
2.2.23 Tropical Summer Index (TSI) The temperature ii) Warm-Humid above 30 above 55
above 25 above 75
of calm air at 50 percent relative humidity which iii) Temperate between 25-30 below 75
imparts the same thermal sensation as the given iv) Cold below 25 All values
environment. TSI (in C) is express as v) Composite see 3.2.2
0.745 tg + 0.308 tw 2.06 v + 0.841 The climatic classification map of India is shown in
Fig. 2.
where
3.2.2 Each climatic zone does not have same climate
tg = Globe temperature, C; for the whole year; it has a particular season for more
tw = Wet bulb temperature, C; and than six months and may experience other seasons for
v = Wind speed, m/s. the remaining period. A climatic zone that does not
have any season for more than six months may be
2.2.24 Threshold Limit Value (TLV) Refers to air- called as composite zone.
borne concentration of contaminants currently accepted
by the American Conference of Governmental 3.3 Climatic Factors
Industrial Hygienists and represents conditions under
From the point of view of lighting and ventilation, the
which it is believed that nearly all occupants may be
following climatic factors influence the optimum
repeatedly exposed, day after day, without adverse
orientation of the building:
effect.
a) solar radiation and temperature
2.2.25 Velocity, Capture Air velocity at any point
in front of the exhaust hood necessary to overcome b) relative humidity, and
opposing air currents and to capture the contaminants c) prevailing winds.
The territorial waters of India extend into the sea to a distance of twelve nautical miles measured from the appropriate base
line.
The boundary of Meghalaya shown on this map is as interpreted from the North-Eastern Areas (Reorganisation) Act, 1971, but
has yet to be verified.
Responsibility for correctness of internal details shown on the map rests with the publisher.
The state boundaries between Uttaranchal & Uttar Pradesh, Bihar & Jharkhand and Chhatisgarh & Madhya Pradesh have not
been verified by Governments concerned.
Table 3 Total Solar Radiation (Direct plus Diffused) Incident on Various Surfaces of
Buildings in W/m2/day for Summer and Winter Seasons
(Clause 3.4.1)
Orientation Latitude
4.1.3.2.2 The lower value of the range may be used Most buildings are complexes of working areas and
when: other areas, such as passages, corridors, stairways,
lobbies and entrances. The lighting of all these areas
a) reflectances or contrast are unusually high; should be properly correlated to give safe movement
b) speed and accuracy is not important; and within the building at all times.
c) the task is executed only occasionally. 4.1.5.1 Corridors, passages and stairways
4.1.3.3 Where a visual task is required to be carried Accidents may result if people leave a well-lighted
out throughout an interior, general illumination level working area and pass immediately into corridors or
to the recommended value on the working plane is on to stairways where the lighting is inadequate, as
necessary; where the precise height and location of the time needed for adaptation to the lower level may
the task are not known or cannot be easily specified, be too long to permit obstacles or the treads of stairs
the recommended value is that on horizontal plane to be seen sufficiently quickly. For the same reason, it
850 mm above floor level. is desirable that the illumination level of rooms which
NOTE For an industrial task, working plane for the purpose open off a working area should be fairly high even
of general illumination levels is that on a work place which is though the rooms may be used only occasionally.
4.2.8.6 Cross-lighting with openings on adjacent walls 0.5 Ht 0.15 0.15 0.25
1.0 Ht 0.30 0.32 0.38
tends to increase the diffused lighting within a room. 1.5 Ht 0.40 0.50 0.55
2.0 Ht 0.50 0.60 0.68
4.2.8.7 Openings in deep reveals tend to minimize
glare effects. 4.2.10 For specified requirements for daylighting of
4.2.8.8 Openings shall be provided with CHAJJAHS, special occupancies and areas, reference may be made
louvers, baffles or other shading devices to exclude, to good practice [8-1(4)].
4.4.2 Daytime use of artificial lights may be minimized a) An average interior finish with ceiling white,
by proper design of windows for adequate daylight walls off white and floor grey has been
indoors. Daylighting design should be according to 4.2. assumed.
4.4.3 Fenestration expressed as percentage of floor b) Ceiling height of 3 m and room depths up to
area required for satisfactory visual performance of a 10 m and floor area between 30 m2 and 50 m2
have been assumed. For floor area beyond
few tasks for different separation to height (S/H) ratio
50 m2 and less than 30 m2 , the values of
of external obstructions such as opposite buildings may
percent fenestration as well as wattage per m2
be obtained from the design nomograph (Fig. 4). The
should be multiplied by a factor of 0.85 and
obstructions at a distance of three times their height or
1.15 respectively.
more (S/H > 3) from a window faade are not
significant and a window facing such an obstruction c) It is assumed that windows are of metallic
may be regarded as a case of unobstructed window. sashes with louvers of width up to 600 mm
or a CHHAJJA (balcony projection) at ceiling
4.4.3.1 The nomograph consists of horizontal lines level of width up to 2.0 m. For wooden sashes,
indicating fenestration percentage of floor area and the window area should be increased by a
vertical lines indicating the separation to height ratio factor of about 1.1.
of external obstructions such as opposite buildings. d) Luminaires emanating more light in the
Any vertical line for separation to height ratio other downward direction than upward direction
than already shown in the nomograph (1.0, 2.0 and 3.0) (such as reflectors with or without diffusing
may be drawn by designer, if required. For cases where plastics) and mounted at a height of 1.5 m to
there is no obstruction, the ordinate corresponding to 2.0 m above the workplane have been
the value 3.0 may be used. The value of percentage considered.
fenestration and separation to height ratio are marked
on left hand ordinate and abscissa respectively. The 4.4.3.3 Method of use
illumination levels are marked on the right hand The following steps shall be followed for the use of
ordinate. The values given within brackets are the nomograph:
illumination levels on the work plane at centre and rear a) Step 1 Decide the desired illumination level
of the room. The wattage of fluorescent tubes required depending upon the task illumination
per square metre of the floor area for different requirement in the proposed room and read
illumination levels is shown on each curve. the value of watts per square metre on
4.4.3.2 Following assumptions have been made in the the curve corresponding to the required
construction of the nomograph: illumination level.
b) Step 2 Fix the vertical line corresponding lights should be increased proportionately
to the given separation to height ratio of to make up for the deficiency of natural
opposite buildings on the abscissa. From the illumination.
point of intersection of this vertical line and
the above curve move along horizontal, and 4.4.4 For good distribution of day light on the working
read the value of fenestration percent on the plane in a room, window height, window width and
left hand ordinate. height of sill should be chosen in accordance with the
following recommendations:
c) Step 3 If the floor area is greater than
50 m2 and less than 30 m2, the value of watts a) In office buildings windows of height 1.2 m
per square metre as well as fenestration or more in the center of a bay with sill level
percent may be easily determined for adequate at 1.0 to 1.2 m above floor and in residential
daylighting and supplemental artificial buildings windows of height 1.0 m to 1.1 m
lighting for design purposes. However, if the with sill height as 0.9 m to 0.7 m above floor
fenestration provided is less than the required are recommended for good distribution
value, the wattage of supplementary artificial of daylight indoors. Window width can
NOTES
1 The table includes lamps and wattages currently in use in buildings in India.
2 Luminous efficacy varies with the wattage of the lamp.
3 Average life values are from available Indian Standards. Where Indian Standard is not available, values given are only indicative.
4 CRI and CCT values are only indicative.
5 For exact values, it is advisable to contact manufacturers.
with white enamelled conical reflectors at an off lights even when sufficient daylight is available
inclination of about 45 from vertical. indoors. In offices and commercial buildings,
occupants may switch on lights in the morning and
4.4.7 Cleaning Schedule for Window Panes and
keep them on throughout the day. When sufficient
Luminaires
daylight is available inside, suitable photo controls can
Adequate schedule for cleaning of window panes and be employed to switch off the artificial lights and thus
luminaries will result in significant advantage of prevent the wastage of energy.
enhanced daylight and lumen output from luminaries. 4.4.9 Solar Photovoltaic Systems (SPV)
This will tend to reduce the duration over which
artificial lights will be used and minimize the wastage Solar photovoltaic system enables direct conversion
of energy. Depending upon the location of the building of sunlight into electricity and is viable option for
a minimum of three to six months interval for periodic lighting purpose in remote nongrid areas. The common
cleaning of luminaries and window panes is SPV lighting systems are:
recommended for maximum utilization of daylight and a) Solar lantern,
artificial lights. b) Fixed type solar home lighting system, and
4.4.8 Photocontrols for Artificial Lights c) Street lighting system.
There is a considerable wastage of electrical energy in 4.4.9.1 SPV lighting system should preferably be
lighting of buildings due to carelessness in switching provided with CFL for energy efficiency.
5.6.3 Combined Effect of Different Methods of 5.7.1.1.2 The height of fan blades above the floor
Ventilation should be (3H + W)/4, where H is the height of the
room, and W is the height of work plane.
When combination of two or more methods of general
5.7.1.1.3 The minimum distance between fan blades
ventilation is used, the total rate of ventilation shall be
and the ceiling should be about 0.3 metre.
reckoned as the highest of the following three, and this
rule shall be followed until an exact formula is 5.7.2 Electronic regulators should be used instead of
established by research: resistance type regulators for controlling the speed of fans.
a) 1.25 times the rate of natural ventilation, 5.7.3 When actual ventilated zone does not cover the
b) Rate of positive ventilation, and entire room area, then optimum size of ceiling fan
should be chosen based on the actual usable area of
c) Rate of exhaust of air.
room, rather than the total floor area of the room. Thus
5.6.4 Air Movement smaller size of fan can be employed and energy saving
could be achieved.
The rate of air movement of turbulent type at the
working zone shall be measured either with a Kata 5.7.4 Power consumption by larger fans is obviously
thermometer (dry silvered type) or heated thermometer higher, but their power consumption per square metre
or properly calibrated thermocouple anemometer. of floor area is less and service value higher. Evidently,
Whereas anemometer gives the air velocity directly, improper use of fans irrespective of the rooms
the Kata thermometer and heated thermometer give dimensions is likely to result in higher power
cooling power of air and the rate of air movement is consumption. From the point of view of energy
found by reference to a suitable nomogram using the consumption, the number of fans and the optimum sizes
ambient temperature. for rooms of different dimensions are given in Table 13.
A-1 DESCRIPTION OF TABLES component at given point is explained with help of the
following example.
A-1.1 The three sky component tables are as given
below: A-1.6.2 Example
Table 14 Percentage sky components on the It is desired to calculate the sky component due to a
horizontal plane due to a vertical vertical window ABCD with width 1.8 m and height
rectangular opening for the clear 1.5 m at a point P on a horizontal plane 3.0 m from the
design sky window wall located as shown in Fig. 7. Foot of the
Table 15 Percentage sky components on the perpendicular N is 0.6 m below the sill and 0.9 m to
vertical plane perpendicular to a the left of AD.
vertical rectangular opening for the
clear design sky
Table 16 Percentage sky components on the
vertical plane parallel to a vertical
rectangular opening for the clear
design sky
A-1.2 All the tables are for an unglazed opening
illuminated by the clear design sky.
A-1.3 The values tabulated are the components at a
point P distant from the opening on a line perpendicular
to the plane of the opening through one of its lower
corners, and l and h are the width and height
respectively of the rectangular opening (see Fig. 6).
FIG . 7
Consider ABCD extended to NB CD
1) For NBCD
l/d = (1.8 + 0.9)/3 = 0.9
h/d = (1.5 + 0.6)/3 = 0.7
F1 = 5.708 percent (from Table 15)
2) For NA DD
l/d = 0.9/3 = 0.3
h/d = (1.5 + 0.6)/3 = 0.7
F2 = 2.441 percent (from Table 15)
3) For NB BA
l/d = (1.8 + 0.9)/3 = 0.9
F IG . 6
h/d = 0.6/3 = 0.2
A-1.4 Sky component for different h/d and l/d values F3 = 0.878 percent (from Table 15)
are tabulated, that is, for windows of different size and 4) For NAAA
for different distances of the point P from the window. l/d = 0.9/3 = 0.3
A-1.5 By suitable combination of the values obtained h/d = 0.6/3 = 0.2
from the three tables, for a given point for a given F4 = 0.403 percent (from Table 15)
window, the sky component in any plane passing
through the point may be obtained. Since ABCD = NBCDNA DDNB BA+NAAA
Sky Component F = F1F2F3+F4
A-1.6 Method of Using the Tables = 5.7082.4410.878+0.403
A-1.6.1 Method of using the Tables to get the sky = 2.792
l/d 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 INF
h/d
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26)
0.1 0.036 0.071 0.104 0.133 0.158 0.179 0.198 0.213 0.225 0.235 0.243 0.250 0.256 0.261 0.264 0.268 0.270 0.272 0.274 0.276 0.284 0.286 0.287 0.288 0.288
0.2 0.141 0.277 0.403 0.516 0.614 0.699 0.770 0.829 0.878 0.918 0.950 0.977 0.999 1.018 1.033 1.046 1.056 1.065 1.072 1.079 1.110 1.118 1.122 1.125 1.125
0.3 0.300 0.589 0.859 1.102 1.315 1.499 1.653 1.782 1.888 1.976 2.048 2.108 2.157 2.197 2.231 2.259 2.282 2.302 2.318 2.333 2.401 2.421 2.429 2.436 2.437
0.4 0.460 0.905 1.322 1.702 2.041 2.337 2.590 2.804 2.984 3.134 3.258 3.361 3.446 3.516 3.574 3.623 3.664 3.699 3.728 3.753 3.873 3.909 3.922 3.935 3.937
0.5 0.604 1.189 1.741 2.247 2.700 3.099 3.444 3.740 3.992 4.204 3.383 4.553 4.659 4.765 4.853 4.928 4.990 5.043 5.088 5.126 5.312 5.366 5.387 5.408 5.410
0.6 0.732 1.443 2.114 2.732 3.289 3.781 4.211 4.582 4.900 5.171 5.401 5.596 5.761 5.901 6.020 6.121 6.208 6.281 6.344 6.397 6.661 6.739 6.769 6.798 6.802
0.7 0.844 1.665 2.441 3.159 3.808 4.385 4.891 5.330 5.708 6.034 6.311 6.548 6.751 6.924 7.071 7.198 7.307 7.400 7.481 7.551 7.902 8.006 8.047 8.087 8.092
0.8 0.942 1.858 2.727 3.532 4.262 4.914 5.488 5.989 6.423 6.798 7.119 7.395 7.632 7.836 8.011 8.162 8.292 8.405 8.502 8.587 9.029 9.164 9.217 9.268 9.276
0.9 1.026 2.025 2.974 3.855 4.657 5.375 6.011 6.567 7.051 7.470 7.832 8.144 8.413 8.645 8.846 9.019 9.170 9.301 9.415 9.515 10.045 10.214 10.280 10.345 10.355
1.0 1.099 2.169 3.188 4.135 5.000 5.776 6.465 7.071 7.600 8.060 8.458 8.803 9.102 9.361 9.585 9.780 9.950 10.098 10.228 10.343 10.957 11.162 11.243 11.323 11.335
1.1 1.161 2.294 3.372 4.377 5.296 6.124 6.861 7.510 8.079 8.576 9.008 9.383 9.709 9.992 10.239 10.454 10.642 10.806 10.951 11.078 11.776 12.017 12.114 12.209 12.224
1.2 1.215 2.401 3.531 4.586 5.553 6.425 7.204 7.893 8.498 9.027 9.489 9.892 10.243 10.549 10.816 11.050 11.254 11.434 11.593 11.732 12.509 12.786 12.900 13.013 13.030
1.3 1.262 2.493 3.668 4.767 5.775 6.687 7.503 8.226 8.863 9.422 9.912 10.339 10.713 11.040 11.326 11.577 11.797 11.992 12.163 12.314 13.167 13.478 13.609 13.742 13.762
1.4 1.302 2.573 3.787 4.924 5.968 6.915 7.764 8.517 9.183 9.769 10.283 10.733 11.127 11.473 11.777 12.044 12.279 12.487 12.670 12.833 13.758 14.102 14.251 14.404 14.427
1.5 1.337 2.643 3.891 5.060 6.136 7.114 7.991 8.772 9.664 10.073 10.609 11.080 11.493 11.857 12.176 12.458 12.707 12.927 13.122 13.295 14.289 14.666 14.832 15.006 15.033
1.6 1.367 2.703 3.981 5.179 6.283 7.287 8.190 8.996 9.710 10.341 10.897 11.386 11.817 12.196 12.531 12.826 13.088 13.319 13.525 13.708 14.768 15.176 15.359 15.555 15.585
1.7 1.394 2.756 4.060 5.283 6.412 7.440 8.366 9.192 9.927 10.577 11.151 11.657 12.104 12.498 12.846 13.154 13.427 13.669 13.885 14.078 15.199 15.638 15.838 16.056 16.091
1.8 1.417 2.803 4.129 5.375 6.526 7.574 8.520 9.366 10.119 10.786 11.376 11.898 12.359 12.766 13.127 13.446 13.730 13.983 14.208 14.409 15.590 16.058 16.274 16.516 16.554
1.9 1.438 2.844 4.190 5.456 6.626 7.693 8.656 9.520 10.289 10.972 11.577 12.112 12.587 13.006 13.378 13.708 14.002 14.264 14.498 14.707 15.944 16.441 16.673 16.937 16.980
2.0 1.456 2.880 4.244 5.527 6.714 7.798 8.778 9.656 10.440 11.137 11.755 12.303 12.789 13.220 13.603 13.943 14.246 14.516 14.758 14.975 16.265 16.790 17.037 17.325 17.372
3.0 1.559 3.087 4.553 5.937 7.223 8.403 9.478 10.448 11.321 12.103 12.804 13.431 13.993 14.496 14.947 15.353 15.718 16.048 16.346 16.676 18.301 19.051 19.432 19.943 20.046
4.0 1.600 3.168 4.676 6.100 7.426 8.646 9.759 10.768 11.678 12.498 13.235 13.897 14.493 15.030 15.514 15.951 16.347 16.706 17.033 17.330 19.241 20.142 20.623 21.322 21.495
5.0 1.620 3.208 4.735 6.179 7.525 8.765 9.897 10.925 11.854 12.693 13.448 14.128 14.742 15.296 15.798 16.252 16.664 17.040 17.382 17.695 19.740 20.740 21.293 22.148 22.393
10.0 1.648 3.263 4.818 6.289 7.662 8.930 10.089 11.144 12.100 12.965 13.747 14.454 15.094 15.674 16.201 16.681 17.118 17.518 17.885 18.222 20.491 21.681 22.390 23.676 24.238
INF 1.657 3.282 4.846 6.327 7.710 8.986 10.155 11.220 12.186 13.060 13.851 14.567 15.217 15.806 16.342 16.831 17.278 17.688 18.064 18.410 20.770 22.046 22.838 24.463 26.111
l/d 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 INF
h/d
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26)
0.1 0.036 0.141 0.303 0.506 0.734 0.971 1.207 1.432 1.643 2.836 1.011 2.168 2.308 2.433 2.544 2.642 2.730 2.808 2.878 2.940 3.309 3.461 3.536 3.641 3.678
0.2 0.071 0.277 0.594 0.993 1.442 1.910 2.374 2.820 3.236 3.618 3.964 4.276 4.554 4.802 5.022 5.219 5.393 5.549 5.688 5.812 6.547 6.850 7.000 7.211 7.284
0.3 0.103 0.401 0.863 1.445 2.100 2.793 3.475 4.180 4.743 5.306 5.818 6.278 6.690 7.058 7.385 7.677 7.936 8.168 8.375 8.560 9.657 10.110 10.335 10.651 10.760
0.4 0.126 0.491 1.059 1.779 2.597 3.460 4.326 5.166 5.958 6.691 7.359 7.967 8.507 8.900 9.420 9.804 10.146 10.451 10.724 10.968 12.421 13.024 13.323 13.743 13.889
0.5 0.142 0.554 1.197 2.015 2.947 3.937 4.938 5.914 6.842 7.707 8.503 9.228 9.883 10.472 10.999 11.476 11.897 12.273 12.610 12.912 14.712 15.462 15.835 16.360 16.542
0.6 0.154 0.600 1.298 2.187 3.204 4.288 5.389 6.468 7.498 8.464 9.358 10.177 10.922 11.596 12.204 12.752 13.244 13.686 14.084 14.441 16.583 17.478 17.924 18.552 18.771
0.7 0.162 0.634 1.372 2.316 3.397 4.552 5.729 6.887 7.997 9.042 10.013 10.907 11.723 12.465 13.138 13.746 14.296 14.793 15.241 15.646 18.111 19.148 19.665 20.397 20.653
0.8 0.169 0.660 1.429 2.413 3.543 4.754 5.990 7.209 8.382 9.490 10.523 11.476 12.350 13.147 13.873 14.531 15.129 15.670 16.161 16.606 19.361 20.538 21.127 21.961 22.253
0.9 0.174 0.680 1.472 2.487 3.655 4.909 6.192 7.460 8.683 9.841 10.924 11.926 12.847 13.690 14.459 15.159 15.796 16.375 16.902 17.381 20.387 21.701 22.360 23.397 23.625
1.0 0.178 0.695 1.505 2.545 3.743 5.030 6.350 7.657 8.921 10.120 11.243 12.284 13.245 14.126 14.931 15.666 16.337 16.948 17.504 18.012 21.237 22.680 23.408 24.446 24.810
1.1 0.181 0.707 1.532 2.591 3.812 5.126 6.475 7.814 9.110 10.342 11.498 12.573 13.356 14.478 15.314 16.079 16.778 17.416 17.999 18.531 21.946 23.508 24.303 25.441 25.841
1.2 0.183 0.716 1.552 2.626 3.866 5.202 6.575 7.939 9.261 10.521 11.705 12.807 13.827 14.766 15.628 16.418 17.141 17.802 18.407 18.961 22.543 24.208 25.072 26.309 26.745
1.3 0.185 0.723 1.568 2.655 3.910 5.263 6.655 8.040 9.384 10.666 11.873 12.998 14.041 15.003 15.887 16.698 17.442 18.123 18.747 19.320 23.049 24.809 25.735 27.070 27.542
1.4 0.186 0.729 1.582 2.678 3.945 5.312 6.720 8.122 9.484 10.785 12.011 13.155 14.217 15.198 16.101 16.931 17.692 18.391 19.032 19.621 23.480 25.326 26.308 27.441 28.249
1.5 0.188 0.734 1.592 2.697 3.973 5.352 6.773 8.189 9.566 10.883 12.124 13.285 14.364 15.361 16.280 17.125 17.902 18.616 19.272 19.875 23.850 25.772 26.808 28.336 28.880
45
46
Table 16 Percentage Sky Components on the Vertical Plane Parallel to a
Vertical Rectandular Opening for the Clear Design Sky
(Clause A-1.5)
l/d 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 INF
h/d
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26)
0.1 0.728 1.429 2.078 2.600 3.167 3.660 3.964 4.265 4.513 4.717 4.883 5.020 5.132 5.225 5.301 5.365 5.418 5.463 5.501 5.533 5.687 5.733 5.749 5.765 5.766
0.2 1.429 2.803 4.007 5.221 6.220 7.073 7.790 8.385 8.876 9.278 9.609 9.880 10.103 10.286 10.439 10.565 10.671 10.760 10.835 10.899 11.207 11.296 11.330 11.362 11.365
0.3 2.068 4.061 5.913 7.580 9.040 10.285 11.337 12.212 12.934 13.528 14.016 14.417 14.747 15.020 15.246 15.434 15.591 15.724 15.836 15.931 16.390 16.523 16.574 16.623 16.627
0.4 2.529 4.970 7.249 9.312 11.133 12.707 14.042 15.164 16.097 16.870 17.507 18.025 18.458 18.816 19.113 19.360 19.568 19.742 19.890 20.015 20.624 20.801 20.868 20.933 20.939
0.5 2.852 5.608 8.186 10.529 12.606 14.401 15.952 17.256 18.350 19.262 20.021 20.652 21.177 21.613 21.978 22.275 22.530 22.746 22.923 23.082 23.836 24.056 24.140 24.222 24.229
0.6 3.086 6.070 8.867 11.415 13.681 15.656 17.353 18.793 20.008 21.027 21.879 22.592 23.189 23.689 24.109 24.462 24.761 25.014 25.229 25.412 26.229 26.561 26.662 26.759 26.768
0.7 3.259 6.413 9.373 12.074 14.482 16.588 18.402 19.949 21.257 22.359 23.285 24.063 24.716 25.267 25.731 26.124 26.458 26.742 26.984 27.192 28.214 28.517 28.634 28.748 28.758
0.8 3.389 6.672 9.755 12.573 15.090 17.296 19.201 20.830 22.212 23.380 24.365 25.195 25.895 26.486 26.987 27.412 27.775 28.084 28.350 28.578 29.720 30.065 30.198 30.327 30.339
0.9 3.489 6.869 10.046 12.955 15.556 17.840 19.817 21.511 22.952 24.173 25.206 26.078 26.816 27.441 27.972 28.424 28.810 29.141 29.426 29.672 30.927 31.303 31.451 31.596 31.610
1.0 3.565 7.024 10.272 13.250 15.917 18.263 20.297 22.043 23.531 24.795 25.866 26.773 27.542 28.196 28.572 29.226 29.633 29.982 30.283 30.544 31.889 32.302 32.467 32.627 32.643
1.1 3.625 7.139 10.447 13.481 16.200 18.594 20.674 22.462 23.989 25.288 26.391 27.326 28.121 28.798 29.375 29.869 30.293 30.658 30.973 31.246 32.670 33.117 33.297 33.473 33.491
1.2 3.672 7.233 10.586 13.663 16.423 18.857 20.973 22.795 24.353 25.681 26.810 27.770 28.587 29.283 29.878 30.388 30.826 31.204 31.532 31.816 33.309 33.796 33.981 34.173 34.193
1.3 3.709 7.307 10.696 13.807 16.602 19.067 21.213 23.062 24.646 25.998 27.148 28.128 28.963 29.676 30.286 30.810 31.261 31.651 31.989 32.283 33.836 34.350 34.550 34.756 34.779
1.4 3.739 7.366 10.784 13.924 16.745 19.236 21.406 23.278 24.884 26.255 27.424 28.420 29.271 29.998 30.621 31.157 31.618 32.018 32.365 32.667 34.374 34.813 35.035 35.247 35.271
1.5 3.763 7.414 10.856 14.018 16.861 19.373 21.563 23.454 25.077 26.465 27.649 28.660 29.523 30.262 30.897 31.443 31.914 32.322 32.677 32.986 34.641 35.202 35.436 35.663 35.689
1.6 3.783 7.453 10.914 14.095 16.956 19.485 21.692 23.599 25.236 26.638 27.835 28.857 29.732 30.482 31.226 31.680 32.160 32.575 32.937 33.253 34.950 35.532 35.776 36.017 36.046
1.7 3.799 7.485 10.962 14.158 17.034 19.578 21.798 23.718 25.368 26.781 27.989 29.022 29.906 30.665 31.317 31.879 32.366 32.888 33.156 33.477 35.211 35.812 36.067 36.321 36.352
1.8 3.812 7.512 11.002 14.211 17.099 19.655 21.886 23.817 25.478 26.900 28.118 29.160 30.052 30.818 31.477 32.046 32.539 32.967 33.340 33.666 35.435 36.052 36.316 36.584 36.617
1.9 3.824 7.534 11.035 14.254 17.153 19.719 21.960 23.900 25.570 27.001 28.226 26.276 30.175 30.948 31.613 32.188 32.686 33.119 33.497 33.828 35.626 35.259 36.532 36.812 36.847
2.0 3.833 7.553 11.062 14.291 17.199 19.773 22.022 23.970 25.647 27.086 28.318 29.374 31.279 31.058 31.728 32.308 32.811 33.249 33.631 33.965 35.791 36.438 36.719 37.011 37.048
3.0 3.876 7.639 11.192 14.463 17.412 20.027 22.316 24.302 26.016 27.491 28.757 29.846 30.783 31.592 32.291 32.898 33.427 33.889 34.294 34.551 36.640 37.380 37.715 38.107 38.157
4.0 3.888 7.663 11.228 14.511 17.471 20.098 22.398 24.398 26.121 27.606 28.884 29.983 30.930 31.748 32.457 33.074 33.611 34.082 34.496 34.860 36.915 37.699 38.063 38.510 38.579
5.0 3.893 7.672 11.241 14.529 17.494 20.125 22.430 24.432 26.161 27.650 28.932 30.035 30.986 31.808 32.521 33.142 33.683 34.157 34.574 34.943 37.028 37.834 38.214 38.696 38.781
10.0 3.897 7681 11.254 14.546 17.515 20.150 22.459 24.466 26.199 27.693 28.978 30.085 31.041 31.867 32.584 33.208 33.753 34.231 34.652 35.024 37.144 37.978. 38.382 38.927 39.057
INF 3.898 7.682 11.256 44.548 17.518 20.154 22.464 24.471 26.205 27.699 28.985 30.093 31.049 31.876 32.593 33.218 33.764 34.243 34.664 35.037 37.162 38.003 38.411 38.978 39.172
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards 7942 : 1976 Code of practice for daylighting
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The of educational buildings
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (5) 1944 Code of practice for lighting of
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may (Parts 1 & 2) : public thoroughfares: Parts 1
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance 1970 and 2 For main and secondary
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the roads (Group A and B) (first
Code. revision)
IS No. Title 2672 : 1966 Code of practice for library
(1) 7662 Recommendations for lighting
(Part 1) : 1974 orientation of buildings: Part 1 4347 : 1967 Code of practice for hospital
Non-industrial buildings lighting
(2) 3646 Code of practice for interior 6665 : 1972 Code of practice for industrial
(Part 1) : 1992 illumination: Part 1 General lighting
requirements and 10894 : 1984 Code of practice for lighting of
recommendations for building educational institutions
interiors (first revision) 10947 : 1984 Code of practice for lighting for
(3) 2440 : 1975 Guide for daylighting of ports and harbours
buildings (second revision) (6) 3362 : 1977 Code of practice for natural
(4) 6060 : 1971 Code of practice for daylighting ventilation of residential
of factory buildings buildings (first revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONAL SYMBOLS 5
3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 9
4 PLANNING OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 9
5 DISTRIBUTION OF SUPPLY AND CABLING 16
6 WIRING 28
7 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 36
8 EARTHING 39
9 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF INSTALLATION 43
10 TELECOMMUNICATION AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 48
11 LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS 49
LIST OF STANDARDS 65
FOREWORD
This Section covers essential requirements for electrical and allied installations in buildings.
This Section was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983. In the first revision, general
guidance for electrical wiring installation in industrial location where voltage supply normally exceeds 650 V
was included. This Section was also updated based on the existing version of the Indian Standards. The importance
of pre-planning and exchange of information among all concerned agencies from the earlier stages of building
work was emphasized.
As a result of experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of the Code and feedback received as well as
revision of some of the relevant standards based on which this Section was prepared, a need to revise this part
was felt. This revision has, therefore, been prepared to take care of these developments. The title of this Section
has been modified from the erstwhile electrical installations to electrical and allied installations to reflect the
provisions now being included on certain allied installations. The significant changes incorporated in this revision
include:
a) The risk assessment procedure for lightening has been thoroughly changed apart from some other changes
in the provision of lightning protection of building.
b) Some of the provisions of wiring have now been aligned with the latest practices.
c) Many existing definitions have been modified in line with current terminologies used at national and
international level. Some new definitions have been added.
d) Provisions on installation of distribution transformer inside the multi-storeyed building have been
incorporated.
e) Concept of energy conservation in lighting has been introduced.
f) Concept of various types of earthing in building installation has been incorporated.
This Section has to be read together with Part 8 Building Services, Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation for
making provision for the desired levels of illumination as well as ventilation for different locations in different
occupancies. Utmost importance should be given in the installation of electrical wiring to prevent short circuiting
and the hazards associated therewith.
Notwithstanding the provisions given in this Section and the National Electrical Code, the provisions of the
Indian Electricity Act, 2003 and the Rules and Regulations framed thereunder have to be necessarily complied
with.
The information contained in this Section is largely based on the following Indian Standards/Special Publication:
IS 732 : 1989 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations (third revision)
IS 12032 Specification for graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of electrotechnology:
(Part 11) : 1987 Part 11 Architectural and topographical installation plan and diagrams
IS 4648 : 1968 Guide for electrical layout in residential buildings
IS 2309 : 1989 Protection of building and allied structures against lightning Code of practice (second
revision)
SP 30 : 1984 National Electrical Code, 1985
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
2.1.19 Conductor, Earthed A conductor with no 2.1.32 Distance Area or Resistance Area (for Earth
provision for its insulation from earth. Electrode only) The area of ground (around an earth
electrode) within which a voltage gradient measurable
2.1.20 Conductor, Insulated A conductor with ordinary commercial instruments exists when the
adequately covered with insulating material of such electrode is being tested.
quality and thickness as to prevent danger.
2.1.33 Discrimination (Over-Current Discrimination)
2.1.21 Conductor of a Cable or Core The Co-ordination of the operating characteristics of two
conducting portion consisting of a single wire or group or more over-current protective devices such that, on
of wires, assembled together and in contact with each the incidence of over-currents within stated limits, the
other or connected in parallel. device intended to operate within these limits does so,
2.1.22 Connector The part of a cable coupler or of while the others do not.
an appliance coupler which is provided with female NOTES
contact and is intended to be attached to the flexible 1 Protective devices should have discrimination so that only
cable connected to the supply. the affected part (minimum section) of the circuit is isolated,
even though a number of protective devices may be in the path
2.1.23 Connector Box or Joint Box A box forming of the over current.
a part of wiring installation, provided to contain joints 2 Distinction is made between series discrimination involving
different over-current protective devices passing substancially
in the conductors of cables of the installations.
the same over-current and network discrimination involving
2.1.24 Connector for Portable Appliances A identical protective devices passing different proportions of
the over-current.
combination of a plug and socket arranged for
attachment to a portable electrical appliance or to a 2.1.34 Earth The conductive mass of the earth,
flexible cord. whose electric potential at any point is conventionally
taken as zero.
2.1.25 Consumers Terminals The ends of the
electrical conductors situated upon any consumers 2.1.35 Earth Continuity Conductor The conductor,
premises and belonging to him at which the supply of including any clamp, connecting to the earthing lead
energy is delivered from the service line. or to each other those parts of an installation which
are required to be earthed. It may be in whole or in
2.1.26 Cord, Flexible A flexible cable having
part the metal conduit or the metal sheath or armour of
conductor of small cross-sectional area. Two flexible
the cables, or the special continuity conductor of a cable
cords twisted together are known as twin flexible
or flexible cord incorporating such a conductor.
cord.
2.1.36 Earth Electrode A conductor or group of
2.1.27 Core of a Cable A single conductor of a
conductors in intimate contact with and providing an
cable with its insulation but not including any
electrical connection to earth.
mechanical protective covering.
2.1.37 Earth Fault Accidental connections of a
2.1.28 Cut-out Any appliance for automatically
conductor to earth when the impedance is negligible,
interrupting the transmission of energy through any
the connection is called a dead earth.
conductor when the current rises above a pre-
determined amount. 2.1.38 Earthing Lead The final conductor by which
the connection to the earth electrode is made.
2.1.29 Damp Situation A situation in which
moisture is either permanently present or intermittently 2.1.39 Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker System A
present to such an extent as to be likely to impair the system of earthing in which the parts of an installation,
effectiveness of an installation conforming to the specified, to be earthed are so earthed through one or
requirements for ordinary situations. more earth leakage circuit-breakers or relays.
Purpose of Final Circuit Individual Household Type of Premises Type of Premises Small
Fed from Conductors or Installations, including Small, Shops, Stores Hotels, Boarding
Switchgear to which Individual Dwelling Offices and Business Houses etc.
Diversity Applies of a Block Premises
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Lighting 66% of total demand 90% of total current 75% of total current
demand demand
Heating and power 80% of total current 80% full load of largest 80% full load of largest
demand upto 10 A appliance appliance
+40% of any current +60% of remaining +60% of second largest
demand in excess of appliances appliances
10 A +40% of remaining
appliances
Cooking appliances 10 A 80% full load of largest 80% of largest appliance
+30% full load of appliance
connected cooking +60% full load of +60% of full load of
appliances in excess of second largest appliance second largest appliance
10 A + 5 A if socket- +50% full load of +50% full load of
outlet incorporated in remaining appliances remaining appliances
unit.
Motors (other than lift 80% full load of largest 80% full load of largest
motors which are subject motor motor
to special consideration) +60% full load of +50% full load of
second largest motor remaining motors
+50% full load of
remaining motors
Water heater 80% full load of largest 80% full load of largest 80% full load of largest
appliance appliance appliance
+50% of second largest +60% of second largest +60% of second largest
appliance appliance appliance
+25% full load of +25% full load of +25% full load of
remaining appliances remaining appliances remaining appliances
Floor warming 50%
installations
Water heaters thermal 50%
storage space heating
installations
Standard arrangements of 80% of current demand 80% of current demand
final circuits in of largest circuit of largest circuit
accordance with IS 732 +40% of current demand +50% of current demand
of every other circuit of every other circuit
Socket outlets other than 80% of current demand 80% of current demand 80% of current demand of
those included above and of largest point of +40% of largest point of largest point of +60% of
stationary equipment of current demand of +60% of current current demand of every
other than those listed every other point of. demand of every other point in main rooms
above point of (dinning rooms, etc) +40%
of current demand of every
other point of.
NOTES
1 For the purpose of the table an instantaneous water heater is deemed to be a water heater of any loading which heats water only
while the tap is turned on and therefore uses electricity intermittently.
2 It is important to ensure that the distribution boards are of sufficient rating to take the total load connected to them without the
application of any diversity.
For the purposes of this Code cables above 1 mm2 must suitable location that requires no additional protection.
have stranded conductors. All cables when installed, The cables for wiring circuits in electrical installation
must be adequately protected against mechanical must have the appropriate wire size matching the
damage. This can be carried out by either having requirement of the loads and the following table gives
additional protection, such as being enclosed in PVC the recommendations for different types of loads.
conduit or metal pipes, or placing the cables in a
5.6.1.2 Circuit wire sizes
Switch or isolator controlling a water heater or geyser the entrance and provide an indication at the water
should not be located within 1 m from the location of heater. A socket or a connector block with suitable
a shower or bath tub, to avoid a person in wet condition protection against water spray should be provided to
reaching the switch or isolator. It is preferable to connect the water heater. The above considerations
provide the control switch outside the bathroom near apply to switches for outdoor lights and other
5 A S W ITC H
S O C K ET O U TL E T
LA M P 5 A S W ITC H
S O C K ET O U TL E T
FA N SW IT C H
O U T LE T
5 A S W ITC H
5 A S W ITC H
S O C K ET O U TL E T
LA M P
LA M P
FA N SW IT C H
O U T LE T
5 A S W ITC H 1 5 A SW IT C H
S O C K ET O U TL E T
2 - W AY S W ITC H O U TL E T
1 5 A SW IT C H
S O C K ET O U TL E T
1 5 A SW IT C H
S O C K ET O U TL E T
N E U TR A L B US
D IST R IB U T IO N B O A R D
FO R TH E F LAT
E AR TH B U S
M C B 's
N L
E
1)
For copper conductors only.
Table 2 Maximum Permissible Number of Single-Core Cables that can be Drawn into
Cable Tunelling and Ducting System (Casing and Capping)
(Clauses 6.10.1 and 6.10.3.2)
Nominal Cross- 10/15 mm 20 mm 25 mm 30 mm 40 mm 50 mm
Sectional Area of 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 20 mm 20 mm
2
Conductor in mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
1.5 3 5 6 8 12 18
2.5 2 4 5 6 9 15
4 2 3 4 5 8 12
6 2 3 4 6 9
10 1 2 3 5 8
16 1 2 4 6
25 1 3 5
35 2 4
50 1 3
70 1 2
preservative or covered with suitable plastic of not more than 1 m, but on either side of
compound. couplers or bends or similar fittings, saddles
f) Fixing of conduit Conduit pipes shall be shall be fixed at a distance of 300 cm from
fixed by heavy gauge saddles, secured to the centre of such fittings.
suitable wood plugs or other plugs with g) Bends in conduit All necessary bends in
screws in an approved manner at an interval the system including diversion shall be done
Conductors of ac supply and dc supply shall be NOTE Rigid PVC conduits are not suitable for use where
the normal working temperature of the conduits and fittings
bunched in separate conduits. For lighting and small may exceed 55C. Certain types of rigid PVC conduits and
power outlet circuits phase segregation in separate their associated fittings are unsuitable for use where the ambient
circuits is recommended. The number of insulated temperature is likely to fall below 5C.
cables that may be drawn into the conduits are given
6.10.4 Non-Metallic Recessed Conduit Wiring
in Table 1 and Table 2. In these tables the space factor
System
does not exceed 40 percent.
6.10.4.1 Recessed non-metallic conduit wiring system
6.10.3.3 Conduit joints
shall comply with all the requirements of surface non-
Conduits shall be joined by means of screwed or plain metallic conduit wiring system specified in 6.10.3.1
couplers depending on whether the conduits are to 6.10.3.9 except 6.10.3.4. In addition, the following
screwed or plain. Where there are long runs of straight requirements 6.10.4.2 to 6.10.4.5 also shall be
conduit, inspection type couplers shall be provided at complied with.
intervals. For conduit fittings and accessories reference
may be made to the good practice [8-2(19)]. 6.10.4.2 Fixing of conduit in chase
6.10.3.4 Fixing of conduits The conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of stapples
or by means of non-metallic saddles placed at not more
The provisions of 6.10.1(f) shall apply except that the than 80 cm apart or by any other approved means of
spacing between saddles or supports is recommended fixing. Fixing of standard bends or elbows shall be
to be 600 cm for rigid non-metallic conduits. avoided as far as practicable and all curves shall be
6.10.3.5 Bends in conduits maintained by sending the conduit pipe itself with a
long radius which will permit easy drawing in of
Wherever necessary, bends or diversions may be conductors. At either side of bends, saddles/stapples
achieved by bending the conduits (see 6.10.3.8) or by shall be fixed at a distance of 15 cm from the centre of
employing normal bends, inspection bends, inspection bends.
boxes, elbows or similar fittings.
6.10.4.3 Inspection boxes
6.10.3.6 Conduit fittings shall be avoided, as far as
possible, on outdoor systems. Suitable inspection boxes to the nearest minimum
requirements shall be provided to permit periodical
6.10.3.7 Outlets inspection and to facilitate replacement of wires, if
In order to minimize condensation or sweating inside necessary. The inspection/junction boxes shall be
the conduit, all outlets of conduit system shall be mounted flush with the wall or ceiling concrete. Where
properly drained and ventilated, but in such a manner necessary deeper boxes of suitable dimensions shall
as to prevent the entry of insects. be used. Suitable ventilating holes shall be provided
in the inspection box covers, where required.
6.10.3.8 Heat may be used to soften the conduit for
bending and forming joints in case of plain conduits. 6.10.4.4 The outlet boxes such as switch boxes,
As the material softens when heated, sitting of conduit regulator boxes and their phenolic laminated sheet
in close proximity to hot surfaces should be avoided. covers shall be as per requirements of 6.10.1 (h).
Caution should be exercised in the use of this conduit They shall be mounted flush with the wall.
in locations where the ambient temperature is 50C
or above. Use of such conduits in places where 6.10.4.5 Types of accessories to be used
ambient temperature is 60C or above is prohibited. All outlets such as switches, wall sockets, etc, may
6.10.3.9 Non-metallic conduit systems shall be used be either flush mounting type or of surface mounting
only where it is ensured that they are: type.
7.2.4 In an earthed system of supply, a socket-outlet 7.3.3 No flammable shade shall form a part of lighting
with plug shall be of three-pin type with the third fittings unless such shade is well protected against all
terminal connected to the earth. When such socket- risks of fire. Celluloid shade or lighting fittings shall
outlets with plugs are connected to any current not be used under any circumstances.
consuming device of metal or any non-insulating 7.3.4 General and safety requirements for electrical
material or both, conductors connecting such current- lighting fittings shall be in accordance with good
consuming devices shall be of flexible cord with an practice [8-2(20)].
earthing core and the earthing core shall be secured by
connecting between the earth terminal of plug and the 7.3.5 The lighting fittings shall conform to accepted
body of current-consuming devices. standards [8-2(10)].
If this neutral point of the supply system is connected 9.1.2 Periodic inspection and testing shall be carried
permanently to earth, then the above rule applies out in order to maintain the installation in a sound
throughout the installation including 2-wire final condition after putting into service.
circuits. This means that no fuses may be inserted in 9.1.3 Where an addition is to be made to the fixed
the neutral or common return wire. And the neutral wiring of an existing installation, the latter shall be
should consist of a bolted solid link, or part of a linked examined for compliance with the recommendations
switch, which completely disconnects the whole of the Code.
system from the supply. This linked switch must be
arranged so that the neutral makes before, and break 9.1.4 The individual equipment and materials which
after the phases. form part of the installation shall generally conform to
the relevant Indian Standard Specification wherever
8.6 System of Earthing applicable. If there is no relevant Indian Standard
Equipment and portions of installations shall be Specification for any item, these shall be approved by
deemed to be earthed only if earthed in accordance the appropriate authority.
with either the direct earthing system, the multiple 9.1.5 Completion Drawings
earthed neutral system or the earth leakage circuit-
breaker system. In all cases, the relevant provisions of On completion of the electric work, a wiring diagram
Rules 33 and 61 of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 shall be prepared and submitted to the engineer-in-
(see Annex B) shall be complied with. charge or the owner. All wiring diagrams shall indicate
clearly, the main switch board, the runs of various
The earthing of electrical installations for non- mains and submains and the position of all points and
industrial and industrial buildings shall be done in their controls. All circuits shall be clearly indicated
accordance with good practice [8-2(24)]. and numbered in the wiring diagram and all points shall
be given the same number as the circuit in which they
8.7 Classification of Earthing System
are electrically connected. Also the location and
The earthing systems are classified as follows: number of earth points and the run of each loads should
be clearly shown in the completion drawings.
a) TN System A system which has one or more
points of the source of energy directly earth, 9.2 Inspection of the Installation
and the exposed and extraneous conductive
parts of the installation are connected by means 9.2.1 General
of protective conductors to the earth points of On completion of wiring a general inspection shall be
the source, that is, currents to flow from the carried out by competent personnel in order to verify
installation to the earth points of the source. that the provisions of this Code and that of Indian
b) TT System A system which has one or more Electricity Rules, 1956, have been complied with. This,
points of the source of energy directly earth, among other things, shall include checking whether
and the exposed and extraneous conductive all equipments, fittings, accessories, wires/cables, used
parts of the installation are connected to a in the installation are of adequate rating and quality to
local earth electrodes or electrodes electrically meet the requirement of the load. General workmanship
independent of the source earth. of the electrical wiring with regard to the layout and
Sl Description Risk of Being Struck (P) Weighting Factors Overall Overall Recommen-
No. of Structure Multi- Risk dation
plying Factor
Collection Flash P A B C D E Factor (Product
Area Density Ac Ng Use of Type of Contents or Degree Type of (Product of cols 5
6
Ac Ng 10 Structure Const- Consequen- of Country of and 11)
(Table ruction tial Effects Isolation (Table cols 610)
3A) (Table (Table 3C) (Table 3E)
3B) 3D)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
3 5
i) Malsonette, 3 327 0.6 2 10 1.2 0.4 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.02 4 10 Protection
reinforced required
concrete and
brick built,
non-metallic
roof
3 5
ii) Office 4 296 0.6 2.6 10 1.2 0.4 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.02 5.2 10 Protection
building, required
reinforced
concrete
construction,
non-metallic
roof
3 4
iii) School, brick 1 456 0.7 1 10 1.7 1.0 1.7 0.4 0.3 0.3 3 10 Protection
built required
4 4
iv) 3 bedroom 405 0.4 1.6 10 0.3 1.0 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.01 1.6 10 No
detached protection
dwelling required
house, brick
built
3 3
v) Village 5 027 0.6 3 10 1.3 1.0 1.7 2.0 0.3 1.3 3.9 10 Protection
church required
NOTE The risk of being struck, P (col 5), is multiplied by the product of the weighting factors (col 6 to 10) to yield an overall risk
5
factor (col 12). This should be compared with the acceptable risk (1 10 ) for guidance on whether or not to protect.
The territorial waters of India extend into the sea to a distance of twelve nautical miles measured from the appropriate base line.
The boundary of Meghalaya shown on this map is as interpreted from the North-Eastern Areas (Reorganisation) Act, 1971, but has yet to be verified.
Responsibility for correctness of internal details shown on the map rests with the publisher.
The state boundaries between Uttaranchal & Uttar Pradesh, Bihar & Jharkhand and Chhatisgarh & Madhya Pradesh have not been verified by
Governments concerned.
FIG. 5 MAP OF INDIA SHOWING PLACES FOR AVERAGE NUMBER OF THUNDERSTORM DAYS IN A YEAR
ANNEX A
(Clause 2.2)
DRAWING SYMBOLS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
Switching
A-3.10 Luminous Push Button
A-2.1.3 Distribution Fuse Board
Without Switches A-3.11 Restricted Access Push Button
A-9.2 Aerial
A-5.13 Battern Lamp Holder
A-12 EARTHING
A-10.2 Impulse Clock Outlet
A-12.1 Earth Point
ANNEX B
[Clauses 3.1, 5.3.1.1, 5.3.1.3, 5.3.2.3(b) and 8.6]
EXTRACTS FROM INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES, 1956
B-1 The following are the extracts of some of the c) In all other cases, at a point corresponding
rules: to the point of commencement of supply
or at such other point as may be approved
Rule 32, Identification of Earthed and Earthed by an Inspector or any officer appointed
Neutral Conductors and Position of Switches and to assist the Inspector and hold authorized
Cut-Outs Therein under sub-rule (2) of Rule 4-A.
Where the conductors include an earthed conductor of 2) No cut-out, link or switch other than a linked
a two-wire system or an earthed neutral conductor of switch arranged to operate simultaneously on
a multi-wire system or a conductor which is to be the earthed or earthed neutral conductor and
connected thereto, the following conditions shall be live conductors shall be inserted or remain
complied with: inserted in any earthed or earthed neutral
conductor of a two-wire system or in any
1) An indication of permanent nature shall be
earthed or earthed neutral conductor of a
provided by the owner of the earthed or
multi-wire system or in any conductor
earthed neutral conductor, or the conductor
connected thereto with the following
which is to be connected thereto, to enable
exceptions:
such conductor to be distinguished from any
live conductor. Such indication shall be a) A link for testing purposes, or
provided: b) A switch for use in controlling a generator
or transformer.
a) Where the earthed or earthed neutral
NOTE For the purpose of this rule, the relevant
conductor is the property of the supplier,
Indian Standards relating to marking and arrangement
at or near the point of commencement of for switch gear, busbar, main connections, and auxiliary
supply; wiring may be referred to.
b) Where a conductor forming part of a
Rule 33 Earthed Terminal on Consumers Premises
consumers system is to be connected to
the suppliers earthed or earthed neutral 1) The supplier shall provide and maintain on
conductor at the point where such the consumers premises for the consumers
connection is to be made; use a suitable earthed terminal in an accessible
Sl Capacity of Total Transformer Total Substation Area (In Coming, Suggested Minimum
No. Transformer(s) Room Area, HV, MV Panels, Transformer Roof but Face Width
2
kVA Minimum, m Without Generators), Minimum m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 1 160 14.0 90 9.0
ii) 2 160 28.0 118 13.5
iii) 1 250 15.0 91 9.0
iv) 2 250 30.0 121 13.5
v) 1 400 16.5 93 9.0
vi) 2 400 33.0 125 13.5
vii) 3 400 49.5 167 18.0
viii) 2 500 36.0 130 14.5
ix) 3 500 54.0 172 19.0
x) 2 630 36.0 132 14.5
xi) 3 630 54.0 176 19.0
xii) 2 800 39.0 135 14.5
xiii) 3 800 58.0 181 14.0
xiv) 2 1 000 39.0 149 14.5
xv) 3 1 000 58.0 197 19.0
NOTES
1 The above dimensions are overall area required for substation excluding generating set.
2 The clear height required for substation equipment shall be minimum of 3.0 m below the soffit of the beam.
ANNEX D
[Clause 4.2.4(j)]
ADDITIONAL AREA REQUIRED FOR GENERATOR IN ELECTRIC SUBSTATION
D-1 The requirement of additional area for generator in electric substation for different capacities of generators
is given below for guidance:
Sl No. Capacity Area Clear Height below the Soffit of the Beam
2
kW m m
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) 25 56 3.6
ii) 48 56 3.6
iii) 100 65 3.6
iv) 150 72 4.6
v) 248 100 4.6
vi) 350 100 4.6
vii) 480 100 4.6
viii) 600 110 4.6
ix) 800 120 4.6
x) 1 000 120 4.6
xi) 1 250 120 4.6
xii) 1 600 150 4.6
NOTE The area and height required for generating set room given in the above table are for general guidance only and may be
finally fixed according to actual requirements.
I/We certify that the installation detailed below has been installed by me/us and tested and that to the best of my/
our knowledge and belief, it complies with Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
Electrical Installation at _____________________________________________________________________
Voltage and system of supply
Particulars of Works:
a) Internal Electrical Installation
No. Total Load Type of system of wiring
i) Light point
ii) Fan point
iii) Plug point
3-pin 6 A
3-pin 16 A
b) Others Description hp/kW Type of starting
1) Motors:
i)
ii)
iii)
2) Other plants:
c) If the work involves installations of
over head line and/or underground cable
1) i) Type and description of overheadline.
ii) Total length and number of spans.
iii) No. of street lights and its description.
2) i) Total length of underground cable and its size:
ii) No. of joints:
End joint:
Tee joint:
Straight through joint:
Earthing:
i) Description of earthing electrode
ii) No. of earth electrodes
iii) Size of main earth lead
Test Results:
a) Insulation Resistance
i) Insulation resistance of the whole system of conductors to earth.. Megaohms.
ii) Insulation resistance between the phase conductor and neutral
Between phase R and neutral ....................... Megaohms.
Between phase Y and neutral ....................... Megaohms.
Between phase B and neutral ....................... Megaohms.
iii) Insulation resistance between the phase conductors in case of polyphase supply.
Between phase R and phase Y ...................... Megaohms
Between phase Y and phase B ...................... Megaohms
Between phase B and phase R ...................... Megaohms
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards diagrams in the field of
in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The electrotechnology:
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (Part 6) : 1987 Protection and conversion of
of the enforcement of the Code. The standards electrical energy
listed may be used by the Authority as a guide in (Part 7) : 1987 Switchgear, controlgear and
conformance with the requirements of the referred protective devices
clauses in the Code. (2) 7752 Guide for improvement of
IS No. Title (Part 1) : 1975 power factor in consumer
installation: Part 1 Low and
(1) 8270 Guide for preparation of
medium supply voltages
(Part 1) : 1976 diagrams, charts and tables
for electrotechnology: Part 1 (3) 5216 Recommendations on safety
Definitions and classification procedures and practices in
electrical work:
1885 Electrotechnical vocabulary:
(Part 16/Sec 3) Lighting, Section 3 Lamps (Part 1) : 1982 General (first revision)
1967 and auxiliary apparatus (Part 2) : 1982 Life saving techniques (first
revision)
(Part 17) : 1979 Switchgear and controlgear
(first revision) (4) 10118 Code of practice for selection,
(Part 2) : 1982 installation and maintenance
(Part 32) : 1993 Electrical cables (first
of switchgear and controlgear:
revision)
Part 2 Selection
(Part 78) : 1993 Generation, transmission and (5) 1646 : 1997 Code of practice for fire
distribution of electricity safety of buildings (general):
General Electrical installations
12032 Graphical symbols for (second revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 PLANNING DESIGN CRITERIA 7
4 DESIGN OF AIR CONDITIONING 12
5 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 26
6 MECHANICAL VENTILATION (FOR NON AIR CONDITIONED AREAS) 30
AND EVAPORATIVE COOLING
7 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONER 35
8 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER 36
9 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONER 37
10 HEATING 38
11 SYMBOLS, UNITS, COLOUR CODE AND IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES 39
12 ENERGY CONSERVATION, ENERGY MANAGEMENT, AUTOMATIC 40
CONTROLS AND BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
13 INSPECTION, COMMISSIONING AND TESTING 46
LIST OF STANDARDS 48
FOREWORD
This Section deals with various aspects of installation of air conditioning equipments and systems in buildings.
The aspects covered include design goals and criteria, design of systems, performance requirements, available
system options, pre-planning requirements, noise and vibration, safety aspects, energy conservation and
management, building management systems and inspection, installation, testing and commissioning requirements.
Though all aspects of the air conditioning, heating and mechanical ventilation plant have been touched upon in
this revision, care has been taken right through to look at them from the specific point of view of how they can
be fashioned to impact beneficially on the building as a whole. Thus, topics like pre-planning, safety requirements,
adequate provisions for maintenance, energy management, conservation strategies and noise pollution
considerations have qualified for special attention.
Space requirements for various air conditioning systems vary considerably with the system adopted. In the
scenario of ever-increasing available system options, it has become all the more necessary to consult an air
conditioning engineer in this connection at the stage of pre-planning.
Weather data has now been included for as many as 58 stations based on data obtained from India Meteorological
Department, Government of India. Till such information is collected for other cities, it is recommended that
design work in these cities may be carried out according to the present (local) practice.
The first version of this Part was prepared in 1970 which was subsequently revised in 1983. As a result of
experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of this Section and feedback received, a need to revise this
Part was felt.
This revision has therefore been prepared. The significant modifications made in this revision include the following:
a) Definitions of several new terms like ozone depletion potential, global warming potential, indoor air
quality, sick building syndrome, buildings related illnesses and thermal energy storage have been included.
b) A new clause on design criterion has been incorporated.
c) Indoor air quality has been included as one of the factors that need to be controlled in the conditioned
space.
d) For large and multi-storeyed buildings, independent air handling unit rooms have been recommended
for each floor.
e) Inside design conditions for various applications have been included; they replace earlier Table 2 and
Table 3.
f) The text on minimum outside fresh air has been revised in the light of currently accepted international
norms. Recommended values for outside air requirements for ventilation purposes have been furnished
for a wider variety and a larger number of applications.
g) New details have been added on temperature, humidity, and vibration and noise.
h) Application considerations, covering a wide variety of commercial applications, offices, hotels,
restaurants, computer rooms, etc, have now been given in more details.
j) A new clause on statutory regulation/safety considerations has now been included.
k) Under the clause on design considerations, various system options available have been described.
m) The characteristics and application of options available in piping, water distribution systems and piping
layout have been given prominently.
n) The text on air filters has been revised; focus is now on the approach to filtration in preference to a
detailed description of ever increasingly available option of filter types.
p) The clause on energy conservation and energy management has been thoroughly revised. The concepts
like energy targets, demand targets and consumption targets; the factors to be considered in system
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 3
design that influence energy aspects; the need for analysis of operation of systems during various seasons
of the year, and the need to incorporate energy recovery strategies have been incorporated in this clause.
q) Automatic Controls given in the 1983 version has now been replaced by Building Management System,
which addresses not only the control function, but also has a telling impact on operation and maintenance
as well, most importantly on the opportunities afforded to implement various energy conservation
strategies.
r) The text on packaged air conditioners and room air conditioners has been revised and elaborated.
s) The text on heating has been completely revised.
t) The text had been thoroughly revised and additional details have been included under Symbols, Units,
Colour Code and Identification of Services; Pipe Work Services; Duct Work Services; Valve Labels
and Charts; and Inspection, Commissioning and Testing.
u) List of various parameters to be checked for performance of air handling unit, hydronic system balancing,
and finally, the hand-over procedure, have been given.
This revision aims to make a difference in the quality of environment and in building usage, in response to
growing concerns and expectations in with regard to indoor air quality, energy conservation, environmental
impact and building safety.
The provisions on natural ventilation are given in Part 8 Building Services, Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation.
The provisions of this Section are without prejudice to the various Acts, Rules and Regulations including the
Factories Act, 1948 and the rules and regulations framed thereunder.
The information contained in this Section is based largely on the following Indian Standards:
IS No. Title
659 : 1964 Safety code for air conditioning (revised)
1391 Specification for room air conditioners:
(Part 1) : 1992 Unitary air conditioners (second revision)
(Part 2) : 1992 Split air conditioners (second revision)
2379 : 1990 Colour code for identification of pipelines (first revision)
3315 : 1994 Specification for evaporative air coolers (desert coolers) (second revision)
7896 : 2001 Data for outside design conditions for air conditioning for Indian cities (first revision)
8148 : 2003 Specification for packaged air conditioners (first revision)
Assistance has also been derived from the following publications in preparation of this Section:
BS 5720 : 1979 Code of practice for mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in building
Guidelines, Standards and Handbooks of American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers
Handbooks of Indian Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 5
The values indicated above are for an integration period comfort. It also includes methods of controlling thermal
of 100 years. properties of moist air.
2.12 Hydronic Systems The water systems that 2.19 Psychrometric Chart A chart graphically
convey heat to or from a conditioned space or process representing the thermodynamic properties of moist
with hot or chilled water. The water flows through air.
piping that connects a chiller or the water heater to 2.20 Recirculated Air The return air that has been
suitable terminal heat transfer units located at the space passed through the conditioning apparatus before being
or process. re-supplied to the space.
2.13 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Air quality that 2.21 Refrigerant The fluid used for heat transfer
refers to the nature of conditioned air that circulates in a refrigerating system, which absorbs heat at a low
throughout the space/area where one works or lives, temperature and low pressure of the fluid and rejects
that is, the air one breathes when indoors. heat at a higher temperature and higher pressure of
It not only refers to comfort which is affected by the fluid, usually involving changes of state of the
temperature, humidity, air movement and odours but fluid.
also to harmful biological contaminants and chemicals 2.22 Relative Humidity Ratio of the partial
present in the conditioned space. Poor IAQ may be pressure of actual water vapour in the air as compared
serious health hazard. Carbon dioxide has been to the partial pressure of maximum amount of water
recognized as the surrogate ventilation index. that may be contained at its dry bulb temperature.
2.14 Infiltration/Exfiltration The phenomenon When the air is saturated, dry-bulb, wet-bulb and
of outside air leaking into/out of an air conditioned dewpoint temperatures are all equal, and the relative
space. humidity is 100 percent.
2.15 Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) The 2.23 Return Air The air that is collected from the
potential of refrigerant or gases to deplete the ozone conditioned space and returned to the conditioning
in the atmosphere. equipment.
The ODP values for various refrigerants are as given 2.24 Shade Factor The ratio of instantaneous heat
below: gain through the fenestration with shading device to
that through the fenestration.
R-11 1.000
2.25 Sick Building Syndrome (SBS) A term,
R-12 0.820
which is used to describe the presence of acute non-
R-22 0.050
specific symptoms in the majority of people caused
R-123 0.012
by working in buildings with an adverse indoor
R-134a 0.000
environment. It could be a cluster of complex irritative
R-407a 0.000
symptoms like irritation of the eyes, blockened nose
R-407c 0.000
and throat, headaches, dizziness, lethargy, fatigue
R-410a 0.000
irritation, wheezing, sinusitis, congestion, skin rash,
sensory discomfort from odours, nausea, etc. These
Due to high ODP of R-11, R-12 and R-22, their use in
symptoms are usually short-lived and experienced
the air conditioning and refrigeration is being phased-
immediately after exposure; and may disappear when
out. R-123 is also in the phase-out category of
one leaves the building.
refrigerants.
SBS is suspected when significant number of people
2.16 Plenum An air compartment or chamber to
spending extended time in a building report or
which one or more ducts are connected and which
experience acute on-site discomfort. The economic
forms part of an air distribution system.
consequences of SBS, like BRI, are decreased
The pressure drop and air velocities in the plenum productivity, absenteeism and the legal implications
should be low. Generally, the velocity in plenum should if occupants IAQ complaints are left unresolved.
not exceed 1.5 m/s to 2.5 m/s.
2.26 Smoke Damper A damper similar to fire
2.17 Positive Ventilation The supply of outside damper, however, having provisions to close
air by means of a mechanical device, such as a fan. automatically on sensing presence of smoke in air
distribution system or in conditioned space.
2.18 Psychrometry The science involving
thermodynamic properties of moist air and the effect 2.27 Static Pressure The pressure that is required
of atmospheric moisture on materials and human to be created by the fan over the atmospheric pressure
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 7
details and data necessary for review of installation g) Internal Load Lighting and other heat
such as: generating sources like computers, equipment
and machinery; and
a) building: name, type and location;
h) Hours of use.
b) owner: name;
c) orientation: north direction on plans; 3.2.1.2 The design of system and its associated
d) general plans: dimensions and height of all controls shall also take into account the following:
rooms; a) Nature of application,
e) intended use of all rooms; b) Type of construction of building,
f) detail or description of wall construction, c) Permissible control limits,
including insulation and finish; d) Control methods for minimizing use of
g) detail or description of roof, ceiling and floor primary energy,
construction, including insulation and finish; e) Opportunities for heat recovery,
h) detail or description of windows and outside f) Energy efficiency,
doors, including sizes, weather stripping,
g) Filteration standard,
storm sash, sills, storm doors, etc;
h) Hours of use,
j) internal equipment load, such as number of
people, motor, heaters and lighting load; j) Diversity factor, and
k) layout showing the location, size and k) Outdoor air quality.
construction of the cooling tower (apparatus), 3.2.1.3 The operation of system in the following
ducts, distribution system; conditions should be considered when assessing the
m) information regarding location, sizes and complete design:
capacity of air distribution system, refrigeration
a) Summer,
and heating plant, air handling equipment;
b) Monsoon,
n) information on air and water flow rates;
c) Winter,
p) information regarding location and
accessibility of shafts; d) Intermediate seasons,
q) information regarding type and location of e) Night, and
dampers used in air conditioning system; f) Weekends and holidays.
r) chimney or gas vent size, shape and height; 3.2.1.4 Consideration should be given to changes in
s) location and grade of the required fire building load and the system designed so that
separations; maximum operational efficiency is maintained.
t) water softening arrangement; and 3.2.1.5 Special applications like hospitals/operating
u) information on presence of any chemical theatres, computer rooms, clean rooms, laboratories,
fumes or gases. libraries, museums/art galleries, sound recording
3.2 Pre-planning studios, shopping malls, etc shall be handled
differently.
3.2.1 Design Considerations
3.2.2 Planning of Equipment Room for Central Air
3.2.1.1 Cooling load estimate shall be carried out prior Conditioning Plant
to installing air conditioning equipment. Calculation
of cooling load shall take into account the following 3.2.2.1 In selecting the location for plant room, the
factors: aspects of efficiency, economy and good practice
should be considered and wherever possible it shall
a) Recommended indoor temperature and be made contiguous with the building. This room shall
relative humidity; be located as centrally as possible with respect to the
b) Outside design conditions as specified in 4.4; area to be air conditioned and shall be free from
c) Details of construction and orientation of obstructing columns.
exposures like roof, floor, walls, partition and
In the case of large installations (500 TR and above),
ceiling;
it is advisable to have a separate isolated equipment
d) Fenestration area and shading factors; room where possible. The clear headroom below soffit
e) Occupancy Number of people and their of beam should be minimum 4.5 m for centrifugal
activity; plants, and minimum 3.6 m for reciprocating and screw
f) Ventilation Requirement for fresh air; type plants.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 9
3.2.3.11 Where necessary, structural design should Collars for grilles and diffusers shall be taken out only
avoid beam obstruction to the passage of supply and after false ceiling/boxing framework is done and
return air ducts. Adequate ceiling space should be frames for fixing grilles and diffusers have been
made available outside the air handling unit room installed.
to permit installation of supply and return air ducts
3.2.5.3 Where a duct penetrates the masonry wall it
and fire dampers at air handling unit room wall
shall either be suitably covered on the outside to isolate
crossings.
it from masonry, or an air gap shall be left around it to
3.2.3.12 The air handling unit rooms may be prevent vibration transmission. Further, where a duct
acoustically treated, if located in close proximity to passes through a fire resisting compartment/barrier, the
occupied areas. annular space shall be sealed with fire sealant to prevent
smoke transmission (see also Part 4 Fire and Life
3.2.3.13 Access door to air handling unit room shall
Safety).
be single/double leaf type, air tight, opening outwards
and should have a sill to prevent flooding of adjacent 3.2.6 Cooling Tower
occupied areas. It is desired that access doors in air
3.2.6.1 Cooling towers are used to dissipate heat from
conditioned spaces should be provided with tight
water cooled refrigeration, air conditioning and
sealing, gaskets and self closing devices for air
industrial process systems. Cooling is achieved by
conditioning to be effective.
evaporating a small proportion of recirculating water
3.2.3.14 It should be possible to isolate the air handling into outdoor air stream. Cooling towers are installed
unit room in case of fire. The door shall be fire resistant at a place where free flow of atmospheric air is
and fire/smoke dampers shall be provided in supply/ available.
return air duct at air handling unit room wall crossings
3.2.6.2 Range of a cooling tower is defined as
and the annular space between the duct and the wall
temperature difference between the entering and
should be fire-sealed using appropriate fire resistance
leaving water. Approach of the cooling tower is the
rated material.
difference between leaving water temperature and the
3.2.3.15 For buildings with large structural glazing entering air wet bulb temperature.
areas, care should be taken for providing fresh air
3.2.6.3 Types of cooling tower
intakes in air handling unit rooms. Fire isolation shall
be provided for vertical fresh air duct, connecting 3.2.6.3.1 Natural draft
several air handling units.
This type of tower is larger than mechanical draft tower
3.2.4 Planning of Pipe Shafts as it relies on natural convection to obtain the air
circulation. A natural draft tower needs to be tall to
3.2.4.1 The shafts carrying chilled water pipes should
obtain the maximum chimney effect or rely on the
be located adjacent to air handling unit room or within
natural wind currents.
the room.
3.2.6.3.2 Mechanical draft
3.2.4.2 Shaft carrying condensing water pipes to
cooling towers located on terrace should be vertically The fans on mechanical draft towers may be on the
aligned. inlet air side (forced draft) or exit air side (induced
draft). Typically, these have centrifugal or propeller
3.2.4.3 All shafts shall be provided with fire barrier
type fans, depending on pressure drop in tower,
at floor crossings (see Part 4 Fire and Life Safety).
permissible sound levels and energy usage requirement.
3.2.4.4 Access to shaft shall be provided at every On the basis of direction of air and water flow,
floor. mechanical draft cooling towers can be counter flow
or cross flow type.
3.2.5 Planning for Supply Air Ducts and Return
Air 3.2.6.4 Factors to be considered for cooling tower
selection are:
3.2.5.1 Duct supports, preferably in the form of angles
of mild steel supported using stud anchors shall be a) Design wet-bulb temperature and approach
provided on the ceiling slab from the drilled hole. of cooling tower.
Alternately, duct supports may be fixed with internally b) Height limitation and aesthetic requirement.
threaded anchor fastners and threaded rods without c) Location of cooling tower considering
damaging the slabs or structural members. possibility of easy drain back from the
3.2.5.2 If false ceiling is provided, the supports for system.
the duct and the false ceiling, shall be independent. d) Placement with regard to adjacent walls and
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 11
Table 1 Day Light Transmittance for Various air from as clean an area as possible. If low level intakes
Types of Glass are used, care should be taken to position them well
away from roadways and car parks.
Sl Type of Glass Visible Transmittance
No. W/(m2 C) 4.2 Design Considerations
(1) (2) (3)
4.2.1 Types of System
i) 3 mm regular sheet or plate glass 0.86 to 0.91
ii) 3 mm grey sheet glass 0.31 to 0.71 Systems for air conditioning need to control temperature
iii) 5 mm grey sheet glass 0.61 and humidity within predetermined limits throughout
iv) 5.5 mm grey sheet glass 0.14 to 0.56
6 mm grey sheet glass 0.52 the year. Various types of refrigerating systems are
v) 6 mm green/float glass 0.75 available to accomplish the tasks of cooling and
vi) 6 mm grey plate glass 0.44 dehumidifying, which are an essential feature of air
vii) 6 mm bronze plate glass 0.49
viii) 13 mm grey plate glass 0.21
conditioning. Systems for air conditioning may be
ix) 13 mm bronze plate glass 0.25 grouped as all-air type, air and water type, all water
x) Coated glasses (single, laminated, 0.07 to 0.50 type or unitary type.
insulating)
4.2.1.1 All-air system
3.2.8 Roof Insulation
This type of air conditioning system provides
3.2.8.1 Under-deck or over-deck insulation shall be complete sensible and latent cooling, preheating and
provided for exposed roof surface using suitable humidification in the air supplied by the system. Most
insulating materials. Over-deck insulation should be plants operate on the recirculation principle, where a
properly waterproofed to prevent loss of insulating percentage of the air is extracted and the remainder
properties. mixed with incoming fresh air.
3.2.8.2 The overall thermal transmittance from the Low velocity systems may be used. High velocity
exposed roof should be kept as minimum as possible systems although require smaller ducts, are high on
and under normal conditions, the desirable value fan energy, require careful acoustic treatment and
should not exceed 0.58 W/(m2 C). higher standards of duct construction.
3.2.8.3 The ceiling surface of floors which are not 4.2.1.1.1 Constant volume system
to be air conditioned may be suitably insulated to
Accurate temperature control is possible, according to
give an overall thermal transmittance not exceeding
the system adopted. Low velocity system variations
1.16 W/(m2 C)
include dehumidification with return air bypass, and
4 DESIGN OF AIR CONDITIONING multi-zone (hot deck/cold deck mixing). High velocity
system may be single or dual duct type.
4.1 General
4.2.1.1.2 Variable volume system
A ventilation and air conditioning system installed in
a building should clean, freshen and condition the air Most Indian air conditioning systems operate at partial
within the space to be air conditioned. This can be load for most of the year and the variable air volume
achieved by providing the required amount of fresh (VAV) system is able to reduce energy consumption
air either to remove totally or to dilute odours, fumes, by reducing the supply air volume to the space under
etc (for example, from smoking). Local extract systems low load conditions. The VAV system can be applied
may be necessary to remove polluted air from kitchens, to interior or perimeter zones, with common or separate
toilets, etc. Special air filters may be required to remove fans, with common or separate air temperature control.
contaminants or smells when air is recirculated. The greatest energy saving associated with VAV
occurs at the perimeter zones, where variation in solar
It is desirable that access doors to air conditioned space
and outside temperature allow the supply air quantity
are provided with tight sealing gaskets and self closing
to be reduced. Good temperature control is possible
devices for air conditioning to be effective.
but care should be taken at partial load to ensure
Positions of air inlets and extracts to the system are adequate fresh air supply and satisfactory control of
most important and care should be taken in their air distribution and space humidity.
location. Consideration should be given to relatively
4.2.1.2 Air and water system
nearby buildings and any contaminated discharges
from those buildings. Inlets should not be positioned Control of conditions within the space is achieved by
near any flue outlets, dry cleaning or washing machine initial control of the supply air from a central plant but
extraction outlets, kitchen, water-closets, etc. When with main and final control at a terminal unit within
possible, air inlets should be at high level so as to induce the conditioned space. The supply air provides the
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 13
accumulation of a non-condensable gas (air) in the conventional oil cooler. Such an arrangement can
condenser. Unchecked surging can lead to damage to impose a small penalty on the plant capacity.
the compressor or its drive and does increase the noise
The condenser most commonly used on packaged units
level.
is the water cooled shell-and-tube type, but equipment
The use of low pressure refrigeration to suit the with air cooled condensers is also available. The
characteristics of the compressor in the smaller size expansion device used will depend on the evaporator
range, means that the evaporator operates at below type but it is often a electronic expansion valve (single
atmospheric pressure, thus a leak can draw in air and or in multiple) of conventional or modified form.
atmospheric moisture. These should be prevented from
Screw compressors are available in open and semi-
accumulating, since these interfere with the operation
hermetic form (see 4.2.2.1) and are generally coupled
of the plant and cause corrosion.
direct to two-pole motors. The capacity of the
The compressors may be driven either directly by compressor can be modulated down to 10 percent of
electric motor or via a speed-increasing gear train. full load capacity.
Units are available in open form, that is, compressor
and motor are separate items, or in semi-hermetic form 4.2.2.3 Reciprocating compressors
where the motor and compressor are contained in a These are available in a wide range of sizes and designs.
common pressure-tight casing that is bolted together. They are almost invariably used in packages up to
The latter type eliminates the drive shaft gland seal (a 120 TR cooling capacity.
potential point of leakage), which is necessary on the
former. Because the cylinders have automatic valves, a single
compressor may be used over wide range of operating
Certain types of open centrifugal compressors could conditions with near optimum efficiency, whereas
conveniently be directly driven by a steam or gas other types of compressor require detailed modification
turbine. This arrangement could be advantageous when to give optimum efficiency at different conditions. This
the refrigeration plant forms part of total energy system. is, however, of minor importance for normal air
The centrifugal compressor type water chilling conditioning duties.
packages normally include a shell-and-tube water Capacity control is achieved by making cylinders in-
cooled condenser and a flooded shell-and-tube operative, usually by propping open the suction valves,
evaporator, but unit are also available incorporating thus, capacity reduction is in a series of steps rather
an air cooled condenser The expansion device is than by modulation. Typically, a four-cylinder
commonly an electronic expansion valve or high compressor would be unloaded in four steps. It is
pressure float regulating valve. therefore necessary to allow for this stepwise operation
4.2.2.2 Screw compressors in designing the chilled water temperature control
system.
Two types of screw compressors are available, that
is, single and twin screw, and both are positive The evaporator is normally of the dry expansion type,
displacement machines. Compression of the refrigerant to permit oil from the compressor to circulate round
vapour is achieved by the progressive reduction of the the system with the refrigerant. Shell-and-tube water
volume contained with in the helical flutes of the cooled condensers are common, but any type of
cylindrical rotor(s) as they rotate. condenser can be used. With air cooled condensers it
is normal practice to build the machine package so that
Oil is injected into the rotor chamber for sealing and it may be located on the roof in a package including
lubrication purposes and is removed from the the condenser.
refrigerant discharge gas in an oil separator before the
refrigerant passes on to the condenser. No oil separator It is common for the electric drive motors to be built
is 100 percent efficient and so a small quantity of oil into the compressor assembly; this is known as a semi-
always passes through with the refrigerant. On systems hermetic drive to distinguish it from the hermetic,
using a direct expansion evaporator the oil is trapped in which the compressor and motor are enclosed within
in the evaporator and an oil recovery system is a pressure vessel and cannot therefore be serviced.
necessary. The semi-hermetic compressor is more compact
With some systems oil cooler is required in the oil and is quieter in operation than the open drive
circulation system, to remove the heat gathered by the compressor, but involves a more difficult service
oil during compression cycle. On other systems liquid operation in the event of a motor failure. It gains in
refrigerant is injected into the compressor to remove reliability, however, by avoiding the shaft seal of the
the heat of compression instead of using the open compressor.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 15
governed by economic considerations, but care should Main headers in the plant room are designed for very
be taken to minimize the possibility of corrosion when low velocity around 1 m/s. Noise can be caused by
choosing material combinations. velocities in excess of 4 m/s but this is more likely to
be caused by air left in the pipes by inadequate venting.
4.3.2.2 Design principles
Where materials other than steel are used, erosion can
The system design should achieve the following two occur at the higher velocities particularly if the water
main objectives: is allowed to become acidic.
a) A good distribution of water to the various Friction factor in piping should not exceed 5 m of water
heat exchangers/cooling coils at all conditions for 100 m of pipe length. The power consumed in
of load. This will be influenced by the method circulating the water around the system is proportional
chosen to control the heat transfer capacity to the pressure loss (due to friction) and the flow. It is
of air handling units. Failure to achieve good therefore an advantage to design system with a water
hydraulic design may lead to difficulties with temperature rise say 5C-7C which results in
system balancing. Adequate provision should minimising the flow rate.
be made for measuring flow rates and pressure
Air-conditioning system operate for a large part of the
differentials.
time at less than the design load, and this means that
b) An economic balance between pipe size and operating costs can be minimized if the water quantity
piping cost. circulated can be reduced at partial load. This should
Excessive water velocities should be avoided, as they be done with variable speed pumping systems.
may lead to noise at pipe junctions and bends. 4.3.2.4 Layout considerations
When multiple water-chilling packages have to be used The layout of the main pipe runs should be considered
in a large system, the control of the machines and the in relation to the building structure, which will have to
arrangement of the water circulation should be support their weight and carry the imposed axial loads.
considered as an integrated whole. It is not possible to The positioning of expansion joints should be
obtain satisfactory result by considering control and considered in relation to the branches, which may only
system design separately. accommodate small movements. The pumps should
Temperature changes in the system lead to changes in not be subjected to excessive loads from the piping.
the volume of water, which has to be allowed to expand Provision should be made for venting air and any gas
into a suitable expansion tank. It is essential that the formed by corrosion processes from the high points in
point at which the expansion tank is connected into the system: failure to do this can lead to restricted water
the system be such that it is never shutoff. It is normal flows and poor performance.
practice to locate the expansion tank above the highest
point in the system, so that a positive pressure is New systems invariably contain debris of one sort or
maintained when all the pumps are stopped; if this is another left during construction, and this can cause
not possible, a closed tank can be installed at a lower trouble by blocking pipes, control valves and pumps
level and pressurized by an inert gas. Closed expansion if it is not removed during testing and commissioning.
tank with air separator in the chilled water system helps Piping system should be designed to permit proper
in improving the life and efficiency of chilled water cleaning and flushing and should include suitable
piping and heat exchange equipment. strainers at appropriate locations.
For central chilled water air conditioning systems, 4.3.3 Thermal Insulation
water is the usual heat transfer medium use to convey 4.3.3.1 Air conditioning and water distribution
the heat from the air-handling units to the primary systems carry chilled or heated fluids. Thermal
refrigerant in the evaporator. In certain special cases, insulation is required to prevent undue heat gain or
when temperatures lower than 5C are required, an loss and also to prevent internal and external
anti-freeze such as ethylene glycol may be added to condensation; a vapour seal is essential if there is a
depress the freezing point. possibility of condensation within the insulating
4.3.2.3 Piping design materials.
The arrangement of the water piping will depend upon 4.3.3.2 The selection of suitable thermal insulating
the cooling or heating systems chosen as being the most materials requires that consideration be given to
suitable for the building. physical characteristics as follows:
The water velocity normally used are dependent on a) Fire Properties Certain insulating
pipe size but are usually in the range 1 m/s to 3 m/s. materials are combustible or may, in a fire,
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 17
Table 2 Inside Design Conditions for Some Applications
(Clause 4.4.3)
Sl Category Inside Design Conditions
No.
Summer Winter
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Restaurants DB 23 to 26C DB 21 to 23C
RH 55 to 60% RH not less than 40%
ii) Office buildings DB 23 to 26C DB 21 to 23C
RH 50 to 60% RH not less than 40%
iii) Radio and television studios DB 23 to 26C DB 21 to 23C
RH 45 to 55% RH 40 to 50%
iv) Departmental stores DB 23 to 26C DB 21 to 23C
RH 50 to 60% RH not less than 40%
v) Hotel guest rooms DB 23 to 26C DB 23 to 24C
RH 50 to 60% RH not less than 40%
vi) Class rooms DB 23 to 26C DB 23 to 24C
RH 50 to 60% RH not less than 40%
vii) Auditoriums DB 23 to 26C DB 23 to 24C
RH 50 to 60% RH not less than 40%
viii) Recovery rooms DB 24 to 26C
RH 45 to 55%
ix) Patient rooms DB 24 to 26C
RH 45 to 55%
x) Operation theatres DB 17 to 27C
RH 45 to 55%
xi) Museums and libraries DB 20 to 22C
RH 40 to 55%
xii) Telephone terminal rooms DB 22 to 26C
RH 40 to 50%
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 19
for heating loads. For critical applications values under loads and the practical cooling and heating range of
0.4 percent column could be used for cooling loads the air.
and 99.6 percent column for heating loads.
4.4.6 Air Movement
For critical jobs and high energy consumption
applications, hourly load analysis should be evaluated a) In air conditioned spaces Air movement
using computer programmes. is desirable, as it contributes a feeling of
freshness, although excessive movement
For industrial and other specific applications, the design should be avoided as this leads to complaints
conditions shall be as per users requirement. of draughts. The speed of an air current
Adequate movement of air shall always be provided becomes more noticeable as the air temperature
in an air conditioned enclosure, but velocities in excess falls, owing to its increased cooling effect.
of 0.5 m/s in the zone between floor level and 1.5 m The design of the air distribution system
level shall generally be avoided; in the case of comfort therefore has a controlling effect of the
air conditioning, recommended air velocity is 0.13 m/s quantity and temperature of the air that may
to 0.23 m/s in this zone, except in the vicinity of a be introduced into a space. The quantity of
supply or return air grille. fresh air should not be increased solely to
create air movement; this should be effected
4.4.5 Minimum Outside Fresh Air by air re-circulation within the space or by
The fresh air supply is required to maintain an inducing air movement with the ventilation
acceptably non-odorous atmosphere (by diluting body air system.
odorous and tobacco smoke) and to dilute the carbon b) In buildings Air flow within a building
dioxide exhaled. This quantity may be quoted per should be controlled to minimize transfer of
person and is related to the occupant density and fumes and smells, for example from kitchens
activity within the space. Table 4 gives minimum fresh to restaurants and the like. This is achieved
air supply rates for mechanically ventilated or air by creating air pressure gradients within the
conditioned space. The quantity and distribution of building, by varying the balance between the
introduced fresh air should take into account the natural fans introducing fresh air and those extracting
infiltration of the building. the stale air. For example, the pressure should
be reduced in a kitchen below that of the
Table 4 specifies requirements for ventilation air adjacent restaurant.
quantities for 100 percent outdoor air when the outdoor
air quality meets the specifications for acceptable Care should be taken, however, to avoid excessive
outdoor air quality. While these quantities are for 100 pressure differences that may cause difficulty in
percent outdoor air, they also set the amount of air opening door or cause them to slam. In other cases,
required to dilute contaminants to acceptable levels. such as computer room, the area may be pressurized
Therefore, it is necessary that at least this amount of to minimize the introduction of dust from adjacent
air be delivered to the conditioned space at all times areas.
the building is in use. 4.4.6.1 Fire and smoke control
The proportion of fresh air introduced into a building Air circulation system may be designed to extract
may be varied to achieve economical operation. When smoke in event of a fire, to assist in the fire fighting
the fresh air can provide a useful cooling effect the operation and to introduce fresh air to pressurize escape
quantity shall be controlled to balance the cooling routes.
demand. However, when the air is too warm or humid
the quantity may be reduced to a minimum to reduce 4.4.6.2 Removal of particulate matter from air
the cooling load. Efficient air filtration prevents fouling of the system
For transfer of heat/moisture, air circulation is required and is of special importance in urban areas, where
to transfer the heat and humidity generated within the damage is likely to be caused to decorations and fittings
building. In simple systems the heat generated by the by discoloration owing to airborne dust particles. In
occupants, lighting, solar heat and heat from electrical order to obtain maximum filtration efficiency within
and mechanical equipment may be removed by the the minimum capital and maintenance expenditure, the
introduction and extraction of large quantities of fresh utmost care should be given to the location of the air
air. In more elaborate systems air may be re-circulated intake in relation to the prevailing wind, the position
through conditioning equipment to maintain the desired of chimneys and the relative atmospheric dust
temperature and humidity. The air circulation rates concentration in the environs of the building; the
are decided in relation to the thermal or moisture recommendation for siting of air inlets given in 4.1
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 21
Table 4 Concluded
vii) Theatre
Ticket booths 60 10
Special ventilation will be needed to eliminate
Lobbies 150 10
special stage effects (for example, dry ice vapours,
Auditorium 150 8
mists, etc).
Stages, studios 70 8
viii) Transportation
Waiting rooms 100 8
Ventilation within vehicles may require special
Platforms 100 8
consideration.
Vehicles 150 8
ix) Workrooms
Meat processing 10 8 Spaces maintained at low temperature at (10F to
+ 50F or 23C to + 10C) are not covered by
these requirements unless the occupancy is
continuous. Ventilation from adjoining spaces is
permissible. When the occupancy is intermittent,
infiltration will normally exceed the ventilation
requirement.
Photo studios 10 8
Darkrooms 10 2.50
Pharmacy 20 8
Bank vaults 5 8
Duplicating, printing 2.50 Installed equipment shall incorporate positive
exhaust and control (as required) of undesirable
contaminants (toxic and otherwise).
x) Education
Classrooms 50 8
Laboratories 30 10 Special contaminant control systems may be
Training shop 30 10 required for processes or functions including
laboratory animal occupancy.
Music rooms 50 8
Libraries 20 8
Locker rooms 2.50
Corridors 0.50
Auditoriums 150 8
xi) Hospital, Nurses and Convalescent
Homes
Patient rooms 10 13 Special requirements or codes provisions and
Medical procedure 20 8 pressure relationships may determine minimum
Operating rooms 20 15 ventilation rates and filter efficiency.
Procedure Recovery and ICU 20 8 Generating contaminants may require higher
rates.
Autopsy 2.50 Air shall not be re-circulated into other spaces.
Physical therapy 20 8
Correctional Cells 20 10
Dining halls 100 8
Guard stations 40 8
1)
This table prescribes supply rates of acceptable outdoor air required for acceptable indoor air quality. These values have been chosen
to dilute human bioeffluents and other contaminants with an adequate margin of safety and to account for health variations among
people and varied activity levels.
2)
Net occupiable space.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 23
atmosphere. Detectors may be advisable in certain 4.6 Application Factors
applications even when the system is not a recirculatory
4.6.1 General
one. Exhausts should not be positioned near the fire
escapes, main staircases or where these could be a This clause gives general guidance, for various
hindrance to the work of fire authorities. The local fire applications, for the factors that usually influence the
authorities should be consulted. selection of the type, design and layout of the air
conditioning or ventilating system to be used.
A careful study of the operating characteristics of each
type of sensing device should be made before selection. 4.6.1.1 Commercial applications
Smoke detectors are normally either of the optical or The primary objective of the application described
ionization chamber type. These can be used to either under this heading is provision of comfort conditions
sound an alarm system or operate a fire dampers. Care for occupants.
should be taken with their location as various factors
affect the satisfactory operation. 4.6.1.2 Offices
Ionization type detectors are sensitive to high velocity Office building may include both external and internal
air streams and if used in ductwork the manufacturer zones.
should be consulted. Activation of smoke detector The external zone may be considered as extending from
should stop the air handling unit supply air fan, close approximately 4 m to 6 m inwards from the external
the fire damper in supply and return air duct and operate wall, and is generally subjected to wide load variation
a suitable alarm system. owing to daily and annual changes in outside
In all the above instances the appropriate controls temperature and solar radiation. Ideally, the system(s)
would require manual re-setting. selected to serve an external zone should be able to
provide summer cooling and winter heating. During
4.5.2.5 Smoke control intermediate seasons the external zone of one side of
While it is essential that the spread of smoke through the building may require cooling and at same time the
a building to be considered in the design of air external zone on another side of the building may
conditioning systems for all types of applications, it require heating. The main factors affecting load are
assumes special significance in high rise buildings, usually window area and choice of shading devices.
because the time necessary for evacuation may be The other important factors are the internal gain owing
greater than the time for the development of untenable to people, light and office equipment. Choice of system
smoke conditions on staircases, in lift shafts and in may be affected by requirements to counteract down
other parts of the building far away from the fire. Lifts draughts and chilling effect due to radiation associated
may be filled with smoke or unavailable, and, if mass with single glazing during winter.
evacuation is attempted, staircase may be filled with Internal zone loads are entirely due to heat gain from
people. people, lights and office equipment, which represent a
One or more escape staircase connecting to outdoors fairly uniform cooling load throughout the year.
at ground level, should be pressurized, to enable mass Other important considerations in office block
evacuation of high rise buildings (see also Part 4 Fire applications may include requirements for individual
and Life Safety). controls, partitioning flexibility serving multiple
Therefore all air handling systems of a building should tenants, and requirement of operating selected areas
be designed with fire protection and smoke control outside of normal office hours. Areas such as
aspects incorporating, where appropriate, facilities to conference rooms, board rooms, canteens, etc, will
permit their operation for the control of smoke within often require independent systems.
the building in event of fire. For external building zones with large glass areas, for
example, greater than 60 percent of the external faade,
The pressurization systems for staircases use large
the air-water type of system, such as induction or fan
volumes of outside air. The system may be designed
coil is generally economical than all air systems and
to operate continuously at low speed, being increased
has lower space requirements. For external zones with
to high speed in the event of fire, or to operate only in
small glass areas, an all air system, such as variable
emergency. Noise and droughts are not considered a
volume, may be the best selection. For building with
problem in an emergency situation. Fan motor and
average glass areas, other factors may determine the
starter should be protected from fire and connected to
choice of system.
the emergency electrical supply through cables with
special fire resistant coating (see also Part 4 Fire and For internal zones, a separate all-air system with
Life Safety). volume control may be the best choice. Systems
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 25
air returning to the patient owing to secondary air temperature variations owing to fluctuation in heat
currents whilst the general pressurization pattern load. Overhead air supply through ceiling plenums
should cause air to flow through the department from utilizing linear diffuser or ventilated ceilings is
sterile to less sterile rooms in progression. In operating eminently suited to computer room application,
theatres 100 percent fresh air system is normally permitting high air change rates to be achieved without
provided and air pressures in various rooms are set by undue discomfort to personnel.
use of pressure stabilizers. Many types of air
The air conditioning system should be reliable because
distribution pattern within operation theatres are in use
failure to maintain conditions for even a short duration
but generally they conform to high-level supply and
can cause substantial monetary loss and possibly more
low-level pressure relief or exhaust. There is also need
serious consequence. As such standby equipment is
for a separate scavenging system for exhaled and waste
recommended.
anaesthetic gases with in theatre suites where general
anaesthetic may be administered. 4.6.1.8 Residential buildings
When zoning air distribution systems to compensate for Very few residences are air conditioned. Some
building orientation and shape, consideration should be individual houses have unitary systems comprising of
given to ensure that the mixing of air from different window/split air conditioners. Some large houses have
departments is reduced to a minimum. This can be VRV based splits and some luxury block of flats are
accomplished by the use of 100 percent conditioned provided with air-water systems. VAV also works well
fresh air with no re-circulation or, where re-circulation for some luxury applications with chilled water
is employed, by providing separate air handling systems applications. In the latter case, most of the considerations
for different departments based on the relative sensitivity of 4.6.1.3 apply.
of each to contamination. A degree of stand-by is
provided by this system so that breakdown will affect 5 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
only a limited section of the hospital. 5.1 General
Laboratories and other areas dealing with infectious Noise is unwanted sound. All ventilating and air
diseases or viruses, and sanitary accommodation conditioning systems will produce noise, and this may
adjacent to wards, should be at a negative air pressure cause annoyance or disturbance in:
compared to any other area to prevent exfiltration of
any airborne contaminants. In extreme cases any a) the spaces being treated;
exhaust to atmosphere from these areas has to pass b) other rooms in the building;
through high efficiency sub-micron particulate air c) the environment external to the building.
(HEPA) filters.
In the case of external environment particular care
4.6.1.7.2 Computer rooms should be taken to avoid a nuisance in the silent hours,
and local authorities have statutory powers to ensure
The equipment in computer rooms generates heat and that noise from plant is limited.
contains components that are sensitive to sudden
variations of temperature and humidity. These are It is important that expert advice be sought in dealing
sensitive to the deposition of dust. Exposure beyond with noise and vibration problems, as for obvious
the prescribed limits may result in improper operation reasons the most economical solutions should be used,
or need for shut-down of the equipment. The without impairing the performance.
temperature and humidity in computer rooms need to
5.2 Types of Noise in Building
be controlled within reasonably close limits, although
this depends on the equipment involved. The relative 5.2.1 Externally Created Noise
humidity may be controlled within + 5 percent in the
Reduction of externally created noise is mainly dealt
range 40 percent to 60 percent. Manufacturers normally
with by choice of building profile and window
prescribe specific conditions to be maintained. Typical
construction. The air conditioning designer should,
conditions are air dry-bulb: 21 1.6C; relative
however, ensure that noise does not enter via air inlets
humidity 50 5 percent; and filtration 90 percent down
or exhausts: it may be reduced by suitable attenuators.
to 10 microns.
5.2.2 Generated Noise
A low velocity re-circulation system may be used with
5 percent to 10 percent fresh air make-up which is Noise produced by the components of air conditioning
allowed to exfiltrate from the room and ensure a and ventilation plant installed within the building can
positive pressure to prevent entry of dust and untreated escape via ventilation grilles or door openings and can
air. The air distribution should be zoned to minimize cause nuisance to neighbours. Equipment mounted
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 27
without touching the members of the false for a more normal operating point and allowing fan
ceiling or partitions. noise to exceed the design criteria on the rare occasions
c) Ensure that ducts/duct supports do not touch when the fan operates at full output.
the evaporator. 5.5.5.3 To reduce fan noise, the following should be
5.5.4 From Plenum Chamber adopted:
The following measures should be adopted/considered: a) Design the air distribution system for
minimum resistance, since the sound generated
a) If possible and if pressures allow, expand the by a fan, regardless of type, increase by the
air to a plenum chamber (of 2.5 m/s for square of the static pressure. Turbulence can
normal office), which is acoustically lined increase the flow noise generated by duct
inside. fittings and dampers in the air distribution
b) Stiffening of the plenum body is very critical systems especially at low frequencies.
since it could create a drumming noise. b) Examine the specific sound power levels of
c) Plenum chambers with sound absorbing the fan designs for any given job. Different
material are frequently used as silencers in fans generate different levels of sound and
air conditioning and ventilating systems and produce different octave band spectra. Select
in testing facilities to reduce flow velocity and a fan that will generate the lowest possible
turbulence. The attenuation of these devices sound level, commensurate with other fan
may be due to both dissipative and reactive selection parameters.
effects. c) Fans with relatively few blades (less than 15)
tend to generate tones, which may dominate
5.5.5 From Fans
the spectrum. These tones occur at the blade
5.5.5.1 Centrifugal fans passage frequency and its harmonies. The
intensity of these tones depends on resonance
There are three basic types of centrifugal fans,
with the duct system, fan design, and inlet
backward curved, forward curved, and radial. Noise
flow distortions.
from centrifugal fans is dominantly a superimposition
of discrete tones at the varying frequencies and d) Select a fan to operate as near as possible to its
broadband aerodynamic noise. rated peak efficiency when handling the
required quantity of air and static pressure.
5.5.5.2 Axial fans Also, select a fan that generates the lowest
Axial fans derive their name from the fact that the possible noise but still meets the required
airflow is along the axis of the fan. To avoid a circular design conditions for which it is selected. Using
flow pattern and to increase performance, guide vanes an oversized or undersized fan, that does not
are usually installed downstream of the rotor. Axial operate at or near rated peak efficiency, may
fans with exit guide vanes are called vane axial and result in substantially higher noise levels.
those without guide vanes are called tube axial. Axial e) Design duct connections at both the fan inlet
fans generally operate at higher pressures than and outlet for uniform and straight airflow.
centrifugal fans and are usually considered noisier. Avoid unstable, gusting, and swirling inlet
Common applications include heating and ventilation airflow. Deviation from accepted applications
systems. Because of the large number of blades and can severely degrade both the aerodynamic
high rotational speeds, noise from axial fans is and acoustic performance of any fan and
generally characterized by strong discrete blade invalidate manufacturers ratings or other
passing tones. performance predictions.
f) Select duct silencers that do not significantly
Variable inlet vane system may generate significantly
increase the required fan total static pressure.
low frequency noise as the vanes shut down. Additional
attenuation with a corresponding additional pressure 5.5.6 From Chillers, Pumps and Pipes
drop is required to attenuate the noise generated by Sizing and selecting a chiller is an important aspect in
the inlet vanes. noise control. The following guidelines may be
Variable speed motors and drives and variable pitch considered for noise control:
fan blade systems are actually quieter at reduced air a) For roof top installation of chillers, these may
output than at full output. The designer has the option be placed on beams connected on the elevated
of designing for maximum output as if the system were levels of pillars on correctly chosen vibration
constant volume, or selecting the sound attenuation isolators.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 29
a) Plant rooms; various parameters that affect the type of ventilation
b) Occupied rooms adjacent to plant rooms; system selected for a particular application, and the
c) Outside plant rooms facing air intakes and sizing of the ventilation plant:
exhausts and condenser discharge, to assess a) The climatic zone in which the building is
possible nuisance to adjacent occupied areas; located is a major consideration. An important
d) In the space served by the first grille or distinction that must be made is between hot-
diffuser after a fan outlet; and dry and warm-moist conditions. Hot-dry work
e) In at least two of the spaces served by fan situations occur around furnaces, forges,
coil units or high velocity system terminal metal-extruding and rolling mills, glass-
units (where applicable). forming machines, and so forth.
Typical warm-moist operations are found in
6 MECHANICAL VENTILATION (FOR NON AIR textile mills, laundries, dye houses, and deep
CONDITIONED AREAS) AND EVAPORATIVE mines where water is used extensively for dust
COOLING control.
6.1 Ventilation Warm-moist conditions are more hazardous
than the hot-dry conditions.
Ventilation is the process of changing air in an enclosed
b) Siting (and orientation) of the building is also
space. A proportion of the air in the space should be
an important factor. Solar heat gain and
continuously withdrawn and replaced by fresh air
high outside temperature increase the load
drawn from outside to maintain the required level of
significantly; how significantly depends, on
air purity. Ventilation is required to control the
the magnitude of these gains particularly in
following:
relation to other gains for example the internal
a) Oxygen Content Prevent depletion of the load.
oxygen content of the air; c) The comfort level required is another
b) Carbondioxide and Moisture To prevent consideration. In many cases, comfort levels
undue accumulation; (as understood in the context of Residential
c) Contaminants To prevent undue rise in Buildings, Commercial Blocks, Office
concentration of body odours and other Establishments) cannot be achieved at all and
contaminants such as tobacoo smoke; therefore, what is often aimed at will be
d) Bacteria To oxidize colonies of bacteria acceptable working conditions rather than
and fungas to prevent their proliferation. comfort.
e) Heat To remove body heat and heat Having surveyed the considerations above,
dissipated by electrical or mechanical there are many options available in mechanical
equipment or solar heat gains. ventilation spot cooling, local exhaust,
changes in work pattern to choose from,
Mechanical ventilation is one of several forms of for achieving the desired acceptable working
ventilation options available. It usually consists of fans, conditions. The options available may need
filters, ducts, air diffusers and outlets for air distribution to be extended to evaporative cooling in
within the building. It may include either mechanical order to achieve more acceptable working
exhaust system or exhaust can occur through natural conditions when confronted with more hostile
means. environmental conditions.
Natural ventilation and natural exhaust are also options It will be thus seen that there are many
(see Part 8 Building Services, Section 1 Lighting and considerations involved in the selection and
Ventilation). The scope of this section is therefore sizing of suitable ventilation and evaporative
restricted to mechanical ventilation. cooling plants to meet the requirements of any
particular building and/or process. It is the
Ventilation controls heat, odours and hazardous interplay of these various factors listed above
chemical contaminants (in a building) that could affect like climatic conditions, internal load,
the health and safety of the occupants. For better exposure to heat and hazardous substances
control, heat and contaminants, air may need to be and level of working conditions aimed at, that
exhausted at their sources by local exhaust systems. determines the option, which best meets the
Usually such systems require lower air flows than requirement and also, the capacity and other
general (dilution) ventilation. attributes of the option selected.
Following considerations provide details regarding the Ventilation control measures alone are
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 31
c) Ventilation systems may need to be 6.5 Ventilation Rate and Design Coniderations for
supplemented by exhaust hoods and canopies Non Air Conditioned Areas
designed to capture the unwanted fumes or 6.5.1 General Ventilation
dust right at the source irrespective of other
The rate of air circulation recommended for different
air currents in the vicinity.
general areas is as given in Table 5.
Many industrial ventilation systems shall handle
Table 5 Recommended Rate of Air Circulation
simultaneous exposures to heat, toxic and hazardous
for Different Areas
substances. The number of contaminant sources, their
(Clause 6.5.1)
generation rate and effectiveness of exhaust hoods are
rarely known; there is no option but to depend on Sl Application Air Change
common ventilation/industrial hygiene practice in such No. per Hour
(1) (2) (3)
situations.
1. Assembly rooms 4-8
Reference may also be made to good practice [8-3(4)]. 2. Bakeries 20-30
3. Banks/building societies 4-8
6.4 Types of Ventilation Systems 4. Bathrooms 6-10
5. Bedrooms 2-4
In the interest of efficient use of energy and comfort 6. Billiard rooms 6-8
to the occupants, it is imperative that all modes of 7. Boiler rooms 15-30
8. Cafes and coffee bars 10-12
ventilation should be considered in relation to the 9. Canteens 8-12
thermal characteristics of the building. 10. Cellars 3-10
11. Churches 1-3
6.4.1 Mechanical Extract/Natural Supply 12. Cinemas and theatres 10-15
13. Club rooms 12, Min
This is simplest form of extract system comprising one 14. Compressor rooms 10-12
or more fans, usually of the propeller, axial flow or 15. Conference rooms 8-12
16. Dairies 8-12
mixed flow type, installed in outside walls or on the 17. Dance halls 12, Min
roof. The discharge should terminate in louvers or 18. Dye works 20-30
cowls or a combination of both. 19. Electroplating shops 10-12
20. Engine rooms 15-30
Alternatively, the system may comprise of ductwork 21. Entrance halls 3-5
22. Factories and work shops 8-10
arranged for general extraction of the vitiated air or 23. Foundries 15-30
for extraction from localized sources of heat, moisture, 24. Garages 6-8
odours, fumes and dust. Such duct work may be 25. Glass houses 25-60
26. Gymnasium 6, Min
connected to centrifugal or axial flow fans that 27. Hair dressing saloon 10-15
discharge through the wall or roof, terminating in 28. Hospitals-sterlising 15-25
louvers or cowls or a combination of both. 29. Hospital-wards 6-8
30. Hospital domestic 15-20
It is essential that provision for make-up air is made 31. Laboratories 6-15
32. Launderettes 10-15
and that consideration is given to the location and size 33. Laundries 10-30
of inlet. Inlet should not be located in the vicinity of 34. Lavatories 6-15
exhaust fan. 35. Lecture theatres 5-8
36. Libraries 3-5
6.4.2 Mechanical Supply/Natural Extract 37. Living rooms 3-6
38. Mushroom houses 6-10
This system is similar in form to the extract system 39. Offices 6-10
but arranged to deliver fresh air positively into the 40. Paint shops (not cellulose) 10-20
41. Photo and X-ray darkroom 10-15
enclosed space. Such a system necessitates provision 42. Public house bars 12, Min
for the discharge of vitiated air by natural means. 43. Recording control rooms 15-25
Where there is a requirement for the enclosed space to 44. Recording studios 10-12
45. Restaurants 8-12
be at a slightly higher pressure than its surroundings 46. Schoolrooms 5-7
(to exclude dust or smoke, for example), the discharge 47. Shops and supermarkets 8-15
may be through natural leakage paths or balanced 48. Shower baths 15-20
49. Stores and warehouses 3-6
pressure relief dampers, as may be required. 50. Squash courts 4, Min
51. Swimming baths 10-15
6.4.3 Combined Mechanical Supply and Extract 52. Toilets 6-10
This system is a combination of those described above 53. Utility rooms 15-20
54. Welding shops 15-30
and may comprise supply and exhaust ductwork
systems or may employ a common fan with a fresh air NOTE The ventilation rates may be increased by 50 percent
where heavy smoking occurs or if the room is below ground.
inlet on the low pressure side.
Suggested design standards for exhaust airflows from Sizing the ventilation plant is essentially arriving at the
different kitchen equipment based on their input power air flow rate required. Based on various considerations
are as given in Table 6. already reviewed the sizing of the plant will be
influenced by the following requirements:
Table 6 Design Exhaust Air Flow in l/s per kW
of the Kitchen Equipment a) Removal of sensible heat,
b) Removal of latent heat,
(Clause 6.5.2)
c) Make-up air the flow rate required will
Sl Kitchen Equipment Electricity Gas based depend upon local exhaust, and
No. based Equipment
Equipment d) Removal or dilution of the contaminants
(1) (2) (3) (4) down to the permissible level.
i) Cooking pot 8 12 The air flow rate arrived at will be the maximum of
ii) Pressure cooker cabinet 5 the flow rates calculated for the above requirements.
iii) Convection oven 10
iv) Roasting oven (salamander) 33 33 6.5.4.1 Ventilation plant size is often expressed in
v) Griddle 32 35
vi) Frying pan 32 35 terms of number of air changes per hour or cmh/m2 of
vii) Deep fat fryer 28 floor area. These expressions fail to evaluate the actual
viii) Cooker/stove 32 35 heat release provided by the plant. The unit, cmh/m2
ix) Grill 50 61
x) Heated table/bath 30 gives a relationship which is independent of the
xi) Coffee maker 3 building height. This is a more rational approach than
xii) Dish washer 17 speaking in terms of air changes per hour. This is
xiii) Refrigeration equipment 60
xiv) Ceramic cooker/stove 25
because, with the same internal load, the same amount
xv) Microwave oven 3 of ventilation air, properly applied to the work zone
xvi) Pizza oven 15 with adequate velocity, will provide the desired heat
xvii) Induction cooker/stove 20 relief quite independently of the ceiling height of the
space, with few exceptions. Ventilation rates of 30 to
It is desirable to use compensating exhaust hoods for
60 m3/h per m2 have been found to give good results
kitchen equipment installed within air conditioned
in many plants. Notwithstanding these general
spaces. The ventilation rates may be confirmed from
observations, detailed design should be based on
the kitchen equipment supplier.
detailed thorough calculations after all necessary data
6.5.3 Car Parking Ventilation has been evaluated and relevant considerations have
been reviewed.
Ventilation is essential, in car parking areas to take
care of pollution due to emission of carbon monoxide, 6.6 Evaporative Cooling
oxides of nitrogen, presence of oil and petrol fumes
and diesel engine smoke. These contaminants cause 6.6.1 Evaporative cooling is defined as the reduction
undesirable effect like nausea, headache, fire hazards, of air dry-bulb temperature by the evaporation of
if applicable permissible limits for each of the water.
contaminants noted are exceeded. Although four 6.6.2 When water evaporates into the air to be cooled,
contaminants are listed above, the capacity of a system simultaneously humidifying it, the process is called
designed to tackle concentration of carbon monoxide, direct evaporative cooling. When the air to be cooled
will be adequate to keep the other three contaminants is kept separate from evaporation process, and therefore
also within their respective permissible limits. is not humidified as it is cooled, then the process is
The recommended ventilation rate will ensure that the called indirect evaporative cooling.
CO level will be maintained within 29 mg/m3 with peak It is good practice to use 100 percent fresh air in
levels not to exceed 137 mg/m3. the evaporative cooling. Re-circulation is not
For partially open garages, the requirement is stated in recommended, as it will lead to continuous increase in
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 33
wet-bulb temperature of the air. When evaporative the dry air from the wet surface. Higher face velocity
cooling is provided for comfort application, it may be may provide insufficient air-water contact time.
supplemented by devices like ceiling fans and fan
6.6.7 Pad material should be such which provides
coolers to enhance air movement for circulation of air
maximum clean wet surface area with minimum
in internal areas in order to maximize evaporation of
airflow resistance. Materials, which have either good
moisture from the skin.
wick characteristics or surface that spread water
6.6.3 The geographic range for the evaporative cooling rapidly by capillary action, should be selected.
is based on coolers ability to create or approximate
6.6.8 In the ducted systems, all supply air diffusers,
human comfort and is limited by relative humidity in
grilles and registers should be preferably adjustable.
the atmosphere. It is more effective in dry climates
(hot-dry climate zone) where wet-bulb depression is 6.6.9 General room cooling should be supplemented
comparatively large. Factors to be considered with spot cooling in the hot workplaces.
include those listed in 6.5.4; In addition the following
6.6.10 Reference may also be made to good practice
also apply:
[8-3(5)].
a) Saturation efficiency of the cooler higher
the better; 6.7 Planning
b) Ambient weather design data; 6.7.1 Planning of Equipment Room for Ventilation
c) Permissible temperature rise; and
6.7.1.1 In selecting the location of equipment room,
d) Type of cooling application residential, aspects of efficiency, economy and good practice
industrial, etc. should be considered and wherever possible, it shall
6.6.4 The cooling load control, especially for industrial be made contiguous with the building. This room shall
application shall be carried out in the following manner be located as centrally as possible with respect to the
for effective evaporative cooling: area served and shall be free from obstructing columns.
a) Minimize external heat loads by shading, use Proper location helps achieve satisfactory air
of heat reflective paints, roof insulation and distribution and also results in a less expensive
sealing of gaps. installation.
b) Minimize internal heat loads by shielding, use 6.7.1.2 Equipment room should preferably be located
of reflective paints, insulation and installation adjacent to external wall to facilitate equipment
of exhaust fans over the hot processes and movement and ventilation. It should also close to main
machines. electrical panel of the building, if possible, in order to
c) Make building tight. avoid large cable lengths.
d) Wherever possible, exhaust of used washed 6.7.1.3 Location and dimensions of shafts, for ducting,
air must be directed towards roof to partly cables, pipes, etc (if envisaged), should be planned at
cool the surface and trusses thereby reducing the virtual stages itself if planning. They should be
heat radiation. located adjacent to the equipment or within the room
6.6.5 Two types of water distribution systems may be itself.
provided: Evaporative cooling units (air washers) should be
a) Once through or pump-less type. located preferably on summer-windward side. They
should be painted white or with reflective coating or
b) Recirculating or pump type.
thermally insulated, so as to minimize solar heat
The first type is simpler and cheaper but consumes absorption.
more water, needs constant drainage and has lower
In locating the units, care should be taken to ensure
efficiency depending upon the temperature of water.
that their noise level will not be objectionable to the
The second type has higher cooling efficiency due to
neighbours. Appropriate acoustic treatment should be
recirculate water approaching wet-bulb temperature
considered, if the noise levels cannot be kept down to
conserves water and can operate with intermittent
permissible limits.
drainage. It is recommended to provide periodic bleed-
off or blow down to remove accumulated mineral Exhaust air devices, preferably to leeward and
additions. This helps in reducing scaling of pads also. overhead side may be provided for effective movement
of air.
6.6.6 The air velocity across wetting pad is
recommended between 1.0 and 1.5 m/s. The lower face In the case of large installations it is advisable to have
velocity reduces evaporation as damp air film isolates a separate isolated equipment room if possible.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 35
a) Means for heating during winter months. 7.6 Location
b) Reciprocating or rotary compressor. Unitary air conditioners should be mounted preferably
c) Swing louvers for better distribution of air in at the window sill level on an external wall where hot
the room. air from air-cooled condenser may be discharged
d) In addition to normal, dust filters, indoor air without causing nuisance. There should not be any
quality filters, such as bactericidal enzyme obstruction to the inlet and discharge air of the
filters for killing bacteria, low temperature condenser. Also while deciding location of the window
catalyst filter for removal of unpleasant air conditioners, care should be taken to ensure that
odours, electrostatic filters to trap particles the condensate water dripping does not cause nuisance.
of smoke as well as suspended matters present The opening for the air conditioner is generally made
in the air. a part of windows or wall construction at the planning
e) Digital LCD remote control which also stage.
indicates room temperature.
7.7 Limitations
7.2 Capacity Room air conditioners are not generally recommended
Most of the manufacturers supply unitary air conditions in the following situations:
in capacities of 3 500 W (1 TR), 5 250 W (1.5 TR) and a) The width of the area exceeds 6 m.
7 000 W (2 TR). However, some of them may be able
b) Area requiring close control of temperature
to supply window air conditioners of 1 750 W (0.5 TR)
and relative humidity.
and upto 10 500 W (3 TR) alongwith intermediate
range. The capacity of windows air conditioners is c) Internal zones where no exposed wall is
rated at outside dry bulb temperature of 35C and wet available for the installation of room air
bulb temperature of 30C and they are suitable for conditioners.
230 V, single phase 50 Hz power supply. Nominal d) Sound recording rooms where criteria for
capacity of all the window air conditioners has to be acoustics are stringent.
de-rated due to high ambient temperatures in summer e) Special applications like sterile rooms for
months in most of Indian cities. Also, generally a hospitals and clean room applications where
voltage stabilizer has to be installed to ensure that high filtration efficiency is desired.
window air conditioner gets stabilized rated voltage. f) Operation theatres where 100 percent fresh
air is needed and fire hazard exists depending
7.3 Suitability
on the type of anaethesia being used.
Unitary air conditioners are suitable for bedrooms, g) Where required to comply with the
office cabins, general office area, hotel rooms and recommended fresh air requirement for
similar applications where normal comfort conditions ventilation.
are required upto a distance of 6 m from unitary air
7.8 For detailed information regarding constructional
conditioner.
and performance requirements and methods for
7.4 Power Consumption establishing ratings of room air conditioners, reference
may be made to accepted standard [8-3(6)].
Power consumption of window air conditioners
of 1 TR (3 500 W) rated capacity should not exceed 8 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER
1.55 kW/TR. However, in smaller sizes, the power
8.1 Split air conditioner has an indoor unit and an
consumption may exceed. Rotary compressors
outdoor unit interconnected with refrigerant piping and
normally consume 7 percent to 8 percent less power
power and control wiring. Indoor unit comprises of a
compared to the above value for reciprocating
filter, evaporator and evaporator fan for circulation of
compressors.
air in the conditioned space. Outdoor unit has a
7.5 Noise Level compressor, air-cooled condenser with condenser fan
housed in a suitable cabinet for outdoor installation.
Noise level of window air conditioner inside the Split air conditioner includes primary source of
conditioned room should be as low as possible. refrigeration for cooling and dehumidification and
However it should not exceed 65 dBA for 5 250 W means for circulation and cleaning of air, with or
(1.5 TR) or smaller capacity window air conditioners. without external air distribution ducting.
Air conditioners with rotary compressors will have
lower noise level as compared to those provided with Split air conditioners may be provided with either
reciprocating compressors. reciprocating compressor or scroll compressor. Scroll
Split air conditioner indoor unit is mounted within the 9.1 Packaged air conditioner is a self-contained unit
air conditioned space or above the false ceiling from primarily for floor mounting, designed to provide
where the air distribution duct is taken to the conditioned air to the space to be conditioned. It
conditioned space to distribute the air. When the indoor includes prime source of refrigeration for cooling and
unit is mounted in the false ceiling, inspection panel dehumidification and means for circulation and
must be kept in the false ceiling to attend to the indoor cleaning of air, with or without external air distribution
unit including periodic cleaning of air filter. Outdoor ducting. It may also include means for heating,
humidifying and ventilating air.
unit is mounted at the nearest open area where
unobstructed flow of outside air is available for air The unit comprises a compressor, condenser and
cooled condenser. evaporator, which are interconnected with copper
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 37
refrigerant piping and refrigerant controls. It also taken to the conditioned space. While deciding location
includes fan for circulation of air and filter. The unit is for the packaged unit, provision must be kept for proper
provided with compressor and fan motor starter and servicing of the unit.
factory-wired safety controls.
9.5 Installation
Compressor is a device, which compresses low-
The packaged units are normally mounted on a resilient
pressure low temperature refrigerant gas to high-
pad which prevents vibration of the unit from being
pressure high temperature super heated refrigerant gas.
transmitted to the building.
Compressors may be reciprocating type or scroll type
for packaging unit applications. 9.6 Limitations
Condenser condenses high pressure high temperature Packaged air conditioner are not generally recommended
refrigerant gas to liquid refrigerant at approximately for:
the same temperature and pressure by removal of
a) Large multi-storey buildings where multiplicity
sensible heat of refrigerant by external means of water
of the compressors may entail subsequent
cooling or air cooling.
maintenance problems.
The packaged units are also available with b) Where the length of air distribution ducting
microprocessor-based controller installed in the unit may exceed approx 20 m.
for digital display of faults as also several other c) Where the vertical distance of air-cooled
functions. The packaged unit can also be provided with condenser from the packaged unit exceeds
winter heating package or humidification package. The about 10 m. The sum of horizontal and vertical
packaged unit may be provided with either water- distances should be generally kept within 15 m.
cooled condenser or a remote air cooled condenser with
d) Special applications like sterile rooms for
interconnected copper refrigerant piping. The units are
hospitals and clean room applications where
available with reciprocating compressor as also scroll
high filtration efficiency is desired.
compressor, which consume about 10 to 12 percent
lesser power. In a water-cooled condenser unit, e) Operation theatres where 100 percent fresh
condenser-cooling water is circulated through the air is needed and fire hazard exists depending
cooling tower with necessary piping and pumpsets. on the type of anesthesia being used.
The water cooled condenser packaged unit gives higher 9.7 For detailed information regarding constructional
capacity at lower power consumption as compared to and performance requirements and methods for
an air cooled condenser packaged unit which gets establishing ratings of packaged air conditioners,
considerably de-rated in capacity and also consumes reference may be made to accepted standard [8-3(8)].
more power in peak summer months in most of the
10 HEATING
cities of our country due to high ambient temperature.
10.1 The installations for air conditioning system may
Packaged units are generally available with vertical
be used advantageously for the central heating system
air discharge or horizontal air discharge.
with additions such as hot water or boiler and hot water
9.2 Suitability coils or strip heater banks.
Packaged units are suitable for wide range of 10.2 The heating equipments as described in 10.2.1
applications including offices, clubs and restaurants, and 10.2.2 are generally used.
showrooms and departmental stores, and computer 10.2.1 Hot Water Heated Coils
rooms, etc.
Central heating systems using hot water usually
9.3 Capacity required not more than one or two rows of tubes in the
Normally the packaged air conditioners are manufactured direction of air flow, in order to produce the desired
in sizes of 17 500 W (5 TR), 26 250 W (7.5 TR), heating capacity. To achieve high efficiency without
35 000 W (10 TR) and 52 500 W (15 TR). Packaged excessive water pressure drop through the coil, various
units with scroll compressors are also available in circuit arrangements are used.
capacity up to 58 100 W (16.6 TR). Generally, the resistance to the hot water flow through
the heater should not exceed 4 kPa in low pressure hot
9.4 Location
water heating installations. In high pressure hot water
The packaged unit can be mounted within the air installations, the resistance to the water flow will
conditioned space with discharge air plenum or in a probably be determined by other factors, for example,
separate room from where the air distribution duct is the need to balance circuits.
With all electric air heaters, care should be taken to Services Colour
preclude the risk of fire under abnormal conditions of
Conditioned Air Red and Blue
operation, by the use of a suitably positioned
Ward Air Yellow
temperature sensitive trip of the manual reset type to
Fresh Air Green
cut off the electric supply.
Exhaust/Extract/Recalculated Air Grey
11 SYMBOLS, UNITS, COLOUR CODE AND Foul Air Brown
IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES Dual Duct System Hot Supply Air Red
Cold Supply Air Blue
11.1 Units and symbols to be used in air conditioning,
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 39
Table 7 Scheme of Colour Code of Pipe Work Services for Air Conditioning Installation
(Clause 11.5.1.1)
Sl No. Description Ground Colour Lettering Colouring First Colour Band
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Cooling water Sea green Black French blue
ii) Chilled water Sea green Black Black
iii) Central heating below 60C Sea green Black Canary yellow
iv) Central heating 60C to 100C Sea green Black Dark violet
v) Drain pipe Black White
vi) Vents White Black
vii) Valves and pipe line fittings White with black handles Black
viii) Belt guard Black yellow diagonal strips
ix) Machine bases, inertia bases and plinth Charcoal grey
11.5.3 Valve Labels and Charts determined by the manner in which the building and
Each valve shall be provided with a label indicating its services are used and is measured in units of energy
the service being controlled, together with a reference (Wh/m2). Targets may be established according to
number corresponding with that shown on the Valve varying climatic conditions and varying pattern of
Charts and as fitted drawings. The labels shall be building use.
made from 3 ply (black/white/black) traffolyte 12.3.4 Air Conditioning/Ventilation
material showing white letters and figures on a black
background. Labels shall be tied to each valve with Some of the more important aspects of establishing
chromium plated linked chain. energy conservation requirements for air conditioning
and ventilation system are given below.
12 ENERGY CONSERVATION, ENERGY
MANAGEMENT, AUTOMATIC CONTROLS 12.3.5 The design of the system and its associated
AND BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM controls should take into account the following:
12.1 In the context of this Code, energy conservation a) The nature of the application;
signifies the optimum use of energy to operate the air b) The type of construction of building;
conditioning, heating and ventilation system of a building. c) External and internal load patterns;
12.2 It is axiomatic that general standards of comfort d) The desired space conditions;
or specific environmental requirements within the e) Permissible control limits;
building should not be compromised in an endeavour f) Control methods for minimizing use of
to achieve lower consumption of energy. Similarly primary energy;
nothing in this Code overrides regulations related to g) Opportunities for heat recovery;
health and safety. h) Economic factors (including probable future
12.3 Considerations for Energy Conservation and cost and availability of fuel).
Management j) Opportunity for optimizing electrical installation
and energy conservation by using thermal
12.3.1 Energy Targets
energy storage.
For the purpose of assessing energy conservation
efficiency of one system design against another, or in 12.3.6 The operation of the system for the following
an existing building comparing one period of energy conditions has to be considered when assessing the
use against another, target consumptions may be complete design:
established. a) in summer;
12.3.2 Demand Targets b) in winter;
Energy demand is mainly determined by location of c) in intermediate seasons;
the building, its structure and the equipment installed d) at night;
within it. Demand targets are readily applied to designs e) at weekends; and
for new buildings and are quoted as an average rate f) restoration of power supply after intermittent
of energy use (W/m2 ). failure.
12.3.3 Consumption Targets 12.3.7 Consideration should be given to changes in
The energy actually consumed in a building is building load in the system design so that maximum
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 41
wire or a thin metallic element whose ventilating systems, for example a paddle-
resistance increases with temperature and blade type of air flow switch may be
varies in a known manner. RTDs are interlocked with an electric heater battery
characterised by their high degree of linearity, to prevent battery from operating and
good sensitivity and excellent stability. RTDs overheating in the event of an air flow failure.
are used with electronic controllers. b) Other elements employed from time-to-time
f) Thermocouple element comprises a junction are measuring smoke density, carbon monoxide
between two dissimilar metals that generates (for example in road traffic tunnels or
a small voltage related to the temperature. underground car parks) and carbon dioxide,
and for flame detection.
12.5.2.2 Humidity devices
12.5.2.5 Controllers
a) These devices have a hygroscopic organic
polymer deposited on a water permeable Controlling elements normally regulate the application
substrate. The polymer film absorbs moisture of either electrical or pneumatic energy. Controllers
until it is in balance with the ambient air. This are mainly of three types: thermostat, humidistats and
causes a change in resistance or capacitance. pressure controllers.
b) Resistance elements, as employed in electronic 12.5.2.6 Thermostats
systems, consist usually of two interleaved
grids of gold foil, each connected to a terminal The following types of thermostats are in common use:
and mounted on a thin slab of insulating a) The room type responds to room air temperature
plastic material with a coating of hygroscopic and is designed for mounting on a wall.
salt (lithium chloride) on the block. A
b) The insertion thermostats respond to the
conductive path between adjacent strips of foil
temperature of air in a duct and are designed
is formed, and the high electric resistance of
for mounting on the outside of a duct with its
this circuit changes as the chemical film
measuring element extending into the air
absorbs and releases moisture with changes
stream.
in the relative humidity of surrounding air.
c) The immersion type responds to the temperature
12.5.2.3 Pressure elements of a fluid in a pipe or tank is designed for
a) Low-pressure measuring elements for low mounting on the outside of a pipe or tank
positive pressure or for vacuum conditions, with a fluid-tight connection to allow the
for example, static pressure in an air duct, measuring element to extend into the fluid.
usually comprise a large slack diaphragm, or d) The remote bulb thermostat is used where the
large flexible bellows. In one type of static point of temperature measurement is some
pressure regulator two bells are suspended distance from the desired thermostat location,
from a lever into a tank of oil, so that positive which may often be in central panel. A
pressure under one of the bells moves the bell differential type employing two remote bulbs
and lever up (or down) to complete an electric may be used to maintain a given temperature
circuit. The majority of these elements sense difference between two points.
differential pressure, and when combined e) The surface type is designed for mounting on
with pitot tubes, orifice plates, and venturi a pipe or similar surface and measuring its
meters may be used to measure velocity, flow temperature, or to give an approximate
rate or liquid level. measurement of temperature of the fluid with
b) High-pressure measuring elements, for in the pipe.
pressure or vacuum measurements in the kPa f) The day/night room thermostat is arranged to
range, are usually of bellows, diaphragm or control at a reduce temperature at night, and
Bourdon tube type. If one side of the element may be changed from day to night operation
is left open to atmosphere the element at a remote point by hand or time clock, or
will respond to pressure above or below from a time switch built into the thermostat
atmospheric. itself.
g) The heating/cooling (or summer/winter)
12.5.2.4 Special elements
thermostat can have its action reversed and,
a) Special elements for various measuring or where required, its set points raised or lowered
detecting purposes are often necessary for by remote control. This type of thermostat is
complete control in air conditioning or used to actuate controlled devices, such as
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 43
that an increase in air pressure acts on Remote data collection panels or remote enclosure,
the diaphragm or bellows to move the which act as termination points for the remote ends of
valve stem compress the spring. When the transmission links and for connections to the remote
the air pressure is removed the spring will input and output devices.
return the operator to its normal position.
12.5.2.9.5 Transmission links
12.5.2.9.2 Automatic control dampers
The transmission links provides the means for
Control dampers are designed to control the flow of communication between the central equipment and the
air in a ductwork system in much the same as an remote data collection panel and may be classified
automatic valve operates in a fluid circuit, that is by according to a number of variables, which includes:
varying the resistance to flow. Following are the details
a) Medium (wires or cables, telephone lines,
of various damper valves and damper operators:
micro wave);
a) Damper valves b) Transmission mode (one direction only, one
1) The single blade damper is generally direction at a time, etc);
restricted to small sizes since it does not c) Data sequence (series, for 2-wire, parallel for
provide accurate control. When fitted in multi-conductor etc);
circular ductwork it may be referred to
d) Wire or cable types;
as a butterfly damper.
e) Signal types; and
2) A multi-leaf damper is two or more
f) Message format.
blades linked together, which may be:
i) A parallel action multi-leaf damper, Other considerations include the physical arrangement
having its blades linked so that when of the transmission system, security and supervisory
operated they all rotate in the same aspect.
direction. 12.5.2.9.6 Central equipment
ii) An opposed action multi-leaf damper,
having adjacent blades linked to This may comprise:
rotate in opposite directions when a) An interface, which provides a connection
operated. point and the signal conversion between the
b) Damper operators central processor and transmission links.
These may be electric motors of the b) The central processor, which is the collection
unidirectional, spring return or reversible type of equipment at the central control room
fitted with suitable linkage mechanisms, or containing the logic for management of the
may be pneumatic actuators of a type centralized control and monitoring system;
designed for damper operation. the processor has the means to receive,
transmit and present information, with the
12.5.2.9.3 Centralized control/monitoring equipment
ability to process all data in an orderly
The centralized control system, which is shown fashion, and may or may not include a
diagrammatically in Fig.1, comprises three main parts: computer.
the remote location equipment, the transmission links, c) Peripheral devices such as typewriters,
and the central equipment. printers, displays (digital type, projectors, or
12.5.2.9.4 Remote location equipment cathode ray tubes, etc).
This includes: 12.5.3 Selection Factors
a) Input devices or sensors, which measure the 12.5.3.1 Common factors
condition of a variable;
There are a number of factors to be considered in the
b) Signal conditioning devices, which convert selection of almost all control system components.
the sensor signal to a type compatible with These common factors include:
the requirements of the remote panel,
transmission system, or the central equipment; a) Supply and working electricity voltage, phase,
frequency and number of wires;
c) Output devices, which provide a means for
converting a command instruction, appearing b) Maximum and/or minimum temperatures,
at the remote panel, into a signal suitable for humidities or pressures to which components
performing an operational function on may be subjected;
external equipment; and c) Restrictions or location, mounting positions,
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 45
etc, or possible problems due to duct, approved standards, unless otherwise stated. Approval
vibration etc; at the time of inspection shall not be construed as
d) Dimensions and mass; acceptance unless the equipment proves satisfactory
e) Finish and type of enclosure; and in service after erection.
f) Required accessories or fittings. High pressure air duct system should also be tested in
NOTE These common factors, should only be used accordance with the procedures.
as a general guide, and control manufacturers should
be consulted in establishing exact requirements. 13.2.1 Inspection and Testing at Works
12.5.4 Sensing/Measuring Elements The air conditioning system will consist of various
items of equipment produced by various manufacturers.
Sensing and measuring elements frequently form an Each manufacturer should give facilities for the
integral part of a controller and the selection factors to inspection of his equipment during manufacturing and
be considered for this arrangement may be as given on completion, as specified.
in 12.5.3.1. However, a sensor may be designed and
arranged for operation with a remote controller and 13.2.2 Inspection and Testing on Site
other components, in that case some of the more Prior to commissioning, testing, adjusting and
important selection factors for temperature elements, balancing, preliminary checks and charging of the
for example, may be as follows: complete system should be carried out. It is important
a) Control operations, for example reverse or that all water systems should have been thoroughly
direct-acting; flushed through and hydraulically pressure tested to
1.5 times the working pressure for a period of not less
b) Sensing range, adjustable or non-adjustable;
than 8 h.
c) Provision for air filter;
d) Pressure output; 13.3 Commissioning, Testing, Adjusting and
e) Provision for branch pressure indication; Balancing
f) Application, for example room, duct or 13.3.1 Basic Considerations
immersion in pipeline;
13.3.1.1 The basic considerations are:
g) Application, for example room, duct immersion
in pipeline; a) to test to determine quantitative performance
h) Electronic; of equipment;
j) Function, for example for primary or secondary b) to adjust to regulate for specified fluid flow
control; rates and air patterns at terminal equipment
(for example reduce fan speed, throttling etc);
k) Temperature range;
and
m) Authority range of throttling range adjustment;
c) to balance to proportion within distribution
n) Nominal resistance and sensitivity; and system (sub mains, branches and terminals)
p) Provision for temperature indication. in accordance with design quantities.
13 INSPECTION, COMMISSIONING AND 13.3.1.2 The objective of testing, adjusting and
TESTING balancing of air conditioning, heating and mechanical
ventilation system shall be to:
13.1 Inspection, commissioning and testing should be
carried out meticulously if a satisfactory installation is a) verify design conformity;
to be handed over to the client. It should be ensured b) establish fluid flow rates, volume and
that these are carried out thoroughly and all results are operating pressures;
properly documented. It is recommended that the c) test all associated electrical panels and
whole commissioning procedure should be under the electrical installation for earthing continuity
guidance and control of a single authority, to be and earth resistance;
identified by the client.
d) take electrical power readings for each
13.2 Inspection and Testing motor;
All equipment and components supplied may be e) establish operating sound and vibration
subjected to inspection and tests during manufacture, levels;
erection/installation and after completion. No f) adjust and balance to design parameters; and
tolerances at the time of inspection shall be allowed g) record and report results as per the specified
other than those specified or permitted in the relevant formats.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 47
simplified line flow and balance diagrams for e) Schedules of mechanical equipment;
the complete installation; f) Test results and test certificates as called for
b) As-built installation drawings; under the contract including any insurance or
c) Operation and maintenance instructions statutory inspection authority certificate;
for equipment, manufacturers service g) Copies of guarantee certificates for plant and
maintenance manuals, manufacturers spare equipment; and
parts list and spares ordering instructions; h) List of keys, tools and spare parts that are
d) Schedules of electrical equipment; handed over.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards
(4) 3103 : 1975 Code of practice for industrial
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The
ventilation (first revision)
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may (5) 3315 : 1994 Specification for evaporative
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance air coolers (desert coolers)
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code. (second revision)
(6) 1391 Specification for room air
In the following list, the number appearing in the first
conditioners:
column within parentheses indicates the number of the
reference in this Part/Section. (Part 1) : 1992 Unitary air conditioners
(second revision)
IS No. Title
(7) (Part 2) : 1992 Split air conditioners (second
(1) 655 : 1963 Specification for metal air
revision)
ducts (revised)
(2) 277 : 2003 Specification for galvanized (8) 8148 : 2003 Specification for packaged air
steel sheet (plain and conditioners (first revision)
corrugated) (sixth revision) (9) 4831 : 1968 Recommendation on units and
(3) 737 : 1986 Specification for wrought symbols for refrigeration
aluminium alloy sheet and (10) 5 : 1994 Specification for colours for
strip for general engineering ready mixed paints and
purpose (third revision) enamels (fourth revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST OUTDOOR NOISE 8
4 PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST INDOOR NOISE 11
5 RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS 11
6 EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS 13
7 HOSPITAL BUILDINGS 16
8 OFFICE BUILDINGS 18
9 HOTELS AND HOSTELS 20
10 INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 21
11 LABORATORIES AND TEST HOUSES 25
12 MISCELLANEOUS BUILDINGS 26
LIST OF STANDARDS 43
FOREWORD
This Section covers the acoustical, sound insulation and noise control requirements in buildings. Emphasis is
laid on planning of buildings vis-a-vis its surroundings to reduce noise and in addition sound insulation aspects
of different occupancies are covered for achieving acceptable noise levels.
This Section was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983. In the last revision mainly the
following changes were made:
a) The approximate measured noise levels due to various types of traffic (air, rail and road) were given;
and planning and design features of buildings against outdoor noise were elaborated;
b) Impact sound insulation in residential buildings was modified to grade system of impact sound insulation;
c) Recommendations regarding planning of open plan schools against noise were given;
d) Planning of office buildings with light weight partitions was specified;
e) Planning and design aspects of hotels and hostels, laboratories and test houses, and other miscellaneous
buildings, such as, law courts and councils chambers, libraries, museums and art galleries, auditoria and
theatres had been given;
f) Hearing damage risk criteria in industrial buildings were modified based on permissible exposure limits
for a steady state noise level; and
g) The public address system was elaborated to cover public address system at passenger terminals.
In this revision, the following important changes have been made:
a) Large number of important definitions have been added in line with the present international practice of
usage of terms in the field of acoustics, sound insulation and noise control.
b) Under Planning and Design against Outdoor Noise, a new clause on Highway Noise Barrier has been
included.
c) The clause on public address system has been deleted.
d) A new clause on cinema has been added.
e) Existing Appendix A Constructional Measures for Sound Insulation of Buildings and Appendix B
Sound Insulation Values for Various Types of Materials and Construction have been deleted and the
following new informative annexes have been added:
1) Annex A Noise Calculations
2) Annex B Specification of Sound Insulation
3) Annex C Noise Rating
4) Annex D Outdoor Noise Regulations in India
5) Annex E Special Problems Requiring Expert Advice
6) Annex F Airborne and Impact Sound Insulation
7) Annex G Basic Design Techniques for Noise Control in Air Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical
Ventilation System
8) Annex H Suggested Equipment Noise Data Sheet
There are two types of noises, that is, air-borne and structure-borne noise. To reduce the intensity of air-borne
noise, sound absorbent materials may be used.
An absorbent material is one which reduces the intensity of sound reflected from its surface. It may be applied to
walls, floors, ceilings or used as furnishings to reduce the sound level by absorption. However, the materials
selected for sound absorption shall be consistent with fire safety requirements of the buildings.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 3
To reduce the transmission of air-borne noise, sound insulating materials may be used. Sound insulating materials
block the passage of noise through them by virtue of their mass and physical properties. The extent of noise
reduction provided by a single homogeneous panel is proportional to the logarithm of mass per unit area. For
high values of sound insulation, normally heavy panels are required. Thin sheets of materials do not have adequate
mass for providing any appreciable sound transmission loss by themselves. However, when thin sheet materials
are used in a double panel construction with an intervening air cavity, this special construction can give extremely
high sound transmission loss values considering the mass of the partition, if designed properly. Porous materials
lack the mass required to provide any appreciable sound transmission loss, and readily allow sound at most
frequencies to be transmitted through them.
To reduce the transmission of structure-borne noise (such as, noise generated by impacts) special construction
methods and elastic discontinuity in the structure may be used. Structure-borne noise reduction is effected by
corner joints, changes in cross-section, changes in materials, etc, in construction. The reduction by these
construction methods is, however, not appreciable specially when a large amount of noise reduction is required
over a short distance. In such cases, introduction of an elastic discontinuity in the structure can result in a very
large amount of noise reduction. The noise transmission is affected only above a certain lower frequency which
depends on the material thickness and the elastic properties of the material. Bonded fibrous materials, rubber
elastomers, cork, etc, are suitable for curtailing structure-borne noise transmission.
This Section is largely based on the following standards:
IS 1950 : 1962 Code of practice for sound insulation of non-industrial buildings
IS 3483 : 1965 Code of practice for noise reduction in industrial buildings
IS 4954 : 1968 Recommendations for noise abatement in town planning
IS 11050 Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements:
(Part 1) : 1984 Airborne sound insulation in buildings and of interior building elements
(Part 2) : 1984 Impact sound insulation
BS 8233 : 1999 Code of practice for sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings
In this revision, opportunity has been taken to update all references to relevant Indian Standards referred to in the
text.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 5
2.15 Free-Field Level Sound pressure level NOTE Normalized impact sound pressure level is usually
used to characterize the insulation of a floor in a laboratory
measured outside, far away from reflecting surfaces.
against impact sound in a stated frequency band (see Annex B).
NOTE Measurements made 1.2 m to 1.5 m above the ground
and at least 3.5 m away from other reflecting surfaces are usually 2.25 Octave Band Band of frequencies in which
regarded as being free-field measurements. To minimize the the upper limit of the band is twice the frequency of
effect of reflections the measuring position should be at least the lower limit.
3.5 m to the side of the reflecting surface (that is, not 3.5 m
from the reflecting surface in the direction of the source). 2.26 Percentile Level, LAN,T A-weighted sound
Estimates of noise from aircraft overhead usually include a pressure level obtained using time-weighting F,
correction of 2 dB to allow for reflections from the ground.
which is exceeded for N percent of a specified time
2.16 Frequency The number of cyclical variations interval.
per unit time. Frequency is generally expressed in
Example:
cycles per second (cps) and is also denoted as Hertz
(Hz). LA90,1h is the A-weighted level exceeded for 90
percent of 1 h. Percentile levels determined over
2.17 Impact Sound Pressure Level, Li Average
a certain time interval cannot accurately be
sound pressure level in a specific frequency band in a
extrapolated to other time intervals. Time-
room below a floor, when it is excited by a standard
weighting F or S can be selected on most
tapping machine.
modern measuring instruments and used to
2.18 Indoor Ambient Noise Pervasive noise in a determine the speed at which the instrument
given situation at a given time, usually composed of responds to changes in the amplitude of the signal.
noise from many sources, inside and outside the Time-weighting F is faster than S and so its
building, but excluding noise from activities of the use can lead to higher values when rapidly
occupants. changing signals are measured.
2.19 Insertion Loss (LIL ) 2.27 Pink Noise Sound with an uninterrupted
frequency spectrum and a power which is steady
Insertion loss is generally defined as the difference, in
within frequency band and proportional to centre
decibels, between two sound pressure levels (or power
frequency. An example is constant power level per
levels or intensity levels) which are measured at the
octave band.
same point in space before and after a muffler or any
other noise control device is inserted between the 2.28 Pure Tone A sound emitted at a single
measurement point and the noise source. frequency.
2.20 Noise Unwanted sound which may be 2.29 Rating Level, LAr ,Tr Equivalent continuous
hazardous to health, intrerferes with communications A-weighted sound pressure level of the noise, plus any
or is disturbing. adjustment for the characteristic features of the noise.
2.21 Noise Exposure Forecast (NEF) The noise NOTE This definition is used for rating industrial noise,
where the noise is the specific noise from the source under
exposure forecast at any location is the summation of
investigation.
the noise levels in EPN dB from all aircraft types, on
all runways, suitably weighted for the number of 2.30 Reverberation Time, T Time that would be
operations during day time and night time. required for the sound pressure level to decrease by
60 dB after the sound source has stopped.
2.22 Noise Rating (NR) Graphical method for
rating a noise by comparing the noise spectrum with a NOTE Reverberation time is usually measured in octave or
third octave bands. It is not necessary to measure the decay over
family of noise rating curves. the full 60 dB range. The decay measured over the range 5 dB
NOTE Noise rating is described in Annex C. to 35 dB below the initial level is denoted by T30 , and over the
range 5 dB to 25 dB below the initial level by T20.
2.23 Noise Reduction Co-efficient (NRC)
2.31 Sound A vibrational disturbance, exciting
A single figure descriptor of the sound absorption hearing mechanisms, transmitted in a predictable
property of a material. It is the arithmetic mean of the manner determined by the medium through which it
sound absorption co-efficients at 250, 500, 1 000 propagates. To be audible the disturbance shall have
and 2 000 Hz rounded off to the nearest multiple to fall within the frequency range of 20 Hz to
of 0.05. 20 000 Hz.
2.24 Normalized Impact Sound Pressure Level, Ln 2.32 Sound Exposure Level, LAE Level of a sound,
Impact sound pressure level normalized for a of 1 s duration, that has the same sound energy as the
standard absorption area in the receiving room. actual noise event considered.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 7
2.50 Weighted Level Difference, Dw Single- survey should examine all the possible causes of noise
number quantity that characterizes airborne sound and consider the various factors causing actual nuisance.
insulation between rooms but which is not adjusted to
3.1.2 Noise by night, causing disturbance of sleep, is
reference conditions.
more of nuisance than noise by day. For this reason,
NOTE Weighted level difference is used to characterize the housing colonies that adjoin areas with heavy traffic
insulation between rooms in a building as they are; values cannot
movement during the night are liable to cause serious
normally be compared with measurements made under other
conditions {see good practice [8-4(1)]}. complaints. Also, the factories that work by night are
liable to cause serious complaints if housing estates
2.51 Weighted Sound Reduction Index, Rw Single adjoin them. While planning, care should be taken that
number quantity which characterizes the airborne housing colonies are adequately setback from busy
sound insulating properties of a material or building airports, state and national highways, factories, main
element over a range of frequencies. railway lines and marshalling yards.
NOTE The weighted sound reduction index is used to
characterize the insulation of a material or product that has been
3.1.3 There are two aspects of defence by planning. The
measured in a laboratory (see Annex B). first is to plan so as to keep the noise at a distance. Under
this aspect comes the separation of housing from traffic
2.52 Weighted Standardized Impact Sound Pressure noise by interposing buffer zones, and the protection of
Level, L nT, w Single number quantity used to schools and hospitals by green belts, public gardens,
characterize the impact sound insulation of floors over etc. The second is the principle of shading or screening.
a range of frequencies. This consists of deliberately interposing a less vulnerable
NOTE Weighted standardized impact sound pressure level building to screen a more vulnerable one or by providing
is used to characterize the insulation of floors in buildings (see a solid barrier, such as a wall, between the source and
Annex B).
the location to be protected.
2.53 Weighted Standardized Level Difference,
Dn,Tw Single-number quantity, which characterizes 3.2 Traffic Noise Levels
the airborne sound insulation between rooms 3.2.1 For Air Traffic
NOTE Weighted standardized level difference is used to For guidance, approximate noise levels due to various
characterize the insulation between rooms in a building (see
Annex B). types of aircrafts, measured on ground, when the
aircrafts fly overhead at a height of 450 m, are given
2.54 Weighted Normalized Impact Sound Pressure in Table 1.
Level, L n.w Single number quantity used to
characterize the impact sound insulation of floors over Table 1 Typical Noise Levels of Some
a range of frequencies. Aircarft Types
NOTE Weighted normalized impact sound pressure level is (Clause 3.2.1)
usually used to characterize the insulation of floors tested in a
laboratory (see Annex B). Sl Type of Aircraft Flyover Noise Levels at 450 m
No. with Take-off Thrust (EPN dB)
2.55 White Noise A noise whose spectrum (level) (1) (2) (3)
density is substantially independent of frequency over i) Boeing 737 107
a specified range and has equal power for any range ii) Boeing 747-200 103
of frequencies of constant band width. iii) Airbus A 300 101
iv) Concorde SST 114
3 PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST
OUTDOOR NOISE 3.2.2 For Rail Traffic
3.1 General Noise levels of some typical railway traffic are given
in Table 2.
Planning against noise should be an integral part of
town and country planning proposals, ranging from Table 2 Typical Noise Levels of Railway Trains
regional proposals to detailed zoning, and three- (Clause 3.2.2)
dimensional layouts and road design within built-up
areas. Noise nuisance should be fully recognized in Sl Type of Train Noise Level at 30 m, Measured
No. on the Side or in the Direction
zoning regulations. of Train, dB (A)
3.1.1 Noise is either generated by traffic (road, rail and (1) (2) (3)
underground railway) or it arises from zones and i) Steam train, 60 km/h 85
buildings within built-up areas (industry, commerce, ii) Diesel train, 60 km/h 83
iii) Electric train, 60 km/h 77
offices and public buildings). For planning, the noise
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 9
3.4.2.1 Wherever possible, no residential or public lights, near bus stops, on steep slopes and in parking
building zone should abut onto railway lines, especially spaces and enclosed yards.
on the marshalling yards which is particularly
3.4.3.3 For zoning and planning new buildings in
objectionable because of the shrill, clanging and
urban areas it is recommended that external LA10 is
intermittent noise they generate, often at night. The
limited to a maximum of 70 dB(A) when the dwellings
appropriate zones along side railway lines are industrial
are proposed to have sealed windows and 60 dB(A)
and commercial buildings other than office buildings.
when the dwellings are proposed to have open
Where these precautions are not practicable and
windows. Indeed it is desirable to confine major new
housing has to abut on to railway lines, every attempt
residential development to locations subject to LA10
may be made to house as few people as possible in the
levels substantially lower than those given above.
vicinity of the railway lines.
It is recognized, however, that within the large urban
3.4.2.2 Underground transportation system can be a
areas, the use of sites where the external LA10 is greater
major cause of disturbance for the neighbouring
than 60-70 dB(A) can not always be avoided. In that
community. Very high noise levels are propagated to
case it is suggested to utilize such design solutions as
long distances by the underground high speed railway,
barrier blocks in order to reduce external LA10 noise
as a result of wheel rail interaction. Both air-borne noise
levels to at least 60-70 dB(A) at any point 1.0 m from
and ground or structure-borne vibration are potential
any inward looking faade. When the orientation of
sources of complaints. Noise control measures,
site and the density of development are such that this
therefore, need to be considered for the following:
cannot be fully achieved some form of dwelling
a) In stations, where high noise levels are insulation will have to be provided. It should be
produced at the arrival and departure of appreciated that where open windows are a must, the
trains; occupants would have to put up with discomfort if the
b) In tunnels, during high speed train movement; above conditions are not met.
c) Where an underground rail transit system 3.4.3.4 Certain other methods can often be utilized to
passes close to existing structures or high rise provide economical and effective protection from noise:
buildings adequate attention should also be
paid to the problem of ground vibration a) Methods may be adopted to improve the
transmitted to the building, and proper smoothness of flow and reduce number of
isolation should be provided for critical areas; stopping and starting. This leads to an
improvement even if it leads to increased
d) Wherever elevated railway tracks are provided,
flows. Flow linking of traffic lights, for
adequate measures should be taken to avoid
example, may reduce noise nuisance.
the spread of noise in the surrounding built
up areas; and b) Use of roads passing through residential areas
may be prohibited to heavy commercial
e) In transit cars, where sound insulation is of
vehicles. An alternative would be to limit use
vital importance to provide comfortable
by commercial vehicles to certain times of
conditions for the commuters.
the day.
3.4.3 Road Traffic c) Use of honking may be prohibited near
3.4.3.1 Convoys of long distance heavy trucks at night sensitive buildings, such as hospitals and the
moving past through built-up areas cause serious noise like.
complaints. On busy roads, the noise of continuous d) Barriers may be provided to shield sites from
traffic may be a worse nuisance than that of railways. noise.
At least the same precautions may, therefore, be taken
3.5 Zoning
in the planning of dwellings in relation to arterial and
trunk roads as with railways. Care may be taken that The zoning of the different cities shall be done by the
local housing roads do not provide short cuts for heavy town planning authorities, taking into account besides
traffic through residential areas. Hilly roads present other aspects, the noise levels from different
the additional noise of gear changing. Trees with heavy occupancies. Wherever necessary, experts in the field
foliage planted on both sides of carriageway help may be consulted. For detailed information on noise
slightly to muffle the noise, provided the foliage reduction for town planning schemes, reference may
extends for a considerable distance (30 m or above). be made to good practice [8-4(2)].
3.4.3.2 Road traffic may give rise to serious nuisance
3.6 Green Belts and Landscaping
particularly on busy thorough fares, between
continuous high buildings in main streets, at the traffic Where relief from noise is to be provided by means of
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 11
blaring loud-speakers and various types of moving 5.2.2 Internal Planning
machinery in the neighbourhood and building
The orientation of buildings in a locality should be
operations.
planned in such a way as to reduce the noise
5.1.2 Indoor Noise disturbance from neighbourhood areas. The non-
critical areas, such as corridors, kitchens, bathrooms,
5.1.2.1 As far as indoor noises are concerned,
elevators and service spaces may be located on the
conversation of the occupants, footsteps, banging of
noisy side and the critical areas, such as bedrooms and
doors, shifting of the furniture, operation of the cistern
living space, on the quiet side.
and water closet, playing of radio, television, music
system, cooling and ventilation machinery, etc, 5.2.2.1 Windows and doors
contribute most of the noise emanating from an
Windows and doors should be kept away from the
adjacent room or an adjacent building. Noise
noisy side of the building as given below, wherever
conditions vary from time-to-time and noise which may
possible:
not be objectionable during the day may assume
annoying proportions in the silence of the night when a) When windows of a building, particularly
quiet conditions are essential. those of bedrooms in apartments or flats, face
roads carrying heavy traffic or other noises
5.1.2.2 In the case of flats the main sources of noise
where the external noise is of the order of 80
are from other flats and from stairs, lifts and access
to 90 dB(A), the building should be located
balconies. Plumbing noise is another cause. In semi-
at a distance of about 30 m from the road, but
detached buildings, outdoor noises from streets are
a distance of 45 m or more, where possible,
noticed more than indoor noises from neighbours.
should be aimed at for greater relief from
5.2 Recommendations noise;
b) When the windows are at right angles to the
5.2.1 Site Planning
direction of the above type of noise, the
The most desirable method is to locate the residential distance from the road should be arranged to
buildings in a quiet area away from the noisy sources be about 15 to 25 m; and
like the industrial areas, rail tracks, aerodromes, roads c) In case another building, boundary wall or
carrying heavy traffic, etc. trees and plantations intervene between the
road traffic and the house/flat further noise
5.2.1.1 To minimize ground reflection, the dwellings
reduction is achieved and in such cases the
should be surrounded by the maximum amount of
above distances may be reduced suitably.
planting and grassed areas and the minimum amount
of hard surfacing. This applies particularly to high 5.2.2.2 Layout plans
density areas. Where for maintenance reasons a large
It is desirable that rooms adjoining party walls and
amount of hard paving is necessary, it should be broken
above/below party floors should be of similar use. By
up by areas of planting and grassing. Narrow hard
this means, bedrooms are not exposed to noise from
paved courts should be avoided between adjacent tall
adjoining living rooms, and there is less risk of
buildings.
disturbance of sleep.
5.2.1.2 Roads within a residential area should be kept
In semi-detached houses, the staircase, hall and kitchen
to a minimum both in width and length, and should be
should adjoin each other on each side of the party wall,
designed to discourage speeding. Area-wise planning,
thus providing a sound baffle between rooms requiring
with zones from which vehicular traffic is altogether
quiet conditions.
excluded will greatly help to reduce noise. Roads with
through traffic should be excluded from residential Bedrooms should not be planned alongside access
areas, but where sites have to be developed adjacent balconies, and preferably not underneath them. Where
to existing major roads the same principles should be the approach is by an internal corridor, a sound baffle
observed in the siting of blocks as with railway lines may usefully be provided by arranging internal
as covered under 3.4.2.1. passages and bathrooms between the corridor and the
living room or bedrooms.
5.2.1.3 Play areas for older children should be sited
as far away from dwellings as possible. Special care Water-closets should not be planned over living rooms
should be taken with old peoples dwellings. They and bedrooms, whether within the same dwelling or over
should not be placed immediately adjacent to service other dwellings. Soil pipes should not be carried in ducts
entries, play spaces, or to any entrances where children which adjoin living rooms or bedrooms unless the side
may tend to congregate. of the duct next to these rooms is a solid wall containing
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 13
which produce continuous or intermittent e) Open planning and circulation areas
sound of considerable loudness; Where open planning is used to permit
f) Practical work carried out in general teaching spaces, such as assembly halls, dining rooms
areas; or entrance halls to be used in association
g) Gymnasia and swimming pools; with each other or for circulation, the degree
of disturbance caused by interfering noise
h) School kitchens and dining spaces where food
to teaching areas needs careful consideration;
preparation and the handling of crockery and
traffic through such areas should be strictly
utensils persist for the greater part of the
controlled; full use should be made of
school day;
sound absorbent treatments to reduce the
j) Corridors and other circulation spaces; and spread of noise from one space to another
k) Plumbing and mechanical services. (see 6.2.3).
6.2 Recommendations If rooms have large glazed panels or ventilation
openings facing directly on the circulation
6.2.1 Site Planning areas, human traffic passing by the rooms
Where outdoor noise nuisance exists from local should be controlled. Preferably baffled
industry, busy roads, railway, airfields, sport grounds ventilation system or double windows should
or other sources beyond the control of the school be used. (Fan-lights over doors should be
authority, school buildings should be sited as far as fixed and glazed).
possible from the sources of noise. f) Furniture In all educational buildings,
regardless of the character of the floor finish,
6.2.1.1 Rooms should be planned in a manner so that
rubber buffers should be fitted to the legs of
the minimum amount of glazing is placed on the side
chairs and tables.
facing the external noise.
6.2.1.2 Noises arising from the activities of a school 6.2.3 Noise Reduction within Rooms
and from the use of the buildings after school hours Sound absorbent materials play a useful part in
may constitute a nuisance to occupants of surrounding reducing the built-up or air-borne noise at source. In
property; therefore, it is desirable to place playgrounds, rooms, such as, classrooms, assembly halls and music
workshops, swimming pools, music rooms, assembly rooms, a fairly short reverberation time under occupied
halls and gymnasia as far away as possible from conditions is one of the requirements of the acoustic
buildings which require a quiet environment. design. The maximum reverberation times permissible
6.2.2 Internal Planning for this purpose are usually short enough to give
adequate noise control but in addition, the reverberation
The following principles should be observed in the time should not be excessive under empty conditions,
detailed planning of educational buildings: because noise may occur in these rooms with very few
a) Grouping Noisy rooms should be separated occupants. Table 6 gives the reverberation times often
from quiet ones, if possible. In general, it is arranged in occupied rooms for acoustic reasons and
desirable that rooms should be grouped the maximum times recommended in the empty rooms
together in accordance with the classification for noise reduction; the times given are for a frequency
given in 6.2.4.1. of 500 Hz, but they should not be greatly exceeded at
b) Windows and ventilators Windows of noisy any frequency. When rooms are used for a variety of
and quiet rooms should not open on to the purposes, the reverberation period appropriate to the
same courtyard or be near to one another. major use should be adopted.
Roof lights and ventilators over noisy rooms 6.2.3.1 Special attention should be given to noise
should be avoided, if they are likely to be a reduction in schools for the deaf and schools for the
source of nuisance to adjacent upper floors. blind. Deaf children are taught by means of hearing
c) Doors Swing doors into rooms should aids which cannot be used satisfactorily in high noise
only be used where no problem of sound levels or in reverberant conditions. Blind children
transmission exists. Reduction of insulation depend on good hearing for understanding speech and
between rooms and corridors due to doors for detecting changes in environment. In both these
must be borne in mind. The type and method types of schools, noise levels should be kept low and
of fitting of doors is important and necessary reverberation times short. As an example, the
care shall be paid in this respect. reverberation times in empty class-rooms should
d) Sliding partitions should only be used where not exceed one second in schools for the blind or
essential. 0.5 second in schools for the deaf.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 15
immediately above the teaching rooms shall provide 2) Sterilizing equipment;
an impact sound pressure level, Ln, Tw not greater than 3) Sluice room equipment including bedpan
70 dB. For example, a covering of 6 mm linoleum or washers;
cork tiles on concrete floor (hollow or solid) weighing 4) Ward kitchen equipment;
not less than 220 kg/m2 will usually meet the above
5) Footsteps;
requirement.
6) Doors banging;
7 HOSPITAL BUILDINGS 7) The handling of metal or glass equipment;
7.1 General 8) Noises caused during maintenance and
overhaul of engineering services; and
Problems of noise control vary from hospital to hospital
9) Vacuum cleaners, mechanical polishers,
but the principles outlined below apply to all types. A
etc.
quiet environment in hospitals is desirable for patients
b) Loudspeaker, radio or television, audible call
who are acutely ill. Staff require quiet conditions for
system, telephone bells and buzzers, and other
consultations and examinations and also in their living
air-borne noises, such as loud conversation;
and sleeping quarters. There have been rapid rises in
and
noise levels in hospitals due to the higher levels of
outdoor noise, increasing use of mechanical and mobile c) Noises from fixed or mobile equipment and
equipment (some of which is now brought much nearer services not directly concerned with hospital
to the patient in order to facilitate nursing procedure) routines. These include all the fixed services
and the introduction of loudspeaker, radio, television as given below:
and call systems. Noise control in the hospital is made 1) Plumbing and sanitary fittings;
much more difficult by the extensive use of hard 2) Steam hot and cold water and central
washable surfaces which reflect and intensify the noise. heating pipes;
In most hospitals, windows to the open air and fanlights 3) Ventilation shafts and ducts;
to corridors are usually open for the purpose of
4) Fans
ventilation, admitting noise from outside and allowing
5) Boilers;
it to spread through the building.
6) Pumps;
7.2 Sources of Noise Nuisance 7) Air compressors;
7.2.1 Outdoor Noise 8) Pneumatic tubes;
9) Electrical and mechanical motors and
This may be classified into two main categories:
equipment;
a) Noise from sources outside the hospital 10) Lifts;
premises, for example, traffic and industrial 11) Laundry equipment; and
noises; and
12) Main kitchen equipment (refrigerators,
b) Noise from sources outside the building but mixers, steam boilers, etc).
usually within the control of the hospital
authority, for example, ambulances, motor-cars 7.3 Recommendations
and service vehicles, fuel and stores deliveries, 7.3.1 Site Planning
laundries, refuse collection, trucks and trolleys.
Hospital sites with their high degree of sensitivity to
7.2.2 Indoor Noise outside noise should be as far away from outside
A hospital is a complex building with many services sources as may be compatible with other considerations,
and the numerous internal sources of structure-borne such as accessibility and availability of services. The
and air-borne noises are grouped into three main building should be so arranged on the site that sensitive
categories: areas like wards, consulting and treatment rooms,
operating theatres and staff bedrooms are placed away
a) Noise consequent upon hospital routines. This from outdoor sources of noise, if possible, with their
category includes sources which transmit windows overlooking areas of acoustic shadow.
noise through both structure-borne and air-
borne paths, many of which may be quite near 7.3.2 Detailed Planning
to patients particularly those in wards, such There is a very large number of unit and room
as the following: classification in hospital design and in planning the
1) Wheeled trolleys of various kinds, for units in relation to each other and to the common
food and medical supplies; services (such as X-ray departments, operating theatre
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 17
with a perforated sheet metal facing can be used in the problems cannot be resolved by planning, the
most areas requiring a washable acoustical treatment. provision of double windows may be necessary.
In noisy areas, such as corridors and waiting rooms,
8.3.2 Detailed Planning
however, a wider choice of absorbents is available.
8.3.2.1 Noise reduction within rooms
In the ward, bed curtains, window curtain etc, add
to the absorbent properties of the room and help The reverberation time should not exceed 1.0 s in all
reduce reverberation in otherwise hard surfaced general offices of the types listed in 8.3.2.2 to 8.3.2.6.
surroundings. In small private offices, the reverberation time should
not exceed 0.75 second, in very large offices the
7.3.5 Sensitive areas such as operation theatres,
reverberation time may be increased to 1.25 s. For
Doctors consultation rooms, intensive care units (ICU)
canteens, the recommended maximum reverberation
require special consideration against noise control.
time is 1.25 s.
Apart from outdoor noise, a common problem is the
transmission of sound between the consulting room 8.3.2.2 Large general offices
and the waiting room. To ensure silence, a sound The grouping of departments and machines together
isolation Dw of 45 dB (A), between the rooms shall be in one room should be avoided wherever possible.
provided. If the doors are directly connected by a single Where supervision is necessary the provision of glazed
communicating door it will not be possible to achieve screens carried up to the ceiling should be considered.
these values of isolation Dw. To obtain 40-45 dB(A) If it is essential to the work of an office for machine
insulation between communicating rooms, it is operators and clerks to work side by side in the same
necessary to provide two doors separated by an air gap, room, the machines should be enclosed by panels or
such as a lobby or corridor. low screens lined with absorbent material and the
ceiling should be sound absorbent. In addition, the
8 OFFICE BUILDINGS
machines should be as quiet as possible in operation
8.1 General and mounted on suitable resilient mountings.
Modern office buildings are often noisier than older NOTE A quiet area should be planned for prolonged
buildings due to the use of thinner and more rigid forms telephonic conversation.
of construction, harder finishes, more austere 8.3.2.3 Light weight construction
furnishings and use of business machines.
Modern construction methods and economy dictate the
8.2 Sources of Noise Nuisance use of light weight construction for many office
buildings. While the light weight materials lead to fast
8.2.1 Indoor Noise fabrication and erection and also effect considerable
Main sources of indoor noise include the following: economy in the building structure, they may lead to
tremendous sound insulation problems between
a) Office machines, such as typewriters, and adjacent offices and areas. Light weight construction
printers; is also frequently employed for the sub-division of
b) Telephonic conversation; large space into executive cabins and secretarial areas.
c) Noise from the public admitted to the building; Where such construction is considered desirable,
d) Footsteps, voices and slamming of doors in efforts should be made to provide a double-skin panel.
circulation spaces, lift doors and gates; The panels should be isolated from each other as far
e) Sound reproduction in staff training rooms, as possible either by the use of separate framing or by
conference rooms and recreation rooms, etc; the use of elastic discontinuities in the construction,
and a sound absorbing material may be introduced in
f) Handling of crockery and utensils in canteens
the air cavity between the panel. The partitions should
and kitchens; and
be full height up to the bottom of the roof above and
g) HVAC and lift machinery. any openings required for air movement should be
8.3 Recommendations provided with sound attenuators compatible with the
rest of the partition.
8.3.1 Site Planning
When light weight floors are provided in multi-use
Rooms demanding quiet conditions should be placed on buildings, adequate attention shall be paid to the
the quiet side of the site. Even on quiet thoroughfares, question of air-borne and structure-borne noise
these rooms should also not be planned at street level. transmission from the upper floors to the floors below.
They should also not be planned on enclosed yards used For effective reduction of air-borne noise, a double
for the parking of cars, scooters, etc. Where, however, panel hollow floor construction may be employed with
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 19
8.3.3 Requirement of Sound Insulation 8.3.3.3 It is recommended that the minimum sound
reduction index, Rw for floors should be 45 dB, and
With open window (single or double) the sound
the floors should have a resilient finish.
reduction (Dw) will be 5-10dB, and with sealed double
windows it will be 40-45dB. Intermediate values are 9 HOTELS AND HOSTELS
obtainable with closed openable windows (single or
double) but only, of course, at such times as ventilation 9.1 General
may be dispensed with. Having to choose between Hotels and hostels are primarily used as dwelling units,
ventilation and noise exclusion is a serious handicap and hotels also provide for public entertainment. The
to efficient working in offices. In large office blocks most serious risk of course is disturbance to sleep, and
on noisy sites, consideration should be given to the adequate care, therefore, need be taken to protect the
provision of sealed double windows and mechanical occupants from being disturbed by outdoor and indoor
ventilation at least in the offices on the sides of the noise.
building exposed to noise.
9.1.1 Outdoor Noise
8.3.3.1 The insulation necessary between adjoining
rooms, both horizontally and vertically, depends upon Hotels near railway stations, airports, highways and
the amount of noise created within the rooms, the those situated in highly urbanized areas are specially
amount of intruding noise and whether it is important vulnerable to outdoor noise. The outdoor noise in many
that conversation should not be overheard between of the areas is of a high level even late at night and in
rooms. Generally a sound isolation value (Dw) of 30 the early morning. The noise could also be due to other
dB between one room and another room in office is types of activities such as building construction activity
recommended. (pile driving, concrete mixing etc) and various types
of portable utility equipment, such as compressors or
8.3.3.2 The following list may be considered as broad generators.
classification of noise producing rooms and rooms
requiring quiet though many offices fall into both 9.1.2 Indoor Noise
categories. Where rooms in opposing categories are In so far as indoor noise is concerned, the noise could
planned adjacent to each other, a sound reduction (Dw ) be due to the occupants themselves, which is transmitted
of at least 45 dB should be provided between them. from one room to the other. It could also be due to public
functions and late night use of restaurants located in the
Noise Producing Rooms Requiring Quiet
hotel as also due to miscellaneous utility equipment
Rooms Conditions
installed for providing and maintaining the services in
Entrance halls, staircases Executives rooms,
and corridors used by the Conference rooms and the hotel, such as, air conditioning equipment, pumping
public Board rooms equipment, power laundry and kitchen. Sometimes
Lifts and lift halls Interview rooms hotels equipped with standby generators are a potential
Motor and plant rooms Offices for one or two source of noise. Another source which could lead to
persons disturbance to the occupants is the plumbing.
Lavatories Medical officers rooms 9.2 Recommendations
Public offices Sick rooms
9.2.1 Site Planning
Canteen and kitchens Rest rooms
Office machine rooms and Libraries While it is desirable to locate the hotel, or hostel away
typing pools from an area where there is a high ambient noise level,
Recreation rooms Telephoning rooms many a time these have to be located in noisy areas for
Large general offices public convenience. Hotels near airports and railway
Cinemas and projection stations are becoming popular because they are
rooms convenient for passengers in transit. Hotels located in
Dw the commercial areas of a city are also a commercially
a) rooms requiring quiet (as listed 45 dB viable proposition and many a time this factor
above) on a quiet site where privacy outweighs the other problems associated with such a
is required location. When a reasonably quiet location is not
b) Rooms requiring quiet (as listed 40 dB possible, it is desirable that adequate measures be
above) but on a noisy site or where considered to provide a comfortable acoustical
a lower degree of privacy is environment for the occupants.
tolerable
c) Clerical offices in which noise does 20-30 dB 9.2.2 Internal Planning
not constitute a major nuisance
Where a hotel is located in a noisy environment, the
9.2.2.2 Door openings on opposite sides of corridors This may disturb sleep or study of other students.
shall be staggered and doors be provided with gaskets Proper precautions should, therefore, be taken to
on head, sides and threshold. Inter-communicating doors provide satisfactory conditions.
should be double doors, fully gasketed. Doors should
10 INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
also have quiet action latches. Whenever possible, rooms
should be entered through a baffle lobby. Wherever 10.1 General
possible, corridor walls should not have ventilators
Industrial buildings are primarily producers rather than
unless they are double glazed and non-openable.
receivers of noise. The level of industrial noise
9.2.2.3 Corridors and staircases may have resilient commonly exceeds that from any other source with
floor coverings and sound absorbent ceilings are the exception of aircraft. As compared with traffic
desirable unless the corridor is fully carpeted. noise, its effects are less widespread but it is often more
Staircases and lift wells may be cut off from corridors annoying in character.
by means of swing doors and, if possible, isolated from
10.1.1 Many industrial noises contain very strong high
guest rooms by linen stores or similar rooms. Room
frequency whines, screeches and clatter these
service pantries on floors can also be a source of noise
components are relatively more attenuated by passage
and may be separated from corridors by baffle lobbies,
through the air and by the insulation of light structure
unless the rooms themselves have baffle lobbies.
than are lower frequencies.
9.2.2.4 Except within the same suite, bathrooms
10.1.2 Intermittent noises are either isolated explosions
should not be planned next to bedrooms. Where this is
or reports, or noises of a periodic nature, such as those
unavoidable, internal pipe shafts with heavy walls,
of pressure relief valves of blow off, or the noises of
unpierced on bedrooms side may be used as means of
work occurring at random intervals, for example,
separation. It is important to choose quiet type of
hammering, grinding and sawing operations; the latter
sanitary fittings and to design the plumbing system so
class may be especially irritating because of high
as not to create noise, that is by avoiding sharp bends,
frequency components.
restrictions of flow, quick-action valves that might
cause water hammer, etc. 10.2 Sources of Industrial Noise
9.2.2.5 Air conditioning system should be quiet in 10.2.1 Noises in industrial buildings are mainly of
operation. Care should also be taken that the air indoor origin. Noise in factories and workshops is
conditioning ducts do not lead to a cross-talk problem generally caused by machine tools and by operations
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 21
involved in making and handling the product and they in permanent noise induced hearing loss in the course
are classified into the following groups, depending of time. Damage-risk criteria specify the maximum
upon how the noise energy is generated. levels and duration of noise exposure that may be
considered safe. Generally accepted damage-risk
10.2.1.1 Impact
criteria for exposure to continuous, steady broad band
Noise caused by impact is the most intense and noise are shown in Table 7. Whenever the sound levels
widespread of all industrial noises. It is normally at the workers position in a factory exceed the levels
coupled with resonant response of the structural and the duration suggested, feasible engineering
members connected to the impacting surface. Common controls shall be utilized to reduce the sound to the
sources of this type of noise are forging, riveting, limits shown. If such controls fail to reduce sound
chipping, pressing, tumbling, cutting, weaving, etc. levels within the levels of Table 7, personal hearing
Intense impact noise may also be produced during protection equipment shall be provided and used to
handling of materials as in the case of sheared steel reduce sound levels within the level shown.
plates falling one over another in collecting trays in a
steel factory. Impact noise is usually intermittent and 10.3.2 Interference with Communication
impulsive in character, but it may also be continuous In factories where audible warning signals are used,
as in the case of tumbling. or where an operator follows the operation of his
10.2.1.2 Friction machine by ear, the background noise should not be
so loud as to mask the signal or desired sound (the
Most of the noise due to friction is produced in such information sound) to be heard. Noise may be the cause
processes as sawing, grinding and sanding. Friction of accidents by hindering communication or by
also occurs at the cutting edge on lathes and other masking warning signals.
machine tools and in brakes and from bearings. The
spectrum of frictional noise often predominates in high 10.4 Methods of Reducing Noise
frequency and is very unpleasant in character. 10.4.1 Noise Control by Location
10.2.1.3 Rotation and reciprocation Machines, processes and work areas which are
A rotating or reciprocating machine generates noise approximately equally noisy should be located together
due to unbalanced forces and/or pressure fluctuations as far as possible. Areas that are particularly noisy
in the fluids inside the machines. In many cases, the should be segregated from quiet areas by buffer zones
moving surfaces radiate noise directly and in other that produce and may tolerate intermediate noise levels.
cases, the pressure fluctuations are transmitted to the 10.4.2 Noise Reduction by Layout
outer casings of the machine from where they are
radiated as noise. Interaction of rotating component The office space in a factory should be as far as possible
with the fluid stream can also give rise to pure tone located preferably in a separate building. This building
components, such as the whine in a turbine. Since most should not have a wall common with the production area.
machine casings have radiation efficiencies of unity Where a common wall is unavoidable, it should be heavy
in the higher frequency range, the amount of sound with few connecting doors and no permanent openings.
radiated is often substantial. 10.4.3 Noise Reduction at Source
10.2.1.4 Air turbulence 10.4.3.1 Selection of machinery
Noise may be generated by rapid variation in air Noise should be reduced as near the source as possible.
pressure caused by turbulence from high velocity air, While the operational processes in a factory may be
steam or gases. Common examples are the exhaust fixed and may have no quieter alternative, careful
noise from pneumatic tools and air jets. The noise is selection of the machine tools and equipment to be
intense, and broad based in character and the frequency used may considerably help attaining lower noise levels
criteria depends on the size of the jet. The intensity in the machine shop.
increases rapidly with the velocity of the air stream.
10.4.3.2 Reducing noise from potential sources
10.2.1.5 Noises with pure tone components
Impact that is not essential to a process should be
Whining noise from turbines and humming noise from quietened. Noise from handling and dropping of
transformers come under this group. materials on hard surface may be reduced by using soft
10.3 Noise Criteria resilient materials on containers, fixing rubber tyres on
trucks, trolleys, etc. Machine noise may be kept to a
10.3.1 Hearing Damage-Risk Criteria
minimum by proper maintenance. Proper lubrication will
Continuous exposure to high noise levels may result reduce noise by friction conveyors, rollers, etc.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 23
chosen to produce enough deflection for
the isolation required; and shall be such
that at this deflection, it is not loaded
beyond its elastic limit.
b) Position of Isolator The normal position
of the isolators is between the machine and
its foundation. However, if the forcing
frequency of the machine is low (less than
10 H z ) and vibration isolators with the
requisite deflection for this location are not
available, the machine may be bolted directly
to an independent heavy inertia concrete base
and the available vibration isolators used
below the concrete base.
1) Large press and drop hammers which
create serious impact vibration in heavy
machine shops may be mounted rigidly
on very massive blocks of concrete
having weights several times greater than
the weights of the supported machines.
The inertia blocks may, in turn, be
FIG. 2 TRANSMISSIBILITY AND EQUIVALENT NOISE isolated from the building structure by
REDUCTION FOR D IFFERENT RATIOS OF FORCING large wooden blocks and with thick pads
AND N ATURAL F REQUENCIES of cork.
Materials for isolators and their position are given 2) In critical installations (see Note), attempt
below: should be made to locate the resilient
mounts in a plane which contains
a) Material for Isolators Vibration isolators the centre of gravity of the mounted
are usually made of resilient materials like assembly. It is also preferable to locate
steel in the form of springs, rubber cork and the mounts laterally as far away as
felt. possible from the centre of the machine.
1) Because of the large range of deflections NOTE Critical installations are those
obtainable in coil springs, they may installations where transmission of vibration from
isolate vibrations over a large spectrum these installations will seriously hamper the
of low frequencies. Metal springs transmit normal working.
high frequency (from about two hundred 3) Rigid mechanical ties between vibrating
to several thousand c/s) very readily. machine and building structure, short-
Transmission of these frequencies can be circuit or reduce the effectiveness of
reduced by eliminating direct contact isolators. Loose and flexible connections
between the spring and the supporting should be inserted in all pipes and
structure. Rubber or felt pads may be conduits leading from the vibrating
inserted between the ends of the spring machine. Where flexible connections are
and the surfaces to which it is fastened. impracticable, bends should be inserted
2) Rubber in the form of pads may be used into the pipes or the pipes themselves
to isolate very effectively engines, should be supported on vibration mounts
motors, etc. It may be used in compression for a considerable distance from the
or in shear. Some rubber mountings use source.
rubber-in-shear as the primary elastic 4) Flexibility of foundation The effect
elements and rubber-in-compression as of flexibility of the foundation on
a secondary element which furnishes the isolator transmissibility shall be
snubbing action if the mounting is considered in the selection of practical
subjected to an overload. vibration isolating mountings. The
3) Felt or cork or both may be used as simplified vibration isolation theory
resilient mats or pads under machine assumes a completely rigid foundation.
bases. The load per unit area shall be However, in practice, this can never be
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 25
should be taken in the design that no noise emitting 12 MISCELLANEOUS BUILDINGS
installations should exist in its neighbourhood.
12.1 Law Courts and Council Chambers
However, where outdoor noises exist, such as from
local factory, heavy traffic airports, railway lines, sport It is important that law courts and council chambers
grounds or busy markets, buildings should be kept as be protected from the intrusion of outdoor noise and
far away as possible from the source of noise. from indoor noise arising both from ancillary offices
and circulation spaces. The general recommendations
11.2.1.1 The window and door openings towards the
on site planning given in 3 apply to law courts and
noise sources should be minimum. Minimum amount
of glazing should be placed on walls directly facing municipal buildings, but in the larger buildings at least,
the noise sources. further protection against outdoor noise can be obtained
by planning offices and other rooms around the court
11.2.2 Internal Planning rooms or chambers, and separating the offices from
11.2.2.1 Noisy places should be kept separate from the central rooms by means of corridors. This
the quiet ones. The location of laboratories or test arrangement is usually convenient to the function of
houses should be so chosen that it is cut off from the the buildings.
noisy zones. Where there are offices attached to a 12.1.1 The wall between the corridors and the central
laboratory, provision should be made to treat the offices rooms should have a sound reduction index, Rw of not
and to use acoustical partitions, to achieve a sound less than 50 dB (for example 230 mm brick) to insulate
isolation Dw of at least 35 dB. against air-borne noise in the corridors. Entrances from
11.2.2.2 In a laboratory, mostly hard reflecting halls or corridors into court rooms or council chambers
surfaces and bare furnishings are found, which should be through baffle lobbies with two sets of quiet
produce very reverberant conditions. The noise action doors. Sound absorbing treatment on ceilings
condition still deteriorates when noise producing and upper parts or walls or entrance lobbies is
instruments are switched on or a heavy object is recommended.
dropped on the floor. Under these conditions, sound 12.1.2 The whole of the floor of the court room or
absorbing treatment of the space is very essential. chamber including steps and seating areas set aside
Sound absorbing ceilings are recommended to deaden for the public should have a resilient floor finish to
such noises. Rubber buffers may also be fitted to the reduce the noise of footsteps and shuffling of feet. Any
legs of furniture.
tip-up seats should be quiet in action.
11.2.2.3 In large span laboratories or test houses where
12.1.3 Sound absorbing treatment applied for acoustic
scientists and researchers are engaged in work and/or
purposes serves also to reduce the build-up of noise
simultaneously busy in calculations or desk work
within the room and, part of the treatment should be
requiring high degree of mental concentration, use of
applied in a band to the perimeter of the ceiling to
sound absorbing screens is recommended.
absorb intruding outdoor noise. It is often desirable to
11.2.2.4 Noise reduction between the test house or keep the centre part of the ceiling free of absorbent
laboratory and corridors or general circulation space material for acoustic reasons.
should be well kept in mind and due care should be
taken of the type of doors and the manner of their 12.2 Libraries, Museums and Art Galleries
fittings etc. Transmission of noise through service Quiet conditions for reading and study are essential
ducts, pipes, lifts and staircases should also be guarded. in these types of buildings and, since their occupancy
Telephones should preferably be placed in a separate is not noise producing, intruding noise is more
small enclosure or acoustically efficient telephone noticeable and distracting. Every opportunity
booth. therefore should be taken to plan for noise defence,
both in respect of siting of the building and internal
11.2.2.5 To isolate a laboratory or a test house from planning. When possible, stack rooms, store rooms
structure borne noises originating from upper floor, and administrative offices should be planned to screen
sandwich type floor construction is recommended. reading rooms, print rooms and lecture rooms from
11.2.2.6 Wherever the provision of double glazed noise sources. In public libraries, the reference library
windows is necessary to reduce the heat losses, care and lecture rooms should receive first consideration;
should be taken to provide sealed double windows the lending library, newspaper and periodical rooms
rather than double glazing in a single window. have a higher background noise and are secondary in
importance.
NOTE Double glazed windows for sound insulation should
have a minimum gap of 100 mm between the two glasses. 12.2.1 In large libraries, museums and art galleries
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 27
and requires a high standard of protection against in Table 9. Cinema design, however, normally requires
extraneous noise. In these circumstances it is doubtful specialist acoustic advice.
whether a single wall can be adequate for insulating
the two halls unless it is designed with a wide unbridged Table 9 Typical Sound Insulation Specification
cavity. Separation by planning is preferable. for Wall Separating Two Cinema Screens
(Clause 12.4)
12.3.6 Other sources of internal noise are rehearsal
rooms, scenery bays and workshops, stages of other Octave Band Sound Reduction Index
halls where rehearsals or erection of stage sets might Hz R, dB
be in progress and foyers and bars where loud 63 38
conversation might occur. The insulation of the internal 125 44
walls should be adequate to protect the auditorium from 250 50
500 61
these noise sources and the insulation should not be 1 000 57
by-passed by openings, doorways, etc. The general 2 000 58
noise due to banging of doors also needs to be taken 4 000 57
care of; soft sealing materials should be provided for 8 000 55
all doors to ensure quiet closing.
13 NOISE FROM BUILDING SERVICES
12.3.7 For detailed acoustical design of auditoria and
conference halls reference may be made to good 13.1 Mechanical, electrical, air conditioning, heating
practice [8-4(3)]. and mechanical ventilation, and other services are
provided in almost all large buildings excluding
12.4 Cinemas
residential, commercial and industrial buildings. Noise
The main objective of the design should be to control control measures should be incorporated during the
noise from adjacent screens, the projection area, the design and installation of such services to adhere to
foyer, and outside the cinema. The first of these, the recommended outdoor and indoor noise criteria for
controlling noise from adjacent screens, is likely to be the kind of occupancy. For detailed design of noise
the most difficult with modern digital sound systems. control for services, specialist advice should be sought.
As most cinemas are air conditioned, there will be some
Some basic design techniques for noise control in air
noise from services. To ensure reasonable listening
conditioning, heating and mechanical ventilation
conditions, this should be limited to 30 dBA. This will
system are given in Annex G.
provide some masking of the noise from adjacent
screens, but a high performance partition will still be 13.2 Control of noise from mechanical equipments
essential. Masonry or lightweight construction may be can also be done by specifying noise control
used, and a typical performance specification for a requirements while purchasing the equipments (see
lightweight wall separating two screens is given Annex H).
ANNEX A
(Clause 2.4)
NOISE CALCULATIONS
A-1 GENERAL Lc = 10 log10 (10 L1/10 + 10 L2/10)
Some of the simpler types of noise calculation are As the individual sound pressure levels are logarithms
described in this Annex. of the mean square sound pressures, they cannot
simply be added arithmetically. Figure 3 shows a
A-2 ADDITION OF TWO NOISE LEVELS
graphical method for adding the sound pressure levels
To determine the combined sound pressure level (Lc ) from two independent sources to obtain the combined
resulting from the sound pressure levels of two or more sound pressure level at a particular place. This graph
noise sources (L1, L2, etc), it is necessary to calculate may also be used for multiple sources by combining
and add the mean square values of their individual sources two at a time to produce virtual sources that
sound pressures and then convert this back to a sound can then be combined. The most accurate approach
pressure level. This can be done using the following is to start with the lowest levels and work towards
formula: the highest.
(0.16V )
T=
Ai
where
V = is the volume of the room in cubic metres
(m3);
Ai = is the equivalent sound absorbing area in the
room in square metres (m2).
The Ai are the absorbing areas of each surface, or other
permanent fixture in the room. Each Ai is determined
FIG. 4 SUBTRACTION OF NOISE L EVELS by multiplying the area of that surface in square
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 29
FIG. 5 SOUND INSULATION OF NON-UNIFORM P ARTITIONS
metres (m 2) by its absorption coefficient si. The individual Ai values. As the values of si are frequency
surface of each significant fixture or feature of the dependent, this calculation should be repeated for each
room should be considered as well as the walls, ceiling octave band of interest.
and floor.
An allowance should also be made for people and
The total absorption is obtained by summing the furnishings in the room.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 31
corrected to a standard reverberation time (To ) of a floor with a carpet is likely to be overestimated by
0.5 s to give the standardized impact sound pressure this method.
level, LnT, which is calculated as follows:
The more common indices used to describe sound
LnT = Li 10 log10 (T/To ) insulation are summarized in Table 11.
In the laboratory, the noise level depends mainly on Table 11 Common Indices Used to Describe
the characteristics of the floor being tested and the Air-borne and Impact Sound Insulation
amount of absorption (A m2) in the laboratory. It is (Clause B-4)
therefore appropriate to correct the noise level to a
Air-borne Lab Measured Values Single Number
standard area of absorption. The area used is 10 m2. (A) (L) Quantity
The resulting normalized impact sound pressure Impact Field
level is given the symbol L n and calculated as (I) (F) Name Symbol Name Symbol
follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
ANNEX C
(Clause 2.22)
NOISE RATING
Annex D
(Clause 3.3)
OUTDOOR NOISE REGULATIONS IN INDIA
D-1 Government notifications are issued from time- around the residential areas and around sensitive
to-time on the allowable ambient noise levels in general buildings, specifically with regard to noise levels from
and specifically in different zones of various electricity generating sets, construction equipment and
metropolitan cities of India. HVAC utility equipment installed outdoors.
D-2 Noise regulations and notifications are also issued D-3 These regulations should be referred to by the
from time-to-time specifying the maximum permissible designer for the design of measures for control of
sound levels from equipments commonly used in and external noise.
ANNEX E
(Clauses 3.8 and 4.5)
SPECIAL PROBLEMS REQUIRING EXPERT ADVICE
E-1 GENERAL and similar performing spaces usually requires
expertise in room acoustics and noise control. The
Certain design problems require reliable advice of a
intrusion of quite low levels of noise may seriously
kind which is not easy to find in published material.
interfere with the enjoyment of the performance and
The advice of an expert should be sought for these
distract the performers. The requirements for low
kinds of problems, some examples of which are given
noise levels often mean that more room has to be
in E-2 to E-9.
allocated for low velocity ventilation ductwork and
E-2 ACOUSTIC TEST ROOMS the impact on the design of the ventilation system is
often substantial.
The design of rooms in which acoustic measurements
are carried out, such as reverberation chambers, free- E-4 BROADCASTING AND RECORDING
field anechoic rooms and audiometric test rooms, STUDIOS
usually requires the advice of an expert.
Broadcasting and recording studios have requirements
E-3 PERFORMING SPACES similar to those of performing spaces. For some
infrequent intrusive noises, the requirements are
The design of theatres, opera houses, concert halls sometimes relaxed on the grounds that a re-take of a
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 33
recording can be done, but this can result in higher E-9 NOISE SURVEYS
operating costs.
Noise surveys are carried out for a variety of reasons,
E-5 AIRCRAFT NOISE for example:
As there are many variables affecting the level of a) before construction, to establish the existing
aircraft noise heard on the ground, expert advice is noise climate at the site of a proposed
almost always required. Contours of daytime LAeq,T development where reliable prediction is
levels are available from most major airports. Where impracticable, as an aid to the design of the
measurements of faade insulation are necessary a building envelope, either to protect against
standard test method may be referred. external noise or contain internally produced
noise;
E-6 GROUND-BORNE NOISE b) during construction, to monitor noise from
Projects involving ground-borne noise from underground building activity, either to assess the likely
trains usually require expert advice. nuisance to the local community or the risk
of hearing damage to the work force;
E-7 LOW-FREQUENCY NOISE c) at the end of a building contract to check the
insulation of the building envelope, or the
Projects involving low-frequency noise usually require
noise levels produced by the services;
expert advice as accurate measurement is difficult and
there is a shortage of reliable data below 100 Hz. d) as part of a planning requirement; and
e) to provide objective evidence to support or
E-8 ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL defend a legal action.
Active noise control is the reduction of noise by The expense of carrying out a comprehensive noise
cancellation with a similar noise (anti-noise) generated survey of any kind is likely to be high, so the cost-
by electro-acoustic means. The technique is still under effectiveness of a full or partial survey should be
development, but commercial systems are available weighed against alternatives such as prediction. A
which successfully reduce low frequency noise from survey will generally be more accurate and can take
mechanical ventilation systems. account of factors such as prevailing wind conditions.
ANNEX F
(Clause 4.4)
AIR-BORNE AND IMPACT SOUND INSULATION
F-1 GENERAL room 2 may travel via the direct path a-a and by the
many indirect, or flanking, paths shown. The term
Air-borne sound refers to sources which produce sound
flanking transmission is usually used to mean
by directly setting the air around them into vibration.
transmission paths involving the structure, while the
Impact sound refers to sources which produce sound
term indirect transmission includes flanking paths and
by impulsive mechanical excitation of part of a building
airborne paths through gaps and ducts, etc. The indirect
(for example by footsteps, electric light switches,
paths may limit the sound insulation attainable no
slamming doors). Many sources of impact sound also
matter how much the direct sound is reduced by the
produce significant levels of airborne sound. The term
separating wall or floor. The indirect transmission can
structure-borne sound has no very precise meaning as
be reduced by measures such as the following:
the structure can be excited by both airborne and impact
sources; it is often used to refer to sound that travels a) Increasing the mass of the flanking walls;
for long distances via the structure, especially in b) Increasing the mass of the partition and
connection with vibrating machinery linked directly bonding it to the flanking walls;
to the structure. c) Introducing discontinuities in the indirect
paths;
F-2 DIRECT AND INDIRECT TRANSMISSION
d) Erecting independent wall linings adjacent to
Figure 6 shows diagrammatically a pair of rooms in a the flanking walls to prevent energy entering
house where the construction consists of solid walls, the flanking construction; and
etc bonded together. Sound travelling from room 1 to e) Sealing any air gaps and paths through ducts.
Figure 7 shows a number of indirect paths that have measurements to those likely to be obtained in the
been found in offices. field.
It is important to remember that standard test F-3 AIR-BORNE SOUND INSULATION
laboratories are designed to minimize transmission
F-3.1 General
by all paths other than the direct path. This makes
it difficult to relate the results of laboratory The sound insulation of structural elements such as
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 35
36
F IG. 7 INDIRECT S OUND LEAKAGE PATHS
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 37
to 3 150 Hz range. An increase of stiffness will have sound from footsteps. However, it should be noted that
the reverse effect. an effective floating floor may result in increased sound
from impacts on the source side of the floor.
It is possible to design lightweight stud partitions so
The conventional forms of floating floor may be
that they perform to their maximum effect in the speech
unsatisfactory if protection against the low-frequency
frequency region between 250 Hz and 2 000 Hz, that
content of impact noise is required (e.g. a dance floor
is between the mass-spring-mass and coincidence
over a restaurant).
regions respectively.
F-4 AIR-BORNE INSULATION VALUES OF
The worst coincidence dips occur in materials such as
WALLS AND AIR-BORNE AND IMPACT
plate glass and rigid metal sheets. Heavily damped
INSULATION VALUES OF FLOORS
materials such as lead sheets are least affected.
Table 15 and Table 16 give examples of common types
F-3.5 Mass-Spring-Mass Frequency of wall and floor construction with sound insulation in
A double leaf wall can perform better than a single the ranges shown. The insulation indices are for field
leaf wall of similar mass because the sound has to pass measurements accessed in accordance with [8-4(5)].
through two barriers. If the two leaves are not The insulation values given are necessarily approximate
connected to each other, the insulation values of the since examples of nominally identical constructions
two leaves may be added together. However, in practice may show variations of several decibels. All the figures
the leaves are often connected by ties or studs, and the represent values expected in the field, that is in
full insulation cannot be achieved. Even where the two actual buildings. Many are based directly on field
leaves are isolated from each other, the full benefit measurements, though other (in the absence of
can only be obtained above a certain frequency that representative field measurements) have been assessed
depends on the cavity width. This is because the air in from laboratory data, with an allowance for typical
the cavity behaves like a spring connecting the leaves flanking conditions in normal buildings. Variation in
together, and causes a resonance at the mass-spring- the amount of indirect transmission may affect
mass frequency. Below this frequency, the two leaves significantly the insulation between two rooms
separated by a given barrier. For example, the sound
behave more like an equivalent single leaf.
insulation of some types of floor may be reduced by
Making the cavity width wide can reduce the mass- indirect transmission along the walls supporting them,
spring-mass frequency, as in the case of sound insulating particularly if these walls are of lightweight masonry
secondary glazing. The mass-spring-mass frequency and carried past the floor.
(F0 ) may be estimated from the following equation:
Table 15 Air-borne Sound Insulation of
1 1 1 Walls and Partitions
F0 = 59.6 + (Clause F-4)
d m1 m2
where Sound Type of Wall or Partition
Insulation
m1 and m2 = the surface masses of the two leaves DnT, w
dB
in kilograms per square metre
(1) (2)
(kg/m2); and
d = the cavity width in metres (m). 26 to 33 a) 1 mm steel sheet panels fixed to steel frame
members to form demountable partition units
F-3.6 Impact Sound Control 50 mm overall thickness. Mineral wool cavity
insulation.
A structure that receives an impact or has a vibrating b) Plywood or wood fibre board 12 mm thick nailed
source in contact with it behaves more like an extension both sides of 50 mm 50 mm timber framing
of the source rather than an intervening element members spaced at 400 mm centres.
between source and listener. For this reason, a relatively c) Paper faced strawboard or wood wool 50 mm thick
small amount of impact energy may produce a loud panels plastered both sides.
sound and, if the structure is continuous, the sound d) Chipboard hollow panels 50 mm thick tongued
and grooved edges, hardboard faced. Joints
may travel a long distance. Control is usually obtained covered with wood trim.
by inserting a resilient surface at the point of contact 33 to 37 a) Lightweight masonry blockwork. Plaster or
with the source (for example laying a carpet on a floor) drylining on at least one side. Overall mass per
or by introducing a structural discontinuity. unit area not less than 50 kg/m2.
b) Laminated plasterboard at least 50 mm thick fixed
Floating floors, which are an example of the latter to timber perimeter framing, any suitable finish.
approach, are a common method of controlling impact Approximate mass per unit area 35 kg/m2.
c) Timber stud partitions any size timbers greater than e) Cavity lightweight aggregate block (maximum
50 mm 50 mm, 400 mm centers, cross noggins, density of block 1 600 kg/m 3) with 75 mm cavity
9.5 mm plasterboard lining on both sides, any and wall ties of the butterfly wire type. Dry
suitable finish. lined finish on both sides. Joints in blockwork
d) Metal stud partition, 50 mm studs 600 mm centres, well filled. Overall mass per unit area not less than
clad both sides with 12.5 mm plasterboard, joints 300 kg/m2. 1)
filled and perimeters sealed. Approximate mass f) Dense aggregate concrete block cavity wall with
per unit area 18 kg/m2. 50 mm cavity and wall ties of the butterfly wire
e) 50 mm lightweight masonry blockwork, plastered type. Dry lined finish on both sides. Joints in block
both sides to 12 mm thickness or drylined with work well filled. Overall mass per unit area not
9.5 mm plasterboard. less than 415 kg/m 2.1)
37 to 43 a) Lightweight masonry blockwork, plaster or dry g) Autoclaved aerated concrete block cavity wall
lining on at least one side. Overall mass per unit consisting of two leaves, 100 mm blocks not less
area not less than 75 kg/m2. than 75 mm apart, with wall ties of the butterfly
type. Plaster or dry line finish on both sides. Joints
b) Either 75 mm or 100 mm 50 mm timber studs in blockwork well filled. Overall mass per unit
spaced 600 mm apart, 50 mm mineral fibre quilt area not less than 150 kg/m 2.1)
in stud cavity. Frame lined on both sides with one
layer 12.5 mm plasterboard. Approximate mass 54 to 60 a) Two separate frames of timber studs not less than
per unit area 19 kg/m2. 100 mm 50 mm spaced at 600 mm maximum
centres. A 50 mm mineral wool quilt in each frame
43 to 50 a) Masonry wall, joints well filled. Either plaster or between studs. Frames spaced to give a minimum
dry lining on both sides. Overall mass per unit 300 mm overall cavity. Each frame clad on outside
area not less than 150 kg/m2. with three layers of 12.5 mm plasterboard
b) 100 mm metal stud partition, C section studs not nailed to framing. Approximate mass per unit area
greater than 600 mm spacing, not less than 51 kg/m2.1)
nominal 50 mm web depth. Clad on both sides b) Two separate frames of boxed C section
with two layers of plasterboard of not less than galvanized nominal 150 mm steel studs 100 mm
22 mm combined thickness. Mineral fibre quilt apart with a 400 mm overall cavity. 50 mm
hung between studs. Approximate mass per unit mineral wool quilt fixed to the back of one frame
area 35 kg/m2. each frame clad on outside with three layers
c) 75 mm 50 mm timber framing using staged studs of 12.5 mm plasterboard by self drilling or
at 300 mm spacing with 25 mm stagger forward tapping screws. Approximate mass per unit area
and back. Frame clad with two layers of 12.5 mm 47 kg/m2.1)
of plasterboard on both sides. Mineral fibre quilt c) Solid masonry with an overall mass per unit
hung between studs. Approximate mass per unit area of not less than 700 kg/m 2 fully sealed both
area 36 kg/m2. sides. 1)
d) 50 mm 25 mm timber stud partition to form a d) Dense aggregate concrete block solid wall
25 mm cavity, clad on both sides with minimum 215 mm thick plaster finish to both surfaces.
38 mm wood wool slabs having their outer faces Overall mass per unit area not less than 415 kg/m2.1)
screeded or plastered.
e) Cavity lightweight aggregate block (maximum
e) Solid autoclaved aerated concrete block 215 mm density of block 1 600 kg/m 3) with 75 mm cavity
thick plaster or dry lined finish on both sides, and wall ties of the butterfly wire type. Plaster
blockwork joints well filled. Overall mass per unit finish on both sides. Joints in blockwork well
area not less than 160 kg/m2. filled. Overall mass per unit area not less than
50 to 54 a) Two separate frames of timber studs not less than 300 kg/m 2.1)
89 mm 38 mm, or boxed metal studwork with f) Dense aggregate concrete block cavity wall with
50 mm minimum web depth. Studs at 600 mm 50 mm cavity and wall ties of the butterfly wire
maximum centres. A 25 mm mineral wool quilt type. Plaster finish on both sides. Joints in
suspended between frames. Frames spaced to give blockwork well filled. Overall mass per unit area
a minimum 200 mm overall cavity. Clad on not less than 415 kg/m2.1)
outside of each frame with a minimum of 30 mm
plasterboard layers (for example 19 mm plus NOTES
12.5 thickness). Approximate mass per unit area 1 Construction details and workmanship are
54 kg/m 2.1) important if the levels of sound insulation
b) Either in-situ or pre-cast concrete wall panel indicated are to be achieved.
not less than 175 mm thick and not less than 2 Where plasterboard is specified it is assumed
415 kg/m2. All joints well filled.1) that the surface mass will be at least 6.5 kg/m 2 for
c) Brick wall nominal 230 mm thickness, weight 9.5 mm thick board, at least 8.5 kg/m 2 for 12.5 mm
(including plaster) not less than 380 kg/m2. Plaster thick board, and at least 14.5 kg/m2 for 19 mm
or dry-lined finish both sides. Brick work joints thick board. If less dense plasterboard is used, the
well filled.1) thickness should be increased.
d) No fines concrete 225 mm thickness, weight 1)
When considering these constructions for separating walls,
(including plaster) not less than 415 kg/m2. Plaster expert advice should be sought.
or dry-lined finish both sides.1)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 39
Table 16 Air-borne and Impact Sound Table 16 Concluded
Insulation of Floor Constructions
(1) (2)
(Clause F-4)
the floor, ceiling and pugging is not less than
Sound Type of Wall or Partition 120 kg/m2. This construction will only give
Insulation values for DnT, w of 50 to 53 dB, and a value
dB for LnT, w of 75 dB.
(1) (2)
d) A floor consisting of 18 mm tongued and
grooved chipboard on 19 mm plasterboard
DnT, w = 49 to 54 a) A concrete floor having mass per unit area
laid on battens running parallel to the
LnT, w = 56 to 65 not less than 365 kg/m2, including any screed
joists and supported on 25 mm thick
or ceiling finish directly bonded to the floor
mineral wool of about 90 kg/m 3 to 140 kg/
slab; together with a floating floor or resilient
m 3 density; 100 mm of fibre absorbent
floor covering equivalent to rubber or sponge
(as used for insulation in roof spaces)
rubber underlay or thick cork tile (for
laid between the joists on top of the
example carpet and underlay or sponge
plasterboard ceiling. 1)
rubber backed vinyl flooring).
e) A floor consisting of 18 mm tongued and
b) A solid floor consisting of:
grooved chipboard on 19 mm plasterboard
1) a solid slab; or floating on a 25 mm thick mineral wool layer
2) concrete beams and infilling blocks; or of about 60 kg/m3 to 80 kg/m3 density; this
on a 12.5 mm plywood platform; 100 mm
3) hollow concrete planks; together with a
of fibre absorbent laid between the joists on
floating floor. A ceiling finish is required
for a beam and block floor. In each case top of the plasterboard ceiling.1)
the slab should have a mass per unit area DnT, w = 32 to 36 Timber joist floor consisting of 22 mm
of at least 300 kg/m2 including any screed LnT, w = 80 to 85 tongued and grooved floor boarding or
or ceiling finish directly bonded to it. equivalent fixed directly to floor joists.
Where a floating floor is laid over a floor of Ceiling of 12.5 mm plasterboard and skim
beams and hollow infill blocks or hollow with no floor covering.
beams along the top of the structural floor, it
should be sealed and levelled before the NOTES
resilient layer is put down. It is also essential 1 Construction details and workmanship are important if the
to have due regard for conduits and pipework levels of sound insulation indicated are to be achieved.
which should be laid and covered so as to
2 Where plasterboard is specified it is assumed that the surface
prevent any short circuit of the floors
mass will be at least 8.5 kg/m3 for 12.5 mm thick board, and at
isolating properties.
least 14.5 kg/m 2 for 19 mm thick board. If less dense
If precast units are used as a structural floor, plasterboard is used, the thickness should be increased.
it is essential that the joints are filled to ensure
that the sound insulation performance is
1)
maintained. In these types of floor construction, the ceiling may be 19 mm
The resilient material is laid to cover plus 12.5 mm plasterboard. It is imperative that the resilient
completely the structural floor and turned up layer is not punctured by nails.
against the surrounding wall along all edges.
The resilient layer is usually of mineral fibre,
or a special grade of expanded polystyrene. In many cases, simple solid partitions give insulation
When the screed is laid, it is important that values according to their mass (see F-3.3). Moreover,
none of the mix finds its way through the with partitions of this type there is usually little
resilient layer to the structural floor, as this
will short circuit the isolation between the two variation between field and laboratory test results
decks and significantly reduce the sound unless the laboratory insulation exceeds 45 dB.
insulation. Exceptions may occur in buildings that have not been
c) A floor consisting of boarding nailed to specially designed to minimize common cavities and
battens laid to float upon an isolating layer
strongly coupled elements in lightweight panelling.
of mineral fibre capable of retaining its
resilience under imposed loading. With The examples given are not exhaustive. Flanking
battens running along the joists, a dense fibre structures are not listed since these can vary widely
layer can be used in strips. The ceiling below and are often dependent upon other factors such as
to be of metal lath and plaster not less than
29 mm thick, with pugging on the ceiling
thermal insulation, which are outside the scope of this
such that the combined mass per unit area of Code.
G-1 When selecting fans and other related mechanical separation, resulting from expansion angles
equipment and when designing air distribution systems greater than 15, may produce rumble noise.
to minimize the sound transmitted from different Expanding the duct cross-section area will
components to the occupied spaces that they serve, the reduce potential flow noise associated with
following recommendations should be considered: turbulence in these areas.
a) Design the air distribution system to minimize h) Use turning vanes in large 90 rectangular
flow resistance and turbulence. High flow elbows and branch takeoffs. This provides a
resistance increases the required fan pressure, smoother transmission in which the air
which results in higher noise being generated can change flow direction, thus reducing
by the fan. Turbulence increases the flow turbulence.
noise generated by duct fittings and dampers j) Place grilles, diffusers and registers into
in the air distribution system, especially at low occupied spaces as far as possible from
frequencies. elbows and branch takeoffs.
b) Select a fan to operate as near as possible to k) Minimize the use of volume dampers near
its rated peak efficiency when handling the grills, diffusers and registers in acoustically
required quantity of air and static pressure. critical situations.
Also, select a fan that generates the lowest m) Vibration isolate all vibrating reciprocating
possible noise but still meets the required and rotating equipment if mechanical
design conditions for which it is selected. equipment is located on upper floors or is
Using an oversized or undersized fan that roof-mounted. Also, it is usually necessary
does not operate at or near rated peak to vibration isolate the mechanical equipment
efficiency may result in substantially higher that is located in the basement of a building
noise levels. as well as piping supported from the ceiling
c) Design duct connections at both the fan inlet slab of a basement, directly below tenant
and outlet for uniform and straight air flow. space. It may be necessary to use flexible
Failure to do this may result in severe piping connectors and flexible electrical
turbulence at the fan inlet and outlet and in conduit between rotating or reciprocating
flow separation at the fan blades. Both of equipment and pipes and ducts that are
these may significantly increase the noise connected to the equipment.
generated by the fan. n) Vibration isolate ducts and pipes, using
d) Select duct silencers that do not significantly spring and/or neoprene hangers for at least
increase the required fan total static pressure. the first 15 m from the vibration-isolated
e) Place fan-powered mixing boxes associated equipment.
with variable volume air distribution systems p) Use barriers near outdoor equipment when
away from noise-sensitive areas. noise associated with the equipment will
f) Minimize flow-generated noise by elbows or disturb adjacent properties if barriers are not
duct branch take-offs, whenever possible, by used. In normal practice, barriers typically
locating them at least four to five duct produce no more than 15 dB of sound
diameters from each other. For high velocity attenuation in the mid-frequency range.
systems, it may be necessary to increase this q) Table 17 lists several common sound sources
distance to up to ten duct diameters in critical associated with mechanical equipment noise.
noise areas. Anticipated sound transmission paths and
g) Keep airflow velocity in the duct as low as recommended noise reduction methods are
possible (7.5 m/s or less) near critical noise also listed in Table 18. Air-borne and/or
areas by expanding the duct cross-section structure-borne sound can follow any or all
area. However, do not exceed an included of the transmission paths associated with a
expansion angle of greater than 15. Flow specified sound source.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 41
Table 17 Sound Sources, Transmission Paths and Recommended
Noise Reduction Methods
[Clause G-1(q)]
ANNEX H
(Clause 13.2)
SUGGESTED EQUIPMENT NOISE DATA SHEET
It is recommended that an equipment noise data sheet units specifying noise requirements at the time of
be furnished to intending bidders of mechanical request for quotation. Following is a sample noise data
equipment such as air conditioning, heating and sheet suggested for the purpose:
mechanical ventilation machinery or diesel generating
It will be observed from the col 3, 4 and 5 that the would indicate the acoustical performance if the
buyer would get quotation for supply of a standard owners were to provide special noise control measures
equipment at a price P-1, whose noise characteristics for the installation (whose broad details and
would be as per col 3. Col 4 would indicate acoustical approximate estimated cost is also furnished by the
performance for a special design at a price P-2. Col 5 vendor).
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards (2) 4954 : 1968 Recommendations for noise
in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The abatement in town planning
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may (3) 2526 : 1963 Code of practice for acoustical
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance design of auditoriums and
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the conference halls
Code. (4) 11050 Rating of sound insulation in
IS No. Title buildings and of building
elements:
(1) 11050 Rating of sound insulation in
(Part 1) : 1984 buildings and of building (Part 1) : 1984 Air-borne sound insulation in
elements: Part 1 Air-borne buildings and of interior
sound insulation in buildings building elements
and of interior building elements (Part 2) : 1984 Impact sound insulation
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 43
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escalators
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 GENERAL 9
4 ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS 11
5 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES 21
6 PRELIMINARY DESIGN 22
7 POWER AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 28
8 CONDITIONS FOR OPTIMUM PRACTICE 33
9 RUNNING AND MAINTENANCE 35
10 LIFT ENQUIRY OR INVITATION TO TENDER 35
11 ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER AND SUBSEQUENT PROCEDURE 37
12 CO-ORDINATION OF SITE WORK 38
13 PROCEDURE FOLLOWING TEST, INCLUDING INSPECTION AND 39
MAINTENANCE
14 ESCALATORS 40
LIST OF STANDARDS 42
FOREWORD
This Section was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983. This Section covers the essential
requirements for installation of lifts and escalators in buildings. This Section shall, however, be read with
Part 4 Fire and Life Safety from fire safety requirements point of view. The major changes in the last revision
were addition of outline dimensions of different types of lifts and detailed requirements of escalators in buildings.
Emphasis was laid on coordination between the engineer/architect and the lift manufacturer to arrive at the
number and position of lifts for attaining optimum efficiency in serving the building with safety.
As a result of experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of the Code and feedback data received as
well as revision of Indian Standards on which this Section was based, a need was felt to revise this Section. This
revision has, therefore, been prepared to take care of these. The significant changes incorporated in this revision
includes:
a) New clauses/recommendations have been added on Building Management System.
b) New clauses have been added on firemans lift, infra-red light curtain safety and Braille button for blind
people.
c) The provisions have been updated as per the revised standards on lifts on which this Section is based.
d) The list of Indian Standards as good practices/accepted standards has been updated.
The information contained in this Section is largely based on the following Indian Standards:
IS No. Title
962 : 1989 Code of practice for architectural and building drawings (second revision)
4591 : 1968 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of escalators
14665 Specification for electric traction lifts:
(Part 1) : 2000 Guidelines for outline dimensions of passenger, goods, service and hospital
lifts
(Part 2/Sec 1 & 2) : 2000 Code of practice for installation, operation and maintenance, Section 1
Passenger and goods lifts, Section 2 Service lifts
(Part 3/Sec 1 & 2) : 2000 Safety rules, Section 1 Passenger and goods lifts, Section 2 Service lifts
(Part 4/Sec 1 to 9) : 2001 Components, Section 1 Lift buffers, Section 2 Lift guide rails and guide shoes,
Section 3 Lift carframe, car, counterweight and suspension, Section 4 Lift
safety gears and governors, Section 5 Lift retiring cam, Section 6 Lift doors
and locking devices and contacts, Section 7 Lift machines and brakes,
Section 8 Lift wire ropes, Section 9 Controller and operating devices
(Part 5) : 1999 Inspection manual
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
2.26 Escalator Machine The mechanism and other 2.40.1 Levelling Device, Lift Car Any mechanism
equipment in connection therewith used for moving which either automatically or under the control of the
the escalator operator, moves the car within the levelling zone
towards the landing only, and automatically stops it at
2.27 Floor Levelling Switch A switch for bringing the landing.
the car to level at slow speed in case of double speed
or variable speed machines. 2.40.2 Levelling Device, One Way Automatic A
device which corrects the car level only in case of under
2.28 Floor Selector A mechanism forming a part run of the car but will not maintain the level during
of the control equipment, in certain automatic lifts, loading and unloading.
designed to operate controls which cause the lift car to
stop at the required landings. 2.40.3 Levelling Device, Two-Way Automatic
Maintaining A device which corrects the car level
2.29 Floor Stopping Switch A switch or
on both under run and over-run and maintains the level
combination of switches arranged to bring the car to
during loading and unloading.
rest automatically at or near any pre-selected landing.
2.40.4 Levelling Device, Two Way Automatic Non-
2.30 Gearless Machine A lift machine in which
Maintaining A device which corrects the car level
the motive power is transmitted to the driving sheave
on both under run and over run but will not maintain
from the motor without intermediate reduction gearing
the level during loading and unloading.
and has the brake drum mounted directly on the motor
shaft. 2.41 Levelling Zone The limited distance above
or below a lift landing within which the levelling
2.31 Goods Lift A lift designed primarily for the
device may cause movement of the car towards the
transport of goods, but which may carry a lift attendant
landing.
or other persons necessary for the loading or unloading
of goods. 2.42 Lift An appliance designed to transport
persons or materials between two or more levels in a
2.32 Guide Rails The members used to guide the
vertical or substantially vertical direction by means of
movement of a lift car or counterweight in a vertical
a guided car or platform. The word elevator is also
direction.
synonymously used for lift.
2.33 Guide Rails Fixing The complete assy.
2.43 Lift Car The load carrying unit with its floor
comprising the guide rails bracket and its fastenings.
or platform, car frame and enclosing bodywork.
2.34 Guide Rails Shoe An attachment to the car
2.44 Lift Landing That portion of a building or
frame or counterweight for the purpose of guiding the
structure used for discharge of passengers or goods or
lift car or counter weight frame.
both into or from a lift car.
2.35 Hoisting Beam A beam, mounted immediately
below the machine room ceiling, to which lifting tackle 2.45 Lift Machine The part of the lift equipment
can be fixed for raising or lowering parts of the lift comprising the motor and the control gear therewith,
machine. reduction gear (if any), brake(s) and winding drum or
sheave, by which the lift car is raised or lowered.
2.36 Hospital Lift A lift normally installed in
a hospital/dispensary/clinic and designed to 2.46 Lift Pit The space in the lift well below the
accommodate one number bed/stretcher along its level of the lowest lift landing served.
depth, with sufficient space around to carry a minimum 2.47 Lift Well The unobstructed space within an
of three attendants in addition to the lift operator. enclosure provided for the vertical movement of the
c) The loads which the lift will impose on the required before completion to allow for
building structure, and the holes to be left in testing;
the machine room floor and cut-outs for wall k) The requirements for electrical supply
boxes for push-buttons and signals; feeders, etc;
d) The necessity for and type of insulation to m) The requirements for scaffolding in the lift
minimize the transmission of vibration and well and protection of the lift well prior to
noise to other parts of the building; and during installation of equipment; and
e) The special requirements of local authorities n) Delivery and storage of equipment.
and other requirements set out in the planning
permit; 3.2.2 Information to be Provided by Architect or
Engineer
f) The need for the builder to maintain accuracy
of building as to dimensions and in plumb; As a result of preliminary discussion (see also 6), the
g) The periods of time required for preparation drawings of the building should give the following
and approval of relevant drawings for particulars and finished sizes:
manufacturing and the installation of the lift a) Number, type and size of lifts and position of
equipment; lift well;
h) The requirements for fixing guide brackets b) Particulars of lift well enclosure;
to the building structure; c) Size, position, number and type of landing
j) The time at which electric power will be doors;
The minimum factor of safety for any part of the lift d) 600 mm.
shall not be less than five. Higher factor of safety for Where there is a projection below the ceiling of the
various parts shall be applicable in accordance with well and the projection is more than 500 mm, measured
accepted standards [8-5(3)]. horizontally from the centre line of the cross-head but
over the roof of the car, a minimum vertical clearance
4.6 Additional Requirements for Passenger and not less than that calculated above shall also be
Goods Lifts available between the roof of the car and the projection.
4.6.1 Bottom and Top Car Clearances Provided that the vertical clearance between any
4.6.1.1 Bottom car clearance equipment mounted on top of the car and the nearest
overhead obstruction shall be not less than the sum of
When the car rests on its fully compressed buffer there the three items (a), (b) and (c) as calculated above plus
shall be a vertical clearance of not less than 600 mm 150 mm.
between the pit floor and the buffer striker plate or the
lowest structural or mechanical part equipment or 4.6.2 Bottom Runby for Cars and Counterweights
device installed. The clearance shall be available 4.6.2.1 The bottom runby of cars and counterweights
beneath the whole area of the platform except for: shall be not less than the following:
a) guide shoes or rollers, safety jaw blocks, a) 150 mm where oil buffers are used;
platform aprons, guards of other equipment b) Where spring-buffers are used;
located within 300 mm measured horizontally
1) 150 mm for controls as in 2.12.4 to 2.12.8.
from the sides of the car platform; and
2) Not less than the following for controls
b) compensating sheaves.
as in 2.12.2 to 2.12.3.
Provided that in all the cases, including small cars, a Rated speed Runby
minimum clearance of 600 mm is available over a m/s mm
horizontal area of 800 mm 500 mm. Up to 0.125 75
Provided also that in all the cases, when the car rests on 0.125 to 0.25 150
its fully compressed buffers, there shall be a vertical 0.25 to 0.50 225
clearance of not less than 50 mm between any part of 0.50 to 1 300
the car and any obstruction of device mounted in the 4.6.3 Maximum Bottom Runby
pit.
In no case shall the maximum bottom runby exceed
4.6.1.2 Top car clearance the following:
The vertical clearance between the car cross-head and a) 600 mm for cars; and
the nearest overhead obstruction within 500 mm b) 900 mm for counterweights.
measured horizontally to the nearest part of the
crosshead when the car platform is level with the top 4.6.4 Top Counterweight Clearances
landing, shall be not less than the sum of the following; The top counterweight clearance shall be not less than
a) The bottom counterweight runby. the sum of the following four items:
b) The stroke of the counterweight buffer used. a) the bottom car runby;
Persons kg A B C D E
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
4 272 1 100 700 1 900 1 300 700, Min
6 408 1 100 1 000 1 900 1 700 700, Min
8 544 1 300 1 100 1 900 1 900 800
10 680 1 300 1 350 1 900 2 100 800
13 884 2 000 1 100 2 500 1 900 900
16 1 088 2 000 1 300 2 500 2 100 1 000
20 1 360 2 000 1 500 2 500 2 400 1 000
Speed in m/s Up to 0.70 > 0.70 1.00 > 1.00 1.50 > 1.50 1.75 > 1.75 2.00 > 2.00 2.50
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Pit depth 1 350 1 500 1 600 2 150 2 200 2 500
Overhead 4 200 4 250 4 800 4 800 5 200 5 400
Machine-room D + 2 000 D + 2 500
Depth
Machine-room C + 1 000 C + 1 200 C + 1 500
Width
NOTES
1 The total overhead dimension has been calculated on the basis of car height of 2.3 m.
2 In case of manually operated doors, clear entrance will be reduced by the amount of projection of handle on the landing door.
3 All dimensions given above for lifts having centre opening power operated doors with counterweight at rear, are recommended
dimensions primarily for architects and building planners. Any variations mutually agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser
are permitted. However, variation in:
a) Car inside dimensions shall be within the maximum area limits specified in accordance with accepted standards [8-5(4)].
b) Entrance width on higher side is permitted.
c) Entrance width on lower side is permitted up to 100 mm subject to minimum of 700 mm.
4 Dimensions of pit depth and overhead may differ in practice as per individual manufacturers design depending upon load, speed
and drive. Recommended dimensions for pit depth, overhead and machine-room for different lift speeds are given in Table 1A.
However, the pit depth and overhead shall be such as to conform to the requirements of bottom clearance and top clearance in
accordance with the accepted standards [8-5(5)].
Persons kg A B C D E
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
15 1 020 1 000 2 400 1 800 3 000 800
20 1 360 1 300 2 400 2 200 3 000 1 200
26 1 768 1 600 2 400 2 400 3 000 1 200
NOTES
1 The total headroom has been calculated on the basis of a car height of 2.2 m.
2 In the case of manually-operated doors, clear entrance will be reduced by the amount of projection of handle on the landing door.
3 Although 15 persons capacity lift is not standard one, this is included to cover lifts of smaller capacity which can be used in small
hospitals.
4 All dimensions given above are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building planners. Any variations mutually
agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser are permitted. However, variation in car inside dimensions shall be within the
maximum area limits in accordance with accepted standards [8-5(4)].
5 Dimensions of pit depth and overhead may differ in practice as per individual manufacturers design depending upon load, speed
and drive. However, the pit depth and overhead shall be such as to conform to the requirements of bottom clearance and top clearance
in accordance with accepted standards [8-5(5)].
NOTE Entrance width E is based on assumption of provision of vertical biparting doors (no car door is
normally provided).
6.5.4 The total load on overhead beams shall be 6.6.3.6 Heights of stairs over 5 m in length shall be
assumed as equal to all equipment resting on the beams provided with intermediate landings.
plus twice the maximum load suspended from the NOTE Where compliance with any of the requirements
beams. specified in 6.61 to 6.6.3 is impracticable, applications for
variation shall be made to the Authority, who may, vary such
6.5.5 The factor of safety for all overhead beams and requirements.
a) Pit lift well and machine room complete and 12.5 Service of Other Trades
weather tight. Pit dry and watertight including The lift erector will require the services of joiners,
tanking if necessary and clear of rubbish. bricklayers and other trades as the work proceeds, and
NOTE In certain systems building and buildings it is essential that the lift erector should give due notice
of over 10 floors, it may be necessary by prior to the building contractor of the demands to be made
agreement to start erection before the top portion of
the lift well has been constructed, in which case the on other trades, so that he can plan accordingly.
general contractor should temporarily deck out and
waterproof. 12.6 Scaffolding, Fencing Etc
b) Preparation for lift fixings in pit, lift well and Scaffolding timbers, rollers and similar items required
machine room complete. If built-in wall for the unloading and erection of the lift, and also for
inserts are used, these should be placed the proper guarding and close fencing of the lift well
accurately and slots cleared of any seepage should be provided, erected and maintained by the
of concrete. building contractor.
c) Steelwork items finally grouted or otherwise
The lift well should not be used as a means of disposal
fixed in position after checking for correct
for rubbish from the upper floors. Such practice is
position by the lift maker (for example lift
dangerous.
well trimmers and machine beams).
d) Scaffolding in position, as arranged with The lift well should be handed over to the lift contractor
the lift maker, lift well etc. properly fenced complete, and no other trades should be allowed to
and guarded in accordance with current work above or below during the whole time of erection
regulation. of the lift, except by arrangement with the lift
e) Entrance preparations completed, including contractor.
preparations for door frames, push boxes and
12.7 System Building Sites
indicators. In many cases, progress can be
facilitated by omitting the front walls of the If the building programme allows insufficient time for
lift well until the lift car, doors, etc. are lift erection in conventional fashion after the well is
installed. completely built special procedures are needed. This
f) Datum line (in elevation) established at each applies particularly to industrialized and multi-storey
floor to enable the lift maker to set metal sills buildings.
and frames in relation to finished floor levels. Methods differ in detail. In most cases however the
building contractors crane is used to lower and
12.2 Delivery of Material
position pre-assembled batches of lift equipment into
The lift maker should advise the contractor when the progressively rising top of the lift well.
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards car, counterweight and
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The suspension, Section 4 Lift
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time safety gears and governors,
of enforcement of the code. The standards listed may Section 5 Lift retiring cam,
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance Section 6 Lift doors and
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the locking devices and contacts,
Code. Section 7 Lift machines and
IS No. Title brakes, Section 8 Lift wire
ropes, Section 9 Controller
(1) 14671 : 1999 Code of practice for and operating devices
installation and maintenance
of hyraulic lifts (4) 14665 (Part 3/ Electric traction lifts: Part 3
Sec 1 & 2) : 2000 Safety rules, Section 1
(2) 14665 Electric traction lifts: Passenger and goods lifts,
(Part 1) : 2000 Guidelines for outline Section 2 service lifts
dimensions of passenger, (5) 14665 (Part 2/ Electric traction lifts: Part 2
goods, service and hospital Sec 1 & 2) : 2000 Code of practice for
lifts installation, operation and
(Part 3/Sec 1 & 2) : Safety rules, Section 1 maintenance, Section 1
2000 Passenger and goods lifts, Passenger and goods lifts,
Section 2 Service lifts Section 2 Service lifts
(Part 4/Sec 1 to 9) : Components, Section 1 Lift (6) 962 : 1989 Code of practice for
2001 Buffers, Section 2 Lift guide architectural and building
rails and guide shoes, drawings (second revision)
Section 3 Lift carframe, (7) 2309 : 1989 Code of practice for the
car, counterweight and protection of buildings and
suspension, Section 4 Lift allied structures against
safety gears and governors, lightning (second revision)
Section 5 Lift retiring cam,
Section 6 Lift doors and (8) 1950 : 1962 Code of practice for sound
locking devices and contacts, insulation of non-industrial
Section 7 Lift machines and buildings
brakes, Section 8 Lift wire (9) 14665 (Part 3/ Electric traction lifts: Part 3
ropes, Section 9 Controller Sec 1 & 2) : 2000 Safety rules Section 1
and operating devices Passenger and goods lifts,
(3) 14665 (Part 4/ Electric traction lifts: Section 2 Service lifts
Sec 1 to 9) : 2001 Components, Section 1 Lift (10) 3043 : 1987 Code of practice for earthing
buffers, Section 2 Lift guide (11) 4591 : 1968 Code of practice for
rails and guide shoes, installation and maintenance
Section 3 Lift carframe, of escalators
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 7
2 TERMINOLOGY 7
3 GENERAL 16
4 WATER SUPPLY 18
5 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 41
6 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 79
LIST OF STANDARDS 87
FOREWORD
This Section covers the requirements of both water supply as well as drainage and sanitation.
The water supply provisions covered in this Section encompass the requirements of water supply, plumbing
connected to public water supply, design of water supply systems, principles of conveyance and distribution of
water within the premises, hot water supply system, inspection and maintenance of water supply systems. It also
covers design of water supply systems in high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions.
The drainage and sanitation provisions covered in this Section encompass the drainage and sanitation requirements
of buildings, design, construction and maintenance of drains inside buildings and from the buildings up to the
connection to the public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal system, cesspool or to other approved
point of disposal/treatment work. It also covers drainage systems peculiar to high altitudes and/or sub-zero
temperature regions of the country.
In the first version of the Code formulated in 1970, three separate sections of Part 9 Plumbing Services, were
brought out, namely, Section 1 Water Supply, Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation, and Section 3 Gas Supply.
These sections were subsequently revised in 1983. The major changes incorporated in the first revision in Section 1
Water Supply, were:
a) Rationalization of definitions and addition of definitions for more terms.
b) Universal pipe friction diagram and nomogram of Hazen and Willams equation were added for discharge
computation, deleting the discharge curves based on Chezys formula.
c) A detailed clause giving guidance on the design of water supply system for multi-storeyed buildings
was introduced.
d) In regard to storage tanks for flushing, the requirements were modified to indicate that no separate
storage need be provided for flushing and domestic purposes for health reasons and a single storage
tank may be provided.
e) Provisions relating to domestic hot water supply installations were modified/amplified.
f) A detailed clause covering recommendations to be considered while planning and designing water supply
systems peculiar to high altitude and/or sub-zero temperature regions of the country, were introduced.
g) Requirements relating to inspection, testing and maintenance applicable to hot water supply system
were added.
The major changes incorporated in the first revision in Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation were:
a) Rationalization of definitions.
b) The requirements for fitments for drainage and sanitation in the case of buildings other than residences
have been modified.
c) A table for sanitation facilities in fruit and vegetable markets has been added.
d) A table giving detailed guidance regarding the selection of plumbing system, depending on the nature
of drainage load in buildings and height of buildings, has been introduced.
e) Provision relating to safeguards to be adopted in single stack system have been amplified.
f) The values of gradients, pipe sizes and the corresponding discharges have been modified.
g) Sizes of manholes/inspection chambers have been rationalized.
h) The sizing of rain water pipe for roof drainage has been modified to take into account rainfall intensities
and recommend sizes on a more rational basis.
j) Provisions for drainage and sanitation system peculiar to high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature
regions of the country have been added.
k) Requirements of the refuse chute system have been covered.
2.1 For the purpose of this Section, the following 2.1.10 Barrel This portion of a pipe in which
definitions shall apply. the diameter and wall thickness remain uniform
throughout.
2.1.1 Access Panel Removable panel mounted in a
frame, normally secured with screws and mounted in 2.1.11 Base The lowest portion or lowest point of
a wall or ceiling, to provide access to concealed a stack of vertical pipe.
appurtenances or items which may require maintenance.
2.1.12 Battery of Fixtures Any group of two or more
2.1.2 Air Gap The distance between the lowest similar adjacent fixtures which discharge into a
point of a water inlet or feed pipe to an appliance and common horizontal waste or soil pipe.
the spill-over level (or the overflowing level) of the
appliance. 2.1.13 Bedding The material on which the pipe is
laid and which provides support for the pipe. Bedding
2.1.3 Air Valve A valve that releases air from a can be concrete, granular material or the prepared
pipeline automatically without loss of water, or trench bottom.
introduce air into a line automatically if the internal
pressure becomes less than that of the atmosphere. 2.1.14 Benching Slopping surfaces constructed on
2.1.18 Branch Ventilating Pipe (BVP) A pipe, one 2.1.29 Chute A vertical pipe system passing from
end of which is connected to the system adjacent to floor to floor provided with ventilation and inlet
the trap of an appliance and the other to a main openings for receiving refuse from successive floors
ventilating pipe or a drain-ventilating pipe. It is fitted and ending at the ground floor on the top of the
to prevent loss of water seal from a trap owing to partial collecting chambers.
vacuum, back-pressure, or surging caused by air
2.1.30 Cistern A fixed container for water in which
movement within the pipe system. It also provides
water is at atmospheric pressure. The water is usually
ventilation for the branch waste pipe.
supplied through a float operated valve.
2.1.19 Branch Waste Pipe (BWP) A pipe connecting
2.1.31 Cleaning Eye An access opening in a pipe
one or more waste appliances to the main waste pipe.
or pipe fitting arranged to facilitate the cleaning of
2.1.20 Building Drain, Combined A building drain obstructions and fitted with removable cover.
which conveys both sewage and storm water or other
2.1.32 Clear Waste Water Cooling water and
drainage.
condensate drainage from refrigeration and air
2.1.21 Building Drain, Sanitary A building drain conditioning equipment, cooled condensate from steam
which conveys sewage and sullage only. heating systems, cooled boiler blow-down water, waste
water drainage from equipment rooms and other areas
2.1.22 Building Drain, Storm A building drain where water is used without an appreciable addition
which conveys storm water or other drainage but no of oil, gasoline, solvent, acid, etc, and treated effluent
sewage. in which impurities have been reduced below a
minimum concentration considered harmful.
2.1.23 Building Sewer That part of the horizontal
piping of a drainage system which extends from the 2.1.33 Collection Chamber A compartment
end of the building drain and which receives the situated at the lower end of the chute for collecting
discharge of the building drain and conveys it to a and housing the refuse during the period between two
public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage- successive cleanings.
disposal system or approved point of disposal.
2.1.34 Communication Pipe That part of a service
2.1.24 Building Sub-Drain That portion of a pipe which vests in the water undertakes. It starts at
drainage system which cannot drain by gravity in the the water main and terminate at a point which differs
building sewer. according to the circumstances of the case.
2.1.25 Building Trap A device, fitting or assembly 2.1.35 Connection The junction of a foul water
of fittings installed in the building drain to prevent drain, surface water drain or sewer from building or
building with public sewer treatment works, public used for supply of water and which is not the property
sewer, private sewer, individual sewage-disposal of the Authority (see Fig. 1).
system, cess pool, soakaway or to other approved point
2.1.38 Cover
of disposal/treatment work.
a) A removable plate for permitting access to a
2.1.36 Consumer Any person who uses or is pipe, fitting, vessel or appliance.
supplied water or on whose application such water is
b) The vertical distance between the top of the
supplied by the Authority.
barrel of a buried pipe or other construction
2.1.37 Consumers Pipe The portion of service pipe and the surface of the ground.
2.1.44 Direct Tap A tap which is connected to a 2.1.55 Fixture Unit A quantity in terms of which
supply pipe and is subject to pressure from the water the load producing effects on the plumbing system of
main. different kinds of plumbing fixtures is expressed on
some arbitrarily chosen scale.
2.1.45 Downtake Tap A tap connected to a system
of piping not subject to water pressure from the water 2.1.56 Fixture Unit Drainage A measure of
main. probable discharge into the drainage system by various
types of plumbing fixtures. The drainage fixture unit
2.1.46 Drain A conduit, channel or pipe for the value for a particular fixture depends on its volume
carriage of storm water, sewage, waste water or other rate of drainage discharge, on the time duration of a
water-borne wastes in a building drainage system. single drainage operation and on the average time
between successive operations.
2.1.47 Drain Ventilating Pipe (DVP) A pipe
installed to provide flow of air to or from a drain to 2.1.57 Float Operated Valve Ball valves or ball
prevent undue concentration of foul air in the drain. taps and equilibrium valves operated by means of a
The main soil pipe or main waste pipe may serve as float.
drain ventilating pipe wherever their upper portions,
which do not receive discharges, are extended to the 2.1.58 Flushing Cistern A cistern provided with a
roof level and let open to air. device for rapidly discharging the contained water and
used in connection with a sanitary appliance for the
2.1.48 Drainage The removal of any liquid by a purpose of cleaning the appliance and carrying away
system constructed for the purpose. its contents into a drain.
2.1.49 Drainage Work The design and construction NOTE The nominal size of a cistern is the quantity of water
of a system of drainage. discharged per flush.
2.1.50 Drop Connection A length of conduit 2.1.59 Formation The finished level of the
installed vertically immediately before its connection excavation at the bottom of a trench or heading
to a sewer or to another drain. prepared to receive the permanent work.
2.1.51 Drop Manhole A manhole installed in a 2.1.60 French Drain or Rubble Drain A shallow
sewer where the elevation of the incoming sewer trench filled with coarse rubble, clinker, or similar
considerably exceeds that of the outgoing sewer; a material with or without field drain pipes.
vertical waterway outside the manhole is provided to
divert the waste from the upper to the lower level so 2.1.61 Frost Line The line joining the points of
that it does not fall freely into the manhole except at greatest depths below ground level up to which the
peak rate of flow. moisture in the soil freezes.
2.1.52 Effective Opening The minimum cross- 2.1.62 General Washing Place A washing place
sectional area at the point of water supply, measured provided with necessary sanitary arrangement and
or expressed in terms of: common to more than one tenement.
2.1.69 Highway Authority The public body in 2.1.86 Non-Service Laterine Other than service
which is vested, or which is the owner of, a highway latrine.
repairable by the inhabitants collectively; otherwise
2.1.87 Offset A pipe fitting used to connect two
the body or persons responsible for the upkeep of the
pipes whose axes are parallel but not in line.
highway.
2.1.70 Horizontal Pipe Any pipe of fitting which 2.1.88 Period of Supply The period of the day or
makes an angle of more than 45 with the vertical. night during which water supply is made available to
the consumer.
2.1.71 Hot Water Tank A vessel for storing hot
water under pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. 2.1.89 Pipe System The system to be adopted will
depend on the type and planning of the building in
2.1.72 Inlet Hopper A receptacle fitting for receiving which it is to be installed and will be one of the
refuse from each floor and dropping it into the chute. following:
2.1.73 Inspection Chamber A water-tight chamber
a) Single stack system (see Fig. 2) The one-
constructed in any house-drainage system which takes
pipe system in which there is no trap
wastes from gully traps and disposes of to manhole
ventilation.
with access for inspection and maintenance.
b) Single stack Partially Vented A via
2.1.74 Interceptor A device designed and installed media between the one-pipe system and the
so as to separate and retain deleterious, hazardous or single stack system (see one-pipe system,
undesirable matter from normal wastes and permit partially ventilated).
normal sewage or liquid wastes to discharge into the c) One-pipe system (see Fig. 3) The system
disposal terminal by gravity. of plumbing in which the wastes from the
2.1.75 Interceptor Manhole or Interceptor Chamber sinks, baths and wash basins, and the soil pipe
A manhole incorporating an intercepting trap and branches are all collected into one main pipe,
providing means of access thereto. which is connected, directly to the drainage
system. Gully traps and waste pipes are
2.1.76 Invert The lowest point of the internal completely dispersed with, but all the traps
surface of a pipe or channel at any cross-section. of the water closets, basins, etc, are
2.1.77 Junction Pipe A pipe incorporating one or completely ventilated to preserve the water
more branches. seal.
d) One-pipe system Partially vented (also
2.1.78 Lagging Thermal insulation or pipes.
called single stack, partially ventilated) A
2.1.79 Licensed Plumber A person licensed under system in which there is one soil pipe into
the provisions of this Code. which all water closets, baths, sinks, and
2.1.99 Service Laterine A laterine from which the 2.1.114 Sullage See 2.1.129.
excreta are removed by manual agency and not by 2.1.115 Supply Pipe So much of any service pipe
water carriage. as is not a communication pipe.
2.1.100 Service Pipe Pipe that runs between the 2.1.116 Supports Hangers and anchors or devices
distribution main in the street and the riser in case of a for supporting and securing pipe and fittings to walls,
multi-storeyed building or the water meter in the case ceilings, floors or structural members.
of an individual house and is subject to water pressure
from such main. 2.1.117 Surface Water Natural water from the
ground surface, paved areas and roofs.
2.1.101 Sewer A pipe or conduit, generally closed,
but normally not flowing full for carrying sewage and/ 2.1.118 Surface Water Drain A drain conveying
or other waste liquids. surface water including storm water.
2.1.102 Slop Hopper (Slop Sink) A hopper shaped 2.1.119 Systems of Drainage
sink, with a flushing run and outlet similar to those of a) Combined system A system in which
a WC pan, for the reception and discharge of human foul water (sewage) and surface water are
excreta. conveyed by the same sewers and drains.
2.1.103 Soakaway A pit, dug into permeable ground b) Separate system A system in which
lined to form a covered perforated chamber or filled foul water (sewage) and surface water are
with hard-core, to which liquid is led, and from which conveyed by the separate sewers and
it may soak away into the ground. drains.
c) Partially separate system A modification
2.1.104 Soffit (Crown) The highest point of the
of the separate system in which part of the
internal surface of a sewer or culvert at any cross-
surface water is conveyed by the foul
section.
(sanitary) sewers and drains.
2.1.105 Soil Appliances A sanitary appliance for
2.1.120 Trade Effluent Any liquid either with or
the collection and discharge of excretory matter.
without particles of matter in suspension which is
2.1.106 Soil Pipe A pipe that conveys the discharge wholly or in part produced in the course of any trade
of water closets or fixtures having similar functions, or industry, at trade premise. It includes farm wastes
with or without the discharges from other fixtures. but does not include domestic sewage.
2.1.129 Waste-Water (Sullage) The discharge from Plumbing system shall be designed, installed and
wash basins, sinks and similar appliances, which does adjusted to use the optimum quantity of water
not contain human or animal excreta. consistent with proper performance and cleaning.
2.1.130 Water Main (Street Main) A pipe laid by 3.1.4 Safety Devices
the water undertakers for the purpose of giving a Plumbing system shall be designed and installed with
general supply of water as distinct from a supply to safety devices to safeguard against dangers from
individual consumers and includes any apparatus used contamination, explosion, overheating, etc.
in connection with such a pipe.
3.1.5 Plumbing Fixtures
2.1.131 Water Outlet A water outlet, as used in
It is recommended that each family dwelling unit
connection with the water distributing system, is the
should have at least one water closet, one lavatory,
discharge opening for the water (a) to a fitting; (b) to
one kitchen wash place or a sink, and one bathing wash
atmospheric pressure (except into an open tank which
place or shower to meet the basic requirements of
is part of the water supply system); and (c) to any water-
sanitation and personal hygiene.
operated device or equipment requiring water to
operate. 3.1.6 Drainage System
2.1.132 Water Seal The water in a trap, which acts The drainage system shall be designed, installed and
as a barrier to the passage of air through the trap. maintained to guard against fouling, deposit of solids
Table 1 Water Requirements for Buildings 4.1.4 Water Supply for Fire Fighting Purposes
Other than Residences
4.1.4.1 The Authority shall make provision to meet
(Clause 4.1.2)
the water supply requirements for fire fighting in the
Sl Type of Building Consumption city/area, depending on the population density and
No. per Day, litres types of occupancy.
(1) (2) (3)
4.1.4.2 Provision shall be made by the owner of the
i) Factories where bath rooms are required 45 per head
to be provided
building for water supply requirements for fire fighting
ii) Factories where no bath rooms are 30 per head purposes within the building, depending upon the
required to be provided height and occupancy of the building, in conformity
iii) Hospital (including laundry): with the requirements laid down in Part 4 Fire and
a) Number of beds not exceeding 100 340 per head
b) Number of beds exceeding 100 450 per head Life Safety.
iv) Nurses homes and medical quarters 135 per head
v) Hostels 135 per head
4.1.4.3 The requirements regarding water supply in
vi) Hotel (up to 4 Star) 180 per head storage tanks, capacity of fire pumps, arrangements of
vii) Hotel (5 Star and above) 320 per head wet riser-cum-downcomer and wet riser installations
viii) Offices 45 per head for buildings above 15 m in height, depending upon
ix) Restaurants 70 per seat
x) Cinemas, concert halls and theatres 15 per seat the occupancy use, shall be in accordance with Part 4
xi) Schools: Fire and Life Safety.
a) Day schools 45 per head
b) Boarding schools 135 per head 4.1.5 Water Supply for Other Purposes
NOTE For calculating water demand for visitors a 4.1.5.1 Water supply in many buildings is also
consumption of 15 litres per head, per day may be taken.
required for many other applications other than
1)
Unit rate of flow = Effective fixture units.
of similar studies in India, the curves based on Hunters 4.7 Distribution Systems in Multi-Storeyed
study may be followed. In making use of these curves, Buildings
special allowances are made as follows:
4.7.1 There are four basic methods of distribution of
a) Demands for service sinks are ignored in water to a multi-storeyed buildings.
calculating the total fixture demand.
a) Direct supply from mains to ablutionary taps
b) Demands of supply outlets such as hose
and kitchen with WCs and urinals supplied
connections and air conditioners through
by overhead tanks.
which water flows more or less continuously
over a considerable length of time must be b) Direct Pumping Systems
added to the probable flow rather than the c) Hydro-Pneumatic Systems
fixture demand. d) Overhead Tanks Distribution
c) Fixtures supplied with both hot and cold water 4.7.2 Direct Supply System
exert reduced demands upon main hot water
and cold water branches (not fixture branches). This system is adopted when adequate pressure is
available round the clock at the topmost floor. With
4.6.4 Pipe Size Computation
limited pressure available in most city mains, water
Commercially available standard sizes of pipes are only from direct supply is normally not available above two
to be used against the sizes arrived at by actual design. or three floors. For details of this system, reference
Therefore, several empirical formulae are used, even may be made to good practice [9-1(5)] may be referred.
though they give less accurate results. The Hazen and
4.7.3 Direct Pumping
Williams formula and the charts based on the same
may be used without any risk of inaccuracy in view of 4.7.3.1 Water is pumped directly into the distribution
the fact that the pipes normally to be used for water system without the aid of any overhead tank, except
supply are of smaller sizes. Nomogram of Hazen and for flushing purposes. The pumps are controlled by a
Williams equation has been provided in Annex F. pressure switch installed on the line. Normally a jockey
4.7.5.3 Water collected in the overhead tank is a) Service mains shall be of adequate size to give
distributed to the various parts of the building by a set the required rate of flow.
of pipes located generally on the terrace. b) The mains shall be divided into sections by
4.10.4 No pump or similar apparatus, the purpose of 4.11.2 The design of the pipe work shall be such that
which is to increase the pressure in or rate of flow from there is no possibility of backflow towards the source
a supply pipe or any fitting or appliance connected to of supply from any cistern or appliance, whether by
a supply pipe, shall be connected unless the prior siphonage or otherwise. Reflux non-return valves shall
written permission of the water supplier has been not be relied upon to prevent such backflow.
obtained in each instance. 4.11.3 Where a supply of less satisfactory water than
The use of such a pump or similar apparatus is likely wholesome water becomes inevitable as an alternative
to lead to pressure reduction in the upstream pipe work or is required to be mixed with the latter, it shall be
which, if significant, increase the risk of backflow from delivered only into a cistern and by a pipe or fitting
other fittings. discharging into the air gap at a height above the top
edge of the cistern equal to twice its nominal bore and
4.10.5 The water shall not come in contact with in no case less than 150 mm. It is necessary to maintain
unsuitable materials of construction. a definite air gap in all appliances or taps used in water-
4.10.6 No pipe or fitting shall be laid in, on or through closets.
land fill, refuse, an ashpit, sewer, drain, cesspool or 4.11.4 All pipe work shall be so designed, laid or fixed
refuse chute, or any manhole connected with them. and maintained as to remain completely water-tight,
4.10.7 No pipe susceptible to deterioration by contact thereby avoiding wastage, damage to property and the
with any substance shall be laid or installed in a place risk of contamination.
where such deterioration is likely to occur. No pipe 4.11.5 No water supply line shall be laid or fixed so
that is permeable to any contaminant shall be laid or as to pass into or through any sewer, scour outlet or
installed in any position where permeation is likely to drain or any manhole connected therewith nor through
occur. any ash pit or manure pit or any material of such nature
4.10.8 If a liquid (other than water) is used in any type that is likely to cause undue deterioration of the pipe,
of heating primary circuit, which transfers heat to water except where it is unavoidable.
for domestic use, the liquid shall be non-toxic and non- 4.11.5.1 Where the laying of any pipe through
corrosive. corrosive soil or previous material is unavoidable, the
4.10.9 A backflow prevention device shall be arranged piping shall be properly protected from contact with
or connected at or as near as practicable to each point such soil or material by being carried through an
of delivery and use of water. Appliances with built-in exterior cast iron tube or by some other suitable means
backflow prevention shall be capable of passing the as approved by the Authority. Any existing piping or
test. All backflow prevention devices shall be installed fitting laid or fixed, which does not comply with the
so that they are accessible for examination, repair or above requirements, shall be removed immediately by
replacement. Such devices shall be capable of being the consumer and relaid by him in conformity with
tested periodically by the Authority to ensure that the the above requirements and to the satisfaction of the
device is functioning efficiently and no backflow is Authority.
occurring at any time. 4.11.5.2 Where lines have to be laid in close proximity
to electric cables or in corrosive soils, adequate
4.11 Conveyance and Distribution of Water Within
precautions/protection should be taken to avoid
the Premises
corrosion.
4.11.1 Basic Principles
4.11.6 Underground piping shall be laid at such a
Wholesome water supply provided for drinking and depth that it is unlikely to be damaged by frost or traffic
culinary purposes shall not be liable to contamination loads and vibrations. It shall not be laid in ground liable
from any less satisfactory water. There shall, therefore, to subsidence, but where such ground cannot be
be no cross-connection whatsoever between the avoided, special precautions shall be taken to avoid
4.13.2.1 The design of hot water supply system and Sl No. Fixtures Rate of Flow litres/min
its appliances shall be based on the temperatures at (1) (2) (3)
which water is normally required for the various uses, i) Bath tub 22.5
namely: ii) Kitchen sink 18
iii) Wash basin 7
Scalding 65C iv) Shower (spray type) 7
Sink 60C
Hot bath 43C as run, for use at 41C 4.13.5 Design of Storage Vessel
Warm bath 37C Storage tanks shall be oblong or cylindrical in shape
Tepid bath 29.5C and shall be installed, preferably with the long side
4.13.2.2 In order to minimize the danger of scalding, vertical in order to assist the effective stratification or
precipitation of scale from hard water, standing heat layering of hot or cold water. The ratio of height to
losses, risk of steam formation and the possibility of width or diameter shall not be less than 2:1. An inlet
damage to porcelain or other fittings and to surface baffle should preferably be fitted near the cold inflow
finishes, a storage temperature of 60C is recommended. pipe in order to spread the incoming cold water.
If storage capacity is limited, a higher temperature up 4.13.6 Materials for Storage Vessel and Pipes
to 65C may be adopted when soft water is used.
4.13.6.1 Under no circumstances shall ungalvanized
4.13.3 Storage Capacity (black) mild steel pipes and fittings, such as sockets,
The size of the storage vessel is governed by the bushes, etc, be used in any part of a hot water
Table 10 Factories
(Clause 5.2.5.1)
Sl Fixtures Offices/Visitors Workers
No
Male Female Male Female
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Water-closets 1 for up to 25 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12
(Workers & Staff) 2 for 16-35 2 for 16-25 2 for 16-35 2 for 13-25
3 for 36-65 3 for 26-40 3 for 36-65 3 for 26-40
4 for 66-100 4 for 41-57 4 for 66-100 4 for 41-57
5 for 58-77 5 for 58-77
6 for 78-100 6 for 78-100
For persons 101-200 add 3% 5% 3% 5%
For persons over 200 add 2.5% 4% 2.50% 4%
ii) Ablution tap 1 in each water-closet 1 in each water-closet
1 in each water-closet 1 in each water-closet
iii) Urinals Nil up to 6 Nil up to 6
1 for 7-20 1 for 7-20
2 for 21-45 2 for 21-45
3 for 46-70 3 for 46-70
4 for 71-100 4 for 71-100
For persons 101-200 add 3% 3%
For persons over 200 add 2.50% 2.50%
iv) Washbasins 1 per 25 or part thereof 1 per 25 or part thereof 1 per 25 or part thereof 1 per 25 or part thereof
Washbasins in rows or troughs and taps spaced 750 mm c/c
v) Drinking water fountain 1 per every 100 or part thereof with minimum 1 per every 100 or part thereof with minimum
one on each floor one on each floor
vi) Cleaners sink 1 on each floor 1 on each floor 1 on each floor 1 on each floor
vii) Showers/Bathing rooms As per trade requirements
viii) Emergency shower and eye 1 per every shop floor per 500 persons
wash fountain
NOTE For factories requiring workers to be engaged in dirty and dangerous operations or requiring them to being extremely clean
and sanitized conditions additional and separate (if required so) toilet facilities and if required by applicable Industrial and Safety Laws
and the Factories Act must be provided in consultation with the user.
NOTES
1 Some WCs may be European style if desired.
2 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third.
NOTES
1 Some WCs may be European style if desired.
2 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third.
NOTES
1 Some WCs may be European style if desired.
2 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third.
3 Provision for additional and special hospital fittings where required shall be made.
ii) Water-closets 1 per 25 persons or part thereof 1 per 15 persons or part thereof
i) Water-closets 1 per 4 persons or part 1 per 4 persons or part 1 per 4 persons or part 1 per 4 persons or part
thereof thereof thereof thereof
2 for 16-35 2 for 13-25
ii) Ablution tap One in each water- One in each water- One in each water- One in each water-
closet closet closet closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the
vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii) Washbasins 1 per 8 persons or part thereof 1 per 8 persons or part thereof
iv) Bath (Showers) 1 per 4 persons or part thereof 1 per 4 to 6 persons or part thereof
v) Drinking water fountain 1 per 100 persons or part thereof, minimum 1 per 100 persons or part thereof, minimum
1 per floor 1 per floor
NOTES
1 Some WCs may be European style if desired.
2 For independent housing units fixtures shall be provided as for residences.
NOTES
1 Some WCs may be European style if desired.
2 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third.
3 Provision for additional and special fittings where required shall be made.
Table 18 Restaurants
(Clause 5.2.5.1)
Sl Fixtures Public Rooms Non-Residential Staff
No.
Male Female Male Female
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Water-closets 1 per 50 seats up to 200 2 per 50 seats up to 200 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12
Over 200 add at 1 per 100 Over 200 add at 1 per 100 2 for 16-35 2 for 13-25
or part thereof or part thereof 3 for 36-65 3 for 26-40
4 for 66-100 4 for 41-57
5 for 58-77
6 for 78-100
ii) Ablution tap One in each water- One in each water- One in each water- One in each water-
closet closet closet closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity
of water-closets and urinals
iii) Urinals 1 per 50 persons or Nil up to 6
part thereof 1 for 7 to 20
2 for 21-45
3 for 46-70
4 for 71-100
iv) Washbasins 1 per WC 1 per WC 1 per WC 1 per WC
v) Cleaners sink 1 per each restaurant
vi) Kitchen sink/Dish washer 1 per kitchen
NOTES
1 Some WCs may be European style if desired.
2 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third.
3 Provision for additional and special fittings where required shall be made.
NOTES
1 Some WCs may be European style if desired.
2 For teaching staff, the schedule of fixtures to be provided shall be the same as in case of office building.
Table 20 Hostels
(Clause 5.2.5.1)
Sl Fixtures Resident Non-Resident Visitor/Common Rooms
No.
Males Females Males Females Males Females
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Water-closets 1 per 8 or part 1 per 6 or part 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12 1 per 100 2 per 100
thereof thereof 2 for 16-35 2 for 13-25 up to 400 up to 200
3 for 36-65 3 for 26-40 Over 400 add at Over 200 add at
4 for 66-100 4 for 41-57 1 per 250 1 per 100
5 for 58-77
6 for 78-100
ii) Ablution tap One in each One in each One in each One in each One in each One in each
water-closet water-closet water-closet water-closet water-closet water-closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of
water-closets and urinals
iii) Urinals 1 per 25 or part Nil up to 6 1 per 50 or
thereof 1 for 7-20 part thereof
2 for 21-45
3 for 46-70
4 for 71-100
iv) Washbasins 1 per 8 persons 1 per 6 persons 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12 1 per WC/Urinal 1 per WC
or part thereof or part thereof 2 for 16-35 2 for 13-25
3 for 36-65 3 for 26-40
4 for 66-100 4 for 41-57
5 for 58-77
6 for 78-100
v) Bath/Showers 1 per 8 persons 1 per 6 persons
or part thereof or part thereof
vi) Cleaners sink 1 per each floor
i) 30 1 2 2 1
ii) 40 3 4 8 2
iii) 50 6 10 24 6
iv) 65 12 20 42 9
v) 75 20 30 60 16
vi) 100 160 240 500 90
vii) 125 360 540 1 100 200
viii) 150 620 960 1 900 350
ix) 200 1 400 2 200 3 600 600
x) 250 2 500 3 800 5 600 1 000
xi) 300 3 900 6 000 8 400 1 500
xii) 375 7 000
1)
Depending upon the probability of simultaneous use of appliances considering the frequency of use and peak discharge rate.
2)
Does not include branches of the building sewer.
1)
Includes branches of the building sewer.
5.5.3.6.3.2 Waste lines are normally laid beneath the All plumbing fixtures or other receptors receiving the
floor slab at a sufficient distance to provide adequate discharge of indirect waste pipes shall be of such shape
back-fill over the joints. Cleanouts are then brought and capacity as to prevent splashing or flooding and
up to floor level grade by pipe extension pieces. shall be located where they are readily accessible for
inspection and cleaning.
5.5.3.6.3.3 The size of the cleanout within a building
should be the same size as the piping up to 100 mm. 5.5.4.3 Pressure drainage connections
For larger size piping 100 mm cleanouts are adequate Indirect waste connections shall be provided for drains,
for their intended purpose. overflows or relief vents from the water supply system,
5.5.3.6.3.4 Cleanouts are suggested to be provided at and no piping or equipment carrying wastes or
the following locations: producing wastes or other discharges under pressure
shall be directly connected to any part of the drainage
a) Inside the building at a point of exit, Y system.
junction branch or a trap.
b) At every change of direction greater than 45. The above shall not apply to any approved sump pump
or to any approved plumbing fixture discharging
c) At the base of all stacks.
pressurized waste or device when the Authority has
d) At the horizontal header, receiving vertical been satisfied that the drainage system has the capacity
stacks and serving the purpose of offset to carry the waste from the pressurized discharge.
header.
5.5.5 Special Wastes
5.5.4 Indirect Wastes
5.5.5.1 General
5.5.4.1 General
Wastes having characteristics which may be detrimental
Waste, overflow and drain pipes from the following
to the pipes in which it is disposed as well as to the
types of equipment shall not be connected into any
persons handling it. Such wastes used in a building
drainage system directly to prevent backflow from the
need to be specially identified and a suitable and safe
drainage system into the equipment/installation:
method of its disposal installed to ensure that the piping
a) Plumbing and kitchen appliances. system is not corroded nor the health and safety of the
1) Underground or overhead water tanks. occupants is affected in any way.
A study of the possible chemical and corrosive and Waste exceeding temperature of 600 C should not be
toxic properties of wastes handled and disposed off in allowed in the grease trap. When so encountered it may
a laboratory need to be ascertained in advance. The be allowed to cool in a holding chamber before entering
relevant statutory rules and regulation regarding the the grease trap.
method of disposal of strong and objectionable wastes Oil and greases tend to solidify as they cool within the
shall be followed. drainage system. The solidified matter clogs the drains
All sinks, receptacles, traps, pipes, fittings and joints and the other matter in the waste stick to it due to the
shall of materials resistant to the liquids disposed off adhesion properties of the grease. Oil and greases are
in the system. lighter than water and tend to float on the top of the
waste water.
In laboratories for educational, research and medical
Grease traps shall be installed in building having the
institutions, handling mildly corrosive and toxic
above types of wastes. In principle the grease laden
wastes, they may be neutralized in chambers using
water is allowed to retain in a grease trap which enables
appropriate neutralizing agents. The chamber shall be
any solids to be settled or separated for manual
provided with chambers at inlet and outlet for
disposal. The retention time allows the incoming waste
collecting samples of the incoming and outgoing waste
to cool and allow the grease to solidify. The clear waste
for monitoring its characteristics.
is then allowed to discharge into the buildings drainage
5.5.5.3 Infected wastes system.
Infected liquid wastes are generated in hospitals 5.5.7 Oil Interceptors
from patient excreta; operation theatres; laboratories
Oils and lubricants are found in wastes from vehicle
testing samples of stools, urine, blood, flesh; etc
service stations, workshops manufacturing units whose
which shall not be disposed off into the drainage
waste may contain high content of oils. Oils, for
system. Such waste shall be collected separately and
example, petroleum, kerosene and diesel used as fuel,
pre-treated before disposal into the building drainage
cooking, lubricant oils and similar liquids are lighter
system.
than water and thus float on water in a pipe line or in a
Soiled and linen from infectious patients needs to be chamber when stored. Such oils have a low ignition
collected from the respective areas of the hospital in point and are prone to catch fire if exposed to any flame
separate linen bins and pre-washed and sterilized in or a spark and may cause explosion inside or outside
the laundry before final wash in the hospital laundry. the drainage system. The flames from such a fire spread
Liquid wastes from the washing operations shall be rapidly if not confined or prevented at the possible
neutralized to prevent any cross contamination before source. Lighter oils and lubricants are removed
disposal in the buildings drainage system. from the system by passing them through an oil
interceptor/petrol gully. They are chambers in various
5.5.5.4 Research laboratory wastes
compartments which allow the solids to settle and allow
Research laboratories conducting research in all areas the oils to float to the top. The oil is then decanted in
of science and technology, for example chemical separate containers for disposal in an approved manner.
industry, pharmacy, metallurgy, bio-sciences, The oil free waste collected from the bottom of the
agriculture, atomic energy, medicine, etc, shall follow chamber is disposed in the building drainage system.
the established procedures laid down by statutory
5.5.8 Radioactive Waste
bodies to handle, treat and dispose wastes which are
highly toxic, corrosive, infectious, inflammable, Scientific research institutions, hospital and many types
100 mm beyond the finished surface if the manhole covers and frames are used they shall conform to
wall. The top rung shall be 450 mm below the manhole accepted standards [9-1(28)].
cover and the lowest not more than 300 mm above the The frame of manhole shall be firmly embedded to
benching. concrete alignment and level in plain concrete on the
5.5.10.4.7 Manhole covers and frames top of masonry.
The size of manhole covers shall be such that there 5.5.10.5 Drop manhole
shall be a clear opening of at least 500 mm in diameter Where it is uneconomic or impracticable to arrange the
for manholes exceeding 0.90 m in depth. The manhole connection within 600 mm height above the invert of
NOTE Wall thickness have been indicated in brick length to provide for use of modular bricks or traditional
bricks. In the Fig. B = one brick length, 1.5B = one and a half brick length etc.
There are several techniques available for catching and For artificial recharge to ground water, Guidelines
storing the rain-water. Most of the techniques are for Artificial Recharge to Ground Water (under
applicable for large open areas, farms, sloping grounds preparation) may be referred.
etc, with a low population base. Two major systems that
5.5.12.3 Roof top rain-water harvesting
are ideal for urban and semi-urban developed areas are:
5.5.12.3.1 Harvesting in regular rainfall areas
a) Artificial ground water recharge, and
b) Roof top rain-water harvesting. In areas having rainfall over a large period in a year
for example, in hilly areas and coastal regions, For roof top rain water harvesting in hilly areas
constant and regular rainfall can be usefully harvested reference may be made to good practice [9-1(30)].
and stored in suitable water tanks. Water is collected 5.5.12.4 Care to taken in rain-water harvesting
through roof gutters and down take pipes. Provision
should be made to divert the first rainfall after a dry Water conservation technique discussed above shall be
spell so that any dust, soot, leaves etc, are drained constructed with due care taking following precautions:
away before the water is collected into the water tank. a) No sewage or waste water should be admitted
The capacity of the water tank should be enough for into the system.
storing water required for consumption between two b) No waste water from areas likely to have oil,
dry spells. The water tank shall be located in a well grease or other pollutants should be connected
protected area and should not be exposed to any to the system.
hazards of water contamination from any other
c) Each structure/well shall have an inlet
sources. The water shall be chlorinated using chlorine
chamber with a silt trap to prevent any silt
tablets or solution to maintain a residual chlorine of
from finding its way into the sub-soil water.
approximately 1 mg/l. The tank must have an
overflow leading to a natural water courses or to any d) The wells should be terminated at least 5 m
additional tanks (see Table 29). above the natural static sub-soil water at its
highest level so that the incoming flow passes
5.5.12.3.2 Harvesting in urban areas through the natural ground condition and
In urban areas with the rainfall limited during the prevents contamination hazards.
monsoon period (usually from 15-90 days) roof top e) No recharge structure or a well shall be used
rain-water cannot be stored and used as mentioned for drawing water for any purpose.
above and is best used for recharging the ground water.
5.5.13 Sub-soil Water Drainage
For individual properties and plots the roof top rain-
water should be diverted to existing open or abandoned 5.5.13.1 General
tubewells. In a well planned building complex the
Sub-soil water is that portion of the rainfall which is
system should be laid out so that the runoff is
absorbed into the ground.
discharged in bore-wells as per designs specified by
the Central Ground Water Board of the Government The drainage of sub-soil water may be necessary for
of India. the following reasons:
Rain 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000 1 100 1 200 1 300 1 400 1 500 1 600 1 700 1 800 1 900 2 000
Fall in
mm
Roof
3
Top Area Harvested Water from Roof Tops m
2
m (80 percent of gross precipitation)
20 2 3 5 6 8 10 11 13 14 16 18 19 21 22 24 26 27 29 30 32
30 2 5 7 10 12 14 17 19 22 24 26 29 31 34 36 38 41 43 46 48
40 3 6 10 13 16 19 22 26 29 32 35 38 42 45 48 51 54 58 61 64
50 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80
60 5 10 14 19 24 29 34 38 43 48 53 58 62 67 72 77 82 86 91 96
70 6 11 17 22 28 34 39 45 50 56 62 67 73 78 84 90 95 101 106 112
80 6 13 19 26 32 38 45 51 58 64 70 77 83 90 96 102 109 115 122 128
90 7 14 22 29 36 43 50 58 65 72 79 86 94 101 108 115 122 130 137 144
100 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160
110 9 18 26 35 44 53 62 70 79 88 97 106 114 123 132 141 150 158 167 176
120 10 19 29 38 48 58 67 77 86 96 106 115 125 134 144 154 163 173 182 192
130 10 21 31 42 52 62 73 83 94 104 114 125 135 146 156 166 177 187 198 208
140 11 22 34 45 56 67 78 90 101 112 123 134 146 157 168 179 190 202 213 224
150 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
200 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320
250 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400
300 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240 264 288 312 336 360 384 408 432 456 480
400 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 256 288 320 352 384 416 448 480 512 544 576 608 640
500 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 440 480 520 560 600 640 680 720 760 800
1 000 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640 720 800 880 960 1 040 1 120 1 200 1 280 1 360 1 440 1 520 1 600
2 000 160 320 480 640 800 960 1 120 1 280 1 440 1 600 1 760 1 920 2 080 2 240 2 400 2 560 2 720 2 880 3 040 3 200
3 000 240 480 720 960 1 200 1 440 1 680 1 920 2 160 2 400 2 640 2 880 3 120 3 360 3 600 3 840 4 080 4 320 4 560 4 800
a) to increase the stability of the surface; 5.5.13.3.1 No field pipe shall be laid in such a manner
b) to avoid surface flooding; or in such a position as to communicate directly with
any drain constructed or adopted to be used for
c) to alleviate or to avoid causing dampness in
conveying sewage, except where absolutely
the building, especially in the cellars;
unavoidable and in such case a suitable efficient trap
d) to reduce the humidity in the immediate shall be provided between sub-soil drain and such sewer.
vicinity of the building; and
e) to increase the workability of the soil. 5.5.13.4 Systems of sub-soil drainage
5.5.13.2 Depth of water table Clay or concrete porous field drain pipes may be used
and shall be laid in one of the following ways (see
The standing level of the sub-soil water will vary with also Fig. 19):
the season, the amount of rainfall and the proximity and
a) Natural The pipes are laid to follow the
level of drainage channels. Information regarding this
natural depressions or valleys of the site;
level may be obtained by means of boreholes or trial
branches discharge into the main as tributaries
pits, preferably the latter. It is desirable though not
do into a river.
always practicable to ascertain the level of the standing
water over a considerable period so as to enable the b) Herringbone The system consists of a
seasonal variations to be recorded and in particular the number of drains into which discharges from
high water level. The direction of flow of the sub-soil both sides smaller subsidiary branch drains
water may usually be judged by the general inclination parallel to each other, but an angle to the
of the land surface and the main lines of the subsoil mains forming a series of herringbone pattern.
drains shall follow the natural falls, wherever possible. Normally these branch drains should not
exceed 30 m in length.
5.5.13.3 Precautions c) Grid A main or mains drain is laid to the
Sub-soil drains shall be so sited as not to endanger the boundaries if the site into which subsidiary
stability of the buildings or earthwork. In some portions branches discharge from one side only.
of the drain, it may be necessary to use non-porous d) Fan-Shaper The drains are laid converging
jointed pipes. to a single outlet at one point on the boundary
of a site, without the use of main or collecting regarding water supply systems shall also be applicable
drains. in the case of waste disposal systems shall also be
e) Moat or cut-off system This system applicable in the case of waste disposal systems. The
consists of drains laid on one or more sides biological and chemical reduction of organic material
of a building to intercept the flow of subsoil proceeds slowly under low temperature conditions,
water and carry it away, thereby protecting consequently affecting the waste disposal systems. The
the foundations of a building. waste disposal methods given in 5.5.14.2, 5.5.14.3
and 5.5.14.4 shall be used only where it is not practical
The choice of one or more of these systems will to install water carriage system.
naturally depend on the local conditions of the site.
For building sites, the mains shall be not less than 5.5.14.2 Box and can system
75 mm in diameter and the branches not less than Where box and can systems are employed, adequate
65 mm in diameter and the branches not less than arrangements shall be made for the cleaning and
65 mm in diameter but normal practice tends towards disinfection of the can after it is emptied of its contents.
the use of 100 mm and 75 mm respectively. The pipes The excrement from the can shall be disposed of by
shall generally be laid at 600 to 900 mm depth, or to burial in isolated spots far from habitation or by
such a depth to which it is desirable to lower the water- incineration, where feasible. The can shall be fitted
table and the gradients are determined rather by the with a tight fitting lid for use when it is carried for
fall of the land than by considerations of self-cleansing emptying.
velocity. The connection of the subsidiary drain to the
main drain is best made by means of a clayware or 5.5.14.3 Trench or pit latrines
concrete junction pipe. The outlet of a sub-soil system Trench or pit latrines shall be used only where soil
may discharge into a soakaway or through a catch pit and sub-soil conditions favour their use. Whenever
into the nearest ditch or watercourse. Where these are they are used, they shall not be closer than 18 m from
not available, the sub-soil drains may be connected, any source of drinking water, such as well, to eliminate
with the approval of the Authority, through an the possibility of bacterial pollution of water.
intercepting trap to the surface water drainage system.
5.5.14.4 Chemical toilets
NOTE Care shall be taken that there is no backflow from
sub-surface drains during heavy rains. For the successful functioning of chemical toilets, they
shall preferably be installed in heated rooms or
5.5.14 Waste Disposal Systems in High Altitudes and enclosures.
or Sub-zero Temperature Regions
NOTE Chemical toilet essentially consists of small cylindrical
5.5.14.1 In general, all the cases to be exercised tanks with a water-closet seat for the use of 8 to 10 persons. A
W = D + 300 mm
where D is external diameter of the pipe
100 mm for pipes under 150 mm
nominal dia
T =
150 mm for pipes of 150 mm W = D + 300 mm
nominal dia and over
where D is external diameter of the pipe
FIG. 20 BEDDING
FIG. 22 SURROUND OR ENCASING
5.6.4.3 Haunching
5.6.5 Connection to Existing Sewers
Concrete haunching (see Fig. 21) shall consist of:
The connection to an existing sewer shall, as far as
a) A concrete bed as described for bedding possible, be done at the manholes. Where it is
(see 5.6.4.2); unavoidable to make connection in between two
b) The full width of the bed carried up to the manholes, the work of breaking into the existing sewer
level of the horizontal diameter of the pipe; and forming the connection shall be carried out by the
and Authority or under its supervision.
NOTES
1 Please strike out whatever is not applicable.
2 The application should be signed by the owner of the premises or his constituted attorney and shall be countersigned by the licensed
plumber.
Certified that I/we have completed the plumbing work Address .......................................................................
of water connection No............................... for the ....................................................................................
premises as detailed below. This may be inspected and
connection given. Situation .....................................................................
....................................................................................
Ward No.......................Road/Street...........................
.................................................................................... Size of main..................................on .........................
I/We hereby make application to the * ...................... The sanitary arrangement and drains of the said
.................................................................................... premises are shown in the accompanying plans and a
description of the specification of the work/material
for permission to drain the premises..........................
used is also appended (Annex D).
Ward No .....................................................................
I/We undertake to carryout the work in accordance with
Street No .....................................................................
Part 9 Plumbing Services, Section 1 Water Supply,
Road/Street known as ................................................ Drainage and Sanitation of the Code.
....................................................................................
..................................................................................... ....................................................................................
Signature of the licensed plumber Signature of the owner
Name and address of the licensed plumber Name and address
..................................................................................... ....................................................................................
..................................................................................... ....................................................................................
Date ........................ Date ........................
NOTE The application should be signed by the owner of the premises and shall be countersigned by the licensed plumber.
ANNEX D
(Clause 3.3.3.2)
FORM FOR DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK AND
SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS
1) Separation of rain-water and foul water ...... 7) Bedding of pipes:
...................................................................... a) Method of bedding..................................
2) Rain-water drains, curbs and points of b) Thickness and width of beds of concrete
discharge ...................................................... .................................................................
3) Rain-water gutters, pipes or spouts where
c) Thickness of concrete round pipes .........
discharging ...................................................
.................................................................
4) Open-full-water drains, materials, sizes, curbs
8) Protection of drain laid under wall ...............
and other means places, verandahs, latrines
9) Traps, description and intercepter:
5) Silt-catcher and grating, size and position
a) Lavatory waste pipes ..............................
...................................................................... b) Bath waste pipes .....................................
6) Drains ........................................................... c) Sink .........................................................
a) Main sewage drains: Fall ...................... d) Gully-traps ..............................................
Size ...................... e) Water-closet traps ..................................
b) Branch drains: Fall ...................... f) Grease traps ............................................
Size ...................... g) Slop sink ................................................
c) Materials ................................................. h) Urinal .....................................................
d) Method of jointing .................................. j) Others .....................................................
Certified that I/we have completed the plumbing work Block No ....................................................................
of drainage and sanitation system for the premises as House No ....................................................................
detailed below. This may be inspected, approved and
connection given. Details of work ...........................................................
....................................................................................
Ward No .....................................................................
....................................................................................
Street ........................................................................... ....................................................................................
Locality ....................................................................... ....................................................................................
..................................................................................... ....................................................................................
Signature of the owner Signature of the licensed plumber ..............................
Name and address ....................................................... Name and address of the licensed plumber ...............
..................................................................................... ....................................................................................
..................................................................................... ....................................................................................
Date .............................
30
= 300 m = 9 m
1 000
Example 2
Find suitable diameter pipe to carry
15 l/s from service line to overhead tank.
Total length of service main = 200 m
Residual pressure available at the take off point on
supply line is 15 m.
Procedure
Available head = 15 m
Deduct residual head = 2 m
Deduct 10 percent for losses in bends and specials
= 1.3 m
Friction head available for loss in pipe of
11.71 000
= 1 000 m = 58.5 /1 000 m
2 000
From the nomogram for a discharge of 15 l/s and
Nomogram of Hazen & Williams friction loss of 58.5 m/1 000 m diameter of nearest
Equation (c = 100) commercial size of pipe is 100 mm diameter.
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards (Part 2) : 1975 Laying and jointing
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The polyethylene (PE) pipes
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time
(Part 3) : 2003 Laying and jointing of
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may
UPVC pipes (first revision)
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the (12) 783 : 1985 Code of practice for laying
Code. of concrete pipes (first
revision)
IS No. Title
3114 : 1994 Code of practice for laying
(1) 11208 : 1985 Guidelines for registration of of cast iron pipes (second
plumbers revision)
(2) 10500 : 1991 Specification for drinking 5822 : 1994 Code of practice for laying
water (first revision) of welded steel pipes for
(3) 2041 : 1995 Specification for steel plates water supply (second
for pressure vessels used at revision)
moderate and low temperature
6530 : 1972 Code of practice for laying
(second revision)
of asbestos cement pressure
804 : 1967 Specification for rectangular pipes
pressed steel tanks (first
7634 Code of practice for plastics
revision)
pipe, work for potable water
(4) 3076 : 1985 Specification for low density supplies:
polyethylene pipes for
potable water supplies (Part 2) : 1975 Laying and jointing
(second revision) polyethylene (PE) pipes
4984 : 1995 Specification for high (Part 3) : 2003 Laying and jointing of
density polyethylene pipes UPVC pipes (first revision)
for potable water supplies (13) 2692 : 1989 Specification for ferrules for
(fourth revision) water services (second
4985 : 2000 Specification for unplasticized revision)
PVC pipes for potable water (14) 302 General and safety
supplies (third revision) (Part 1) : 1979 requirements for household
(5) 2065 : 1983 Code of practice for water and similar electrical
supply in buildings (second appliances: Part 1 General
revision) (fifth revision)
(6) 3114 : 1994 Code of practice for laying 2082 : 1993 Stationary storage type
of cast iron pipes (second electric water heaters (third
revision) revision)
(7) 782 : 1978 Specification for caulking (15) 7558 : 1974 Code of practice for domestic
lead (third revision) hot water installations
(8) 5822 : 1994 Code of practice for laying (16) 6295 : 1986 Code of practice for water
of welded steel pipes for supply and drainage in high
water supply (second revision) altitudes and/or sub-zero
(9) 6530 : 1972 Code of practice for laying temperature regions (first
of asbestos cement pressure revision)
pipes (17) 771 Specification for glazed fire-
(10) 783 : 1985 Code of practice for laying clay sanitary appliances:
of concrete pipes (first (Part 1) : 1979 General requirements (second
revision) revision)
(11) 7634 Code of practice for plastics (Part 2) : 1985 Specific requirements of
pipe, work for potable water kitchen and laboratory sinks
supplies: (third revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 PRESSURE REGULATIONS 5
4 SERVICE SHUT-OFF VALVES 6
5 EXISTING WORK 6
6 RULES FOR TURNING GAS ON 6
7 RULES FOR SHUTTING OFF THE GAS 6
8 INSTALLATION OF GAS PIPES 6
9 INSPECTION OF SERVICES 8
10 LEAKAGE CHECK 8
11 USE OF LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS 9
LIST OF STANDARDS 12
FOREWORD
This Section covers the safe use of gas for fuel or lighting purposes in buildings.
The use of gas for fuel and lighting purposes in buildings has begun in some parts of the country and with the
advent of new petroleum complexes, community gas supply is bound to become one of the important services
like electricity and water supply in buildings.
The use of liquefied petroleum gas supplied in containers and cylinders is already quite popular. On release of
pressure, by opening the valve, they readily convert into the gaseous phase. In this state they present a hazard
comparable to any inflammable natural or manufactured gas, except that being heavier than air, low level ventilation
is necessary to avoid inflammable concentration of gas.
A minimum set of safety regulations are, therefore, laid down to safeguard the gas piping installation and the
mode of operation in the interest of public safety.
The first version of this part was prepared in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983. In the first revision, the
safe distance between gas piping and electrical wiring system was modified as well as between gas piping and
steam piping was incorporated. Additional information regarding the handling, use, storage and transportation of
LPG in cylinders exceeding 500 ml water capacity were included. Provisions relating to LPG cylinders, installations
regarding some aspects, such as jointing compound used at joints, painting of gas piping, details of fire
extinguishers, total quantity of LPG at stationary and portable installations in proportion to the floor area were
added. Also, some provisions of LPG bulk storage installations were introduced.
As a result of experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of the Code and feed back received a need to
revise this part was felt. This revision has, therefore, been prepared to take care of these. The significant changes
incorporated in this draft revision include:
a) Provision with regard to pressure regulations have been modified.
b) In the provision of service shut-off valves, number of additional shut-off valves have been specified.
c) In the provision of installation of gas pipe, new materials for pipes have also been mentioned. The
minimum diameter for gas pipe has been reduced to 8 mm. The colour for pipe line for supplying
natural gas has been specified. The provisions regarding protection against the corrosion have been
modified. Also, the process of installation of meters have been clarified.
d) Additional method for detection of leakage of gas has been recommended.
e) Also, a few more terminologies have been added.
The information regarding the use of liquefied pertroleum gas has been largely based on the following Indian
Standards:
IS No. Title
6044 Code of practice for liquefied petroleum gas storage installations:
(Part 1) : 2000 Commercial and industrial cylinder installations (first revision)
(Part 2) : 2001 Commercial, industrial and domestic bulk storage installations (first revision)
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
8.2.4 For any thread joint proper sealant shall be used 8.9 Generally concealed piping shall not be allowed.
on male threads only. However, if it is necessary then it shall be under the 8.4
of underground piping and all protection such as
8.3 The gas piping shall be of the colour stipulated by coating, cathodic protection shall be done.
explosive authority to distinguish it from other piping
and the piping shall be painted silver grey with red 8.10 A drip shall be provided in the gas distribution
band of 150 mm width. The gas pipeline shall be system, if the moisture contents in the gas is likely to
painted canary yellow in case of natural gas. reach saturation point at any stretch of pipe line in
the system; a drip shall, however, be provided at any
8.4 Piping Underground suitable point in the line of the pipe where condensate
8.4.1 Protection of Piping may collect and from where it can be easily removed.
This drip should be so installed as to constitute a trap
Piping shall be buried to a minimum depth of 1 m or where in an accumulation of condensate will shut
covered in a manner so as to protect the piping from off the flow of gas before it will run back into the
physical damage. meter.
8.4.2 Protection against Corrosion
8.10.1 Drip has to be provided in the case of gas
Generally all the piping within the premises where it consisting moisture content.
8.13 The distance between the gas piping and steam 10.3 Use of Lights
piping, if running parallel, shall be at least 150 mm.
Artificial illumination used in connection with a search
The gas piping should preferably run below the steam
of gas leakage shall be restricted to electric hand flash
piping.
lights (preferably of the safety type) or approved safety
8.14 Piping installation shall be thoroughly gas-tight. lamps. In searching for leaks, electric switches should
not be operated. If electric lights are already turned
8.15 Smoking shall not be permitted when working
on, they should not be turned off.
on piping which contains or has contaminated gas.
8.16 Meters shall be installed in such a way that there 10.4 Checking for Leakage with Meter
shall be no load transfer from the pipeline to the inlet/ Immediately after turning gas into the piping, the
outlet of the meter and shall be easily accessible. system shall be checked to ascertain that no gas is
escaping. This may be done by carefully watching the
9 INSPECTION OF SERVICES
test dial of the meter to determine whether gas is
9.1 No person shall use or permit the use of a new passing through the meter. In no case should a leakage
system or an extension of an old system of gas piping test be made using a gas meter unless immediately prior
in a building or structure before the same has been to the test it has been determined that the meter is in
inspected and tested to ensure the tightness of the operating condition.
system, and a certificate has been issued by the
Authority. 10.5 Checking of Leakage Without Using a Meter
9.1.1 Test of Piping for Tightness This may be done by attaching to an appliance, orifice
or a manometer or equivalent device and momentarily
Before any system of gas piping is finally put in service, turning on the gas supply and deserving the gauging
it shall be carefully tested to ensure that it is gas-tight. device for pressure drop with the gas supply shut-off.
Where any part of the system is to be enclosed or No discernible drop in pressure shall occur during a
concealed, this test should precede the work of closing period of 3 min.
in. To test for tightness the piping may be filled with
city gas, air or inert gas but not with any other gas or 10.6 After piping has been checked, all gas piping shall
liquid. In no case shall oxygen be used. The piping be fully purged. Piping shall not be purged into the
shall stand a pressure of at least 20 kN/m2 measured combustion chamber of an appliance. A suggested
with a manometer or slope gauge, for a period of method for purging the gas piping to an appliance is to
not less than 10 min without showing any drop in disconnect the pilot piping at the outlet of the pilot
pressure. valve.
9.1.2 When the gas pressure exceeds 7 kN/m2, the 10.7 After the gas piping has been effectively purged,
piping shall withstand a pressure of 0.6 MN/m2 for 4 h. all appliances shall be purged and the pilots lighted.
Sl LPG Storage Water Capacity of Distance from Building/Property Line Distance between Tanks
No. Individual Tank
Above Ground Under Ground Above Ground Under Ground
l
m m m m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Up to 2 000 5 5 1 1.5
ii) Above 2 000 and up to 10 000 10 7.5 1 1.5
iii) Above 10 000 and up to 20 000 15 10 1.5 1.5
iv) Above 20 000 and up to 40 000 adjacent 20 15 2 0.25 dia of vessel
or
1.5 m, Min
v) Above 40 000 and above adjacent 30 15 2 0.25 dia of vessel
or
1.5 m, Min
NOTE If the aggregate water capacity of a multi-tank installation is 40 000 litres or greater, the above minimum safety distances
shall apply to the aggregate storage capacity rather than the capacity per individual storage tank.
area within 3 m from the shell of any LPG tank of up 11.4.6.1 Water supply
to 2 000 litres water capacity, and within 6 m from the
Provision shall be made for an adequate supply of water
shell of larger tanks. If weed killers are used, chemicals
and fire protection in the storage area according to the
which are a potential source of fire hazard shall not be
local hoses and mobile equipment, fixed monitors or
selected for this purpose.
by fixed spray systems which may be automatic.
11.4.5 Warning Signs Control of water flow should be possible from outside
any danger area.
No smoking or naked flames shall be permitted within
the safety zone of the installation. Prominent notices 11.4.6.2 Fire extinguishers
to this effect shall be posted at access point.
At least two dry chemical powder type fire extinguishers
11.4.6 Fire Protection of 10 kg capacity each, conforming to the quality
requirements in accordance with the accepted standards
The possibility of a major fire outbreak, leading to
[9-2(7)], each shall be installed at points of access to
direct flame impingement of the storage tank, shall be
the storage installations.
minimized by sound engineering in plant design and
layout, good operating practice, and proper education 11.4.7 For detailed information regarding LPG bulk
and training of personnel on both routine operations storage installations reference may be made to good
and on action to be taken in an emergency. practice [9-2(8)].
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards pressure liquefiable gases:
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The Part 1 Cylinders for liquefied
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time petroleum gases (LPG) (fourth
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may revision)
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
7142 : 1995 Specification for welded low
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
carbon steel cylinders for low
Code.
pressure liquefiable gases not
IS No. Title exceeding 5 litre water capacity
(1) 14885 : 2001 Specification for polyethylene (first revision)
pipe for the supply gaseous fuel (3) 8198 Code of practice for steel
(2) 3196 Specification for welded low (Part 5) : 1984 cylinders for compressed gases:
(Part 1) : 1992 carbon steel cylinders exceeding Part 5 Liquefied petroleum gas
5 litre water capacity for low (LPG) (first revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE 5
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 PERMIT 6
4 PROTECTION OF LANDSCAPE DURING CONSTRUCTION 8
5 SOIL AND WATER CONSERVATION 9
6 EARTH SLOPES AND GRADING REQUIREMENTS 12
7 PLANTING DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 13
8 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANTING WORKS 20
9 SERVICE UTILITIES IN LANDSCAPE 24
10 PAVED SURFACES IN EXTERNAL AREAS 26
11 STREET FURNITURE 26
FOREWORD
This Part of the Code was first published in 1970 and subsequently revised in 1983, and covered provisions
relating to only signs and outdoor display structures. In this revision, this Part has been sub-divided into two
sections as follows by including a new section on landscaping:
Section 1 Landscape planning and design
Section 2 Signs and outdoor display structures
This Section covers the requirement of landscape planning and design with the aim of improving quality of
outdoor built environment and protection of the land and its resources. With growing urban development and
environmental degradation it has become imperative to determine landscape design parameters, and also provide
rules, regulations, controls and procedures for the protection, preservation and modification of surrounding
environment. A brief clause on street furniture has also been introduced in this Section.
The components of landscape design and external development were earlier covered in the Code in its various
Parts/Sections but a comprehensive treatment has been given in this new Section in this revision.
2.11 Foliage The collective leaves of a plant or plants. 2.23 Invert The low inside point of a pipe, culvert,
or channel.
2.12 Geo-textile Any permeable textile (natural or
synthetic) used with foundation, soil, rock, earth or 2.24 Kerb A concrete or stone edging along a
any other geotechnical engineering-related material as pathway or road often constructed with a channel to
an integral part of a human made project, structure or guide the flow of storm water and thereby serving dual
system. purpose.
2.13 Grade The slope or lay of the land as indicated 2.25 Mound A small hill or bank of earth,
by a related series of elevations. developed as a characteristic feature in landscape.
The planting plan shall be drawn to a scale of not less i) Botanical name
ii) Common name
than 1 in 200 for a site up to one hectare and not less iii) Plant code
than 1 in 500 for site more than 10 hectare with part iv) Type (Evergreen/Deciduous)
plans at 1 in 200 of two of the design areas. Planting v) Height
vi) Spread/Canopy
plan should include plant material schedule as shown vii) Form of Tree
in Table 1. The planting plan and landscape plan must viii) Flower colour
show identical information to avoid conflict between ix) Seasonal duration
both plans. The planting plan shall include the layouts x) Zone (Functional Attributes)
xi) Characteristics
as given below drawn to the scale: xii) Function
xiii) Remarks
a) Location of proposed trees, shrubs, ground
covers and lawn area indicated clearly with
3.3.3 Irrigation Plan
appropriate symbols and legend.
b) The size of plant material indicated in the The irrigation plan shall be drawn to a scale of not less
drawing should be shown as diameter of than 1 in 500 for a site up to one hectare and not less
canopy for tree and spread for shrubs and than 1 in 1 000 for site more than one hectare. The
ground cover. Two years growth will be Plan shall include the following information:
considered as full maturity size for shrubs and a) The source of irrigation water.
ground covers and ten years growth will be b) Type of water conserving irrigation systems
considered for trees. proposed differentiating between systems for
c) The Botanical name could be indicated as a different water use zones on the site.
symbol on the main drawing (for example c) Extent of supplementary irrigation provided
Delonix regia as Dr). Plant names should to by water harvesting measures.
be tabulated in alphabetical order under heads
d) Arrangement of hydrants or sprinklers
Trees, Shrubs, Groundcovers, Climbers and
indicating location and type with typical
Grass.
details and specifications.
d) Functional attributes and growth pattern
tabulation to be attached as Table 2, as an 3.3.4 Construction Details
annex. Construction details, specifications and methods used
e) All existing vegetation shall be marked on the for the following landscape elements are to be included
landscape plan and areas designated for where applicable:
and tanks are underground facilities used for Supply, Drainage and Sanitation may be
the storage of surface water, and typically referred.
constructed from reinforced cement concrete
6 EARTH SLOPES AND GRADING REQUIRE-
(vaults) or corrugated pipes (tanks). The water
MENTS
that is captured in these vaults and tanks may
be used later for irrigation. 6.1 Grading Design
5.3 Conservation and Re-use of Water for Irrigation Design for changes in elevation in the outdoor
environment is a primary component of landscape
The following measures shall be followed for design
development. Grading of proposed external
of irrigation systems for landscape works:
development areas should relate to the existing
a) Water conserving irrigation systems should topography of the site and it should direct surface water
differentiate between systems for different runoff to the designed drainage and water harvesting
water use zones on the site. Supplementary area. Grading design parameters are as follows:
irrigation sources should be used by means
a) The proposed grading design should respond
of appropriate water harvesting measures.
to the function and purpose of the activities
b) The irrigation system should be designed
to be accommodated within the site.
considering the prevailing wind direction,
b) New development and structures to be
slope and proposed grade, type of soil, soil
integrated with existing landform within the
percolation, and the type of vegetation to be
site and in its immediate surroundings.
watered.
c) Storm water to be directed away from buildings.
c) Spray irrigation to be designed to provide total
head to head cover to avoid dry spots and spray d) Terraces, levels and slopes in required areas
on to paved areas and unplanted surfaces. to be created and to emphasize control, or
negotiate circulation routes and views.
d) Spray irrigation is to be avoided in areas of
width less than 3.00 m. e) Steep slopes to be modified to minimize or
eliminate erosion.
e) Sullage recycle systems are ideal for large
housing complexes and residential colonies. f) Legally, grades cannot be changed beyond the
Sullage (or water from kitchens and property line of the site.
bathrooms) is treated and recycled for g) The rate of storm water runoff leaving the site
gardening and toilet flushing reducing fresh after construction to not exceed the pre-
water requirement by 60 percent. Irrigation construction rate.
system should be designed keeping sullage h) Grading design should optimize cut and fill.
recycle in view.
f) For requirements regarding, the volume of 6.2 Grading Plan
water for different kinds of landscapes, see 6.2.1 The submitted grading plan should include the
Part 9 Plumbing Services, Section 1 Water following:
Apart from factors such as climate, soil, fast rate of The application of the concept of shelterbelts to
growth, one of the more significant considerations in landscape planning and design may be effective in
choosing species for shelter planting is the possibility the creation of landscape structure of very large
of a particular species serving the dual role of wood- developments at the regional scale, or townships or
production (for fuel, fodder) as well as shelter. campuses. Shelterbelts can also be established in
association with, or instead of road side planting. This
7.3.3.1 Spacing of plants in windbreaks and shelterbelts itself creates a distinctive landscape pattern. The
Windbreaks usually consist of a single or double row advantage of using native species in shelter planting
of trees planted at 0.7 m to 1.5 m according to species. are:
Normally, one year old trees are used. As the roots of a) New development is merged into the existing
tree extend for some distance beyond the rows in which landscape. The original character of the
they are planted, the same should be taken into account landscape is therefore not obtruded upon.
while planting windbreakers. The most common layout b) The shelterbelt is a component of land
where shelter planting is part of an extensive planned management (previous waste or barren land
programme, is that of tree belts arranged in a is conserved).
chessboard pattern, each field being-protected from
c) Additional habitat for wildlife are brought into
every side. This pattern gives full protection to all the
existence.
fields, provided that the right distance between the
fields has been chosen. Efficient protection is achieved 7.3.5 Species-suitable for wind breaks are:
if belts are separated by a distance of not more than 20
a) For Dry and Arid Regions
times the height of the trees. A considerable mixture
of species is recommended so as to compensate for Acacia auriculiformis (Australian Blackwood)
different rates of growth and also to achieve variety in Ailanthus excelsa (Maharukh)
the form of crowns. Albilzia lebbeck (Siris)
Azadiracta indica (Neem)
7.3.3.2 Within shelterbelts, close spacing of tree is the
Casuarina equisetifolia (Beef-wood)
general practice. The recommended spacing for shrubs
Dalbergia sissoo (Sisham)
is 1 m and for tree such as Casuarina and Grevellia
robusta (Silver Oak) 2.5 m. Spacing between rows Eugenia jambolana (Jamun)
should be 2.3 m to 3 m to enable mechanized Grevillea robusta (Silver oak)
cultivation. Five rows of tree and shrubs are considered Peltophorum ferrugineum (Cooper pod)
necessary for protection. Tamarindus indica (Imli)
Dry farm yard manure shall be used. Measurement shall Prior to planting operation, the contractor will ensure
be in stacks, with 8 percent reduction for payment. It all planting areas free of weeds, debris, rocks over
shall be free from extraneous matter, harmful bacteria 25 mm in diameter and clumps of earth that do not
insects or chemicals. break up.